20140224-ME Vol 2 Pam 4 Incl Amdt 1 - Auth - 2-1 - MVRSPT-R

RESTRICTED
Army Code No: 71670

(Revised 2013)
Military Engineering
Volume II
Field Engineering
Pamphlet No 4
Demolitions
Incorporating Amendment No 1
2013
(This publication replaces Military Engineering Volume II, Pamphlet No 4

Demolitions 1999 (Army Code No 71670 (Pam 4)) which should now be destroyed)
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
CONDITIONS OF RELEASE
Copyright This work is Crown copyright and the intellectual property rights for
this publication belong exclusively to the Ministry of Defence (MOD).
No material or information contained in this publication should be
reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form
outside MOD establishments except as authorised by both the sponsor
and the MOD where appropriate.
Security This document is issued for the information of such persons who need to
know its contents in the course of their official duties. Any person finding
this document should hand it in to a British Forces unit or to a British
Police Station for its safe return to the MINISTRY OF DEFENCE, D MOD
SY, LONDON SW1A 2HB, with particulars of how and where found. THE
UNAUTHORIZED RETENTION OR DESTRUCTION OF THIS DOCUMENT
COULD BE AN OFFENCE UNDER THE OFFICIAL SECRETS ACTS OF
1911-1989. (When released to persons outside Government service, this
document is issued on a personal basis and the recipient to whom it is
entrusted, in confidence, within the provisions of the Official Secrets Act
1991-1989, is personally responsible for its safe custody and for seeing
that its contents are disclosed only to authorised persons.)
Authority This publication is issued under the overall direction of the CGS. It is an
MOD Approved Code of Practice (ACOP). Where issues of health and
safety are concerned it takes into account the provisions of the Health &
Safety at Work Act 1974.
Status This publication has no formal status in legal terms. The contents provide
clear military information concerning the most up to date experience
and best practice available for commanders and troops to use in their
operations and training. If you are prosecuted for a breach of health
and safety law, and it is proved that you have not followed the relevant
provisions of the ACOP, a court may find you criminally liable unless you
can show that you have complied with the requirements of health and
safety legislation since it is a breach of this legislation which renders a
person criminally liable. Breaches or omissions of the ACOP could result
in disciplinary action under the provisions of the Armed Forces Act 2006.
Amendments Amdt No Date Amdt No Date Amdt No Date

Amdt 1 2/14
Distribution As directed by SO1 Publications, RE General Staff Publications, Chatham,

Kent, ME4 4UG who is the sponsor and to whom comments and queries
concerning this publication should be addressed.
RESTRICTED
COMMENTS AND/OR SUGGESTIONS
ON RE GENERAL STAFF PUBLICATIONS
From:
Name _________________________________________________________
Unit _________________________________________________________
Address _________________________________________________________
Date: _____________________
To:
SO2 PUBLICATIONS, RE GENERAL STAFF PUBLICATIONS

BROMPTON BARRACKS
CHATHAM, KENT ME4 4UG
I have the following comments and/or suggestions to make for amendment/

improvement to:
ME VOL --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Signed ................................................
( )
Notes:
(i) Comments generally should relate to content and matters of fact.

Notification of typing and spelling errors is also required.
(ii) Continue overleaf if required.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
RESTRICTED
Army Code No 71670

(Revised 2013)
Military Engineering Volume II

Field Engineering
Pamphlet No 4
Demolitions
Prepared under the direction
of the Chief of the General Staff
Ministry of Defence
2013
Crown Copyright Reserved
2013
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
ii RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.0 Jan 13

RESTRICTED
CONTENTS
Section Page
Glossary xv
Abbreviations xxv
Introduction xxix
CHAPTER 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF EXPLOSIVES
1.1 Background 1-1

1.2 Characteristics of Explosives 1-3
1.3 Hazard Classification 1-11
1.4 Explosive Charges 1-15
CHAPTER 2 SERVICE EXPLOSIVES
2.1 Summary 2-1

2.2 Bulk Explosive 2-3
2.3 Shaped Charges 2-11
2.4 Explosive Kits 2-27
2.5 Improvised Charges 2-35
CHAPTER 3 EXPLOSIVE AND DEMOLITION ACCESSORIES
3.1 Summary 3-1

3.2 Non-electrical Accessories 3-3
3.3 Electrical Accessories 3-27
3.4 Aids to the Emplacement of Charges 3-39
CHAPTER 4 FIRING ARRANGEMENTS
4.1 Initiating Single Charges Non-electrically 4-1

4.2 Multiple Points of Initiation - Non-electric 4-5
4.3 Electrical Initiation of Charges 4-13
CHAPTER 5 CHARGES FORMED FROM BULK

EXPLOSIVES - DESCRIPTION AND CALCULATION
5.1 General 5-1

5.2 Cutting Charges - Steel and Timber 5-5
5.3 Cutting Charges - Masonry and Concrete 5-23
5.4 Breaching Charges 5-49
5.5 Pier Footing Charges 5-55
5.6 Borehole Charges 5-61
5.7 Cratering Charges 5-73
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED iii

RESTRICTED
Section Page
5.8 Concussion Charges 5-99
CHAPTER 6 SPECIAL CHARGES
6.1 Introduction 6-1

6.2 Demolitions under Water 6-3
6.3 Charges using Charge Demolition Sheet Explosive 6-15
6.4 Use of Linear Cutting Charges 6-21
6.5 Use of Explosives to Aid Digging 6-27
6.6 Use of Explosives for Improvised Armoured Vehicle Track Cutting 6-35
CHAPTER 7 USE OF EXPLOSIVES FOR ASSAULT BREACHING
7.1 General 7-1

7.2 Assault Breaching Charges 7-11
7.3 Breaching Charges using In-Service Explosive Stores 7-25
7.4 Door and Window Breaching Techniques 7-31
7.5 Safety in Assault Breaching 7-37
CHAPTER 8 SIMULATION OF BATTLE NOISE
8.1 General 8-1

8.2 Methods of Representing Battle Noises 8-3
CHAPTER 9 DEMOLITION TASKS
9.1 General 9-1

9.2 Roads and Railways 9-7
9.3 Airfields, Ports and Inland Waterways 9-11
9.4 Buildings 9-15
9.5 Industrial and Commercial Installations 9-19
9.6 Military Equipment and Vehicles 9-25
9.7 Ammunition and Explosives 9-29
9.8 Caves and Tunnels 9-31
CHAPTER 10 BRIDGE DEMOLITION
10.1 Principles 10-1

10.2 Categorisation of Bridges 10-9
10.3 Demolition of Simply Supported Bridges 10-15
10.4 Demolition of Continuous Bridges 10-43
10.5 Miscellaneous Bridges 10-73
10.6 Demolition of UK Close Support Bridging Equipment 10-77
iv RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

RESTRICTED
Section Page
CHAPTER 11 TACTICAL AND LOGISTIC ASPECTS
11.1 Types of Demolition 11-1

11.2 Reconnaissance 11-5
11.3 Protection, Maintenance and Firing Procedures 11-9
11.4 Effects of a Nuclear Explosion on Charged Bridge Demolition 11-19
Target
11.5 Supply of Demolition Stores 11-21
CHAPTER 12 SAFETY
12.1 General 12-1

12.2 Rules and Procedures when using Explosives 12-3
12.3 Additional Safety Precautions with Electrical Initiation 12-19
12.4 Storage and Transport of Explosives 12-27
12.5 Army and Special Forces Explosives Qualifications 12-33
12.6 Organisation of Demolitions Range Day 12-43
ANNEXES
A. Battlefield Inoculation Remote Initiation System (BIRIS) A-1

B. Assault Breaching Training B-1
Appendix 1 Range Layout for Assault Breaching Training B-1-1
Appendix 2 Precast Concrete Barrier Design B-2-1
C. Examples of AF W4012 used as a Reconnaissance Report C-1
D. Example of AF W4012 used as a Demolition Schedule D-1
E. Demolition Order (AF W9811) E-1
F. Responsibilities of Range Safety Personnel F-1
Appendix 1 Range Medical Cover F-1-1
G. Demolition Range Action and Safety Plan (DRASP) G-1
Appendix 1 DRASP - Example G-1-1
H. Conduct of Confidence Charge Training H-1
Appendix 1 Confidence Charge Training - Sequence of Events H-1-1
Appendix 2 Range Layout for Confidence Charges H-2-1
FIGURES
1/1 Transmission of shock wave to target 1-15

1/2 Scabbing and indentation of thick target 1-16
1/3 Staggered charges on thick target 1-16
1/4 Various shaped charges and liners 1-18
1/5 Typical explosive trains 1-21
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED v

RESTRICTED
Page
2/1 Charge Demolition Plastic Explosive 2-3

2/2 M319 box PE 7 (showing top layer) 2-4
2/3 2 kg Charge Holder (inner tactical packaging) 2-5
2/4 10 kg Charge Box (outer tactical packaging) 2-6
2/5 Charge Demolition Sheet Explosive No 4 Intermediate Pack 2-9
2/6 SX4 markings 2-10
2/7 Charge Demolition Conical, 12 kg 2-11
2/8 User instruction card for Charge Demolition Conical, 12 kg 2-12
2/9 Charge Demolition Underbridge, 17.5 kg 2-14
2/10 User instruction card for Charge Demolition Underbridge, 17.5 kg 2-15
2/11 Charge Demolition Overbridge, 72 kg 2-17
2/12 User instruction card for Charge Demolition Overbridge, 72 kg 2-18
2/13 Flexible Linear Cutting Charge (FLCC) 2-20
2/14 FLCC (Sabre) Intermediate Packaging 2-21
2/15 FLCC (Sabre) Logistic Packaging 2-21
2/16 Charge Demolition No 14 (Charge Demolition Necklace) 2-23
2/17 Effect of CD 14 necklace on mild steel girder with flange 2-24
130 mm thick
2/18 Different methods of positioning CD14s 2-25
2/19 Rapid Cratering Kit 2-28
2/20 Fuze Electrical No F123 - method of use 2-28
2/21 RCK Firing sequence 2-30
2/22 Layout of RCKs for multiple firing 2-30
2/23 Bangalore Torpedo 2-32
2/24 Improvised Bangalore Torpedo using angle iron pickets 2-40
2/25 Improvised conical charge using a bottle 2-43
2/26 Improvised linear charge using a metal container 2-44
3/1 Detonators Demolition 3-3

3/2 Fuze Safety 3-5
3/3 Crimpers 3-7
3/4 Firing device and flash initiator 3-8
3/5 Tins containing Firing Device Demolition Grip and Flash Initiators 3-9
3/6 Fitting safety fuze to a flash initiator 3-10
3/7 Match Fuzee 3-11
3/8 Igniting safety fuze with match 3-12
3/9 Cord Detonating 3-13
3/10 Clip Detonating Non-Magnetic, Small 3-14
3/11 Clip Detonating Non-Magnetic, Large 3-15
3/12 Detonating cord booster 3-16
3/13 DCB with holder and detonator 3-17
3/14 Coupler Kit Demolition 3-18
3/15 Uses of demolition couplers 3-19
vi RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

RESTRICTED
Page
3/16 Fuze Instantaneous 3-20

3/17 30-m Integrated Firing Device 3-22
3/18 Lid removed and detonator withdrawn 3-22
3/19 M9 Bunch Block with detonator inserted 3-23
3/20 M9 Bunch Block with detonating cord 3-24
3/21 Flip trigger fully rotated; release to fire 3-25
3/22 Use of second 30-m IFD to initiate shock tube of first 30-m 3-26
IFD
3/23 Detonator Demolition Electric 3-27
3/24 Igniter Safety Fuze Electric 3-28
3/25 Cable Special Purpose Electrical 3-30
3/26 Exploder DC Electronic Hand-held (Shrike) 3-31
3/27 DRFD equipment 3-33
3/28 Demolition ladder 3-40
3/29 Top assembly of demolition ladder in use 3-40
3/30 Bolt Gun and Tool Box 3-41
3/31 Bolt Gun and Accessories 3-45
3/32 Industrial Safety Harness Kit (ISHK) 3-46
3/33 Belt demolition rubber 3-47
3/34 Belt demolition rubber in use 3-47
3/35 Camouflet equipment 3-48
3/36 Use of camouflet set 3-51
4/1 Initiating PE using detonating cord 4-2

4/2 Binding detonator in detonating cord cradle 4-2
4/3 Non-operational initiation of small charges 4-4
4/4 Detonating cord junction box 4-5
4/5 Junctions in detonating cord 4-6
4/6 Configuration of ring mains 4-8
4/7 Typical simple firing circuit 4-10
4/8 Typical maximum firing circuit 4-11
4/9 Making joint in firing cable 4-15
4/10 Connecting single electric detonator to firing cable 4-17
4/11 Multi-detonator circuit 4-18
4/12 Connecting detonator to multi-detonator firing circuit 4-19
5/1 Cutting steel cable 5-8

5/2 Positioning charges on steel beams and girders 5-13
5/3 Charges on fabricated steel girder 5-13
5/4 Tree felling 5-21
5/5 Typical masonry arch span 5-30
5/6 Effect of concrete stripping charge 5-39
5/7 Minimum width of wedge for collapse 5-39
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED vii

RESTRICTED
Page
5/8 Section through span 5-44

5/9 Dragons’ teeth prepared for destruction 5-51
5/10 Breaching charge on concrete wall 5-52
5/11 Breaching charge on reinforced concrete pier 5-53
5/12 Pier footing charges 5-58
5/13 Example of borehole charges in reinforced concrete pier 5-65
5/14 Borehole charges in timber 5-69
5/15 Relieved face cratering 5-81
5/16 Ditching with explosives 5-82
5/17 Position of charge in relation to exterior face of target and ground 5-89
level
5/18 Spacing of charges behind an abutment 5-89
5/19 Placing small mined charges behind abutments 5-93
6/1 Positioning charges for breaking steel joints 6-5

6/2 Cutting pile 6-6
6/3 Construction of line or rope charge 6-6
6/4 Template for boreholes 6-7
6/5 Plaster shooting to break up submarine rock 6-8
6/6 Creating channel or trench under water 6-9
6/7 Typical arrangement for underwater demolition 6-10
6/8 Recovery line attached to target 6-12
6/9 End initiation of SX using patch 6-16
6/10 Initiation of SX at right angles to charge 6-16
6/11 Ribbon charge used to cut steel beam 6-17
6/12 Diamond charge on steel bar 6-18
6/13 Disc charge and effect 6-19
6/14 FLCC initiation 6-22
6/15 Flexible Linear Cutting Charge (FLCC) 6-23
6/16 Sizes of DIOPLEX 6-24
6/17 End cap for 40 mm DIOPLEX with detonator 6-25
6/18 DIOPLEX attached to steel tower 6-25
6/19 Spacing of explosive charges 6-28
6/20 Charges for two-man survival hole 6-31
6/21 Manual borehole driver 6-32
6/22 Use of DIOPLEX for track cutting 6-35
6/23 Improvised cutting of single-pinned track without lug 6-36
6/24 Improvised cutting of single-pinned track with lug 6-37
6/25 Improvised cutting of multi-pinned track 6-37
7/1 Use of manual breaching tools 7-1

7/2 Use of shotgun to disrupt locking mechanism 7-2
7/3 Man-packed thermal lance 7-2
viii RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

RESTRICTED
Page
7/4 Slip-on detonating cord booster 7-9

7/5 Booster created from detonating cord loop 7-9
7/6 Improvised PETN sheet explosive slip-on booster over 7-10
detonating cord
7/7 Basic improvised cruciform charge 7-12
7/8 Advanced improvised cruciform design 7-14
7/9 Improvised frame charge 7-17
7/10 Improvised charge using FLCC on one-piece frame 7-18
7/11 Improvised charge using FLCC ‘Sabre’ on hinged frame 7-19
7/12 Fracture sheet charge 7-20
7/13 Improvised cruciform charge using UDBs 7-22
7/14 Demolition charge using UDB 7-22
7/15 UDBs secured to half Barmine 7-23
7/16 Charge using UFCC (DIOPLEX) 7-23
7/17 Barmine sectioned through fuze well and half charge container 7-26
7/18 Improvised half-Barmine charge 7-27
7/19 Section through Barmine fuze 7-28
7/20 Improvised charge using slurry explosive 7-29
7/21 C-cuts 7-33
7/22 Strip charge on wooden door 7-34
7/23 Improvised linear strip charge 7-34
7/24 Use of FLCC as hinge charge 7-35
7/25 Door lock charge using one block (0.5 kg) of PE 7-36
7/26 Development of Mach stem 7-38
7/27 Representative danger areas from blast and fragmentation 7-39
8/1 Rapid small arms fire 8-4

8/2 Infantry section rapid fire 8-5
8/3 GPMG fire 8-6
8/4 Mortar and artillery fire 8-8
8/5 Rocket propelled anti-tank weapon 8-9
8/6 Blast incendiary device 8-10
8/7 Large nuclear simulator 8-12
8/8 Small nuclear simulator 8-15
8/9 Layout for strafing fire 8-16
8/10 Blast incendiary for strafing fire 8-17
8/11 Charge construction of 1000 lb bomb simulation 8-19
8/12 Assault breaching simulation facility (open) 8-20
8/13 Mousehole simulation facility (closed) 8-21
9/1 Position of charges on rail track 9-9

9/2 Demolition of multiple arch dam 9-21
9/3 Charges placed on outside of tank 9-26
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED ix

RESTRICTED
Page
10/1 See-saw collapse mechanism 10-3

10/2 Beam collapse mechanism 10-4
10/3 Member-without-support collapse mechanism 10-5
10/4 Formation of cantilevers - no collapse mechanism 10-6
10/5 Three-pin arch effect 10-7
10/6 Cranked beam effect 10-7
10/7 Jammed bridge span due to insufficient freedom of movement 10-8
10/8 Ideal simply supported span 10-9
10/9 Examples of multi-span simply supported bridges 10-10
10/10 Example of continuous multi-span bridge 10-11
10/11 Differentiation between simply supported and continuous spans 10-13
10/12 Simply supported categorisation chart 10-15
10/13 Examples of steel trusses 10-16
10/14 Typical mid-span cross sections of concrete bridges 10-17
10/15 Cross section of deck and through bridge 10-18
10/16 Top and bottom support of deck bridges 10-19
10/17 Normal and reinforced bowstring bridges 10-20
10/18 Simply supported steel beam through bridges 10-21
10/19 Simply supported, steel beam, deck bridges, bottom support 10-22
10/20 Simply supported, steel truss, through bridge 10-23
10/21 Simply supported, steel truss, deck bridge, bottom support 10-23
10/22 Simply supported, concrete beam, through bridge 10-24
10/23 Simply supported, concrete beam, deck bridge, top support 10-24
10/24 Simply supported, bowstring bridge, normal 10-25
10/25 Simply supported, bowstring bridge, reinforced 10-25
10/26 Recommended lines of attack 10-26
10/27 Measurements of simply supported spans 10-28
10/28 Continuous categorisation chart 10-43
10/29 Cantilever bridges 10-44
10/30 Cantilever bridges with suspended spans 10-45
10/31 Typical portal bridges 10-46
10/32 Comparison of portal and arch bridges 10-46
10/33 Arch bridge parts and shapes 10-47
10/34 Concrete cantilever bridges with suspended span 10-48
10/35 Continuous concrete slab bridge with short side span 10-49
10/36 Continuous concrete portal bridge with fixed footings 10-49
10/37 Concrete portal bridge with pinned footing 10-50
10/38 Concrete arch bridge, open spandrel, fixed footing 10-50
10/39 Concrete arch bridges, solid spandrel, fixed footing 10-51
10/40 Continuous steel beam bridge with short side span 10-52
10/41 Continuous steel bridge without short side span 10-52
10/42 Steel arch bridge, open spandrel 10-53
10/43 Brick arch bridge 10-53
x RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

RESTRICTED
Page
10/44 Masonry arch bridge 10-54

10/45 Collapse of a pier 10-57
10/46 Measurements of continuous bridges 10-60
10/47 Suspension bridge 10-73
10/48 Cable-stayed bridge 10-74
10/49 Lifting bridges 10-75
12/1 Electric detonator 12-19
A/1 BIRIS comprising one transmitter, two receivers and one ancilliary A-2
pack, in transit case
A/2 BIRIS transmitter, showing keyboard A-4
A/3 BIRIS receiver, showing terminals A-5
A/4 BIRIS self-test display A-7
H/1 Initiation train for confidence charge training H-2

H/2 Inert equipment showing confidence charge laid flat in a straight H-3
line
TABLES
1-1 Explosive hazard divisions 1-12

1-2 Explosive compatibility groups 1-13
2-1 Summary of service explosives 2-1

2-2 PE particulars 2-4
2-3 Training variants of PE 2-6
2-4 SX4 particulars 2-8
2-5 SX4 single variant particulars 2-9
2-6 FLCC (SABRE) packaging 2-22
2-7 Particulars of Bangalore Torpedo 2-31
2-8 Bangalore Torpedo Variant 2-31
2-9 Kilograms of ANFO required per metre of borehole 2-39
3-1 Summary of explosive and demolition accessories 3-1

3-2 UDB Specifications 3-52
5-1 Types of charge 5-1

5-2 Cutting charges for round mild steel bars and wire cables 5-6
5-3 Cutting charges for rectangular steel sections 5-9
5-4 Cutting charges for rectangular timber 5-16
5-5 Cutting charges for round timber 5-19
5-6 Cutting charges for masonry and unreinforced concrete 5-25
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED xi

RESTRICTED
Page
5-7 Cutting charges for masonry and unreinforced concrete arch rings 5-28
5-8 Cutting charges for small reinforced concrete beams 5-34
5-9 Cutting charges for small reinforced concrete slabs 5-37
5-10 Concrete stripping charges 5-42
5-11 Breaching charges for obstacles, walls and reinforced concrete 5-49
piers
5-12 Weight of pier footing charges for masonry and unreinforced 5-55
concrete piers
5-13 Pier footing charges for masonry and unreinforced concrete piers 5-57
5-14 Configuration of borehole charges in piers 5-64
5-15 Borehole charges in masonry and reinforced concrete 5-66
5-16 Borehole charges in timber 5-71
5-17 Cratering charges using rapid cratering equipment 5-74
5-18 Cratering charges in known subgrade using PE Blocks and 5-77
assuming 6 m craters
5-19 Cratering charge calculations 5-78
5-20 Data for ditching with explosives in average ground 5-83
5-21 Continuous cratering charges 5-85
5-22 Continuous cratering charges - weight of charge in kg/m run 5-86
5-23 Abutments and retaining walls - mined and cratering 5-92
5-24 Values of K in calculating concussion charges for reinforced 5-100
concrete structures
6-1 Safety depths and distances for underwater explosive charges 6-14
6-2 FLCC Performance against steel 6-23
6-3 Specification and capability of DIOPLEX 6-26
6-4 Explosive for track cutting 6-38
7-1 Minimum ‘safe-stacking’ distances for small and medium-sized 7-40

breaching charges in open
7-2 Blast phenomena and safety distances for small breaching 7-41
charges in enclosed spaces
8-1 Maximum charge size for 1000 lb bomb simulation 8-18
9-1 Estimates of time and labour for demolition tasks 9-4

9-2 General information on making holes and cutting channels 9-5
in piers, abutments, etc

10-1 Factor Lc⁄L - Determining minimum length of section to be removed 10-29
for mid-span top attack
10-2 Required end clearance at supports for mid-span bottom attacks 10-31
10-3 Methods of attack - simply supported bridges 10-33
xii RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

RESTRICTED
Page
10-4 Minimum length of section to be removed for arch and pinned 10-59
footing portal bridges
10-5 Methods of attack - continuous bridges 10-61
10-6 Prioroties for destruction 10-79
12-1 Danger areas for explosive charges 12-14

12-2 Danger areas for explosive battle noise simulation charges 12-15
12-3 Distances at which various results may be expected from an 12-16
explosion in the open-operational use
12-4 RF hazard safety distances for military equipment 12-21
12-5 RF hazard safety distances for Bowman radios 12-22
12-6 Details of regular Army and Special Forces demolitions 12-38
qualifications and competencies
12-7 Demolition range day - outline safety briefing 12-46
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED xiii

RESTRICTED
xiv RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

RESTRICTED
GLOSSARY
Notes:
1. Main references:
a. Allied Administrative Publication 6 (AAP-6) NATO Glossary of Terms and Definitions.
b. Joint Service Publication 403 (JSP 403) Handbook of Defence Land Ranges Safety, Volume IV,
Glossary of Terms and Definitions.
c. Joint Service Publication 482 (JSP 482) Ministry of Defence Explosives Regulations.
2. The definitions selected are those relevant to demolitions.
Ammunition/Munition. A complete device charged with explosives, propellants,

pyrotechnics, initiating composition or chemical, biological, radiological or nuclear
material, for use in military operations, including demolitions. (AAP-6)
Notes:
1. The terms ‘ammunition’ and ‘munition’ are interchangeable although ‘munition’ is the preferred NATO
term. In common usage, ‘munitions’ (plural) may be military weapons, ammunition and equipment.
2. Certain suitably modified munitions may be used for training, ceremonial or non-operational purposes.
Armed/Arming. Arming is the changing from a safe condition to a state of readiness

for initiation (see State of Readiness).
Base Charge. The increment of secondary high explosive (commonly tetryl, PETN
or RDX) in the base of a composite detonator, which enhances the shock wave
produced by the primary explosive.
Battle Noise Simulation. The production of the noise or effects of battlefield weapon
systems using service explosives and accessories or purpose-made simulators.
Blast. The brief and rapid movement of air, vapour or fluid away from a centre of
outward pressure, as in an explosion or in the combustion of rocket fuel; the pressure
accompanying this movement. This term is commonly used for ‘explosion’, but the
two terms may be distinguished. (AAP-6)
Blasting Cap. Alternative (US) term of reference for a demolition detonator.
Blasting Explosive. Explosive used for industrial mining and quarrying, etc.
Blast Wave. Wave created by the rapid expansion of hot gases in the atmosphere
which results from an explosion. The blast wave is initially a shock wave which
subsequently decays into a sound wave. (AAP-6)
Blind. Explosive ordnance which has been primed, fuzed, armed, initiated or otherwise
prepared for action, and which has been dropped, fired, launched, projected or placed
in such a manner as to constitute a hazard to operations, installations, personnel or
material and remains unexploded either by malfunction or design, or for any other
cause. (A&ER)
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED xv

RESTRICTED
Booster. A high-explosive element sufficiently sensitive so as to be actuated by small

explosive elements in a fuze or primer and powerful enough to cause detonation of
the main explosive filling. (AAP-6)
Bridgewire. An electrical filament that can be used to ignite a pyrotechnic or primary

explosive in contact with it, normally inside an igniter or detonator.
Brisance. The shattering property shown by an explosive; the property is estimated

by firing explosives in contact with metals or other solids and measuring the
deformation or shattering. The effect is associated with the detonation pressure and
the characteristics of the shock wave produced in the material in contact with the
explosive.
Burning. The propagation of combustion by a surface process involving conduction,

convection and radiation.
Charge. A quantity of explosives prepared for demolition purposes (see also Shaped
Charge and Booster). (AAP-6)
Combustion. An exothermic oxidation reaction producing flame, sparks or smoke.

The oxidant may be part of the material as in a propellant, or oxygen from the
atmosphere or other sources.
Compatibility Group. A grouping identified by a letter which, when referenced to

a compatibility table, shows those explosives which may be stored or transported
together without significantly increasing the probability of an accident or, for a given
quantity, the magnitude of the effects of such an accident. (JSP 482)
Competent Person. A person with the practical and theoretical knowledge and the
actual experience of the type of plant, item, substance, equipment or system which
he/she has to examine as will enable him/her to discover defects or weaknesses
which it is the purpose of the examination to detect. (JSP 482)
Cratering Charge. A charge placed at an adequate depth to produce a crater.

(AAP-6)
Cutting Charge. A charge which produces a cutting effect in line with its plane of
symmetry. (AAP-6)
Danger Area/Zone (DA/Z). The space in which there may be a hazard which could
result in a risk to personnel, equipment or property. (JSP 403)
Note: The space is defined as weapon or range specific, ie weapon DA/Z (WDA) or range DA/Z (RDA).
Deflagrating Explosive. An explosive that reacts by deflagration rather than by

explosion when used in its normal manner. (JSP 482)
xvi RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

RESTRICTED
Deflagration. A rapid chemical reaction in which the output of heat is sufficient

to enable the reaction to proceed and be accelerated without input of heat from
another source. Deflagration is a surface phenomenon with the reaction products
flowing away from the unreacted material normal to the surface at subsonic velocity.
The effect of a deflagration under confinement is an explosion. Confinement of
the reaction increases pressure rate of reaction and temperature and may cause
transition into a detonation. (JSP 482)
Demolition. The destruction of structures, facilities or materiel by use of fire, water,

explosives, mechanical, or other means. (AAP-6)
Demolitions Conducting Officer (DCO). An officer, warrant officer or senior non-

commissioned officer, or corporal with dispensation from Capability Directorate
Combat Support, trained and qualified in the planning, conduct and supervision of
demolition practices.
Detonating Cord. A waterproof flexible fabric tube containing a high explosive

designed to transmit the detonation wave. (AAP-6)
Detonating Pressure. The dynamic pressure in the shock front of a detonation wave.
Its magnitude for a particular explosion can be calculated or can be determined
experimentally using the Hopkinson machine. This parameter should not be confused
with pressure of combustion.
Detonation. An exothermic reaction at molecular level induced by the action of a

disruptive wave through an explosive material causing a sudden violent increase
in volume due to the evolution of gaseous products. There are three forms that
detonation may take:
a. High Order. Detonation at a velocity approaching the maximum stable velocity

of detonation for a system. Usually applied to NG based compositions.
b. Low Order. Detonation at a velocity well below the maximum stable velocity of
detonation for a system. Usually applied to NG based compositions.
c. Partial. The incomplete detonation of a high explosive caused by a physical

break or lack of chemical homogeneity within the explosive material. (JSP 403)
Detonator. A device containing a sensitive explosive intended to produce a

detonation wave. (AAP-6)
Drill or Instructional Ammunition. An inert replica of ammunition specifically

manufactured for drill and instructional purposes. (JSP 482)
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED xvii

RESTRICTED
Dual-compartment Vehicles. Vehicles in which the driver’s and cargo compartments

are separated by a bulkhead which is close fitted or sealed to protect the driver in the
event of fire, leakage or accidental initiation of the goods. Wooden bulkheads must
be fire resistant. The vehicles are required when moving explosives and detonators
together.
Electric Detonator. A detonator initiated by electrical means.
Electro-Explosive Device (EED). A one-shot explosive or pyrotechnic device used as

the initiating element in an explosive or mechanical train and which is activated by
the application of electrical energy.
Energetic Material. Material that makes a positive contribution to an explosive,

propellant or pyrotechnic process.
Exploder. A device assigned to generate an electric current in a firing circuit after

deliberate action by the user in order to initiate an explosive charge or charges.
(AAP-6)
Exploding Bridgewire (EBW). A detonator in which an electric filament is explosively

vaporised by a high tension pulse, and thereby sets up detonation in a surrounding
secondary explosive filling.
Explosion (Munition). A very rapid transfer of heat through a layer or layers of material,
which is characterised by heat, flash, sound and large quantities of gas. (JSP 403)
Note: An explosion can take place without oxygen.
Explosive. A substance or mixture of substances which, under external influences, is

capable of rapidly releasing energy in the form of gases and heat. (AAP-6)
Explosives Classification. A division of explosives according to the risk they present

when initiated in storage and transport. (See also Compatibility Group, Hazard Class,
Hazard Classification Code, Hazard Division) (JSP 482)
Explosiveness. The measure of the violence of a response of an explosive confinement

once ignition has occurred to a stimulus. A term relevant to hazard assessment.
Explosive Ordnance. All munitions containing explosives, nuclear fission or fusion

materials and biological and chemical agents. This includes bombs and warheads;
guided and ballistic missiles; artillery, mortar, rocket and small arms ammunition; all
mines, torpedoes and depth charges, demolition charges; pyrotechnics; clusters and
dispensers; cartridge and propellant actuated devices; electro-explosive devices;
clandestine and improvised explosive devices; and all similar or related items or
components explosive in nature. (AAP-6)
xviii RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

RESTRICTED
Explosive Ordnance Disposal (EOD). The detection, identification, on-site evaluation,

rendering safe, recovery and final disposal of unexploded explosive ordnance.
(AAP-6)
Note: The DSO/ESO qualification (see Chapter 12) does not cover EOD.
Explosive Power. The work capacity of an explosive, usually referring to high

explosives. It is not the rate of doing the work, although in practice the rate may
affect the experimental measurement of values. It can be calculated as a percentage
of the work done by a standard explosive on the basis of the amount of heat and gas
generated.
Explosive Train. A succession of initiating and igniting elements arranged to cause a

charge to function. (AAP-6)
Firing Circuit. An electrical circuit which, directly or indirectly, causes the ignition of
explosives or propellants. (JSP 482)
Firing Point. That point in the firing circuit where the device employed to initiate the
detonation of the charges is located. (AAP-6)
Flash Detonator. A detonator initiated by a brief radiation pulse accompanying an

explosion or short-lived flame.
Fragmentation. The combined effect of explosive and shell wall composition

producing high velocity fragments. (JSP 403)
Fuze. A device which initiates an explosive train. (AAP-6)
Hazard Class. The UN recommended system of nine classes for identifying Dangerous
Goods. Class 1 identifies Explosives. (JSP 482)
Hazard Classification Code (HCC). An alpha-numeric symbol which denotes the

complete HCC for a particular nature. The code consists of two or three digits
indicating the Hazard Division followed by a letter corresponding to the Compatibility
Group, eg 1.3G. (JSP 482)
Hazard Division (HD). A division of the UN Dangerous Goods Class 1 (explosives)

indicating the main type of hazard to be expected in the event of an accident. There
are six HDs: 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6. (JSP 482)
High Explosives. Substances or mixtures of substances which, in their application

as primary, booster or main charges in shells, missiles, and demolition systems, are
required to detonate. (JSP 403)
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED xix

RESTRICTED
Hollow Charge. A shaped charge producing a deep cylindrical hole of relatively small
diameter in the direction of its axis of rotation. (AAP-6)
Hot Spot. A small, localised region in an explosive substance, which is characterised

by a temperature much higher than that of its surroundings. This is relevant to
mechanisms of initiation.
Hydrolysis. The decomposition of a compound by the action of water. This is relevant

to the chemical stability of explosives.
Ignition. The initial heating of a deflagrating explosive or pyrotechnic composition, by

flame or other source of heat, up to its point of inflammation. Means of ignition may
include propellant, primers, igniters, squibs, fuze lighters, etc. (JSP 482)
Initiation. The action of a device used as the first element of an explosive train which,
upon receipt of the proper impulse, causes the detonation or burning of an explosive
item. (AAP-6)
Low Explosive. Explosives which normally deflagrate (burn to combustion). The term
is obsolescent because the compositions which it covers fall largely into the category
of propellants.
Mach Stem. The shock front formed by the fusion of the incident and reflected shock
fronts from an explosion. The term is generally used with reference to a blast wave,
propagated in the air, reflected at the surface of the earth. In the ideal case, the Mach
stem is perpendicular to the reflecting surface and slightly convex (forward). (AAP-6)
Main Charge. The charge provided to accomplish the end result in the munition.
Misfire. The failure of a weapon, munition or other device to fire or explode as or

when expected due to a fault in the firing system, initiator, propellant or other charge.
(AAP-6)
Munition. See Ammunition.
Munroe Effect (or Neumann Effect). A local concentration of shock wave energy
produced by shaping the explosive charge.
Net Explosive Quantity (NEQ). The total explosive content present in a container,
ammunition, building, etc unless it has been determined that the effective quantity is
significantly different from the actual quantity. It does not include such substances
as white phosphorous, war gas, or smoke and incendiary compositions unless these
substances contribute significantly to the dominant hazard of the Hazard Division
concerned. Also known in some applications as Net Explosive Mass (NEM), Net
Explosive Weight (NEW). (JSP 482)
xx RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

RESTRICTED
Obsolescent. Becoming out of practice or out of date. (JSP 482)
Obsolete. Out of use, date, practice, or not current. (JSP 482)
Partial Detonation. See Detonation.
Partial Ignition. An ignition from which subsequent burning fails to propagate

throughout the sample. Effectively, ‘partial burning’.
Peak Overpressure. The maximum value of overpressure at a given location which is

generally experienced at the instant the shock (or blast) wave reaches that location.
(AAP-6)
Plastic Explosive (see also Explosive). Explosive which is malleable at normal

temperatures. (AAP-6)
Primary Explosive. An explosive that is extremely sensitive to stimuli such as heat,

friction and/or shock and requires special care in handling. Generally, primary
explosives are synonymous with initiating explosives. (JSP 482)
Pyrotechnics. A mixture of chemicals, which, when ignited, is capable of reacting

exothermically to produce light, heat, smoke, sound or gas, and may be used to
introduce a delay into a firing system because of its known burning time. The term
excludes propellants and explosives. (AAP-6)
Radio Frequency Hazard (RADHAZ). The potential danger of accidental initiation of

an electro-explosive device (EED) by radio frequency energy. (JSP 482)
Rate of Burning.
a. The rate of regression of the burning surface of an explosive, usually a propellant

grain, under given conditions of pressure and grain temperature. Sometimes
referred to as the ‘linear rate of burning’ in geometrical sense but not the algebraic
sense.
b. The rate of consumption of a burning explosive, usually a propellant or

bipropellant combination, in terms of mass per unit time.
Safety Fuze. Pyrotechnics contained in a flexible and weatherproof sheath burning

at a constant rate, used to transmit a flame to the detonator, with a predetermined
delay. (AAP-6)
Secondary Explosive. An explosive which can be made to detonate when initiated by

a detonation wave or other shock front but which does not normally detonate when
heated or ignited.
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED xxi

RESTRICTED
Sensitiveness. A measure of the relative probability of an explosive being ignited or

initiated by a prescribed stimulus. It is used in the context of accidental ignition or
initiation.
Sensitivity. A measure of the stimulus required to cause reliable design mode function
of an explosive. (JSP 482)
Shaped Charge. (See also Charge). A charge shaped so as to concentrate its

explosive force in a particular direction. (AAP-6)
Sheet Explosive. Plastic explosive provided in a sheet form. (AAP-6)
Shock Front. The boundary between the pressure disturbance created by an

explosion (in air, water, or earth) and the ambient atmosphere, water, or earth.
(AAP-6)
Shock Wave. (See also Blast Wave). The continuously propagated pressure pulse
formed by the blast from an explosion in air, underwater or underground. (AAP-6)
State of Readiness.
a. State 1 – Safe. The state of a demolition target in which charges are in place.
The firing circuit may be in place, but the detonators are not installed and the
means of firing are not connected.
b. State 2 – Armed. The state of a demolition target in which the demolition charges
are in place, the firing and priming circuits are installed and complete, ready for
immediate firing.
(AAP-6)
Sympathetic Detonation. The detonation of an explosive as a consequence of

another detonation. (JSP 482)
Temperature of Ignition. The temperature at which an explosive ignites under

specified conditions. This is affected by confinement (pressure building up), heating
rate and NEQ.
TNT Equivalent. A measure of the energy released from the detonation of a nuclear
weapon, or from the explosion of a given quantity of fissionable material, in terms of
the amount of TNT (Trinitrotoluene) which could release the same amount of energy
when exploded. (AAP-6)
Undertamping. Undertamping is the practice of placing sand-filled sandbags under

explosive charges used for battle noise simulation so as to reduce the risk from
stones, or debris.
xxii RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

RESTRICTED
Velocity of Detonation (VoD). The speed at which a detonation wave progresses

through an explosive. When, in a given system, it attains such a value that it will
continue without change, it is called the stable velocity of detonation for that system.
Explosives have various VoDs. The faster/higher the VoD, the greater the brisance
and power of the explosive.
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED xxiii

RESTRICTED
xxiv RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

RESTRICTED
ABBREVIATIONS
AAP Allied Administrative Publication

ADAC Ammunition Descriptive Asset Code
A&ER Ammunition and Explosive Regulations
AESP Army Equipment Support Publication
AN Ammonium nitrate
ANFO Ammonium nitrate and fuel oil
APDS Armour piercing discarding sabot
AR Authorised Representative
ARTD Army Recruiting and Training Directorate
BIRIS Battlefield Inoculation Remote Ignition System

BSS Battle Noise Safety Supervisor
CD Charge Demolition
CDLC Charge Demolition Linear Cutting (‘Blade’)
CE Composite explosive
CLC Charge Linear Cutting
COSHH Control of substances hazardous to health
CSPE Cable Special Purpose Electric
CTCRM Commando Training Centre Royal Marines
DA Danger area
DCB Detonating cord booster
DCO Demolitions Conducting Officer
DLP Defence Learning Portal
DMNB 3-Dimethyl-2, 3-Dinitrobutane
DOSG Defence Ordnance Safety Group
DRASP Demolition Range Action and Safety Plan
DRFD Demolition Remote Firing Device
DSO Demolitions Safety Officer
DZ Danger zone
EBW Exploding bridgewire

ECBA Enhanced Combat Body Armour
ECT Explosive cutting tape
EED Electro-explosive device
EOD Explosive ordnance disposal
ESA Explosive storage area
ESO Explosives Safety Officer
ESTC Explosives Storage and Transport Committee (MoD)
FAE Fuel air explosive

F of I Figure of Insensitivity
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED xxv

RESTRICTED
FLCC Flexible Linear Cutting Charge (‘Sabre’)
HAS Hardened aircraft shelter

HCC Hazard Classification Code
HD Hazard Division
HESH High explosive squashed head
HMX High Molecular-weight rdX
IBS Infantry Battle School

ICCS Inert change container system
IFD Integrated Firing Device
IPE Intelligence preparation of the environment
ISFE Igniter Safety Fuse Electric
ISHK Industrial Safety Harness Kit
ITC Infantry Training Centre
ITP Inner Tactical Packaging (or Package or Pack) (of PE)
JSP Joint Service Publication
KDNBF Potassium dinitrobenzofurozan
LMNR Lead mononitroresorcinate
MDF Medium density fibreboard

ME Military Engineer
NEM Net explosive mass

NEQ Net explosive quantity
NEW Net explosive weight
NG Nitroglycerine
NSN Nato Stock Number
OTP Outer Tactical Packaging (or Package or Pack) (of PE)
PAN Prilled ammonium nitrate

PAUB Platform Access Underbridge
PE Plastic explosive
PETN Pentaerythritol
PSN Proper Shipping Name
PVC Polyvinyl chloride
RADHAZ Radio frequency hazard

RBD Rapid bridge demolition
RCK Rapid Cratering Kit
RDA Range danger area
xxvi RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

RESTRICTED
RDX Research department explosive

RF Radio frequency
RLO Range liaison officer
SX Sheet explosive
TATB Triaminotrinitrobenzene
TNT Trinitrotoluene
UAV Unmanned aerial vehicle

UDB Universal Demolition Block
UFCC User-Filled Charge Container
UN United Nations
UOI Unit of Issue (replaces Description of Quantity (DofQ))
VHF Very high frequency

VoD Velocity of detonation
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED xxvii

RESTRICTED
xxviii RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

RESTRICTED
INTRODUCTION
1. Aim. The aim of this pamphlet is to:
a. Provide the information required on demolition equipment, techniques

and procedures to enable the correct planning, conduct and control of
operational demolitions on the battlefield.
b. Set out the qualifications, rules and procedures required for the safe
planning, conduct and supervision of demolition training range days,
battle noise simulation and other non-operational uses of explosives.
2. Scope. The pamphlet is intended for use by Military Engineers and specially
trained personnel of other Arms and Services when carrying out training and
operations within the remit of their relevant qualifications. The pamphlet is
mainly concerned with the use of explosives and accessories for demolitions,
but the basic principles and safety factors apply when explosives are used
for other tasks such as battle noise simulation. Publications relating to the
use of explosives for other tasks, including battle noise simulation, are listed
in Paragraph 6 below: the list is not comprehensive. Where equipment is
concerned, outline descriptions and operating procedures are included and
detailed information is contained in Army Equipment Support Publications
(AESPs) which are the authoritative documents.
3. Use of Explosives in Operational Conditions. ‘Operational conditions’

covers the whole spectrum of operations from major combat operations to
hybrid operations. Commanding officers must assess the requirement for
a Demolitions Conducting Officer (DCO) to be present during a demolition
task and issue the appropriate orders. It may be deemed unnecessary for
a DCO to be present and personnel may be tasked to undertake demolition
tasks to the limit of their training. Live training conducted while deployed
on an operation must be conducted by a DCO.
4. Use of Explosives in Non-operational Conditions. All use of, or training

with, live explosives in non-operational conditions must be conducted by a
DCO qualified in accordance with Chapter 12 of this pamphlet. Tasks such
as Military Aid to the Civilian Community are only to be conducted by Royal
Engineers personnel.
5. Service Explosives. The plastic explosive (PE) and sheet explosive (SX)
referred to in this publication are the UK service issue (currently PE7, which
is being replaced by PE8, and SX4).
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED xxix

RESTRICTED
6. Safety. Explosive stores and demolition charges are potentially dangerous

if their handling and use is not carefully planned, controlled and supervised.
The safety precautions and procedures in Chapter 12 are designed to
reduce risk to a minimum and are therefore to be adhered to at all times in
training and as far as possible on operations.
7. Related Publications. Pamphlets relating to the use of explosives for tasks

other than demolitions are listed below:
Pamphlet General Content
a. JSP 333 Service Textbook of Explosives EOD
b. JSP 364 Joint Service EOD Manual Reference for technical

information (incorporates all
Service demolition and
explosives details)
c. JSP 375 MOD Health and Safety Safety

Handbook
d. JSP 403 Handbook of Defence Land Ranges and range policy

Ranges Safety
e. JSP 412 Radio frequency Radiation RF hazards

Hazards Associated with Electron
Explosive Devices
f. JSP 454 Land Systems Safety Operational dispensation

and Environmental Protection
Part 2, Regulation 7
g. JSP 482 MOD Explosives Regulations Safety and storage

Part 3
h. JSP 800 Defence Movements and

Transport Regulations Vol 4b
i. Military Engineering Volume II Explosive digging

Field Engineering, Pamphlet 2
Field Fortifications
j. Military Engineering Volume II Battle noise simulation

Field Engineering, Pamphlet 4A
All Arms Battle Noise Simulation
xxx RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

RESTRICTED
k. Military Engineering Volume II Booby traps

Minelaying
l. Military Engineering Volume II Mine disposal

Breaching Minefields and Other
Explosive Obstacles
m. Military Engineering Volume V Quarrying

Roads, Part 3 Quarries and Gravel Pits
n. Infantry Training Volume IV Destruction of blinds

Ranges, Pamphlet 21, Regulations for
the Planning, Conduct and Supervision of
Firing and Training with Infantry
Weapon Systems and Pyrotechnics
8. Other References.
a. Capability Directorate Combat Support, Confidence charges

Military Engineering Training Branch,
Training Policy Note 12.06
Conduct of Confidence Charge Training
b. Royal Navy: Clearance Diving Operations BRd 5063.
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED xxxi

RESTRICTED
xxxii RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

RESTRICTED
CHAPTER 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF
EXPLOSIVES
SECTION 1.1 BACKGROUND
0101. Introduction. Most explosives used in demolitions are high explosives.
They possess large amounts of potential energy which they release very
rapidly. If this energy is released incorrectly, it can cause havoc; if it is
controlled and correctly applied, it can yield great benefits. There is a wide
variety of explosives available with different characteristics. If explosives
are to be used efficiently and safely, the correct explosives must be
selected for a particular task and they must be positioned and initiated so
that the maximum use is made of their inherent power. This requires an
understanding of the characteristics of explosives and their effects.
0102. Aim. The aim of this chapter is to describe the fundamental characteristics
of explosives and their effects with particular reference to demolitions.
0103. Scope. The subject is covered under the following headings:
a. Section 1.2. Characteristics of Explosives.
(1) Deflagration and detonation.
(2) Classification of explosives.
(3) Initiation of detonation.
(4) Properties of explosives.
(5) Military requirements of explosives.
b. Section 1.3. Hazard Classification.
(1) Background.
(2) UN classification system.
c. Section 1.4. Explosive Charges.
(1) Explosive effects.
(2) Shaped charges.
Issue No : 2.0 Jan 13 RESTRICTED 1-1

RESTRICTED
(3) Underwater explosions.
(4) Initiation of explosive charges.
This chapter is not authoritative and many aspects have been generalised
for brevity. Although there are exceptions to many of the statements, they
are broadly true and the application of the principles errs on the side of
safety and prudence. The science and technology of explosives is given in
greater detail in JSP 333, Service Textbook of Explosives.
0104. Spare.
to
0110.
1-2 RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.0 Jan 13

RESTRICTED
SECTION 1.2 CHARACTERISTICS OF

EXPLOSIVES
TYPES OF EXPLOSION, DEFLAGRATION AND DETONATION
0111. General. An explosion occurs when a large amount of energy is suddenly

released, causing a violent expansion of gaseous matter. The energy may
come from an over-pressurised steam boiler, from products of a chemical
reaction involving explosive materials, or from a nuclear reaction that is
uncontrolled. The release of energy can be dissipated as blast waves,
propulsion of debris, or by the emission of thermal and ionizing radiation.
These types of explosion can be divided into three groups: physical
explosions such as the over-pressurised steam boiler, chemical explosions
as in the chemical reactions of the explosive compositions, and atomic
explosions.
0112. Physical Explosions. A physical explosion can arise when a substance,

whilst being compressed, undergoes a rapid physical transformation. At the
same time, the potential energy of the substance is rapidly transformed into
kinetic energy and its temperature rises rapidly, resulting in the production
of a shock wave. An example of a physical explosion is the eruption of
the Krakatoa volcano in 1883. During this eruption, a large quantity of
molten lava spilled into the ocean causing about 1 cubic mile of sea water
to vaporise. This rapid vaporisation created a blast wave that was heard up
to 300 miles away.
0113. Chemical Explosions. A chemical explosion is the result of a chemical

reaction or change of state that occurs over an exceedingly short space of
time with the generation of a large amount of heat and, generally, a large
quantity of gas. Chemical explosions are produced by compositions that
contain explosive compounds and which are compressed together but do not
necessarily need to be confined. During a chemical explosion, an extremely
rapid exothermic transformation takes place, resulting in the formation of
very hot gases and vapours. Owing to the extreme rapidity of the reaction
(one hundredth of a second), the gases do not expand instantaneously but
remain for a fraction of a second inside the container occupying the volume
that was once occupied by the explosive charge. As this space is extremely
small and the temperature of the explosion is extremely high (several
thousands of degrees), the resultant pressure is very high (several hundreds
of atmospheres); high enough to produce a ‘blast wave’ that breaks the
wall of the container and causes damage to surrounding objects. If the
blast wave is strong enough, damage to distant objects can also occur.
The types of explosion described in this book are based on the explosion
caused by chemical reaction of explosive compositions.

RESTRICTED
0114. Atomic Explosions. The energy produced from an atomic or nuclear

explosion is a million to a billion times greater than the energy produced
from a chemical explosion. The shock waves from an atomic explosion are
similar to those produced by a chemical explosion but last longer and have
a higher pressure in the positive pulse and lower pressure in the negative
phase. The heavy flux of neutrons produced from an atomic explosion
would be fatal to anybody near the explosion, whereas those who are some
distance from the explosion would be harmed by the gamma radiation.
Atomic explosions also emit intense infra-red and ultra-violet radiation.
0115. Combustion. Oxygen is needed for combustion. For burning most materials
(paper, wood, coal, petroleum, etc), the oxygen to support combustion
is drawn from the air and the rate of combustion is comparatively slow,
although dust or fuel droplets can be dispersed in air so rapid combustion
and explosion occur. (If finely divided solid fuel droplets or gaseous fuel
or fuel vapour are mixed with air and exploded, such a mixture is known
as fuel air explosive (FAE)). With an explosive substance, the oxygen to
support combustion is contained within the material itself; air is not required
and combustion is very rapid. Combustion of an explosive can occur in
two ways, called ‘deflagration’ and ‘detonation’. They differ in the speed
at which combustion takes place. The combustion process of propellants
is usually subsonic, whereas the combustion process of explosives during
detonation is supersonic.
0116. Deflagration. The rate of combustion of explosive substances varies

greatly between substances and even more so with the conditions under
which they are burnt. Most explosives can be easily ignited in the open air
and many burn relatively slowly in this condition. If an explosive is ignited
in a confined space, such as the barrel of a gun, the burning causes an
increase in pressure, which in turn causes the rate of burning to increase,
in which convection often plays an important role. The acceleration in
the rate of burning results in an explosion. The burning of an explosive
is generally a surface reaction, with each particle of the substances being
consumed from the surface inward; it is known as ‘deflagration’. The rate
of burning is between 0.001 and 500 m/s depending on the substance and
conditions. A deflagration or rapid burn starts with the ignition and burning
of the confined energetic material and leads to non-violent pressure release
of a low strength case or venting through case closures (leading port or fuze
wells, etc). The case might rupture but does not fragment; closure covers
could be expelled and unburned or burning energetic material thrown about
and spread the fire. Pressure venting can propel an unsecured test item,
causing an additional hazard. There is no blast or significant fragmentation
damage to the surroundings; only heat and smoke damage from the burning
energetic material; this is in contrast to a detonation.

RESTRICTED
0117. Detonation. The combustion process can occur at a far higher rate and
by a different physical mechanism known as ‘detonation’. Detonation is
defined as ‘the instantaneous decomposition of the unstable molecules of
the compounds that make up the high explosive into more stable gases.
This process is started by an initial shock’. Detonation waves in solid and
liquid explosives travel at between 1,800 and 9,000 m/s. Detonations have
the potential to cause more damage than deflagrations because of the
directional nature of the shock wave and the much greater and more rapid
build-up of pressure. Therefore they are the type of explosion of most
interest to the combat engineer.
INITIATION OF DETONATION
0118. The detonation of an explosive can be brought about in two ways:
a. Burning to Detonation. Burning to detonation is otherwise known as

‘deflagration to detonation transition’. Paragraph 0116 describes how, if
an explosive is burnt in a confined space, the rate of burning accelerates.
If this continues, the rate of regression of the burning surface may
suddenly accelerate to a velocity exceeding that of sound within the
explosive in its compressed condition. This makes it impossible for any
increase in pressure to be smoothly transmitted through the charge and
a shock (detonation) wave develops. Detonation waves develop in some
explosives without being confined. Certain explosives, when ignited in
the open in masses of a few milligrams, burn to detonation; for others,
the critical mass is in the kilogram range. Other factors may influence the
outcome, such as the self-confinement of a large mass due to its size and
shape. Thus the time in which the transition from burning to detonation
can occur varies widely from a few milliseconds to many minutes.
b. Shock to Detonation (Sympathetic Detonation). The detonation of an

explosive can also be started by the shock wave caused by the detonation
of another charge. The two charges may be in contact or separated by a
short distance.
0119. Requirements for Successful Detonation. Once established, the

detonation wave is very violent but it is susceptible to failure, particularly in
the early stages of development. The main requirements to ensure success
are:
a. Magnitude of Initiation. The initial shock wave of the initiation charge

must be of sufficient magnitude to detonate the main charge.
b. Path of Shock Wave. The intended path of the shock wave must be in a
relatively straight line, avoiding any sharp bends.

RESTRICTED
c. Perpendicular Detonation. The shock wave must enter perpendicular

to the face of the charge to direct the detonation wave with its greatest
force against the object.
0120. Effect of Inadequate Conditions. Should any of the required conditions

not exist, one of the following may occur:
a. The charge may fail to detonate.
b. Partial detonation may occur, in which case part of the charge detonates
but the remainder, though probably disintegrated, is chemically
unchanged and still visible.
c. A low order detonation may occur, in which case the detonation wave
passes completely through the explosive, consuming all the material, but
at a speed well below its characteristic velocity. The explosion is less
violent than expected.
CLASSIFICATION OF EXPLOSIVES
0121. An explosive is defined as ‘a solid or liquid substance which, on the

application of a suitable stimulus, is converted in a very short interval of time
into other more stable substances, usually gases, with the development of
high pressure’. Explosives are classified in three categories:
a. Low Explosives. Low explosives are those which normally deflagrate

(burn to combustion). Low explosives are used as igniting agents
for propellant charges, such as bullets and shells, because of the
combustible properties described in Paragraph 0116.
b. High Explosives. High explosives function by the process known as

‘detonation’, described in Paragraph 0117.
c. Pyrotechnics. The third category is pyrotechnics. Pyrotechnics

are mixtures of oxidising and reducing solids (fuels) capable of self-
contained combustion. They are designed to produce special effects
that supplement or simulate those produced by conventional explosives.
As the effects in some cases include deflagration or detonation, the
main difference between a fast burning pyrotechnic and an explosive
is that the former is by definition a mixture, whereas the latter may be
a chemical compound or mixture. Pyrotechnics include illuminants,
smoke, incendiaries, signal tracer, and delay and priming compositions.

RESTRICTED
PROPERTIES AND CHARACTERISTICS OF EXPLOSIVES
0122. Four properties - sensitivity, power, velocity and brisance (shattering effect)
- can be used to compare explosives. Though they are not the only factors
that must be considered when assessing an explosive for military use.
Other factors are mentioned in Paragraph 0128.
0123. Sensitivity. Different explosive substances have varying degrees of

sensitivity to initiation by shock, friction, heat, etc. It is measured on a
comparative scale and is quoted as a Figure of Insensitivity (F of I). It gives
a measure of the care required in handling the explosive and its inherent
safeness. Sensitivity is one method of grouping explosives. With high
explosives:
a. Primary Explosives. Primary explosives (also known as ‘primary high

explosives’) can be detonated easily and differ from secondary explosives
in that they undergo a very rapid transition from burning to detonation and
have the ability to transmit the detonation to less sensitive explosives.
Primary explosives detonate when subjected to heat or shock. On
detonation, the molecules in the primary explosive initiate a second,
more stable explosive. For these reasons, they are used in initiating
devices. Primary explosives differ considerably in their sensitivity to heat
and in the amount of heat they produce on detonation. The heat and
shock on detonation can vary but is comparable to that from secondary
explosives. Their detonation velocities are in a range of 3500 to 5500
m/s. Primary explosives have a high degree of sensitivity to initiation
through shock, friction, electric spark or high temperatures and explode
whether they are confined or unconfined. Typical primary explosives
which are widely used are lead azide, lead styphnate (trinitroresorcinate),
lead mononitroresorcinate (LMNR), potassium dinitrobenzofurozan
(KDNBF) and barium styphnate). Other primary explosive materials not
frequently used today are mercury azide and mercury fulminate.
b. Secondary Explosives. Secondary explosives (also known as ‘high

explosives’) can be detonated less easily than primary explosives and
differ from primary explosives in that they cannot be detonated readily by
heat or shock. They are generally more powerful than primary explosives
and can only be initiated to detonation by the shock produced by the
explosion of a primary explosive. On initiation, the secondary explosive
compositions dissociate almost instantaneously into other more
stable components. An example of this is shown in reaction; 2.4.RDX
(C3H6N6O6) explodes violently if stimulated with a primary explosive. The
molecular structure breaks down on explosion leaving, momentarily,
a disorganised mass of atoms. These immediately recombine to give
predominantly gaseous products evolving a considerable amount of heat.

RESTRICTED
The detonation is so fast that a shock wave is generated that acts on its
surrounding with great brisance (or shattering effect) before the pressure
of the exerted gas can take effect. Some secondary explosives are so
stable that rifle bullets can be fired through them or they can be set on
fire without detonating. The more stable explosives that detonate at very
high velocities exert a much greater force during their detonation than
the explosive materials used to initiate them. Values of their detonation
velocities are in range of 5500 to 9000 m/s. Examples of secondary
explosives are TNT, tetryl, picric acid, nitrocellulose, nitro-glycerine, nitro
guanidine, RDX, HMX and TATB. Examples of commercial secondary
explosives are blasting gelatine, guhr dynamite and 60% gelatine
dynamite.
0124. Power. The power of an explosive is a measure of the energy available and
is quantified by measuring the gas and heat released from the explosive.
The useful energy produced by a detonation is described in Paragraph
0127.
0125. Velocity of Detonation. The velocity of detonation is the rate at which the
detonation wave passes through the explosive and is an indication of the
rate at which the energy is released.
0126. Brisance (Shattering Effect). Brisance is a qualitative assessment of the

explosive, which in many respects combines the power and the velocity
of detonation to give an idea of its violence and ability to shatter nearby
materials.
0127. Detonation Energy. The energy of a detonated explosive manifests itself

in two ways:
a. Primary Shock or Shattering. Primary shock, or shattering, is the

result of the detonating shock wave passing from the explosive into its
surroundings. In air, the shock wave is quickly dissipated because of the
elasticity of the air but, if the explosive is in contact with a solid or more
dense material, the shock wave is sustained for longer and produces a
shattering (brisance) effect in the material.
b. Pressure. The expanding gases produced by the explosion cause a bulk

pressure and steady push effect.
The proportions in which these energies are produced varies with different
explosive substances. In general, the greater the velocity of detonation the
greater the shattering effect. In practice, the form in which the energy is
required varies with the task. For example, to cut steel a high shattering
effect is required, whereas to blow a crater in soft earth the pressure effect

RESTRICTED
is the main requirement. In other tasks, such as destroying an abutment

or producing shrapnel from the body of a munition, a combined effect
is required, an initial shattering effect to break up the structure followed
by a blast to blow it away or project it. Although in theory the explosive
substance should be chosen to match the task, for military uses the range of
explosives from which the choice can be made is limited by factors divorced
from the final task.
MILITARY REQUIREMENTS OF EXPLOSIVES
0128. Military explosives must be reliable, safe and effective. These desirable
attributes interrelate with the following factors:
a. Availability and Cost. Large quantities of the raw materials must be

readily available and the explosive must be simple and cost effective to
manufacture.
b. Stability. The explosive material must be chemically stable and not

degrade throughout its life which may include long periods of storage
in various climatic conditions. Resistance to water is important with
many explosive substances. They should be non-volatile and should not
melt in hot climatic conditions; nevertheless, many explosives must be
able to be melted for filling into explosive munitions. Properties such as
sensitivity must remain constant throughout the life of the explosive.
c. Compatibility. The explosive must be compatible and as non-reactive as

possible with materials with which it comes into contact.
d. Toxicity. Many explosives because of their chemical nature are toxic to

some degree. This must be minimised.
e. Density. Maximum power is required from the minimum volume of

explosive material. This normally implies that the explosive material
must have a high density.
f. Malleability. Explosives used in engineering must be malleable, as this

enables the explosive to be easily moulded to the target.
g. Traceability. UK law demands that explosives are fully traceable and

as such, UK military explosives have chemical signatures, or ‘tags’, that
indicate their nature and details. This can also contribute to the toxicity
of the explosives.

RESTRICTED
0129. Spare.
to
0130.

RESTRICTED
SECTION 1.3 HAZARD CLASSIFICATION

BACKGROUND
0131. Explosives are inherently dangerous. Safety is achieved by:
a. The choice of explosive materials as mentioned in Section 1.2.
b. The incorporation of safety devices in explosive munitions and associated

equipment.
c. The strict control of conditions and procedures used in the storage,

transportation and use of explosives and explosive munitions. The
background to these is described below. Safety procedures for the use
of explosive are contained in Chapter 12.
0132. There are two bodies predominantly concerned with explosive safety in the
British armed forces.
a. Ordnance Board. The Ordnance Board is concerned with the safety

aspects of all explosives, explosive munitions and their associated
weapon systems.
b. Explosive Storage and Transport Committee (ESTC). The Explosive

Storage and Transport Committee is responsible for ensuring that
explosives are stored and transported with the minimum risk to life and
property.
0133. Classification of Explosives. British military explosives are classified in

accordance with the International System of Classification as recommended
by the United Nations (UN). The system is primarily designed for regulating
the transportation of explosives but is also widely used for handling and
storage. A knowledge of the system helps in assessing foreign explosives
in the absence of other data.
UNITED NATIONS CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM
0134. The UN system divides dangerous goods into nine classes, of which
explosives comprise Class 1. This class is divided into six sub-divisions or
Hazard Divisions. The characteristics of explosives in each of these hazard
divisions are described in Table 1-1. The explosives are also divided into
thirteen compatibility groups which are designated by a letter between A and
S. Explosives are considered to be compatible if they can be transported
together without significantly increasing either the probability or magnitude

RESTRICTED
of an accidental explosion. The compatibility groups are summarised in

Table 1-2.
0135. With the exception of Groups A, K and L, all explosives in any one group
are compatible in any mode of storage or transport. The combination
of Hazard Division and Compatibility Group is referred to as the Hazard
Classification Code which is shown as a decimal number and letter (eg 1.4C
denotes Hazard Class 1, Division 4, Compatibility Group C). The Hazard
Classification Code should be displayed wherever the explosive is stored or
transported.
TABLE 1-1 EXPLOSIVE HAZARD DIVISIONS
Serial Division Description

(a) (b) (c)
1 1.1 Substances and articles which have a mass explosion hazard. A mass
explosion is one that affects the entire load virtually instantaneously.
2 1.2 Substances and articles which have a projection hazard but not a mass
explosion hazard. The explosion results in items burning and exploding
progressively a few at a time. Fragments, firebrands and unexploded
items may be projected in considerable numbers; some may explode on
impact.
3 1.3 Substances and articles which have a fire hazard and either a minor blast
hazard or a minor projection hazard or both, but not a mass explosion
hazard. Some items in this division burn with great violence. Some
may explode but do not usually form dangerous high velocity fragments,
although firebrands and burning containers may be projected.
4 1.4 Substances and articles which present no significant risk. Items which
are primarily a moderate fire risk. The effects are largely confined to the
package.
5 1.5 Very insensitive substances which have a mass explosion hazard. At
present there are no military explosives in this division.
6 1.6 Articles which contain only extremely insensitive detonating substances.
At present there are no military explosives in this division.

RESTRICTED
TABLE 1-2 EXPLOSIVE COMPATIBILITY GROUPS
Serial Group Description

(a) (b) (c)
1 A Primary explosive substance (eg lead azide).
2 B Article containing a primary explosive substance and not containing two or
more protective features.
3 C Propellant explosive substance or other deflagrating explosive substance or
article containing such substance.
4 D Secondary detonating explosive substance or black powder or article
containing secondary detonating explosive, in each case without means
of initiation and without a propelling charge, or article containing a primary
explosive substance and containing two or more effective protective
features.
5 E Article containing a secondary detonating explosive substance without
means of initiation, with a propelling charge (other than a charge containing
a flammable or hypergolic liquid).
6 F Article containing a secondary detonating explosive substance with its own
means of initiation, with a propelling charge (other than a charge containing
a flammable or hypergolic liquid) or without a propelling charge.
7 G Pyrotechnic substances or article containing a pyrotechnic substance,
or an article containing both an explosive substance and an illuminating,
incendiary, lachrymatory or smoke producing substance (other than a
water-activated article or one containing white phosphorus, phosphide or a
flammable liquid or gel).
8 H Article containing both an explosive substance and white phosphorus.
9 J Article containing both an explosive substance and a flammable liquid or
gel.
10 K Article containing both an explosive substance and a toxic chemical agent.
11 L Explosive substance or article containing an explosive substance and
presenting a special risk needing isolation of each type.
12 N Article containing only extremely insensitive detonating substances.
13 S Substance or article so packed or designed that any hazardous effects
arising from accidental functioning are confined within the package unless
the package has been degraded by fire, in which case all blast or projection
effects are limited to the extent that they do not significantly hinder or
prohibit fire fighting or other emergency response efforts in the immediate
vicinity of the package.

RESTRICTED
0136. Spare.
to
0140.

RESTRICTED
SECTION 1.4 EXPLOSIVE CHARGES

EXPLOSIVE EFFECTS
0141. The bulk of the energy released from a detonating explosive is in two forms,
shock wave and pressure.
0142. Shock Wave Effects. Part of the detonation process is a supersonic shock
wave which passes through the explosive. The shock wave passes into any
material in contact with the explosive and tends to travel at the same speed
as sound in the material. In air, the extreme pressure decreases rapidly
with distance travelled but, in dense liquid or solid materials, the intense
pressure is maintained for greater distances and the shock wave travels
much faster. The extremely high pressures of such shock waves, and their
rapid transition to stretching waves as they undergo internal reflection,
frequently cause shattering of the target. Important points related to such
shattering effects are:
a. Close Contact. The charge must be in close contact with, ie packed

against, the target to ensure a good transmission of the shock wave from
the explosive to the target. If non-plastic explosive is used, the air gap
should be packed with plastic explosive, or failing that with water, clay or
mud.
b. Initiation. The energy should be transmitted to the target as efficiently

and to the largest extent possible. Therefore it should be travelling at
right angles to the face of the target, as shown in Figure 1/1a, with the
point of initiation on the face of the charge opposite the target. For long
targets, a number of points of initiation may be required to ensure the
shock wave is normal to the target throughout its length. If the shock
wave is travelling parallel to the target, a relatively small proportion of the
available energy is transferred to it. As shown in Figure 1/1b, the shock
transfer is over a longer period with reduced effect.
Charge Charge
Target Target
a. Initiation at right angles b. Parallel initiation

- good transfer - reduced transfer
Figure 1/1. Transmission of shock wave to target.

RESTRICTED
c. Charge Shape. The shape of the charge and the point of initiation can
modify the geometry of the detonation wave and thus enhance the
effect it produces on the target. A semi-circular or triangular cross
section is more efficient than a rectangular shape. If the explosive is not
mouldable, then a width to height ratio of about two to one should be
arranged. Charges of a plastic or mouldable explosive applied directly
to the surface of a target are known as ‘plaster charges’. The principles
are described in Paragraph 0144.
d. Shearing Charges. If the target is too thick to be cut by the charge, its
surface will be marked by a shallow angular depression in its surface. If
the amount of explosive is sufficient, it frequently causes a convex ‘scab’
of metal to be spalled from the opposite side of the target as a result of
an internally reflected tension wave. This is the effect produced by a
squash-head shell (see Figure 1/2). If it is required to cut a plate or bar
of metal, this may frequently be achieved by the simultaneous firing of a
pair of staggered charges on opposing sides of the target, as shown in
Figure 1/3.
Crater
Scab
Figure 1/2. Scabbing and indentation of thick target.
Charge
Charge
Figure 1/3. Staggered charges on thick target.

RESTRICTED
0143. Pressure. Pressure is caused by the expanding gases that result from the
explosion. When only a pressure effect is required from the explosion, there
is no need for the charge to be in contact with the target and there is some
advantage in having an air space around the charge. In many demolition
tasks both a shattering and pressure effect are required, and hence it is
usual for the charge to be in contact with the target. The pressure effect is
non-directional and the gases expand in the direction of least resistance.
The application of pressure to the target may be prolonged by tamping the
explosive by surrounding it with several times its own thickness of filled
sandbags or similar material. The damaging effect on the target is greatly
enhanced by such means. The possible projection of fragments of the
tamping material should be remembered.
SHAPED CHARGES
0144. The detonation products of a mass of explosive flow away in a direction

approximately normal to the surface of the explosive. Thus, if the surface of
such a mass of explosive has an indentation, the stream of hot, extremely
high pressure gas is concentrated in front of the concavity. Thus a target
surface placed in front of the surface of the mass of explosive is subjected
to greatly enhanced pressure immediately opposite such a concavity. If the
explosive is sufficiently violent and the charge is large enough, the surface
of the target is depressed in this region. A hollowed out pattern on the
surface of the explosive can be reproduced as a corresponding hollowed
pattern on the target. This phenomenon is known as the ‘Munroe effect’.
The effect is especially noticeable when an elongated explosive charge is
provided with a conical cavity in one end and initiated at a point in line with
the apex of the cone. It is enhanced if there is a space corresponding to
two or three charge diameters between the base of the cone and thus the
surface of the target; this space is known as ‘stand-off’.
0145. Liners. The penetrating effect of a shaped charge can be enhanced several
fold by lining the cavity with a thin layer of high density, inert material. The
great majority of such charges have a cone angle between 450 and 900 mils
and are lined with a few millimetres of metal, most commonly copper, steel,
lead or aluminium. They produce their maximum effect at a rather greater
stand-off distance than charges with unlined cavities and penetrate steel
targets several times thicker than their own diameter, producing a round hole
in doing so. An alternative configuration consists of an elongated charge
with a wedge-shaped, metal-lined, groove running along one side. This is
known as a ‘linear cutting charge’ and is used for making long cuts rather
than deep holes. Copper and steel liners are not raised to their melting
points but nevertheless flow as a result of the very high pressures to which
they are subjected. The metal derived from the inner surfaces is projected
forwards at extremely high velocity (typically at several thousand metres a

RESTRICTED
second) and forms a narrow stream known as a ‘jet’. The rest of the metal
liner travels separately, and at much lower velocity, and is called a ‘slug’.
This is illustrated in Figure 1/4.
SHAPED CHARGE PLATE CHARGE MISNAY-SCHARDIN
Detonator shock waves
Percentage of liner
Slug 80% 95% 99%
Jet 20% 5% 1%
Figure 1/4. Various shaped charges and liners.
0146. Self-forging Fragment Charges. If shaped charges are provided with

liners of wider angle than those used to form deeply penetrating jets, or with
an acroid cross section, then almost the entire mass of the liner is formed
into a single projectile. Such charges are known as ‘self-forging charges’.
Because of their lower velocity, they are less penetrating than jet-forming
shaped charges; their greater mass and their integrity enables them to travel
much greater distances, however, and their main application is as off-route
mines with a useful range of several tens of metres. Such charges are
frequently named as ‘Misnay-Schardin charges’ after their inventors. Flat
plates may also be projected by explosive charges but they tend to break up
in the process, so need either to be very thick, or to be protected from the
shock wave effects by a rubber buffer.

RESTRICTED
UNDERWATER EXPLOSIONS
0147. Explosive Effects under Water. As in air, the detonation of an explosive

under water produces two main effects:
a. Shattering. The shattering, or shock wave, effect produced by the

detonation wave passing from the explosive into its surroundings.
As water is denser and less compressible than air, the shock wave is
sustained over greater distances than in air before its velocity declines to
sonic speed.
b. Pressure. Just over half of the energy of an underwater detonation is

projected in the shock wave and half of this is lost heating the water.
Rather less than half the total energy is spent expanding the bubble of
gaseous explosion products. The inertia of the surrounding water causes
it to continue to move away from the point of explosion until the internal
pressure of the bubble becomes lower than that of the surrounding
water. This allows the bubble to collapse and the energy of the imploding
water generates a second shock wave, albeit with much less energy than
that of the original shock wave. This process of bubble expansion and
implosion repeats several times, the magnitude falling off rapidly, and the
bubble migrating both towards any adjacent solid surface and upwards
as the remaining energy is dissipated. The second and subsequent
shock wave cause little additional damage to a target although they may
often be heard as a very rapid succession of two or three muffled bangs.
0148. Cavity Effects under Water. The relative incompressibility of water that
enhances the explosively generated pressure acting on a target surface also
provides enhanced support for the target if present on the opposite side.
Thus the damaging effect of the pressure is decreased. In addition, a larger
proportion of the shock energy passes harmlessly through the target and
into the surrounding water than is the case if the target is surrounded by air.
It follows that much greater damage can be done to an underwater target,
such as a steel plate or concrete block, if some of the water behind the
target can be replaced by air or some other gas. This can often be arranged
by generating a curtain of bubbles by pumping air through a perforated
hose below the attack zone or by exploding a small charge behind the target
a few milliseconds before the main charge is detonated. Damage is then
enhanced as a result of enhanced internally reflected shock waves and
displacement of the target which is made possible as it is displaced into the
compressible zone of gas or gas/water mixture by the main charge.

RESTRICTED
0149. Shaped Charges Underwater. If shaped charges are used underwater,

the water within the stand-off distance absorbs much of the effect of the
shaped charge, unless measures are taken to exclude the water. This is
usually achieved by the construction of the charge case with a sealed, air-
filled compartment in front of the cavity or, for use in shallow water, by filling
the stand-off space with closed cell plastic foam.
0150. Initiation of Underwater Charges. It is essential to consider the high

velocity of sonic waves in water (approximately 5000 m/s) compared with
the velocity in air and the enhanced damage caused at a given distance as
a result of the incompressibility of water. This means that, when an array
of shaped charges is being initiated in a single round, the detonation of
any of the individual charges before the rest have begun to function will
almost certainly collapse the stand-off space and result in a complete loss
of cutting effect. The use of delays between individual charges, though
practicable in air, is to be avoided when using shaped charges under water.
The time taken for propagation along the initiation train of detonating cord
and the possible variation in bursting time of nominally instantaneous
electric detonators must be taken into consideration. In general, the use of
a single detonator and lengths of detonating cord interconnecting individual
charges by the shortest possible route is most reliable method.
INITIATION OF EXPLOSIVE CHARGES
0151. Any explosive that is to be used in bulk should be as insensitive as possible.

The stimulus necessary to detonate such an explosive has to be generated
by stages. Just as the heat necessary to light a coal fire is built up from a
match to paper, to wood and finally to the coal, so the initiation of a bulk
explosive is started using a sensitive explosive that can be made to function
reliably from a small mechanical, electrical or thermal stimulus and is built up
through one or a number of intermediary stages to the bulk explosive. This
series of explosive substances is known as an ‘explosive train’. Explosive
trains may consist entirely of detonating substances or components, or a
sequence of pyrotechnic or igniferous elements leading to a detonating
element. Since nearly all modern military charges consist essentially of
charges that detonate (ie are ‘high explosive’), nearly all initiation trains
terminate with a detonating element. Only such deflagrating explosives as
gunpowder do not require an initiation train that itself detonates.

RESTRICTED
0152. Typical Explosive Trains. Typical explosive trains used in a demolition

charge are illustrated in Figure 1/5. These are purely illustrative and many
variations are possible, but the presence of a detonator (the start of the
disruptive element) in both trains, should be noted. The detonator may
initiate the main charge directly or a separate booster (or priming) charge
may be required, depending on the strength of the detonator and the
sensitivity of the main charge. The booster charge may be incorporated in
the detonator.
Match
Time Distance
Safety
fuze
Electric
Booster
detonator
Detonator charge
Main charge
Main charge
Figure 1/5. Typical explosive trains.
0153. Safety. The detonator is the critical element in the initiation of a detonation
and therefore is a vital element in the safety procedures. With military
demolition charges, it is usually not incorporated into the explosive train
until immediately before the charge is to be fired. Other safety elements
included in the explosive trains illustrated in Figure 1/5 are time (safety fuze)
and distance (electrical leads).
0154. Fuzes. In explosive munitions the initiating explosive train is incorporated

into the fuze. Safety is achieved by breaking the chain so it is not complete
until the fuze is fully armed. Typically, the detonator is moved out of line
with the main charge, various other discontinuities or barriers interrupt the
explosive or pyrotechnic train and, in addition, some mechanism prevents
the initiating influence (such as percussion or an electric charge) from
starting the initiation process. A defined sequence of actions is required to
remove these discontinuities and to arm the munition.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
CHAPTER 2 SERVICE EXPLOSIVES

SECTION 2.1 SUMMARY
0201. The chapter describes the range of service explosives available to combat
engineers. The explosives are summarised in Table 2-1 and a full description
is given at the paragraph indicated.
TABLE 2-1 SUMMARY OF SERVICE EXPLOSIVES
NEQ Full description

Serial Explosive Brief description
(kg) (i) (paragraph)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
Section 2.2 Bulk Explosives
1 Charge Demolition (CD) Block: Weight 0.5 kg, length 200 mm, width 0.5 0211
No 7 Plastic Explosive 60 mm, depth 30 mm. White, wrapped in
(PE7) Block: L20A1 clear plastic with markings at five 100 g and
(obsolescent) one 250 g increments for measuring and
Slab: L21A1 cutting.
(obsolescent)
Slab: Four 0.5 kg blocks in plastic container; 2.0
weight 2.0 kg, length 290 mm, width 214
mm, depth 36 mm.
M319 Box. Eighteen blocks in wooden box;

total NEQ 9 kg (obsolescent).
Tactical Pack. Five slabs (each containing 10

four 0.5 kg blocks) with NEQ 2.0 kg; total
NEQ 10 kg.
Logistic Box. Two 10 kg tactical packs; total 20

NEQ 20 kg.
2 Charge Demolition (CD) As Serial 1 less M319 boxes. 2.0 0211
No 8 Plastic Explosive
(PE8) Slab L22A1
3 Charge Demolition (CD) Plastic explosive in sheets with NEQ of 0.32 0.32 0218
L23A1 Sheet Explosive kg per sheet. Packaged five sheets to an
No 4 (SX4) intermediate container and four intermediate
containers to a box. Also available in a
single variant. Sheets 250 x 250 x 3.2 mm.
10 mm markings on film.
Section 2.3 Shaped Charges
4 Charge Demolition Conical shaped charge for stripping 12 0231

(CD) Conical L7A1 concrete from the webs of beams. Diameter
(obsolescent) 256 mm. Actual weight 17.6 kg.
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED 2-1

RESTRICTED
TABLE 2-1 SUMMARY OF SERVICE EXPLOSIVES (continued)
NEQ Full description

Serial Explosive Brief description
(kg) (i) (paragraph)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
5 Charge Demolition (CD) Linear shaped charge for cutting reinforcing 17.5 0234
Underbridge L11A1 bars. Length 282 mm. Actual weight
(obsolescent) 26.5 kg.
6 Charge Demolition Linear shaped charge for cutting reinforcing 72 0237

(CD) Overbridge L12A1 bars. Length 473 mm. Actual weight 100 kg.
(obsolescent)
7 Charge Demolition Flexible linear shaped charge available in 40-1150 0240
Flexible Linear Cutting different cross-sectional sizes. Replaces g/m
Charge (FLCC) (Sabre) CDLC (Serial 7).
8 Charge Demolition Linear shaped charge, 241 mm long and 5.3 0245
No 14 (CD 14) weighing 9.3 kg. Packed five to a box
(obsolescent) with two adjustable links, two clamps and
ten nails to form the Charge Demolition
Necklace L1A1.
Section 2.4 Explosive Kits
9 Kit Explosive Rapid 8.5 kg shaped charge, two 9.8 kg bags 6.5 0251
Cratering L25A2 and of granular explosive and initiation stores
L25A1 (obsolescent) packed in separate H83 container.
10 Bangalore Torpedo Device for breaching wire obstacles. Comes 2.03 0255
in 1067 mm lengths, each length weighing
4.13 kg and having an NEQ of 2.03 kg
(including initiator) of explosive. One
equipment breaches approximately 6.2 m
in coherent wire fences. Four Bangalore
Torpedoes per box.
Section 2.5 Improvised Charges
11 ANFO Mixing and use of ANFO. n/a 0271
12 Mines, shells and bombs Use of mines, shells and bombs as charges. n/a 0280
13 Improvised Bangalore Bangalore Torpedo made from tubes or n/a 0284
Torpedo angle iron pickets.
14 Improvised shaped Improvised conical and linear shaped n/a 0286
charges. charges.
Note: i. NEQ – net explosive quantity.
0202. Spare.
to
0210.
2-2 RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

RESTRICTED
SECTION 2.2 BULK EXPLOSIVE
CHARGE DEMOLITION PLASTIC EXPLOSIVE No 7 (PE7) (OBSOLESCENT)

AND CHARGE DEMOLITION PLASTIC EXPLOSIVE No 8 (PE8)
0211. General. PE7 (see Figure 2/1) and PE8 are plastic bonded high explosive
charges, white in colour and composed of 89% and 88% respectively
Research Department Explosive (RDX) with a Hexomax binder. PE is
suitable for operations in all climatic conditions, including under water. PE
is chemically marked by containing the chemical ‘taggent 2’ (3-Dimethyl-2,
3-Dinitrobutane (DMNB)) in the binder; the Marking Regulations specify
the marking chemical to be not less than 1.25% of the total volume. PE
is produced in 0.5 kg blocks in the dimensions given in Table 2-1. Each
0.5 kg block is sealed in clear plastic film printed with black lines denoting
half blocks (0.25 kg in weight and net explosive quantity (NEQ)) and five
segments of 0.1 kg in weight and NEQ. PE is issued in slabs containing four
blocks.
a. PE – 0.5 kg block in plastic film.
1 2 3
PE-7
PE-7
60 mm PE-7
PE-7
200 mm Legend:
PE-7
1 Plastic film
30 mm 2 Sticker
PE-7
3 PE designation
b. PE – marking on clear plastic film.
Note: Dimensions approximate (± 2 mm).
Figure 2/1. Charge Demolition Plastic Explosive.

RESTRICTED
0212. Particulars. The particulars of the 2.0 kg PE slab are listed in Table 2-2.
TABLE 2-2 PE PARTICULARS
Serial Property PE7 PE8

(a) (b) (c) (d)
1 Ammunition Descriptive Asset Code (ADAC) 52416-01 52418-01
(per slab)
2 NATO Stock Number (NSN) 1375-99-3974615 1375-99-4889723
(Unit of Issue (UOI) one slab)
3 UN Serial Number 0084
4 UN Proper Shipping Name (PSN) Charges, Bursting, Plastic Bonded
5 UN Hazard Classification Code 1.1D
6 Weight (per slab) 2.0 kg
7 Net Explosive Quantity (NEQ) per slab 2.0 kg
8 Dimensions (per slab) (L x W x D) including 290 x 214 x 36
lugs, etc
0213. M319 Packaging (Obsolescent). PE7 (but not PE8) may be issued in a
M319 wooden box. The box contains eighteen PE7 0.5 kg blocks, giving a
total weight and net explosive quantity of 9 kg per box. The 0.5 kg blocks
are packed in two layers of nine blocks, each layer surrounded on the outer
sides by cardboard packing, with a foam pad above, below and between
each layer (see Figure 2/2).
Figure 2/2. M319 box PE7 (showing top layer).

RESTRICTED
0214. Tactical Packaging. PE7 and PE8 are both available in two forms of tactical
packaging that are inter-operable with one another:
a. 2 kg Charge Holder (Inner Tactical Packaging). The 2 kg Charge Holder

(see Figure 2/3) is a slab-shaped box containing four CD PE 0.5 kg
blocks. The 2 kg Charge Holder houses a screw-in detonator holder
in each end with the option of creating holes in the lid of the charge
holder for top initiation. These boxes can be used in conjunction with
one another to create rapidly a small charge of appropriate NEQ.
Figure 2/3. 2 kg Charge Holder (inner tactical packaging).
b. 10 kg Charge Box (Outer Tactical Packaging). Five 2 kg Charge Holders

are contained in one 10 kg Charge Box (see Figure 2/4). Each 10 kg
box is configured to stack easily on top of each other. They have rubber
bungs on each end to enable easy connection of the detonator holders
through the outer packaging and allow swift preparation of large charges.
In addition to the rubber bungs on the ends of the box, each box has
areas in its side that can easily be removed to allow side-on initiation, so
the charges should always be able to be initiated perpendicular to the
target.
0215. Logistic Packaging. Two 10 kg Charge Boxes are packed in a wooden

20 kg box.

RESTRICTED
Figure 2/4. 10 kg Charge Box (outer tactical packaging).

(Lid omitted to show the five inner Charge Holders)
0216. Training Variants. The PE training variants use a material with excellent
rheological properties that has the same physical and environmental
performance as the live energetic material. NSNs for the equipment should
be on unit equipment tables. The training variants are listed in Table 2-3.
TABLE 2-3 TRAINING VARIANTS OF PE
Serial Name Designation UOT NSN

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
1 PE7 Inert Block (0.5 kg) (i) Charge Demolition (CD) 0.5 kg Block 1375-99-8846824
Block PE7 L24A1 Inert
2 PE7 Inert Slab (2.0 kg) (i) Charge Demolition (CD) 2.0 kg Slab 1375-99-5179030
Slab PE7 L25A1 Inert
Note: i. Suitable for PE8 training.
0217. Working with PE. When working with PE, the following should be noted:
a. Size. The Unit of Issue (UOI) for PE is a 2.0 kg slab and all accounting
processes are based around this unit, though there is provision for the
return of unused 0.5 kg blocks. On no account in training should a 0.5 kg
block be cut into smaller quantities or removed from its wrapping, unless
it is certain to be used.
b. Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH). Other than

those hazards normally associated with explosives, DMNB is subject to
warnings and controls to minimise the risk of exposure to both associated
and non-associated personnel; more information is in Joint Service
Publication (JSP) 482, MOD Explosives Regulations, Part 3, Chapter 17.

RESTRICTED
c. Toxic Hazard. PE is toxic, therefore several control measures should be

reinforced for those regularly using PE:
(1) Toxic Vapour/Gases. When in storage, toxic vapour can build up.
Charge containers should only be opened in well ventilated areas
in case of a build up of taggant vapour. If ingestion or inhalation
should occur, medical advice should be sought immediately. PE is
not suitable for use as an explosive in confined areas, eg tunnels,
that are to be re-occupied, because of the toxic fumes generated
on detonation.
(2) Gloves. PE contains nitramines and DMNB; because of the toxicity,

it is recommended that disposable protective gloves be worn to
avoid contact between the skin and explosive. If contact with
the eyes or mouth occurs, the affected areas should be washed
thoroughly with plenty of water.
d. Explosive Hazard. Control measures should be put in place to mitigate

the explosive hazard when in use:
(1) Wrapping Material. PE comes tightly wrapped in clear plastic film.

Once the PE is removed from its packaging, an explosive residue
remains on the film. The plastic film should be disposed of in
accordance with COSHH guidelines.
(2) Contamination. When PE is cut to a smaller size for charges, the

remainder should be repackaged in a sealed plastic bag to prevent
contamination and consequent sensitisation of the explosive.
(3) Cutting. PE should be cut, not sawn, with a sharp knife on a non-
metallic surface.
e. User-filled Charges. PE is suitable for use in service user-filled charge

containers (UFCC) provided:
(1) Location. The UFCC is filled and used at the task site only.
(2) Positive Filling. Once the UFCC is filled with PE, the PE is not to
be extracted for re-use, but used on site. Should it be necessary
to remove the PE, the UFCC should be disposed of in accordance
with COSHH guidelines.
(3) Cleanliness. The UFCC and PE must be inspected for cleanliness

prior to filling to prevent unnecessary sensitisation of the explosive.

RESTRICTED
(4) Initiation. The PE in UFCCs must only be initiated with approved

service initiators.
(5) Storage. UFCCs are not to be stored overnight whilst filled with
PE unless specifically approved by the Defence Ordnance Safety
Group (DOSG).
CHARGE DEMOLITION SHEET EXPLOSIVE No 4 (SX4)
0218. General. SX4 is a plastic bonded explosive known as ‘DPX9’. It is used for
special tasks and is of similar performance to PE but is in sheet form that
enables it to be used with more precision. The main form of SX4 and its
particulars are detailed in Table 2-4.
TABLE 2-4 SX4 PARTICULARS
Serial Property Value

(a) (b) (c)
1 ADAC 52803-01
2 NSN 1375-99-9831451
3 Weight (per sheet) 321 g
4 Net Explosive Quantity (per sheet) 321 g
5 UN Serial Number 0084
6 UN Proper Shipping Name (PSN) Explosives, Blasting, Type D
7 ESTC Classification Number T5226 (4 Intermediate packs in a plywood box)
8 UN Hazard Classification Code 1.1D
9 Store Nominal Dimensions 250 x 250 x 3.2 mm
(L x W x D)
0219. Packaging. SX4 is available in two sets of packaging:
a. Main Variant. Five SX4 sheets are packed in an Intermediate Pack (see
Figure 2/5). The Intermediate Pack is made from injection moulded plastic
with a hinged lid and fasteners to enable it to be resealed. It has a rubber
gasket seal to prevent ingress of water and dust. Four Intermediate
Packs are packaged in a plywood box. Each pack is separated from the
others by a 12 mm sheet of MDF and expanded foam polyethylene pads
for ease of removal and to add further separation between packs.

RESTRICTED
Figure 2/5. Charge Demolition Sheet Explosive No 4 Intermediate Pack.
b. Single Variant. SX4 is also available in a single variant with the same
properties. Details are shown in Table 2-5.
TABLE 2-5 SX4 SINGLE VARIANT PARTICULARS
Serial NSN Designation ADAC

(a) (b) (c) (d)
1 1375-99-983 1451 Charge Demolition Sheet Explosive SX4 L23A1 52803-1
0220. Properties and Uses. SX4 is used for tasks such as cutting metal where
only minimum shock waves or noise levels are acceptable; it is not used
for general combat engineering tasks. It has 10 mm markings on the film
in which it is packaged (see Figure 2/6) and can be cut accurately to the
required shape using a sharp knife on a non-metallic surface. It is best
used with special detonator holders and joining clips, though these are not
essential. Further details of its use are given in Chapter 6.

RESTRICTED
Figure 2/6. SX4 markings.
0221. Spare.
to
0230.

RESTRICTED
SECTION 2.3 SHAPED CHARGES
CHARGE DEMOLITION CONICAL 12 kg (OBSOLESCENT)
0231. General. A full description of the charge, which is one of the family of rapid
bridge demolitions (RBD), is given in Army Equipment Support Publication
(AESP) 1375-B-100-201 which is authoritative. The conical charge is one of
a family of three charges designed primarily for the destruction of reinforced
concrete bridges. The other charges are the underbridge and overbridge
charges (see Paragraphs 0234 and 0237). The main components are the
charge itself and the steel packaging box that provides the stand-off. The
charge is illustrated in Figure 2/7.
Figure 2/7. Charge Demolition Conical, 12 kg.
0232. Dimensions and Packaging.
Charge Packaging Box

Diameter 256 mm Length and width 360 mm
Height 362 mm 480 mm
Weight (filled) 17.6 kg 36 mm
Eighteen charges in their steel packaging boxes are packed on a NATO

pallet in two layers (weight 738 kg).
0233. Use. The charge is designed primarily to strip structural quality concrete
from the web of pre-stressed concrete beams by firing vertically downwards.
It strips 2 m in depth on a beam 0.6 m wide. The charge can also be fired
horizontally to attack concrete piers or abutments. A user card, which
is reproduced in Figure 2/8, is packed with each charge. A bolt gun is
essential for attaching the charge to the target when the charge is to be fired
horizontally.

RESTRICTED
Figure 2/8. User instruction card for Charge Demolition Conical, 12 kg.

RESTRICTED
Figure 2/8 (continued). User instruction card for Charge Demolition Conical, 12 kg.

RESTRICTED
CHARGE DEMOLITION UNDERBRIDGE 17.5 kg (OBSOLESCENT)
0234. General. A full description of the charge, which is one of the family of
rapid bridge demolitions (RBD), is given in AESP 1375-B-100-201 which is
authoritative. The underbridge charge is one of a family of three charges
designed primarily for the destruction of reinforced concrete bridges. The
other charges are the conical and overbridge charges (see Paragraphs
0231 and 0237). The main components are the charge itself and the steel
packaging box that provides the stand-off. The charge is illustrated in Figure
2/9.
Figure 2/9. Charge Demolition Underbridge, 17.5 kg.

Length 282 mm 380 mm
Width 240 mm 365 mm
Weight (filled) 26.5 kg 50 kg
Eighteen charges in their steel packaging boxes are packed on a NATO

pallet in two layers (weight 973 kg).
0236. Use. The charge is designed primarily to cut reinforcing bars in concrete
beams or slabs. It cuts two layers of 40 mm diameter reinforcing bars
covered by up to 200 mm of concrete. A user card, which is reproduced in
Figure 2/10, is packed with each charge. A bolt gun is essential for attaching
the charge to the target.

RESTRICTED
Figure 2/10. User instruction card for Charge Demolition Underbridge, 17.5 kg.

RESTRICTED
Figure 2/10 (continued). User instruction card for Charge Demolition Underbridge,
17.5 kg.

RESTRICTED
CHARGE DEMOLITION OVERBRIDGE 72 kg (OBSOLESCENT)
0237. General. A full description of the charge, which is one of the family of
rapid bridge demolitions (RBD), is given in AESP 1375-B-100-201 which
is authoritative. The overbridge charge is one of a family of three charges
designed primarily for the destruction of reinforced concrete bridges. The
other charges are the conical and underbridge charges (see Paragraphs
0231 and 0234). The main components are the charge itself and the steel
packaging box that provides the stand-off. Lifting bars and wheels are
provided to assist in positioning the charge. The charge is illustrated in
Figure 2/11.
Figure 2/11. Charge Demolition Overbridge, 72 kg.

Length 473 mm 604 mm
Width 380 mm 486 mm
Weight (filled) 100 kg 145 kg
Four charges in their steel packaging boxes are packed on a NATO pallet
(weight 617 kg).
0239. Use. The charge is designed primarily to cut reinforcing bars in concrete
beams. It cuts three layers of 40 mm diameter reinforcing bars covered
by up to 300 mm of concrete. Due to its weight, the charge can only be
positioned on the top (road surface) of the target. A user card, which is
reproduced in Figure 2/12, is packed with each charge.

RESTRICTED
Figure 2/12. User instruction card for Charge Demolition Overbridge, 72 kg.

RESTRICTED
Figure 2/12 (continued). User instruction card for Charge Demolition Overbridge,
72 kg.

RESTRICTED
CHARGE DEMOLITION FLEXIBLE LINEAR CUTTING
0240. General. The Flexible Linear Cutting Charge (FLCC) (brand name ‘SABREX’;
commonly called ‘Sabre’) is a robust, exceptionally flexible and explosive-
efficient family of linear shaped charge, designed to cut a wide range of
engineering and building materials on land and under water. FLCC is
illustrated in Figure 2/13. An inert version is available for training.
Figure 2/13. Flexible Linear Cutting Charge (FLCC).
0241. Dimensions and Packaging. FLCC is manufactured in various sizes

specified by weight of explosive per metre. Sizes are 40, 100, 350, 600 and
1150 g/m. FLCC is supplied in lengths of 1 m and 4 m. A 4 m length is
coiled around a central core in a flat box (see Figure 2/14) as an ‘Intermediate
Pack’ and a number of intermediate packs contained in a wooden box (see
Figure 2/15) as a ‘Logistic Pack’; Table 2-6 gives details.

RESTRICTED
Figure 2/14. FLCC (Sabre) Intermediate Packaging.
Figure 2/15. FLCC (Sabre) Logistic Packaging.

RESTRICTED
TABLE 2-6 FLCC (SABRE) PACKAGING
Serial Nature Length Number of 4 m lengths Number of Intermediate Packs

(g/m) (m) per Intermediate Pack per Logistic Pack
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
1 40 4 1 4
2 100 4 1 4
3 350 4 1 4
4 600 4 1 3
5 1150 4 1 2
0242. Accessories. The following accessories are available:
a. Detonator Holder. To fit detonators 6.1 to 7.5 mm.
b. Double-sided Adhesive Tape. Issued in 2 m rolls.
0243. Use. FLCC can be used for general combat engineering and specialist
tasks. It can be cut with a knife or a hack saw on a non-metallic surface
and can be shaped. It can be used against both metallic and non-metallic
targets. It can be used underwater to a depth of approximately 30 m, but
with some deterioration in performance. Further details of its use are in
Chapter 6.
0244. Safety. FLCC on detonation has no secondary missile hazard, however

some toxic fumes are produced and can be harmful if inhaled.
CHARGE DEMOLITION No 14 (CD 14) (OBSOLESCENT)
0245. General. The CD14 is a linear shaped charge and forms part of the Charge
Demolition Necklace (see Figure 2/16). It is mainly used for cutting steel
girders in bridge demolition.

RESTRICTED
Figure 2/16. Charge Demolition No 14 (Charge Demolition Necklace).
0246. Dimensions and Packaging. Each charge is 241 mm long, 133 mm

wide and 254 mm high. Its total weight is 9.3 kg, which includes 5.3 kg
of explosive. It is packed five to a box as illustrated in Figure 2/16 with
two adjustable links, two clamps and ten 150 mm nails to form the Charge
Demolition Necklace.
0247. Capability. When placed end-to-end over the whole breadth to be cut, the
following depths of cut can be expected:
a. With No Stand-off.
100 mm of laminated steel in compression.

130 mm of laminated steel in tension.
If two charges are placed exactly opposite each other, these figures may be
doubled.
b. With No Stand-off. 25 mm of steel, eg reinforcing bars, through

150 mm of concrete.
c. With 1 m Stand-off. 25 mm of steel plate.
An example is shown in Figure 2/17.

RESTRICTED
Figure 2/17. Effect of CD 14 necklace on mild steel girder with

flange 130 mm thick.
0248. Use.
a. Initiation. The charge is initiated by detonating cord passed through the

hole in the turret on the top of the charge. When packaged, the hole is
protected by a transit bolt secured with a wing nut.
b. Positioning. The charges can be joined at the bottom and top, either
close coupled or spaced using the adjustable link. They can be clamped
to the target using the clamps. Different methods of fixing the charges
are illustrated in Figure 2/18.

RESTRICTED
Figure 2/18. Different methods of positioning CD14s.
0249. Spare.
to
0250.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
SECTION 2.4 EXPLOSIVE KITS
KIT EXPLOSIVE RAPID CRATERING (RAPID CRATERING KIT OR RCK)

(OBSOLESCENT)
0251. General. The RCK is a self-contained kit for making a crater rapidly. A
shaped charge is used to produce a pilot hole. The main charge of granular
explosive is placed in the pilot hole and detonated to form the crater. It
enables two men to produce a single crater in about 15 minutes and a
section to produce a complex of four craters in 20 to 25 minutes.
0252. Components and Packaging. The kit (see Figure 2/19) consists of four
packages in a steel box 480 x 460 x 400 mm and weighing 48 kg. The four
packages, which when unpacked can easily be carried by two men, are:
a. One 8.5 kg shaped charge in a protective container.
b. Two polyester bags each containing 9.8 kg of granular explosive.
c. H83 box containing the initiating components:
One length of safety fuze sealed at each end with a match-head

assembly
Two match-head striking surfaces and three matches fuzee
Two detonators demolition in individual safety packs
Two lengths of detonating cord with booster caps at each end (Note:
The detonating cord is thinner than the standard detonating cord and therefore should
never be joined using detonating cord junction clips)
Three demolition couplers
One booster charge for use with the cratering charge
Two Fuzes Electrical No F123 (see Figure 2/20 for method of use)
One razor blade
One roll of tape
One instruction sheet.

RESTRICTED
Figure 2/19. Rapid Cratering Kit.
Fuze No. F123
Push fuze No. F123 into detonator until

Flash detonator back of fuze is flush with end of detonator
as shown. Use tape to secure.
Figure 2/20. Fuze Electrical No F123 - method of use.
0253. Use. (See Figure 2/21)
a. The shaped charge is set up using its container as the firing stand. It
must be stable and secure.
b. The shaped charge may be initiated using either safety fuze or electrical
initiation (see Chapter 4). If safety fuze is to be used, the length supplied
is cut in half; one half is used to initiate the shaped charge and the other
the cratering charge. Each half of the safety fuze burns for approximately
6 minutes. The rate of burning of the safety fuze does not require testing
as both ends are sealed in the factory.
c. The shaped charge produces a pilot hole. If this is deeper than 2 m, it

should be backfilled to that depth.

RESTRICTED
d. The explosive granules are poured from one bag into the pilot hole. The
priming charge is attached to the end of a length of capped detonating
cord (see Chapter 4) and lowered into the centre of the explosive
granules. The second bag of granules is poured in.
Note: In saturated ground, the borehole may be wider than normal. In this case, the explosive
granules should be placed down the hole in a bag with the priming charge in the centre. The
hole should be backfilled and tamped. The moisture does not affect the explosive.
e. An initiation set is attached to the detonating cord.
f. Multiple Firings. In multiple firings, the detonating cord leads to each

shaped charge should be approximately the same length (as supplied
in the kit) and be initiated from a single point. The leads should be
positioned so there is no danger of them pulling the charges over (see
Figure 2/22) and should be joined with a bound or taped junction.
0254. Performance.
a. Shaped Charge. In average soil, the shaped charge produces a pilot hole
200 to 300 mm in diameter and some 2 m deep. In sand, the pilot hole
may collapse. In rock, the pilot hole may be too small to be effective but
a larger conical charge such as the CD11 may produce better results.
b. Crater. Provided the pilot hole is satisfactory, the size of the crater should
conform to Table 5-17.

RESTRICTED
Match-head
Figure for
0.3 m diameter hole comparison
Safety fuze
2m
Shaped charge container
used as firing stand
a. b. Pilot hole produced by outer space.
Safety fuze Ground level

Detonator
Detonating cord
1.4 m 1.6 m
2.1 m
1.8 m
0.3 m
1.7 m
2.1 m
Explosive granules 6.5 m
in pilot hole
c. d. Typical crater in clay-rich loam.
Figure 2/21. RCK firing sequence.
Match head
Charge
Charge
Safety fuze
Detonator
Detonating cord
taped together
Note:
Detonating cord leads supplied with Charge
RCK have effective length of 6 m.
Figure 2/22. Layout of RCKs for multiple firing.

RESTRICTED
CHARGE DEMOLITION BANGALORE TORPEDO
0255. General. The Charge Demolition Bangalore Torpedo is a modular, multi-

purpose battlefield explosive engineering munition optimised for breaching
battlefield barrier obstacles and for demolition operations. It is not a shaped
charge, but uses blast and fire-formed fragments to damage its target.
0256. Particulars. The particulars of the Bangalore Torpedo are listed in Table
2-7.
TABLE 2-7 PARTICULARS OF BANGALORE TORPEDO
Serial Property Value

(a) (b) (c)
1 ADAC 53505-01
2 NSN (store 1375-99-4334953
3 Weight (per filled tube) 4.13 kg
4 Net Explosive Quantity (per tube) 2.029 kg
5 UN Serial Number (all) 0048
6 UN Proper Shipping Name (PSN) Charges Demolition
7 ESTC Classification Number P5214
8 UN Hazard Classification Code 1.1D (ACA Box Wood GDR 18172)
9 Tube Length 1067 mm (nominal)
10 Tube Length (with Noise Cap and DHA) 1131.2 mm (nominal)
11 Tube Diameter 50.8 mm
12 Ignition Method All approved in-service demolition initiators
0257. Variants. Table 2-8 lists the Bangalore Torpedo variants.
TABLE 2-8 BANGALORE TORPEDO VARIANTS
Serial NSN Nomenclature ADAC

(a) (b) (c) (d)
1 1375-99-4334953 Charge Demolition Bangalore Torpedo L26A1 53505-01
2 1375-99-8132175 Charge Demolition Drill Bangalore Torpedo L27A1
3 1375-99-5518314 Charge Demolition Instructional Bangalore Torpedo
L28A1

RESTRICTED
0258. Components and Packaging. The set consists of four sections, a bullet-
shaped nose and a screw-in initiator containing 0.105 kg of explosive (see
Figure 2/23a). Each section is 50.8 mm in diameter and 1067 mm long
and has a male and female end with a screw thread (see Figure 2/23b).
A screw-threaded initiator charge screws into the end to be initiated (see
Figure 2/23c); this is capable of receiving any in-service initiation method.
a. One section of Bangalore Torpedo, with nose cone and initiator fitted.
b. Bangalore Torpedo mating ends.
c. Detail showing screw-in Bangalore Torpedo initiator.
Figure 2/23. Bangalore Torpedo.

RESTRICTED
0259. Use.
a. The nose is fitted to the male end of a tube section.
b. The tube sections are connected together to achieve the required length.
The effective length of one set is 4.2 m. Multiple lengths of sections can
be connected together if required.
c. The tubes are pushed forward through the obstacle. For optimum effect
against wire obstacles, the Bangalore Torpedo should be 300 mm above
the ground.
d. Initiation. The screw-in initiator should then be fitted with the initiation
method connected. The initiator houses a universal split crew assembly
that can be removed to hold detonating cord, detonating cord boosters,
or all variants of detonators.
0260. Performance. Positioned correctly, the Bangalore Torpedo produces a gap

approximately 6.2 m wide in most wire obstacles.
0261. Safety.
a. The safety distances to be observed in training are given in Table 12-1.
b. When positioning the Bangalore Torpedo in a wire obstacle, care should

be taken to avoid detonating any mines laid in the vicinity.
0262. Spare.
to
0270.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
SECTION 2.5 IMPROVISED CHARGES

AMMONIUM NITRATE AND FUEL OIL (ANFO)
0271. General. ANFO is a powerful explosive made by mixing ammonium nitrate

and fuel oil (diesel), both of which are cheap and readily available. It is used
for quarrying and, in civilian practice, for other tasks. It can be used by
combat engineers for blasting tasks in the absence of conventional service
explosives but it is not recommended for demolitions in combat situations.
Three terms commonly used in connection with ANFO are:
a. Ammonium Nitrate (AN). Usually in a powder form that is unsuitable for

mixing with fuel oil.
b. Prilled Ammonium Nitrate (PAN). Prilled means formed in small balls and
it is this type of ammonium nitrate that is used to produce the explosive.
c. Prilled Ammonium Nitrate and Fuel Oil (ANFO). The explosive mixture.
0272. Properties. The characteristics of ANFO as an explosive are:
a. It is a high explosive with a power to weight ratio equivalent to other

service explosives.
b. It has a low velocity of detonation (between 2,500 and 3,200 m/s)

compared with PE (8,000 m/s).
c. On detonation, it is completely converted into gases.
d. A moisture content in excess of about 16% renders it inert. Therefore it

cannot be used in conditions where it is likely to absorb water. This is the
main objection to its use in combat situations.
e. It is relatively insensitive to shock but is flammable and may detonate if

ignited in large quantities or under confinement.
f. It is unaffected by temperature.
g. Before detonation there are no toxic fumes but toxic gases are produced
on detonation.

RESTRICTED
0273. Safety.
a. IF PAN COMES INTO CONTACT WITH EITHER COPPER OR TIN (OR

THEIR COMMON ALLOYS BRONZE AND BRASS), IT MAY REACT TO
FORM CUPRAMMINE NITRATE OR STANNOUS NITRATE. THESE ARE
DANGEROUS EXPLOSIVES THAT ARE SENSITIVE TO SHOCK AND
FRICTION. ANY SUCH METAL OBJECT THAT IS AFFECTED SHOULD
BE IMMEDIATELY WASHED IN WATER.
b. After ANFO has been mixed, it must be treated as a high explosive with
the same safety precautions as other explosives.
c. It is not to be used in confined spaces because of the toxic gases

produced on detonation.
d. Only prilled ammonium nitrate intended for explosives must be used in

preparing ANFO. Ammonium nitrate based fertilizers are not to be used
as their ingredients may become sensitive when mixed with fuel oil and
may explode during mixing.
e. Misfires. In the event of a misfire, the Demolitions Conducting Officer

(DCO) in charge must satisfy himself that all the high explosive (HE)
booster charge has exploded or been removed. The unused ANFO
should be washed out with copious amounts of water; small quantities
remaining soak harmlessly away into the soil.
f. General Handling.
(1) Ammonium Nitrate. Ammonium nitrate is unpleasant to handle as

it may cause irritation to cuts or to perspiring skin and contact with
the eyes should be avoided. Water should be on hand to rinse
out the eyes if they become contaminated. Gloves, long-sleeved
shirts with sweat towels around the neck and goggles should be
worn when mixing and loading machines.
(2) Diesel. If diesel comes into contact with the skin, it can cause
dermatitis. Protective clothing is to be worn at all times when
handling diesel.
0274. Mixing. Mixing is the most critical part of making ANFO. The prills must be
mixed until they are coated with a thin film of oil. An excess or deficiency of
oil decreases the efficiency of the explosive. The correct ratio of ingredients
is:

RESTRICTED
a. By Weight. 16 PAN to 1 diesel.

b. By Volume. Depending on the specific gravity (SG) of the PAN:
16 PAN to 1 diesel for 0.8 SG PAN
15 PAN to 1 diesel for 0.9 SG PAN
14 PAN to 1 diesel for 1.0 SG PAN.
0275. Methods and Equipment. There are two methods of mixing, mechanically
in an approved concrete mixer and manually with a wooden paddle in a
container such as half a 200-litre drum or a plastic rubbish bin. If a concrete
mixer is used, it should not be petrol driven and it must be earthed. The
following equipment is required:
Concrete mixer or mixing container and paddle

Measuring container for diesel (1 litre)
Measuring container for PAN (9-litre bucket)
Funnel
Rubber gloves
Knife for opening bags of PAN.
0276. Procedure. The procedure is:
a. Measure the required quantity of PAN into buckets and pour into the
mixing bowl.
b. Measure the correct quantity of diesel and pour it over the PAN wetting
as much of the surface as possible.
c. Mix using one of the methods in Paragraph 0275 until the PAN is coated
with diesel. A small quantity of diesel soluble die mixed with the diesel
assists in assessing when mixing is complete.
d. Allow to stand for 1 hour. Although not essential, this allows the diesel
to distribute itself evenly and so reduces the probability of local zones of
insensitive mixture. If stored in closed plastic bags, humid conditions do
not affect ANFO any more adversely than AN.
e. Where possible, ANFO is to be mixed on site.

RESTRICTED
0277. Use.
a. Because of its low velocity of detonation, ANFO is not suitable as a cutting

charge. It can be used as a borehole, mined, cratering and concussion
charge. Its use in quarrying is described in Military Engineering Volume
V Part 3.
b. Priming and Initiation. A booster charge of one block of PE (0.5 kg)

should be sufficient to initiate any quantity of ANFO. It should be placed
in the centre of the ANFO and be initiated by detonating cord.
c. Borehole Charges.
(1) Loading may be by hand or mechanical means, depending on the

size and number of the tasks.
(2) Wet boreholes should be flushed out with an airline before loading
which must be continuous. The area around the hole must be
clean to avoid stones or earth falling into the hole and causing
discontinuities in the charge.
(3) If the ground is wet, but the quantity of water is not excessive and
the time between loading and firing is not great, it may be possible
to enclose the charge in a waterproof skin.
(4) The charge required per metre of borehole is given in Table 2-9.
0278. Additional Guidelines. The following additional guidelines are to be strictly

observed when working with ANFO:
a. ANFO must be used or destroyed on the day of mixing and not stored
over long periods.
b. Special attention must be paid to the decontamination of mixing

implements particularly if mechanical mixers are used.
c. Officers-in-charge are to ensure every precautionary measure is taken to

prevent unnecessary contamination of the soil. Accidental spillage can
be washed away with copious amounts of water.

RESTRICTED
TABLE 2-9 KILOGRAMS OF ANFO REQUIRED PER METRE OF BOREHOLE
Diameter of Specific gravity of PAN

Serial
bore (mm) 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h)
1 25 0.39 0.44 0.49 0.54 0.59 0.64
2 30 0.57 0.63 0.70 0.77 0.84 0.91
3 35 0.77 0.86 0.96 1.06 1.15 1.25
4 40 1.00 1.13 1.26 1.39 1.51 1.64
5 45 1.27 1.43 1.59 1.75 1.91 2.07
6 50 1.57 1.76 1.96 2.16 2.35 2.55
7 60 2.26 2.55 2.83 3.11 3.40 3.68
8 70 3.08 3.46 3.85 4.24 4.62 5.01
9 80 4.02 4.53 5.03 5.53 6.04 6.54
10 90 5.09 5.72 6.36 7.00 7.73 8.27
11 100 6.28 7.06 7.85 8.64 9.42 10.21
12 110 7.60 8.55 9.50 10.45 11.40 12.35
13 120 9.05 10.18 11.31 12.44 13.57 14.70
14 130 10.62 11.94 13.27 14.60 15.92 17.25
15 140 12.32 13.85 15.39 16.93 18.47 20.01
16 150 14.14 15.90 17.67 19.44 21.20 22.97
0279. Transportation. The transportation of mixed explosives on public roads is

prohibited unless the relevant classification has been obtained. Relevant
classifications include the UN Hazard Code, ESTC classification and
approved method of packing. This is required to satisfy current legal
requirements for the transportation of explosives.
MINES, SHELLS AND BOMBS
0280. General. Mines, shells and bombs can be used as concussion or mined
charges but are normally unsuitable for cutting charges where close contact
with the target is necessary. They are not efficient charges because of
the low explosive to total weight ratio (only about 10% in small shells). In
general, the larger the munition, the better this ratio is.
0281. Initiation. Initiation of the munitions may not be easy. Every munition
should be initiated independently. The methods that should be considered
are:

RESTRICTED
a. Removing the fuze (normally by unscrewing) and filling the fuze well with
one block of PE.
b. Placing a cutting charge (minimum 1 kg PE) on the thinnest part of the

case next to the filling of the munition.
0282. References. Further information is in Military Engineering Volume II

Pamphlet 6. If in doubt, consult explosive ordnance disposal (EOD) trained
personnel.
0283. Safety.
a. A MINE, SHELL OR BOMB THAT HAS BEEN PROJECTED OR DROPPED,

IE A BLIND, SHOULD NEVER BE USED AS A DEMOLITION CHARGE AS
IT MAY BE IN AN UNSTABLE CONDITION.
b. THE FUZE OF A MUNITION SHOULD NEVER BE USED AS THE MEANS

OF INITIATION.
IMPROVISED BANGALORE TORPEDO
0284. General. A Bangalore Torpedo may be improvised using a hollow tube

(metal, wood, plastic, etc) between 40 and 70 mm internal diameter or two
angle iron pickets lashed together as illustrated in Figure 2/24b. The tubes
are filled with PE.
a. Embedding knotted detonating cord.
Figure 2/24. Improvised Bangalore Torpedo using angle iron pickets.

RESTRICTED
b. Binding the filled pickets together.
Figure 2/24 (continued). Improvised Bangalore Torpedo using angle iron pickets.
0285. Initiation. However the Torpedo is constructed, ensuring continuity of

initiation throughout the length of the charge is difficult. Detonating cord
knotted at least every 0.3 m should be threaded through the tube before
filling or embedded in the PE, as shown in Figure 2/24a before the pickets
are lashed together.
IMPROVISED SHAPED CHARGES
0286. Shaped charges can be improvised. They may give considerable savings
in explosive but the results obtained may not be consistent. The point of
initiation must be directly opposite the point of a conical charge or apex of a
linear charge. The effect can be enhanced significantly by lining the cavity
with a thin layer of high density, inert material as discussed in Paragraph
0145.
0287. Conical Charges. The cone-shaped bottom of a conical charge may be

obtained using a bottle or can (see Figure 2/25). The optimum depth of
charge and stand-off (lengths of legs) are:
a. Depth of charge = 2h, where h is the height of the cone.
b. Stand-off = 3⁄2d or 1.5d, where d is the diameter of the container.

RESTRICTED
0288. Preparation of a Bottle Conical Charge (see Figure 2/25).
a. Select a bottle with a cone shaped bottom.
b. Cut the top off the bottle so the base remaining is greater than 2h tall.
(Note: Glass bottles may be cut by winding a string soaked in petrol
around the cut line, lighting the string and after about 1 minute immersing
the bottle in cold water.)
c. Fix legs or a spacer (eg 150 mm nails or a can) of the correct length
securely to the bottle with insulating tape.
d. Add an improvised liner (eg a coin) as required.
e. Fill the bottle with PE to the required depth and position the knotted
detonating cord for initiation.
0289. Preparation of a Can Conical Charge.
a. Select a can of suitable diameter, and height just over twice the diameter.
b. Cut out the top and make a hole in the centre of the bottom.
c. Thread detonating cord through the hole and knot it inside the can.
d. Add an improvised liner (eg a coin) as required.
e. Pack the can with PE, leaving a cone-shaped indentation in the top. The
depth of the cone should be slightly greater than its diameter.
f. Turn the can upside down and fix legs or a spacer of the correct length.

RESTRICTED
Top of bottle
removed
d
Detonating cord
Knotted
detonating
cord h
2h
150 mm nails bound PE

to bottle with
insulating tape
3
/2 d
Figure 2/25. Improvised conical charge using bottle.
0290. Linear Charges. A suitable container may be prepared with an inverted ‘V’
in the base (see Figure 2/26). The optimum depths of charge and stand-off
are:
a. Depth of charge = 2h, where h is the height of the inverted V.
b. Stand-off = 3⁄2 w, where w is the width of the container.

RESTRICTED
0291. Preparation of a Metal Container Linear Shaped Charge.
a. Select a suitable metal container.
b. Form an inverted ‘V’ in the base.
c. Add improvised liner (eg part of a metal picket) as required.
d. Fill the container to a depth 2h around the inverted V and position the
knotted detonating cord for initiation.
e. Tamp the charge with damp earth.
Point of initiation
Figure 2/26. Improvised linear charge using metal container.

RESTRICTED
CHAPTER 3 EXPLOSIVE AND DEMOLITION

ACCESSORIES
SECTION 3.1 SUMMARY
0301. This chapter describes the main accessories used to create and position
demolition charges. The accessories are summarised in Table 3-1 and
described in the paragraph indicated.
TABLE 3-1 SUMMARY OF EXPLOSIVE AND DEMOLITION ACCESSORIES
Serial Item Brief description Full description

(paragraph)
(a) (b) (c) (d)
Section 3.2 Non-electrical Accessories
1 Detonator Demolition L1A2 Used with safety fuze to initiate a detonation. 0311
(flash detonator) Packed two to a polythene pack, twenty-five packs
to a H82 container.
2 Safety Fuze L1A2 Coloured black. Burns at 7.5 mm/s. Ten 0314
8 m coils packed in a H83 container.
3 Crimpers Used to connect safety fuze and fuze instantaneous 0320
to detonators and ISFEs.
4 Firing Device Kit Used to ignite safety fuze. One firing device and 0322
Demolition Grip L41A4 four flash initiators packed in a tin.
5 Flash Initiators L3A4 Seven flash initiators packed in a primary pack. 0322
6 Match Fuzee Matches fuzee used to ignite safety fuze. Fifteen 0325
matches in a waterproof container.
7 Detonating Cord L5A1 and Coloured grey. One 70 m reel with forty PVC 0328
Detonating Clips (PVC) detonating clips (twenty large and twenty small in
separate bags) and twenty sleeves sealing in a H83
container.
8 Detonating Cord Booster Issued as alternative to the double thumb knot. 0333
(DCB) L10A1 Used in conjunction with detonating cord.
Packaged two to a polythene pack.
9 Coupler Kit Demolition Provides water and vibration proof connections 0336
between detonators, safety fuze and detonating
cord. Packed five couplers and two connectors to
a tin; fifteen tins to a metal box.
10 Fuze Instantaneous Used for booby traps and battle noise simulation; 0339
coloured light brown; 70 m reels packed in a metal
box. Burns at 33 m/s.
11 Integrated Firing Device Demolition initiation system. Preassembled and 0342
(IFD) packed in a plastic case 170 x 100 x 35 mm. Five
IFDs per H83 container, with aide memoire and five
M9 Bunch Blocks.

RESTRICTED
TABLE 3-1 SUMMARY OF EXPLOSIVE AND DEMOLITION ACCESSORIES

(continued)
Serial Item Brief description Full description

(paragraph)
(a) (b) (c) (d)
Section 3.3 Electrical Accessories
12 Detonator Demolition Packed two to a polythene pack and twenty-five 0351
Electric L2A2 packs to a H83 container.
13 Igniter Safety Fuze Electric Used principally in battle noise simulation. Packed 0355
(ISFE) one hundred to a tin.
14 Firing Cables Cable Special Purpose Electrical. Drums of 250 m. 0360
Resistance 2.5 ohms per 100 m.
15 Exploder DC Electronic A fully charged battery produces one hundred 0363
Hand-held L3A2 (Shrike) firings through a circuit of maximum resistance of
400 ohms.
16 Demolition Remote Firing A battery powered system which facilitates the 0368
Device (DRFD) firing of a single detonator demolition between a
transmitter and receiver up to 2 km apart.
17 Firing by Battery Not to be used in peacetime, 0374
18 Battlefield Inoculation Used for battlefield noise simulation only. Capable 0377
Remote Initiation System of firing up to one hundred ring mains up to a range
(BIRIS) of 10 km with line of sight.
Section 3.4 Aids to the Emplacement of Charges
19 Demolition Ladder Four ladder sections each 1.5 m long. 0383
20 Service Bolt Gun L2A1 To provide fixing points for securing demolition 0384
charges to targets.
21 Industrial Safety Harness To provide a secure working system for men whilst 0387
Kit working at height on a demolition structure.
22 Belt Demolition Rubber To secure charges. 0389
23 Camouflet Equipment Used to assist in cratering. 0390
24 User-filled Charge Plastic or metal containers designed to be packed 0395 and 0396
Containers (UDCCs) with PE for easy attachment to targets. UDBs
including Universal come in 0.25 and 0.5 kg variants . Some UFCCs,
Demolition Blocks (UDBs) eg DIOPLEX, have removable inserts for shaped
charges.
0302. Spare.
to
0310.

RESTRICTED
SECTION 3.2 NON-ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

DETONATOR DEMOLITION (FLASH DETONATOR)
0311. General. The flash detonator is used to initiate a detonation using safety
fuze (see Paragraph 0314). It contains both a priming composition and
composite explosive (CE) pellets and has sufficient power to initiate
detonating cord and PE without the use of a priming charge.
0312. Description and Packaging. The detonator consists of an open-ended

metal cylinder approximately 60 mm long and 6.5 mm in diameter. The
explosive elements are contained in the bottom section and the end is
hollow for the insertion of safety fuze. In storage, a rubber plug is inserted
in the top. They are packed two to a polythene pack (see Figure 3/1a) and
twenty-five packs to a H82 container (see Figure 3/1b).
0313. Safety. The detonator is sensitive to shock, which may cause detonation.
It must always be handled with care (see Paragraph 0321) and MUST ONLY
BE HANDLED BY THE OPEN END.
a. Polythene pack.
b. H82 container.
Figure 3/1. Detonators Demolition.

RESTRICTED
SAFETY FUZE
0314. General. Safety fuze is used to impose a time delay between the ignition of
an explosive train and detonation. One end of the safety fuze is connected
to a detonator using either a coupler (see Paragraphs 0337 to 0339) or
crimpers (see Paragraph 0320). The other end of the fuze is ignited using
the Firing Device Kit Demolition Grip (see Paragraph 0322) or matches (see
Paragraphs 0325 and 0326). Safety fuze can be cut with a sharp knife on a
non-metallic surface.
0315. Description and Packaging. Safety fuze consists of a gunpowder core

wrapped in counter-spun yarns and encased in a black plastic sheath
approximately 6.4 mm in diameter. It burns at a rate of 7.5 mm/s. It is
supplied in 8 m coils in plastic covers (see Figure 3/2). Ten coils are packed
in a H83 container. The ends of the coils are protected by grey coloured
tape fitted at the factory.
0316. Damp and Damage.
a. Damp. Care must be taken to protect safety fuze from damp as it

absorbs water very easily and quickly becomes useless. Therefore the
ends of coils are always discarded as described in Paragraph 0317. The
required lengths should only be cut from the coil immediately before use.
Odd lengths should not be allowed to accumulate and if a length cut from
a coil is not used immediately, it should be destroyed by burning.
b. Damage. Safety fuze is vulnerable to damage by rough handling. The

gunpowder core only burns at the correct rate if it retains its original
consistency. In extreme cases of damage, burning may stop at a break
or, if the core has completely disintegrated, a flashover may occur,
shortening the burning time. If a package is found to be damaged, the
contents should be treated with particular suspicion and damaged items
should be destroyed by burning.
0317. Testing. To ensure safety fuze is in good condition, the following test and
procedure must be followed whenever safety fuze is used:
a. Cut the first 300 mm from the coil and destroy it by burning.
b. Cut off the next 600 mm, ignite one end and measure the time it takes to
burn through to the other end. If this is within the span 72 to 88 seconds,
the fuze remaining in the coil may be used. If the burning time is outside
these limits, the coil of fuze is rejected and an ammunition failure report
submitted. Every coil of fuze must be tested immediately before use.

RESTRICTED
c. The last 300 mm of all coils is discarded and destroyed by burning.
0318. Use.
a. In peacetime training, the minimum length of safety fuze used to initiate

a charge is 600 mm except when an Igniter Safety Fuze Electric (ISFE)
(see Paragraphs 0355 to 0359) is employed, when a minimum of 50 mm
of safety fuze may be used. On operations, the minimum length of safety
fuze is at the discretion of the operator, who needs to allow time to move
to a safe location.
Figure 3/2. Fuze Safety.
b. Separate lengths of safety fuze must not be used if it is required to

detonate two charges simultaneously as it is impossible to guarantee
identical lengths and burning times.
c. When laying out safety fuze, CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO ENSURE IT

CANNOT DOUBLE BACK ON ITSELF as burning may be transmitted
from one part to another where they touch.
d. Safety fuze is normally ignited with a Firing Device Kit Demolition Grip
(see Paragraph 0322), but if these are not available a match fuzee or
ordinary match (see Paragraphs 0325 and 0326) may be used.
e. For planning purposes, the effective working length of a coil of safety

fuze is 6.8 m.

RESTRICTED
0319. Calculating Length of Safety Fuse Required.
a. To calculate how much safety fuze is needed for a task, the safety fuze
must first be accurately tested to establish its rate of burning. Once this
is known, the figures are used in the following equation:
L/T x DT = LR
where L is the length

T is the time to burn length L
DT is the duration required for the task
LR is the length required for the task.
b. Example. It takes 80 seconds to burn 600 mm of safety fuse in the test,

so the burning rate is 7.5 mm per second. This is multiplied by the length
of time the safety fuze is required to burn. In this example, the time
required is 50 seconds, so the safety fuze should be cut to a length of
375 mm.
600 = 7.5
80

( )
600 mm x 50 secs = 375 mm.

80 secs
CRIMPERS
0320. Crimpers (see Figure 3/3) are used to secure a flash detonator to safety fuze
or fuze instantaneous and to secure safety fuze to an ISFE (see Paragraph
0358). There are recesses on the inside jaws of the crimpers that slide over
the top of the detonator and crimp it to the safety fuze. The rounded end
of one of the handles can be used to make a hole for a detonator in a small
charge of PE.

RESTRICTED
a. Crimpers and pouch.
b. Crimping a detonator.
Figure 3/3. Crimpers.
0321. Securing Safety Fuze to Flash Detonator.
a. Cut the end of the safety fuze square with a sharp knife on a non-metallic
surface.
b. Remove the black rubber transit plug.
c. Ensure the open end of the detonator is clear by looking inside. If dirt
or dust is present, invert the detonator and shake it out. If necessary,
tap the side of the detonator lightly with the thumb nail. NEVER TRY TO
REMOVE OBSTRUCTIONS IN THE TUBE OF THE DETONATOR WITH
A MATCH STICK, PIECE OF WIRE, ETC AS THIS COULD CAUSE THE
DETONATOR TO FUNCTION.
d. Insert the safety fuze firmly but gently into the open end of the detonator
until it goes no further. DO NOT USE A SCREWING ACTION.
e. Holding the detonator and safety fuze by the method illustrated in Figure
3/3, crimp the open end of the detonator to the safety fuze between 5
and 10 mm from the open end of the detonator. After a single crimp,
gently check the safety fuze is securely held in the detonator.
Note: Failure of a detonator to fire is usually due to poor contact between the end of the
safety fuze and the explosive filling. Therefore it is essential the tube of the detonator
is checked before the safety fuze is inserted and the safety fuze is fitted correctly.

RESTRICTED
FIRING DEVICE KIT DEMOLITION GRIP
0322. General. The demolition firing device is used to initiate safety fuze and
Fuze Instantaneous. The kit consists of the Demolition Grip Switch and the
Flash Initiator.
a. Demolition Grip Switch. The grip switch contains a spring-loaded plunger

that fires the cap of the flash initiator. The plunger is self-cocking and
the top can be rotated so it can be positioned in the safe or ready-to-fire
positions as shown in Figure 3/4. It is reusable.
Safe. Ready to fire.
a. Demolition grip switch. b. Flash initiator.
Figure 3/4. Firing device and flash initiator.
b. Flash Initiator. The flash initiator contains an explosive cap that ignites
the safety fuze. One end has a male thread for screwing on to the grip
switch; the other end, to which the safety fuze is connected, contains a
rubber grommet and collar held in place by a hollow threaded cylinder.
Note: Flash Initiators are also used to initiate Fuze Instantaneous or a detonator when used
with a Firing Device Demolition Combination which is described in Military Engineering
Volume II Pamphlet 5.

RESTRICTED
0323. Dimensions and Packaging. The firing device is approximately 120 mm

long and 25 mm in diameter. The flash initiator is approximately 40 mm long
and 25 mm in diameter.
a. The kit consisting of one firing device and four flash initiators is packed in
a tin as shown in Figure 3/5. Fifteen tins are packed in a metal box and
two boxes in a metal carrier.
b. Additional flash initiators are packed in similar tins to the kit: seven
initiators to a tin (see Figure 3/5); fifteen tins to a box and two boxes to a
carrier.
Figure 3/5. Tins containing Firing Device Demolition Grip and Flash Initiators.

RESTRICTED
0324. Use.
a. Connecting Safety Fuze. Cut the end of the safety fuze square. Thread
the threaded cylinder, plastic collar and rubber grommet over the safety
fuze as shown in Figure 3/6, with sufficient safety fuze protruding to fit
fully home into the recess in the flash initiator body. Screw the threaded
cylinder back into the body so the safety fuze is held securely.
b. Attaching Firing Device. Check the plunger of the grip switch is in the
safe position and screw the firing device on to the flash initiator.
c. Firing. Move the plunger to the ready to fire position. Holding the firing
device with the plunger in the palm of the hand and the fingers around
the grips, push the plunger smartly down to fire the grip switch. Look
away in case the firing device shatters.
d. Recovering Firing Device. If time allows, unscrew the grip switch from
the flash initiator for reuse.
Figure 3/6. Fitting safety fuze to a flash initiator.

RESTRICTED
MATCHES
0325. Match Fuzee. (See Figure 3/7). A match fuzee is a large match, that
smoulders rather than flares. It is made specifically for igniting safety fuze.
The head has a red tip and base. The matches are supplied in a plastic
waterproof container, fifteen matches to a container.
Figure 3/7. Match Fuzee.
0326. Ordinary Matches. Ordinary matches can be used to ignite safety fuze in
an emergency.
0327. Use.
a. The end of safety fuze to be ignited with a match must be scarfed.
b. Match Fuzee. When safety fuze is ignited with a match fuzee, the
smouldering match head is placed against the gunpowder core of the
fuze.
c. Ordinary Match. When safety fuze is ignited with an ordinary match, the
head of the match is placed against the gunpowder core of the fuze as
shown in Figure 3/8. The match box is then drawn across the match
head to ignite it.

RESTRICTED
a. Match fuzee
b. Fuze scarfed for lighting with match fuzee

or (in an emergency) an ordinary match
Figure 3/8. Igniting safety fuze with match.
CORD DETONATING
0328. General. Detonating cord consists of a train of powdered explosive

enclosed in a paper tape, wrapped in counter-spun yarns and encased
in a plastic sheath. It is used for transmitting a detonation wave from an
initiation device to a charge and between charges. It provides a way of
detonating a number of charges simultaneously. One end of the cord is
initiated by an initiation set (see Chapter 4) and the other end is coupled to
the charge or charges. Detonating cord must be treated with the same care
as bulk high explosive.
0329. Description and Packaging. Standard service detonating cord is 6.4 mm

in diameter and coloured grey. It is wound on a metal reel with 70 m per
reel. A reel plus forty PVC detonating clips (twenty large and twenty small)
and twenty sleeves sealing (see Figure 3/9) are packed in a H83 container.

RESTRICTED
Figure 3/9. Cord Detonating.
0330. Properties and Use.
a. Detonating cord is initiated by a detonator or small charge and detonates

at approximately 6000 m/s. It is not to be ignited by a match, Igniter
Safety Fuze Electric (ISFE) or firing device.
b. Detonating cord can be cut with a sharp knife on a non-metallic surface

and can be joined using PVC detonating clips, tape or knots as described
in Chapter 4. It should not be cut with scissors because of the friction
between the blades.
c. The covering of the cords is waterproof but damp may enter through the
end and render the explosive inert. Damp cannot penetrate more than
300 mm along the core as the moisture and the explosive core combine
to form a self-sealing cement. The following precautions must be taken
against damp:
(1) Whenever possible, fit rubber sealing sleeves to all ends. This is
mandatory for all reserved demolitions.
(2) When using detonating cord from a new or part-used reel; if sealing
sleeves are fitted, cut off and discard the first 100 mm of cord; if
sealing sleeves are not fitted, cut off and discard the first 300 mm
of cord.

RESTRICTED
(3) When fitting detonators and making detonating cord junctions (see
Chapter 4), 100 mm of spare end must be left if sealing sleeves are
fitted and 300 mm if they are not used.
d. All discarded pieces of detonating cord must be destroyed by placing

them against a charge.
0331. Commercial Detonating Cord. Commercial detonating cords may be

encountered. These should be treated with caution. The size and initiating
power should be checked before use.
0332. Clip Detonating Non-Magnetic. There are two sizes of PVC clip:
a. Small. (See Figure 3/10). The small detonating clip is used to hold
detonating cord firmly in place when making a single junction. A length
of detonating cord is looped over the detonating cord to be joined and
threaded back into the detonating clip. The clip is then slid up to the
adjoining detonating cord, which is secured in the jaws of the clip.
Figure 3/10. Clip Detonating Non-Magnetic, Small.

RESTRICTED
b. Large. (See Figure 3/11). The large detonating clip is used to hold
detonating cord firmly in place when making a single junction and to
connect a detonator to detonating cord. It includes a cleat to secure the
leads from an electric detonator. For a detonating cord junction, the clip
is used as described in Paragraph 0332a. For connecting a detonator
to detonating cord, it is used the opposite way round and the detonator
inserted between the loop as shown in Figure 3/11.
Figure 3/11. Clip Detonating Non-Magnetic, Large.
DETONATING CORD BOOSTER
0333. General. A Detonating Cord Booster (DCB) is an aluminium tube containing

1.5 g of PETN explosive fill. It augments the initiating effect of detonating
cord and is an alternative to inserting knotted detonating cord into PE. The
DCB can be inserted directly into PE and the other end has a clip to accept
a length of detonating cord. DCBs must be treated with the same care as
bulk high explosive.
0334. Description and Packaging. DCB is produced from a modified flash

detonator body and is manufactured from drawn aluminium tube. The tube
is 50 mm long and 6.5 mm in diameter, with a diameter of 12.5 mm at the
clip housing. The DCB consists of a body, main filling and clip housing. It
is closed at the base and open at the top to receive the clip housing, which
contains a stemming charge of 0.15 g of PETN; this is crimped into the
body. The DCB is dark grey in colour. There are two DCBs in a polythene
pack (see Figure 3/12).

RESTRICTED
Figure 3/12. Detonating Cord Booster.
0335. Properties and Uses.
a. The DCB is designed to fit easily to detonating cord and the PE charge.
b. The DCB may also be used with the Charge Demolition Sheet Explosive
(SX) and Flexible Linear Cutting Charge (FLCC). When used in this mode,
it is fitted using a Holder, Detonator (Top Hat) (see Figure 3/13).
c. The DCB can be inserted directly into small PE charges that are difficult
or impracticable to mould. DCBs have a similar Figure of Insensitivity
(FoI) to plastic explosive and are therefore no more dangerous to handle
than PE.
d. The DCB is initiated using a normal initiation train through the medium of
detonating cord placed into the clip housing.
e. When detonating cord is placed into the DCB, it is important to allow for
normal precautions against damp:
(1) Allow 300 mm spare end on the detonating cord if no rubber

sealing sleeves are used.
(2) Allow 100 mm spare end if rubber sealing sleeves are used.

RESTRICTED
Figure 3/13. DCB with holder and detonator.
COUPLER KIT DEMOLITION
0336. General. Demolition couplers provide a water and vibration proof

connection between safety fuze and a detonator, between two lengths of
detonating cord, between an electric detonator (see Section 3.3) and a
length of detonating cord, and between a flash detonator and detonating
cord. They can be used in pairs to provide a connection from safety fuze
via a detonator to detonating cord.
0337. Description and Packaging. Demolition couplers consist of a central

transparent plastic sleeve with a female thread at each end, two rubber
grommets and two further plastic sleeves threaded at each end that screw
into the centre section. Aluminium connectors with female threads are
supplied for joining two couplers. A connector is approximately 55 mm
in length and 22 mm in diameter. They are packed five couplers and two
connectors in a tin; fifteen tins to a metal box (see Figure 3/14).

RESTRICTED
Figure 3/14. Coupler Kit Demolition.
0338. Use. The uses of the demolition coupler are illustrated in Figure 3/15.
They are not needed when a waterproof or vibration proof connection is
unnecessary. The following points should be noted:
a. The ends of the detonating cord and safety fuze must be cut square and
particular care must be taken to ensure none of the filling falls out.
b. Care must be taken to ensure the explosive components butt close

together within the connection.
c. The black outer sleeves should be screwed firmly into the central
transparent sleeve so the rubber grommet grips the explosive component
firmly. ONLY THE UK SERVICE DETONATING CORD SHOULD BE USED
WITH DEMOLITION COUPLERS AS OTHER DETONATING CORDS
MAY BE MANUFACTURED TO DIFFERENT SPECIFICATIONS. UNDUE
FORCE MUST NOT BE USED.

RESTRICTED
Safety fuze
a. Connecting safety fuze to detonator.
Detonating cord
b. Connecting two lengths of detonating cord.
Detonating cord Electric detonator
c. Connecting electric detonator to detonating cord.
Detonating cord
d. Connecting detonating cord to flash detonator.
Detonating cord Safety fuze
Detonator
e. Connecting safety fuze, flash detonator and detonating cord.
Figure 3/15. Uses of demolition couplers.

RESTRICTED
FUZE INSTANTANEOUS
0339. General. Fuze Instantaneous is used in booby traps (see Military Engineering
Volume II Pamphlet 5) to transmit an igniferous explosive train at 33 m/s
(almost instantaneously) from the switch to the charge. It is also used in
battle noise simulation as described in Chapter 8.
0340. Description and Packaging. Fuze Instantaneous consists of twisted paper

coated in gunpowder enclosed in a light brown polythene cover. It has a
ridge along one side to help identify it at night. It is 6.4 mm in diameter. It
is supplied in reels of 70 m packed in a H83 container (see Figure 3/16).
0341. Use. Fuze Instantaneous is ignited either by a Flash Initiator or by an Igniter

Safety Fuze Electric (see Section 3.3). Care must be taken not to pull the
Fuze Instantaneous too taut as this breaks the paper core and causes
misfires. FUZE INSTANTANEOUS IS COLOURED LIGHT BROWN AND
HAS A RIDGE ALONG ITS LENGTH TO AVOID CONFUSION WITH EITHER
SAFETY FUZE OR DETONATING CORD.
Figure 3/16. Fuze Instantaneous.

RESTRICTED
30-m INTEGRATED FIRING DEVICE
0342. General. The 30-m Integrated Firing Device (30-m IFD) is a demolition
initiation system incorporating a shock tube to relay the firing signal from the
trigger to the detonator. The shock tube is narrow bore plastic tubing coated
with a very thin emulsion of high explosive that burns at a very rapid rate.
The shock tube is not consumed in the process in the manner of detonating
cord and there are no flame or physical shock hazards associated with
firing the device; it can be fired safely even if not all the shock tube has
been removed from the case. On firing, there is a small report from the
initiator cap and the shock tube flashes briefly. After firing, the IFD appears
undamaged, other than destruction of the detonator. It can only be used
once.
0343. Description and Packaging. The 30-m IFD is pre-assembled and packaged
in a plastic case approximately 170 mm long, 100 mm wide and 35 mm
deep; it is slightly curved on the long axis. The plastic case incorporates an
integral, ganged, twin flip-trigger retained by a single ‘twist and pull’ safety
pin (see Figure 3/17). The trigger is used to initiate an integral firing cap at
the captive end of a single core 30-m length of opaque, olive drab-coloured
shock tube; an instantaneous detonator is fitted at the free end. The shock
tube is packed so it pays out easily from the case without excessive tension
being applied. The 30-m IFD is packaged in a standard H83 container; each
H83 contains five IFD. The box also contains a user aide memoire and five
M9 Bunch Blocks. The M9 Bunch block is a plastic detonator holder that
can be used as a detonator clip to connect the shock tube detonator either
to a length of detonating cord or up to five individual lengths of shock tube
in a bundle, but not both; it is not essential but makes connection easier and
quicker. An inert training variant is available. In addition to the appropriate
markings on the packaging and the plastic boxes, the inert shock tube is
translucent and yellow in colour.

RESTRICTED
Figure 3/17. 30-m Integrated Firing Device.
0344. Pre-deployment Check. Ensure the IFD case is not damaged and the
safety pin is installed correctly.
0345. Use.
a. Remove the 30-m IFD from the plastic case, open the shock tube
container and remove the detonator, holding it by its base (see Figure
3/18).
Figure 3/18. Lid removed and detonator withdrawn.

RESTRICTED
b. Connect Detonator using M9 Bunch Block. When using the M9 Bunch

Block, the detonator is inserted into the device from the thinner end (see
Figure 3/19) and the rear lid closed over to secure it.
Figure 3/19. M9 Bunch Block with detonator inserted.
c. Fit Detonating Cord. Detonating cord (or shock tube) is placed in contact
with the detonator (see Figure 3/20) and the larger lid closed over. Secure
the shock tube with tape or a cable tie or by a clove hitch so any induced
tension cannot disconnect it or dislodge the charge.

RESTRICTED
a. Detonating cord looped.
b. Detonating cord run through.
Figure 3/20. M9 Bunch Block with detonating cord.
d. Retire to Firing Point. Move back to the firing point; the shock tube should
pay out without snagging and without excessive tension. Conduct final
pre-firing checks; obtain authority to fire if necessary.
e. Remove Safety Pin. Holding the safety pin toggle, twist and pull the
safety pin to remove it.
f. Fire. Rotate both the flip triggers together to the rearmost position
(see Figure 3/21) and release it under full compression to fire. Observe
the shock tube for the initiation flash; the main charge detonates
instantaneously on firing.

RESTRICTED
Figure 3/21. Flip trigger fully rotated; release to fire.
0346. Other Techniques.
a. Fitting Detonator. If a M9 Bunch Block is not available, the detonator

can be secured to the detonating cord cradle by a clip or tape or other
means.
b. Preventing Disconnection of Detonator and Disturbance of Charge.

Before attaching the detonator, the shock tube may be looped around
a solid object (eg the main charge itself) using a half-hitch or clove
hitch to prevent separation of the detonator and detonating cord during
deployment. This is particularly important if the detonator is taped to the
detonating cord. Unlike detonating cord, the shock tube can function
around knots and tight bends.
c. Dual Circuit. For critical tasks, two IFDs may be attached to the main
charge to provide a dual firing circuit; each should have a separate
connection to the main charge. If the first IFD fails, the second is fired.
d. Extending Range. If the charge has to be fired from more than 30 m, the
shock tube can be initiated by a detonator. Connect the detonator of a
second 30-m IFD to the shock tube of the first IFD as close as possible
to the captive end (see Figure 3/22) and deploy and fire the second IFD.

RESTRICTED
Figure 3/22. Use of second 30-m IFD (left) to initiate shock tube of
first 30-m IFD (right).
0347. Misfire Drill.
a. If the shock tube does not fire (no audible report from the initiator cap; no
flash observed):
(1) Operate the triggers again at least twice, ensuring they are pulled
back fully before release.
(2) If the shock tube still does not fire: either fire the second IFD if set
up for dual circuit, or connect a new 30-m IFD detonator to the
deployed shock tube. Withdraw to the uncovered detonator safe
distance and fire the second IFD.
b. If the shock tube has functioned (audible report from initiator cap and
flash observed) but no detonation has resulted:
(1) Fire the alternate 30-m IFD, if prepared.
(2) Follow theatre SOPs for non-electric initiation misfires.
0348. Spare.
to
0350.

RESTRICTED
SECTION 3.3 ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

DETONATOR DEMOLITION ELECTRIC
0351. General. Electric detonators are used to initiate a detonation electrically.

The electric detonator has a similar explosive performance to the flash
detonator.
0352. Description and Packaging. The electric detonator consists of an

aluminium tube 63 mm long and 6 mm in diameter with two twisted electrical
leads protruding from the top. It contains an electrical bridgewire that heats
up and ignites the explosive train when an electric current is passed through
it. Electric detonators are packed two to a polythene primary pack and
twenty-five packs to a H83 container. (See Figure 3/23).
Figure 3/23. Detonator Demolition Electric.
0353. Resistance and Firing Current. The electrical resistance of the detonators
varies between 0.9 and 1.6 ohms when cold. A current of 0.6 amps is
required to fire a single electric detonator, but when a number are connected
in series a current of 1.5 amps should be used. If the minimum current is
used and the resistance of the detonators varies slightly, one detonator may
fire and break the electric circuit before the others have heated sufficiently
to ignite the explosive train. A greater current ensures all detonators heat
up and fire almost instantaneously.

RESTRICTED
0354. Safety. Electric detonators are sensitive to shock and must be handled with
care. There is a danger an electric detonator may fire accidentally due to
radio frequency (RF) or electrostatic hazards, as described in Chapter 12. It
is essential the procedures for their use, and especially the safety measures
described in Chapter 12, are enforced.
IGNITER SAFETY FUZE ELECTRIC
0355. General. Igniters Safety Fuze Electric (ISFE) are used principally in battle
noise simulation to ignite safety fuze or Fuze Instantaneous. Although the
safety fuze is ignited electrically by ISFE, the actual charge is defined as
being initiated non-electrically for the purpose of the safety rules contained
in Chapter 12.
0356. Description and Packaging. (See Figure 3/24). An ISFE consists of a

copper tube 35 mm long and 6.5 mm in diameter with two twisted electrical
leads 365 mm long at one end. The other end of the tube is open to receive
the fuze. They are packed in tins of one hundred.
Figure 3/24. Igniter Safety Fuze Electric.
0357. Resistance and Firing Current. The electrical resistance of ISFEs varies
between 0.9 and 1.6 ohms when cold. A current of 0.6 amps is required to
fire a single ISFE, but when a number are connected in series a current of
1.5 amps should be used. If the minimum current is used and the resistance
of the ISFEs varies slightly, one ISFE may ignite and break the electric circuit
before the others have heated sufficiently to ignite the fuze. A greater
current ensures that all ISFEs heat up and fire instantaneously.

RESTRICTED
0358. Use. The end of the fuze is cut square and gently pushed into the tube of
the ISFE up to the copper lip. The tube is crimped twice, firstly in the same
way as a flash detonator (see Paragraph 0321), then, after rotating the ISFE
through 90º, it is crimped again in the same place to secure the fuze. At no
stage should the black plastic sleeve be removed from the ISFE.
0359. Safety.
a. There is a danger an ISFE may fire accidentally due to radio frequency

(RF) or electrostatic hazards, as described in Chapter 12. To reduce
the RF hazard, the leads must be twisted throughout their length. It is
essential the procedures for their use, and especially the safety measures
described in Chapter 12, are enforced.
b. When being connected into an electric circuit, AN ISFE IS TO BE

HANDLED ONLY BY THE LEADS AND BE POINTED DOWN AND AWAY
FROM THE BODY.
c. An ISFE must be treated an a non-electric means of initiation in the event

of a misfire (see Paragraph 1244).
FIRING CABLES
0360. Although other cables can be used in an emergency, Cable Special Purpose
Electrical must normally be used for the electrical initiation of explosive
charges.
0361. Cable Special Purpose Electrical.
a. General. The cable consists of two cables, one coloured black and the
other brown, insulated with PVC. The cables are twisted together with
sixty-two twists per metre. The electrical resistance is 2.5 ohms per
100 m. It is supplied on reels of 250 m (see Figure 3/25).
b. Use. A minimum of 50 m of cable should be used. In good condition,

the cable withstands immersion in water for long periods but, because of
the high voltages involved, there is always a risk of insulation failure, and
therefore, if possible, water should be avoided.

RESTRICTED
Figure 3/25. Cable Special Purpose Electrical.
0362. Other Cables. Most other electric cables likely to be available have a
much higher electrical resistance than Cable Special Purpose Electrical.
For example, Cable Electric D10 Mk2 has a resistance of 12.0 ohms per
100 m of double cable. However the resistance can be reduced by doubling
up the cables. The ends of a length of twisted cable are joined together,
producing in effect a single wire. Two such wires are then twisted together
to produce a firing cable of four wires. This reduces the effective resistance
by approximately 50%. When non-standard cables are used, resistance
measurements and calculations must be undertaken with care. All cables
must be twisted together with a minimum of forty-two twists per metre.
EXPLODER DC ELECTRONIC HAND-HELD (SHRIKE)
0363. Full details of the Exploder DC Electronic Hand-held (Shrike) are in Army
Equipment Support Publication (AESP) 1385-F-100-201. Its main features
are included in this section.
0364. General. The Shrike (see Figure 3/26) is the exploder normally used with
electric firing circuits. It consists of:
a. The exploder, measuring 140 x 90 x 51 mm and weighing 1.25 kg.
b. A rechargeable nickel cadmium battery in the base of the exploder.
c. The battery recharger.
d. Two fault locating tools.
e. A canvas case.

RESTRICTED
a. Exploder. b. Battery.
c. Battery rechargers.
d. Fault locating tools. e. Carrying case.
Figure 3/26. Exploder DC Electronic Hand-held (Shrike).

RESTRICTED
0365. Electrical Details.
a. The Shrike exploder produces 400 volts and fires through a total circuit
resistance of 400 ohms; it is capable of firing multiple detonator circuits
over a distance of 7 km.
b. A fully charged battery fires at least a hundred times through 400 ohms
resistance before requiring recharging.
c. The Shrike exploder has outputs to four separate firing circuits, with
spring terminals for easy connection. Any circuit may be selected for
firing and rapid sequential firing is possible.
0366. Use.
a. Connecting the Exploder. Strip about 10 mm of insulation from the ends

of the pair of wires to be connected to the exploder. Fit the wires to a pair
of like numbered terminals on the exploder, eg one wire to Red terminal
No 3 and the other to Black terminal No 3.
b. Testing. Select the circuit button appropriate to the number of the circuit
to be tested, ie Button No 2 to test Circuit No 2, and press. The green
TEST lamp lights up if the circuit is correct for firing (there is continuity
in the circuit and its total resistance is less than 400 ohms). If the TEST
lamp does not light, check the circuit for breaks and poor connections.
c. Firings.
(1) Press the PRIME button and keep pressed until the red READY
lamp begins to flash, then release the button. This should take less
than 2 seconds. The exploder is active and ready for firing while
the red light is flashing.
(2) Select the button appropriate to the circuit to be fired and press
that button and the fire button together.
(3) To fire another circuit repeat steps (1) and (2).
Note: The exploder remains safe until the selected circuit button and the FIRE button are
depressed at the same time. Therefore the FIRE button should only be pressed when it is intended
to fire the circuit. On the rare occasion when, after priming the exploder, it is decided not to fire
the circuit, carefully disconnect all firing cables and twist together the ends of each circuit.
0367. Battery Recharging. Remove the battery from the base of the Shrike and
plug it into an in service 240 volt battery recharger.

RESTRICTED
DEMOLITION REMOTE FIRING DEVICE
0368. A full description of the Demolition Remote Firing Device (DRFD) is in AESP
1385-B-103-201, which is authoritative. The DRFD enables demolition
charges to be initiated via radio signals over line of sight ranges up to 2
km. The equipment consists of transmitters, receivers and code plugs (see
Figure 3/27).
b. DRFD Code Plug.
a. DRFD Transmitter. c. DRFD Receiver.
Figure 3/27. DRFD equipment.
0369. Forms. The equipment is supplied in two forms:
a. Operational versions - coloured green.
b. Training versions - coloured blue (training code plugs have a blue band
around them).
The functions of the operational and training versions are identical.
0370. Security. The overall security classification of the system is RESTRICTED

and that of individual items, which must be handled and stored appropriately,
is as follows:
a. Operational code plugs - RESTRICTED.
b. Training code plugs - RESTRICTED.

RESTRICTED
c. Transmitters - RESTRICTED.
d. Receivers - RESTRICTED.
a. Dimensions. Except for the weight, the dimensions of the transmitter

and receiver are identical:
Height: 238 mm (excluding antenna and battery)

273 mm (including battery)
Width: 98.6 mm
Depth: 48.8 mm
Weight: 1.3 kg (transmitter excluding battery)
1.4 kg (receiver excluding battery).
Note: The transmitter and receiver are powered by Clansman lithium-thionyl chloride
batteries.
b. Packaging. The transmitters and receivers are packed in ammunition

containers. A container holds one transmitter and accessories or two
receivers and accessories. A user hand card is packed with each
transmitter and receiver.
0372. Characteristics and Use.
a. Code Plugs. The code plugs are provided in pairs. The two plugs are
identical and contain a unique set of radio frequency and firing data.
Each pair of code plugs has a different frequency. The system only
operates when the transmitter and receiver radio frequency and firing
code data are identical. With a receiver, the code plug is removed after
the firing data has been down-loaded. With a transmitter, the code plug
must be fitted for it to operate.
b. Receivers. Each receiver is designed to initiate a single firing circuit.

There must be no more than 10 m of demolition cable between the
receiver and the detonator. Mounting plates are provided to assist in
fitting the receiver to the target. The receiver must be located so the
antenna is vertical and clear of surrounding structures (an extension
cable is provided so the antenna can be remoted). There is an arming
delay of 5 minutes between setting the receiver switch to ARM and the
receiver being able to receive a signal and fire the circuit.
c. Transmitters. A transmitter can control up to eight receivers. Both fire

buttons on the transmitter must be pressed simultaneously to transmit a

RESTRICTED
fire signal. The transmitter can be used to fire differently encoded sets
of receivers by switching off the transmitter after firing one set, changing
the code plug and then switching back on to fire the second set. Two
sets of receivers can be fired within a minute.
Note: The training use of transmitters in classrooms containing unscreened computer

equipment may cause the loss of data.
d. Testing. Receivers and transmitters have facilities for testing that individual
components and the system are functioning correctly. Continuity and
discontinuity checks can be carried out on the firing circuit using the
receiver.
0373. Outline Procedure.
a. At the Target. On each receiver being used, in turn:
(1) Fit the code plug to the receiver.
(2) Remove the code plug.
(3) Check code has been accepted.
(4) Fit the antenna.
(5) Carry out receiver tests.
(6) Locate but do not secure the receiver in position.

Note: All receivers on a target must be tested before either any receiver is switched to ARM
or the transmitter is tested.
b. At the Firing Point.
(1) Fit the code plug to the transmitter.
(2) Fit the antenna.
(3) Carry out transmitter tests.
c. Transmitted and Received Signal Checks. With the receivers in location

and the transmitter at the firing point, carry out the transmitted and
received signal checks. If the tests are successful, secure the receivers
in position.

RESTRICTED
d. Safety. Remove the code plug from the transmitter until it is required to
fire the charge.
e. Discontinuity and Continuity Tests. Carry out firing circuit discontinuity

and continuity tests with the detonator placed under a sandbag.
f. To Fire the Charge.
(1) With the detonator placed under a sandbag, move the receiver
mode switch to ARM.
(2) Insert the detonator on to the ring main or detonating cord lead.
(3) Evacuate the target area.
(4) Fit the code plug to the transmitter, set the transmitter mode switch
to ARM and press both fire buttons simultaneously.
FIRING BY BATTERY
0374. Electric detonators and ISFE can be initiated using a battery, however:
a. This method is NOT TO BE USED IN PEACETIME.
b. In war, it should only be used when an exploder is not available.
0375. Dry Batteries. Dry batteries have an appreciable internal resistance that
cannot be determined in the circumstances under which they are likely to
be used. Therefore, if this type of battery is used, it must be new or unused
and in good condition, with no cracks in the bitumen seal or case. Not
more than one detonator should be connected into the circuit. With these
conditions, the following battery voltages are required to fire through the
lengths of Cable Special Purpose Electrical indicated:
a. A 1.5 volt battery may fire through 25 m.
b. A 3.0 volt battery may fire through 100 m.
c. A 4.5 volt battery may fire through 200 m.

RESTRICTED
0376. Lead/Acid (Vehicle) Batteries. Lead/acid batteries have negligible internal

resistance and so the details of the circuit can be calculated as shown. If
this type of battery is used, it is essential the battery is fully charged or the
engine of the vehicle is running and there must be good electrical contacts
throughout the circuit.
a. Determine the resistance of the circuit based on 1.6 ohms per detonator
and 2.5 ohms per 100 m of Cable Special Purpose Electrical.
b. Multiply the total resistance by the current required (1.5 amps from
Paragraph 0357) to determine the battery voltage required.
c. Example. If there are two Detonators Demolition Electric in a circuit of

130 m of Cable Special Purpose Electrical, determine the voltage of the
battery required.
Total resistance of circuit

= (2 x 1.6) + (130/100 x 2.5) = 6.45 ohms
Minimum voltage required = 6.45 x 1.5 = 9.7 volts
Therefore a 12 volt battery should be used.
BATTLEFIELD INOCULATION REMOTE INITIATION SYSTEM
0377. The Battlefield Inoculation Remote Initiation System (BIRIS) is designed to

command detonate pyrotechnics and explosives to provide battle noise
simulation during battle inoculation training. It is essentially a system for
use in training, rather than on operations, and is available in limited numbers
in collective training organisations (eg the Land Warfare Centre and BATU
Suffield). The system comprises a transmitter and up to ten receivers,
linked by UHF radio. Each receiver can initiate up to ten circuits that can
be fired individually. Its typical operating range varies from 2 km to over 10
km, depending on the environment and line of sight. Further information is
in Annex A and full details in Army Equipment Support Publication (AESP)
1375-G-111-201.
0378. Spare.
to
0380.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
SECTION 3.4 AIDS TO THE EMPLACEMENT OF

CHARGES
INTRODUCTION
0381. Most demolition charges must be securely held against the target if they
are to be effective. This is often hard to achieve, particularly as access to
the vulnerable points of many targets is difficult. Therefore the equipment
described in this section is provided specially to assist in reaching charge
locations and in attaching charges.
0382. Common Items. In addition to the special items described, many common
tools and materials and field engineering techniques are required. The more
commonly used are:
Timber, nails and wire for attaching charges

Plastic ties for attaching charges
Earth augers and digging tools for placing mined and cratering charges
Crow bars and drilling equipment for placing borehole charges
Sandbags for tamping.
DEMOLITION LADDER
0383. The demolition ladder (see Figure 3/28) is assembled from a number of light
alloy sections that are pinned together. The main components are:
a. Four ladder sections each with an effective length of 1.5 m, giving a

maximum effective length of 6 m.
b. A top assembly that incorporates a hooked section for securing the

ladder over the parapet, etc of a bridge and a pulley to assist in handling
charges (see Figure 3/29).
c. A pair of non-slip rubber feet.

RESTRICTED
Figure 3/28. Demolition ladder.
Figure 3/29. Top assembly of demolition ladder in use.
SERVICE BOLT GUN AND ACCESSORIES
0384. Bolt Gun. The bolt gun is used primarily to drive special nails or threaded
studs into steel girders or concrete bridges to provide fixing points for
securing demolition charges to targets. The bolt gun is compatible with a
wide range of fixings available for construction and special applications.

RESTRICTED
a. The bolt gun is a modified commercial Hilti DXA41 tool. It works on an

indirect action principle whereby the cartridge drives a piston which in
turn drives the fixing (nail or stud) into the target.
b. The bolt gun uses separate ammunition and fixings. The bolt gun can
be used with a magazine that holds a strip of ten nails, or in single-shot
mode for both nails and threaded studs. Ammunition comes in standard
strips of ten rounds for all applications. Driving power can be adjusted
by varying a power setting on the gun.
c. The complete kit includes the bolt gun, magazine barrel, single barrel,
splinter guards, butt, sling and a pair of safety goggles (see Figures 3/30
and 3/31).
Figure 3/30. Bolt Gun and Tool Box.

RESTRICTED
0385. Fixing Kits. The ammunition for the bolt guns is provided in kit form, packed
into five separate H83 ammunition containers:
a. Fixing Kit, Steel, Studs (ADAC No 57006). The kit comprises:
Description Quantity Remarks

6.8/11M Red Cartridges: 200 Strips of 10
M6 Threaded Stud: 200
(12 mm stud x 20 mm thread length)
M6 Wingnuts (BZP): 200
M6 Spring Washers (BZP): 200
LB17 Banding (330 mm long): 50.
b. Fixing Kit, Steel, Nails (ADAC No 57007). The kit comprises:

16 mm Nail: 200 Strips of 10
LB 12 Banding (330 mm long): 50.
c. Fixing Kit, Concrete, Studs (ADAC No 57008). The kit comprises:

M6 Threaded Stud: 200
(27 mm stud x 20 mm thread length)
M6 Wingnuts (BZP): 200
M6 Spring Washers (BZP): 200
LB17 Banding (330 mm long): 50.
d. Fixing Kit, Concrete, Nails (ADAC No 57009). The kit comprises:

LB 12 Banding (330 mm long): 50.
e. Fixing Kit, Hard Concrete, Nails (ADAC No 57011). The kit comprises:

Drill bit 18 mm: 1.

RESTRICTED
f. Fixing Kit, Supplementary. The kit provides the supplementary items for
fixing slab explosives. It is used in conjunction with the stud fixing kits
for concrete and steel. The kit consists of three ammunition containers
marked C, D and E. Their contents are as follows:
(1) C. Sixty demolition charge fixing spikes, in strips of twelve.

(2) D. Forty M6 threaded demolition charge fixing pins short.
(3) E. Twenty M6 threaded demolition charge fixing pins long.
Also included are thirty demolition charge fixing straps (five packs of six)
and forty-eight demolition charge retainers in plastic bags.
g. Design of Fixings. (Refer to User Handbook for full details)
Fixings into Fixings into

Steel Concrete
Minimum target (base) material thickness: 4 mm 100 mm
Minimum distance from edge: 15 mm 70 mm
Minimum spacing: 20 mm 80 mm
Optimum penetration into base material: 12 mm±2 mm 27 mm±5 mm
Working load (pull out): 1.6 KN 400 N.
Note: Based on fixings supplied in standard kits.
0386. Safety Precautions.
a. Always use the bolt gun in accordance with the User Handbook.
b. Always wear protective goggles and ear protection.
c. Always check the tool for signs of damage before use.
d. Never point the gun near or at anyone. Never place a hand in front of a
loaded gun. Never leave a loaded gun unattended.
e. Always ensure that no one is behind or below the fastening location.

Never fix into thin-skinned targets until the danger area behind the target
has been cleared and cordoned off.
f. Splinter guards must always be used when fixing into concrete. They
should normally be used for fixing into steel but can be removed if
protective gloves are worn.

RESTRICTED
g. Never cock the gun except by pressing against a target.
h. After firing, if the projectile is not visible in the face of the target, first
remove the cartridge strip from the gun and then check that the barrel is
clear of any obstruction before attempting any further firings.
i. In the event of a misfire, refer to the User Handbook.
j. Subsequent fixings should not be made into existing holes or where

other projectiles have failed to hold. Make a new fixing at least 50 mm
away from the previous position.

RESTRICTED
Butt
Fastener guide Cartridges
Splinter guide
Nails for concrete
Nails for steel

Magazine Magazine
splinter guard
Banding
Stud for
Stud for concrete
steel with with spring
spring washer and
washer and wingnut
wingnut
Nail
Figure 3/31. Bolt Gun and Accessories.

RESTRICTED
INDUSTRIAL SAFETY HARNESS KIT
0387. The Industrial Safety Harness Kit (ISHK) provides a means of safely securing
a person safely to a structure while charges are being attached to a target
(see Figure 3/32). It is classed as a fall arrest system and meets all current
European directives that cover the Personal Protective Equipment at Work
Regulation. The ISHK must be worn whenever a person is working 2 m or
more above ground level. Users need to be trained on the equipment by a
qualified in-unit ISHK trainer to be deemed competent to use the equipment.
Figure 3/32. Industrial Safety Harness Kit (ISHK).
0388. Military Engineering Volume II Pamphlet 1, Part 1 Tools and Skills gives
details of the equipment and its use. The authoritative publication is Joint
Service Publication (JSP) 569 Chapter 3-24.

RESTRICTED
BELT DEMOLITION RUBBER
0389. The Belt Demolition Rubber (see Figure 3/33) is used to attach a charge to a
target (see Figure 3/34). The belt has a buckle and its length is adjustable.
Belts may be used singly or joined to form longer lengths. The maximum
length of a single belt is 1.15 m and the width is 45 mm.
Figure 3/33. Belt Demolition Rubber.
Figure 3/34. Belt Demolition Rubber in use.

RESTRICTED
CAMOUFLET SET MARK 1
0390. General. The camouflet equipment is used to assist in placing charges

below ground, eg mined and cratering charges (see Chapter 5). These
paragraphs describe the use of the equipment. Crater details are in Chapter
5.
0391. Equipment. The set consists of the following items that are illustrated in
Figure 3/35.
Item Quantity Weight (each)
Driver light: 1 22.68 kg

Cap driving: 1 2.04 kg
Adaptor: 1 6.00 kg
Points driving: 30 1.08 kg
Clamp tube withdrawing: 1 5.90 kg
Stirrups: 4 0.75 kg
Chisel steel: 1 6.56 kg
Key ejector: 1 0.56 kg
Tubes driving 2.43 x 0.051 m: 4 19.5 kg.
Chisel, steel
Adapter Clamp, tube,

Driver, light withdrawing
Point, Tube, driving Cap,

driving driving
Key, ejector
Stirrups
Figure 3/35. Camouflet equipment.

RESTRICTED
0392. Use. (See Figure 3/36).
a. Set a driving tube up vertically with an expendable driving point at the

bottom and the top protected by the driving cap. Drive the tube into the
ground using the driver. When the driver reaches the ground, the tube
has penetrated 1.5 m and then, if the protective cap is replaced by the
adaptor, an extra 0.45 m is possible.
b. If the ground surface is hard and cannot be penetrated by the tube, break
up the surface using the chisel, adaptor and driver.
c. If the tube is likely to stick in the hole or be difficult to withdraw, fix the
clamp to the tube just below the driver and rotate the tube while driving
is in progress. If the tube sticks, connect the driver to the clamp with
stirrups and jerk it upwards until the tube becomes free.
d. When the hole is the required depth, withdraw the tube. If the soil is
sandy and likely to fall into the hole, only withdraw the tube 0.6 m and
hold it in this position by placing the clamp around it at ground level.
0393. Positioning the Charges. Chapter 4 should be read in conjunction with

this paragraph.
a. First a small charge, as described below, is lowered down the hole and
detonated to form the camouflet. This increases the effective depth of
the hole by approximately 0.2 m. The method depends on the condition
of the soil:
(1) Firm Soil. A 6 m length of detonating cord is tied in the centre and
two segments (200 g) of PE (taken from the main charge of sixty
blocks or 30.0 kg) is moulded around the knot. The charge is then
lowered down the hole made by the tube and fired using a single
detonator on the two detonating cord points of initiation.
(2) Sandy Soil. Two segments (200 g) of PE are moulded around

a double knot on the end of a 4 m length of detonating cord.
The charge is then lowered down the tube, the tube is partially
withdrawn, and the charge fired using a single detonator on the
end of the detonating cord.
b. The resulting chamber normally holds about sixty blocks (30.0 kg) of
PE. The PE blocks are broken into 50 g chunks and dropped down the
hole. They are tamped using a wooden tamping rod. When half the main
charge is positioned, the initiating charge is inserted.

RESTRICTED
c. A 6 m piece of detonating cord is tied in the centre and a split segment

(100 g) of PE (taken from the main charge) is taped to it. The two ends of
the PE are bent back in the shape of a long ‘U’ and the detonating cord
with the PE block on the end is lowered down the hole. The two ends
of the detonating cord are left protruding out of the hole to provide two
points of initiation.
d. The remaining charge is inserted and tamped.
e. If still in position, the tube is carefully withdrawn over the detonating cord
leads.
0394. Limitations.
a. It is very difficult to drive the tube in rocky ground.
b. In very wet ground the camouflet chamber may collapse.
c. The maximum effective depth pilot hole is about 2.15 m.

RESTRICTED
STAGE 1 STAGE 2 STAGE 3
Breaking through Driving to 1.5 m Driving to 1.95 m

road surface with with standard with adaptor and Adaptor
chisel 50 mm tube standard tube
1.5 m
1.95 m
STAGE 4 STAGE 5
Blowing camouflet Laying main

in firm earth charge and firing
arrangements in
Safety fuse firm earth
initiation set
No tamping required Hole tamped 2.15 m

with earth
Camouflet charge: One segment

two segments (200 g) (100 g) PE taped
of PE taped to to detonating
knotted detonating cord
cord lead
29.7 kg PE
ALTERNATIVE STAGE 4 ALTERNATIVE STAGE 5
Method of blowing Method of laying main

camouflet in loose charge and firing
earth arrangements in
loose earth
Tube ready to be
withdrawn over
detonating cord
leads
2.15 m
Tube raised 0.6 m
One segment
Electric cable (100 g) PE taped
to detonating
Electric detonator 0.6 m cord
Two segments 29.7 kg PE

(200 g) of PE
Figure 3/36. Use of camouflet set.

RESTRICTED
USER-FILLED CHARGE CONTAINERS
0395. User-filled charge containers (UFCC) are a family of shaped containers

that may be transported and stored as a set of inert components, then
assembled by the operator and filled with plastic explosive on site. They are
explosively efficient, so a lower quantity of explosive is required to achieve
the intended effects than would be required with bulk PE. Some, such as
DIOPLEX, have removable inserts for use as shaped charges.
UNIVERSAL DEMOLITION BLOCKS
0396. General. The Universal Demolition Block (UDB) is a type of UFCC used as
a small, standard explosive charge for demolitions and as a booster charge
for larger charges. There are two sizes: for holding 250 g (½ block) or 500 g
(one block) of PE. The UDB consists of a matchbox concept of two sliding
parts; the tray for holding up to 250 g or 500 g of PE and an outer sleeve
that contains and protects the explosive and provides several means of
attachment and initiation. Individual charges may be joined to each other
using integral interlocking projections on the sides to make larger charges
and three initiation points are provided; two on the side and one on the end.
Long zip-ties are provided as a means of fixing to targets.
0397. Specifications. Table 3/2 shows the specifications for 250 g and 500 g
UDBs.
TABLE 3-2 UDB SPECIFICATIONS
Serial Specification 250 g UDB 500 g UDB

(a) (b) (c) (d)
1 Weight empty 100 g 120 g
2 Weight loaded 350 g 620 g
3 Dimensions 58 x 117 x 30 mm 58 x 195 x 30 mm
4 NEQ 250 g 500 g
0398. Configuration. The UDB can be configured end-to-end using the end-rail,
or can be configured side-by-side using a simple hinge and pin system. The
side-by-side charges have the added advantage that they can be fitted to a
curved surface while maintaining good charge contact. Charges configured
side-by-side can be used as slab demolition charges where charge weight
can be scaled in multiples of 250 g or 500 g.

RESTRICTED
CHAPTER 4 FIRING ARRANGEMENTS

SECTION 4.1 INITIATING SINGLE CHARGES
NON-ELECTRICALLY
0401. Operational Initiation of Charges. Individual charges are normally initiated
by detonating cord. The detonating cord is initiated by a detonator.
0402. Connecting Detonating Cord to Charge.
a. PE. When the charge is PE, a double thumb knot is made in the end
of the detonating cord and is buried in the PE as illustrated in Figure
4/1. Alternatively, a detonating cord booster (see Paragraph 0333) could
be used instead of the double thumb knot. The double thumb knot or
booster is necessary to ensure there is sufficient explosive power to
initiate the PE. Small charges, eg. one segment (100 g), moulded round
a double thumb knot of detonating cord, can be secured with masking
tape.
b. Other Charges. Many shaped charges have a booster charge incorporated

in them that has a hole to allow the attachment of the detonating cord.
The booster charge obviates the need for knots in the detonating cord.
The connection of the detonating cord must be in accordance with the
user instructions for the charge.

RESTRICTED
Note: A minimum of 100 g of PE (one segment) is required to enable the PE to be effectively moulded
around the knot. It can be secured with masking tape.
Figure 4/1. Initiating PE using detonating cord.
0403. Connecting Detonator to Detonating Cord. A Detonator Demolition

(flash detonator), or Detonator Demolition Electric, may be connected to
detonating cord (minimum length of 2 m) by one of the following methods:
a. By Forming Detonating Cord Cradle and Binding. The usual method for
connecting a detonator to detonator cord is illustrated in Figure 4/2. The
last 300 mm of detonating cord is doubled back on itself and bound
together in three places with the end binding as close as possible to the
bend in the detonating cord and 100 mm of exposed double detonating
cord between the end binding and centre binding. The detonator and
the exposed double detonating cord leads are tightly bound together as
illustrated in Figure 4/2.
20 mm 20 mm
100 mm
Bend
20 mm
300 mm
Note: Plastic insulation tape is the preferred binding material as it is slightly elastic, enabling a tight joint to
be made.
Figure 4/2. Binding detonator in detonating cord cradle.

RESTRICTED
b. Using Demolition Coupler. The use of a demolition coupler is illustrated

in Figure 3/15. The detonating cord must be cut square and must be
butted up against the detonator in the coupler. This method is used when
there is likely to be a delay between connecting and firing the detonator,
or when a waterproof or vibration proof connection is necessary.
c. Using Clip Detonating Non-Magnetic (Large). (See Figure 3/11). A loop

of detonation cord is placed in the detonating cord clip and the detonator
inserted. The leads of an electric detonator are secured using the cleat.
0404. Initiation of Detonator. The flash detonator is initiated by safety fuze which
may be held in position by crimping or by a demolition coupler (a demolition
coupler must be used if a waterproof connection is required). A demolition
firing device should normally be used to ignite the safety fuze.
0405. Initiation Set. The combination of items used for initiating the detonating
cord is commonly called the ‘initiation set’.
0406. Small Charges Non-operational Conditions. Small single charges of PE

(up to 1 kg) may be initiated under non-operational conditions by inserting a
detonator directly into the charge. A hole for the detonator can be made in
the explosive using crimpers (see Paragraph 0320). If non-electrical initiation
is used, as illustrated in Figure 4/3, the detonator may be connected to the
safety fuze by crimping or by a demolition coupler and, similarly, the trains
may be initiated by either matches or a firing device. This method is only
recommended for small charges used in battle noise simulation and to be
fired immediately after preparation.

RESTRICTED
Figure 4/3. Non-operational initiation of small charges.
0407. Spare.
to
0410.

RESTRICTED
SECTION 4.2 MULTIPLE POINTS OF INITIATION -

NON-ELECTRIC
0411. Introduction. Most demolition tasks require a number of charges to be
initiated simultaneously and some charges require more than one point
of initiation. Therefore the charges or individual points of initiation are
connected by detonating cord via a junction box (see Paragraph 0413) or a
ring main firing circuit (see Paragraphs 0414 to 0419).
0412. Charges requiring Multiple Points of Initiation. Charges that require

more than one point of initiation include:
a. Charges forming a demolition in a critical tactical situation, eg reserved

demolitions (see Chapter 11), require two points of initiation.
b. Elongated Charges. Long thin charges require more than one point of
initiation. As a guide, one point of initiation is required every 1.5 m or,
when using large charges in a line, every fourth container should be
initiated.
0413. Junction Box. Up to four charges may be initiated simultaneously through

a detonating cord junction box as illustrated in Figure 4/4. At the junction,
all the detonating cord leads must be bound tightly together over a length
of 100 mm using tape or spun yarn. A spare end of 300 mm must be left on
each detonating cord lead (100 mm if sealing sleeves are used).
300 mm spare ends Charges
From initiation set

100 mm
300 mm spare end
Figure 4/4. Detonating cord junction box.

RESTRICTED
0414. Detonating Cord Junctions. There are four methods of joining detonating
cord. The required spare end must be left on all joints.
a. Non-Magnetic Detonating Clips. (See Figure 4/5a). Detonating clips are

described in Chapter 3. They join two detonating cord leads at right
angles. This is the preferred method of joining two detonating cord leads
and should always be used when clips are available.
b. Lap Joint. (See Figure 4/5b). The detonating cord leads are tightly
bound together over a length of 100 mm. It is essential the branch lead is
positioned correctly in relation to the direction of travel of the detonation
wave.
c. ‘Y’ Junction. (See Figure 4/5c). A ‘Y’ junction is a combination of three

lap joints that makes the direction of travel of the detonation wave
irrelevant.
d. Emergency (Clove Hitch) Junction. (See Figure 4/5d). The clove hitch
junction should only be used in an emergency when detonating clips are
not available and time precludes the use of Y junctions.
a. Detonating Clip Small.
Figure 4/5. Junctions in detonating cord.

RESTRICTED
Direction of detonating wave

100 mm
Main lead
300 mm spare end

Charge
b. Lap joint.
100 mm
Main lead
300 mm spare end
Insulating tape,
spun yarn or
300 mm spare ends
thin binding wire
Charge
c. ‘Y’ junction.
300 mm spare end

Main lead
Clove hitch
Charge
d. Emergency junction (clove hitch).
Figure 4/5 (continued). Junctions in detonating cord.
0415. Ring Mains. Multiple initiations are best achieved by using a ring main.
This is a loop of detonating cord with individual charges spurred off it. The
ends of the loop are connected by a detonating cord switch. Each end of
the loop should be initiated separately, giving a good assurance against
failure; however, in an emergency, one point of initiation may be acceptable.
The configuration of the ring main depends on the method used to join the
lengths of detonating cord.

RESTRICTED
0416. Configuration. The configurations of ring mains using the different types of
junction are shown in Figure 4/6.
Charges
300 mm spare end
Detonator Detonator
Safety fuze Safety fuze

a. Ring main using detonating clips.
Charges
300 mm spare end
Detonator Detonator
Safety fuze Safety fuze

b. Ring main using bound junctions.
Figure 4/6. Configuration of ring mains.

RESTRICTED
Charges
300 mm spare end
Detonator
Safety fuze
c. Emergency ring main using clove hitch junctions.
Figure 4/6 (continued). Configuration of ring mains.
0417. Firing Circuits. A firing circuit may consist of a junction box, a ring main
or several interconnected ring mains. There are two types of firing circuit -
simple and maximum. Maximum firing circuits are used when a high degree
of assurance is required that all charges will be initiated, eg in a reserved
demolition (see Chapter 11).
0418. Simple Firing Circuits. A typical simple firing circuit for a bridge demolition
is illustrated in Figure 4/7. The main features are:
a. One horizontal ring main is used.
b. As many vertical ring mains as required are connected to the horizontal

ring main. Vertical and horizontal ring mains must be connected in two
places, one connection on each leg of the horizontal ring main.
c. The point(s) of initiation of each charge are connected to a ring main by

detonating cord leads.

RESTRICTED
d. The horizontal ring main is initiated at two points, preferably by different

methods (ie safety fuze, electrically or remote firing device).
Charges above
bridge deck
Charges on Mined charges
bridge deck
Vertical
ring main
Horizontal
ring main
Vertical
ring main
Detonating cord
cross-over switch
Charges below
bridge deck
Methods of initiating horizontal ring main
Electric detonator connected to detonating cord
Flash detonator connected to detonating cord
Figure 4/7. Typical simple firing circuit.
0419. Maximum Firing Circuit. A typical maximum firing circuit is illustrated in

Figure 4/8. The critical features are:
a. There are two horizontal ring mains interconnected by detonating cord

cross over switches at each end.
b. All vertical ring mains are duplicated, one on either side of the charges
where possible. Each vertical ring main is connected to both legs of
each horizontal ring main.
c. Each charge must be connected to two vertical ring mains. All charges,
except shaped charges where the design of the charge precludes it,
must have two points of initiation. Charges must not be connected to
the horizontal ring main.
d. Each leg of both horizontal ring mains must be initiated separately using
different means of initiation (ie safety fuze, electrically or remote firing
device). If possible, the points of initiation should be separated, eg at
each end of the target.

Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14
Safety fuze
Charges above Charges in initiation
Vertical bridge deck abutment
ring mains Charges on
bridge deck
Electrical
initiation
Horizontal
ring mains
Vertical
ring
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
Horizontal
ring mains mains
Safety fuze
initiation
Vertical
Detonating cord Charges below
ring
cross-over switch bridge deck
mains
Electrical
initiation
Figure 4/8. Typical maximum firing circuit.

4-11
RESTRICTED
e. The ends of the horizontal ring mains may be run back towards the firing
point. This enables:
(1) The point of initiation of the safety fuze to be closer to the firing
point.
(2) Electric firing cables to be laid so RF hazards are minimized (see

Chapter 1 and Section 4.3).

Care must be taken when laying extended detonating cord leads to
ensure they do not cross; this avoids the danger of one lead cutting the
other when they are fired. If crossed leads are unavoidable, they must be
joined securely with a junction clip or tape.
0420. Initiation of Firing Circuits. All methods of initiation connected to the firing
circuit must be used. Where they are of the same type, they should be fired
as nearly simultaneously as possible. Where they are different, eg electrical
and safety fuze, the safety fuze should be ignited first but the electrical
system should be initiated before the safety fuze has finished burning. Thus
it is the electric circuit that fires the demolition, the safety fuze being the
insurance against failure.

RESTRICTED
SECTION 4.3 ELECTRICAL INITIATION OF

CHARGES
0421. Introduction. Detonation may be initiated by an electric detonator
connected by firing cable to a suitable electric source (normally a service
exploder or the receiver of a Demolition Remote Firing Device (DRFD)). In
operational demolitions, it is recommended that not more than one detonator
is connected into any electric circuit in order to minimise the radio frequency
(RF) hazard. Multiple charges are initiated by detonating cord from the
point of electrical initiation. On other tasks, a number of detonators may be
connected into a single electric circuit but multiple detonator circuits should
be avoided, if possible, on account of the increased RF hazard.
0422. Connection of Electric Detonator. The Detonator Demolition Electric

is connected to the detonating cord in the same way as the Detonator
Demolition (flash detonator) as described in Section 4.1. Igniters Safety
Fuze Electric (ISFE) may be used to ignite safety fuze in battle noise
simulations (see Chapter 6). They should be treated in a similar manner to
electric detonators.
0423. RF Hazard. The RF hazard must constantly be kept in mind when electrical
initiation is used; it is described in Chapter 12, which includes additional
measures for the carriage of electric detonators. It is not necessary to have
continuity in a circuit for it to be susceptible to RF hazards. The techniques
described in this section must be followed to minimise the hazard. The
following points are particularly relevant:
a. Multi-Detonator Circuits. Multi-detonator circuits should not be used for

operational demolitions and should be avoided for all others.
b. Arrangement of Detonators. In multi-detonator circuits, the detonators

must be arranged as described in Paragraph 0426.
c. Knots and Loops. Knots and loops in cables must be avoided where
possible.
d. Twisted Leads. All leads (firing cables, detonator leads and ISFE leads)
must remain twisted together and only the minimum length untwisted to
make connections.
e. One-lead Connection. Detonators should not have one lead connected

into the circuit.

RESTRICTED
0424. Joints in Firing Cables. Joints in firing cables should be avoided if

possible as they induce forced resistance into the cable and increase the
RF hazard. If joints are unavoidable, they should be made as described in
this paragraph and illustrated in Figure 4/9. Only electrical PVC insulating
tape is to be used in cable joints and creases should be avoided as they
allow damp to penetrate.
a. Stage 1. Join the two cables with a reef knot and pull the knot tight. The
knot takes any strain subsequently put on the cable.
b. Stage 2. Cut the spare ends of each cable as short as practicable and
such that, when the joints are made, they will be staggered. Strip off
about 30 mm of insulation from the end of each lead. If necessary, clean
the ends of the bare wires by scraping them with the back of a knife.
c. Stage 3. Twist together the bare wire of two similarly coloured leads and
fold flat.
d. Stage 4. Tape the joint with two layers of insulating tape, taking the tape
at least 40 mm over the insulation on each side of the joint.
e. Stage 5. Twist together the other two leads and tape the joint in a similar
manner.
f. Stage 6. Flatten the loop and bind the whole joint with insulating tape.

RESTRICTED
Tie reef knot

Stage 1
and pull tight
Cut and bare ends

Stage 2 so joints are
staggered
Stage 3 Twist together bare ends

of one cable and fold flat
Stage 4 Tape joint
Repeat with
Stage 5 second joint
Flatten loop and

Stage 6
bind to twisted cable
Figure 4/9. Making joint in firing cable.

RESTRICTED
0425. Joining Detonators to Electric Cable. In a single detonator (or ISFE)

circuit, the detonator is joined at the end of the cable. The procedure is
illustrated in Figure 4/10 and as follows:
a. Stage 1.
(1) Bind the leads of the firing cable together about 50 mm from the
end to prevent them untwisting.
(2) Strip off about 30 mm of insulation from each lead and, if necessary,
clean the bare leads with the back of a knife.
(3) Clean the 40 mm of bare wire at the end of each detonator lead.
Ensure the detonator leads are not untwisted or separated more
than absolutely necessary.
b. Stage 2.
(1) Place the detonator under a sandbag or other suitable protection

with the leads protruding.
(2) Earth the detonator leads, cable and yourself by touching them to
the ground using your hand.
(3) Wind the bared ends of each detonator lead around the ends of the
firing cable and then bend the ends back as shown in Figure 4/11.
c. Stage 3. Bind each connection separately with insulation tape, ensuring

there are at least two layers of insulation tape over each joint and the
bare wires are completely covered.
d. Stage 4.
(1) Twist the insulated connections together so the twist of the

detonator leads continues smoothly into the twist of the firing
cable.
(2) Bind insulating tape over the connections so the leads cannot
untwist.

RESTRICTED
Firing cable
Stage 1
Leads taped or bound together

to prevent unnecessary untwisting
when connecting detonator leads
Stage 2
Detonator leads
Stage 3 Tape
Tape
Stage 4
Connections taped together so

twist of detonator leads continues
smoothly into twist of firing cable
Figure 4/10. Connecting single electric detonator to firing cable.

RESTRICTED
0426. Multi-detonator Circuits. If a number of detonators (or ISFEs) have to be

connected into an electric circuit, they should be positioned in alternate
leads of the firing cable as shown in Figure 4/11. The end detonator is
connected as described in Paragraph 0425. The connection of other
detonators is described in Paragraph 0427.
Service exploder
Figure 4/11. Multi-detonator circuit.
0427. Connection of Detonators into Multi-detonator Circuits.
a. Bind the firing cable with insulating tape about 50 mm on either side of
the place where the detonator is to be inserted. Cut the appropriate lead
of the firing cable. Strip off about 30 mm of insulation from the ends of
the cut lead. If necessary, clean the bare ends of the cut lead and the
ends of the detonator leads with the back of a knife. Place the detonator
under a sandbag.
b. Wind the bared ends of each detonator lead around the ends of the firing
cable and then bend the ends back as shown in Figure 4/12.
c. Bind each joint with two layers of insulating tape.
d. Bind each joint to the uncut lead of the firing cable as illustrated in
Figure 4/12.

RESTRICTED
Figure 4/12. Connecting detonator to multi-detonator firing circuit.
0428. Testing Electric Circuits. Two sets of tests are carried out when charges are
to be fired electrically. Firstly, the individual components are tested before
being assembled into the circuit and then the complete circuit is tested.
Tests are carried out using the Shrike exploder as described in Chapter 3.
When detonators are tested they must be placed under a sandbag or other
suitable protection.
a. Individual Components. The following are tested:
(1) Shrike exploder for power and continuity, or DRFD or Mini-DRFD

for functioning and transmitted and received signal strength.
(2) Electric cables for continuity.
(3) Detonators for continuity.
b. Complete Circuit. After the electric firing circuit has been assembled but
before detonators are connected to any other explosive component, the
complete electric circuit is tested as follows:

RESTRICTED
(1) Visually (inspect for faults and breaks).
(2) Continuity.

RESTRICTED
CHAPTER 5 CHARGES FORMED FROM BULK

EXPLOSIVES - DESCRIPTION
AND CALCULATION
SECTION 5.1 GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
0501. The chapter covers charges formed on site from bulk explosives (PE
blocks). Although the detonation of an explosive has only two main effects
(shattering and pressure), it is convenient to divide demolition charges into
six groups which reflect the result achieved, the explosive effect used, the
method of calculating the charge, and the position and method of placing
the charge. The groups are:
Cutting
Breaching
Pier footing
Borehole
Cratering
Concussion.
0502. These groups are further sub-divided as indicated in Table 5-1 which also
acts as an index to this chapter.
TABLE 5-1 TYPES OF CHARGE
Serial Type of charge Target Paragraph

(a) (b) (c) (d)
SECTION 5.2 CUTTING CHARGES - STEEL AND TIMBER
1 Cutting Round steel bars and cables 0512
2 Cutting Steel - rectangular sections 0516
3 Cutting Steel girders and beams 0519
4 Cutting Steel rails 0523
5 Cutting Timber - rectangular sections 0524
6 Cutting Timber - circular sections 0528
SECTION 5.3 CUTTING CHARGES - MASONRY AND CONCRETE
7 Cutting Masonry and unreinforced concrete 0543
8 Cutting Reinforced concrete - small beams and slabs 0549
9 Cutting (concrete Reinforced concrete - large beams and slabs 0553
stripping)
10 Cutting Reinforced concrete arches 0557

RESTRICTED
TABLE 5-1 TYPES OF CHARGE (continued)
Serial Type of charge Target Paragraph

(a) (b) (c) (d)
SECTION 5.4 BREACHING CHARGES
11 Breaching Reinforced concrete obstacles, walls and piers 0561
SECTION 5.5 PIER FOOTING CHARGES
12 Pier footing Masonry and unreinforced concrete piers 0571
SECTION 5.6 BOREHOLE CHARGES
13 Borehole Bridge piers 0584
14 Borehole Reinforced concrete beams 0589
15 Borehole Brick or masonry walls 0590
16 Borehole Timber 0591
SECTION 5.7 CRATERING CHARGES
17 Cratering Roads and airfields 05102
18 Cratering Relieved face cratering 05111
19 Cratering Ditching 05112
20 Cratering Digging in hard ground 05116
21 Cratering Continuous cratering charge 05118
22 Cratering Masonry piers 05122
23 Cratering Abutments and retaining walls 05124
24 Cratering Tree stumps 05130
SECTION 5.8 CONCUSSION CHARGES
25 Concussion Buildings 05141
CALCULATION OF CHARGES
0503. Method. The method of calculating the required charge for targets within
the six groups varies and is described in detail within the appropriate
section. Charges may be extracted from the table, or calculated from a
given formula and table, or calculated by formula alone; examples of each
relevant method are given.
0504. Accuracy. The following factors require consideration when deciding on

the accuracy of calculation required:
a. The formula results summarised in the cutting charge tables are based
on the target having been measured. On operations, if measurement of
the target is not possible, the guidance given at the foot of each table
should be followed.

RESTRICTED
b. Charge sizes within the tables are calculated and rounded up to the
nearest size of charge that is both practicable and economical.
c. On operations, the charge size or weight can be increased to assist in

the demand, carriage and placement of the charges. It should only be
reduced if experience of a target that exactly replicates the one to be
attacked has shown a reduced charge to be adequate.
d. In demolitions where reduction of the effects of the explosion is desirable,

eg a military aid to the civilian community task, calculations should be by
formulae, without rounding up, to ensure the minimum weight of charge
is calculated. If possible, trials should then be conducted to find the
minimum charge required to achieve the desired effect.
e. Should time be a critical factor in the placement of charges, the table

and formula method should be used. This allows sufficient explosives
for ease of placement.
0505. Spare.
to
0510.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
SECTION 5.2 CUTTING CHARGES - STEEL AND

TIMBER
INTRODUCTION
0511. The section covers the use of PE as a cutting charge for steel and timber.
The charges should be fixed to the target along the line of the desired cut.
The following principles apply to the charges:
a. The charge utilises the shattering effect of the explosive, therefore:
(1) No tamping is necessary.
(2) Close contact between the charge and the target is essential. There
must not be any air gaps between the target and the explosive.
Note: When using PE blocks, all air gaps and voids between the target and the PE
block must be filled with explosive.
b. The charge must be continuous over the complete line of the cut.
c. The cross section of the charge should be such that the width is between
one and three times the thickness. Charges more than 150 mm thick
should be avoided as a better method of attacking the target is usually
available; possibly, the charge can be divided and placed on opposite
sides of the target (see Sub-paragraph 0511e).
d. Charges should be initiated so the detonation wave is at right angles to

the target.
e. If charges are placed on both sides of the target, they should not be
exactly opposite each other or their effects may cancel each other
out. They should be staggered leaving a slight overlap, so they have a
scissors effect.
f. The charge should be initiated every 1.5 m or fourth container.
ROUND STEEL BARS AND CABLES
0512. Calculation using Table.
a. The cutting charges required to cut round steel bars and cables up to 100
mm are summarised in Table 5-2; the explosive charge is rounded up to
the nearest segment of PE.

RESTRICTED
TABLE 5-2 CUTTING CHARGES FOR ROUND MILD STEEL BARS AND
WIRE CABLES
Serial Diameter Whole 500 g blocks plus Diameter MS bar

MS cable (mm) number of 100 g segments (mm)
Blocks Segments
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
1 Up to 23 0 2 Up to 25
2 32 0 3 35
3 39 0 4 43
4 45 1 0 50
5 50 1 1 56
6 55 1 2 61
7 60 1 4 66
8 64 2 0 71
9 68 2 1 75
10 71 2 2 79
11 75 2 3 83
12 78 2 4 87
13 82 3 0 90
14 85 3 2 93
15 88 3 3 97
16 90 3 4 100
17 93 4 0
18 96 4 1
19 99 4 2
20 100 4 3
Notes: 1. Do not interpolate; round up to next target diameter.

2. For targets with diameter in excess of 100 mm, use linear shaped charge(s).
b. Method of Calculation. To calculate the charge requirement, select the

thickness of either the cable or bar, respectively from Column (b) or
Column (e), and read across to Columns (c) and (d) to obtain the required
quantity of PE blocks and segments. The requirement is the total of
Columns (c) and (d), ie blocks and segments.
c. Example. Determine the charge required to cut a 74 mm diameter mild

steel bar.
Use 75 mm from Serial 9 Column (e).

RESTRICTED
From Serial 9, Columns (c) and (d), the charge required is 2 blocks
and 1 segment.
0513. Calculation using Formula.
a. The charges required to cut steel bars and cables up to 100 mm diameter
are calculated using the following:
(1) Steel Bars. Charge C = d kg.

2
5500
(2) Steel Cables. Charge C = d kg.

2
4500
Where d is the diameter of the bar or cable in mm.
b. Example. Determine the charge required to cut a 75 mm diameter steel

cable.
Charge C = d = 75
2 2
= 1.25 kg.
4500 4500
Divide by 0.5 to determine the number of blocks:
1.25 ÷ 0.5 = 2.5 blocks of PE, or 2 blocks and 3 segments (rounding up).
Note: When calculating the total charge, 0.2 of a block is equal to 1 segment (0.1 kg) of PE.
0514. Positioning Charges. For small bars and cables, the charge is placed
on one side only. For bars over 75 mm diameter and cables over 70 mm
diameter, one half of the charge should be placed on each side of the target
and be staggered as shown in Figure 5/1.

RESTRICTED
PE
Binding
SWR
End view Side view
Figure 5/1. Cutting steel cable.
0515. Large Bars and Cables. The formulae above are only suitable for diameters
up to 100 mm. For thicker targets, the charge varies more nearly to the
cube rather than the square of the diameter, making this method of cutting
uneconomical: a linear shaped charge should be used.
RECTANGULAR STEEL SECTIONS
a. The cutting charges required to cut rectangular steel sections are

summarised in Table 5-3. The tables provide the total charge requirement
for cuts up to 120 mm in thickness and 1200 mm in length. For targets
thicker than 120 mm, linear shaped charges should be used. Placing the
shaped charges so as to attack both sides of the target simultaneously
can increase the depth of cut.
Note: When attacking targets with CD14, the required number of charges is calculated by
dividing the length of cut by the length of charge (241 mm).
b. To determine the charge requirement for a cutting charge, select the

thickness of the target to be cut and the length of cut. At the intersection
of the row and column, the total charge required is shown.
c. Example. Determine the number of PE blocks required to cut a steel

plate 65 mm thick and 600 mm wide:
Total charge (from Table 5-3, Serial 9, Columns (j, k and l))
= 13 blocks and 4 segments (6.9 kg) of PE.
Note: Calculation by table is not as accurate as calculation by formula. If deliberate
calculations are required, use the formula.

TABLE 5-3 CUTTING CHARGES FOR RECTANGULAR STEEL SECTIONS -
0.5 kg PE BLOCKS (200 mm) AND 0.1 kg SEGMENTS
Total charge in 500 g blocks (length 200 mm) plus 100 g segments (length 40 mm) per length of cut (mm) (ii)(iii)(iv)(v)
Charge cross
Target
section Up to 200 201 - 400 401 - 600 601 - 800 801 - 1000 1001 - 1200
Serial thickness
(100 g segments)
(mm) NEQ NEQ NEQ NEQ NEQ NEQ
(i) Blocks Segments Blocks Segments Blocks Segments Blocks Segments Blocks Segments Blocks Segments
(kg) (vi) (kg) (vi) (kg) (vi) (kg) (vi) (kg) (vi) (kg) (vi)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r) (s) (t) (u)
1 20 1 0 3 0.3 1 1 0.6 1 4 0.9 2 2 1.2 3 0 1.5 3 3 1.8
2 30 1 1 0 0.5 2 0 1.0 3 0 1.5 4 0 2.0 5 0 2.5 6 0 3.0
3 35 2 1 2 0.7 2 4 1.4 4 1 2.1 5 3 2.8 7 0 3.5 8 2 4.2
4 40 2 1 4 0.9 3 3 1.8 5 2 2.7 7 1 3.6 9 0 4.5 10 4 5.4
5 45 3 2 1 1.1 4 2 2.2 6 3 3.3 8 4 4.4 11 0 5.5 13 1 6.6
6 50 3 2 4 1.4 5 3 2.8 8 2 4.2 11 1 5.6 14 0 7.0 16 4 8.4
7 55 4 3 1 1.6 6 2 3.2 9 3 4.8 12 4 6.4 16 0 8.0 19 1 9.6
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
8 60 4 3 4 1.9 7 3 3.8 11 2 5.7 15 1 7.6 19 0 9.5 22 4 11.4
9 65 5 4 3 2.3 9 1 4.6 13 4 6.9 18 2 9.2 23 0 11.5 27 3 13.8
10 70 6 5 1 2.6 10 2 5.2 15 3 7.8 20 4 10.4 26 0 13.0 31 1 15.6
11 75 6 6 0 3.0 12 0 6.0 18 0 9.0 24 0 12.0 30 0 15.0 36 0 18.0
12 80 7 6 4 3.4 13 3 6.8 20 2 10.2 27 1 13.6 34 0 17.0 40 4 20.4
13 85 8 7 4 3.9 15 3 7.8 23 2 11.7 31 1 15.6 39 0 19.5 46 4 23.4
14 90 9 8 3 4.3 17 1 8.6 25 4 12.9 34 2 17.2 43 0 21.5 51 3 25.8
15 95 10 9 3 4.8 19 1 9.6 28 4 14.4 38 2 19.2 48 0 24.0 57 3 28.8
16 100 11 10 3 5.3 21 1 10.6 31 4 15.9 42 2 21.2 53 0 26.5 63 3 31.8
17 105 12 11 4 5.9 23 3 11.8 35 2 17.7 47 1 23.6 59 0 29.5 70 4 35.4
18 110 13 12 4 6.4 25 3 12.8 38 2 19.2 51 1 25.6 64 0 32.0 76 4 38.4
19 115 14 14 0 7.0 28 0 14.0 42 0 21.0 56 0 28.0 70 0 35.0 84 0 42.0
20 120 16 15 1 7.6 30 2 15.2 45 3 22.8 60 4 30.4 76 0 38.0 91 1 45.6
Notes: i. Segment used to calculate cross section; each segment 40 mm long, with NEQ of 100 g.
ii. Do not interpolate; round up to next target thickness.
iii. In operational circumstances where thickness of target cannot be ascertained, estimate (eg from thickness of other parts of structure) and then double charge shown in table.
iv. For lengths of cut not shown, calculate by table and formula.
v. Number of 500 g blocks and 100 g segments MUST BE ADDED TOGETHER for specified length of cut.
vi. NEQ of blocks and segments required (indicated in columns preceeding it) for specified length of cut.
5-9
RESTRICTED
0517. Calculation using Table and Formula.
a. To calculate the total number of PE blocks for lengths of cut not shown
in Table 5-3, divide the length of cut by the length of a segment of PE (40
mm), round up to the next whole number and multiply the result by the
charge cross section in Column (c) of Table 5-3.
b. The charge cross section is an amount of explosive given in segments.

It is the amount of explosive required over a given length of cut, eg if the
charge cross section is 3 segments of PE, it means that for every 40 mm
of cut there must be a minimum of 3 segments of PE over that part of the
cut.
c. Example. Determine the number of blocks of PE required to cut a steel

plate 35 mm thick and 1900 mm wide, obtaining the charge cross section
from Table 5-3, Column (c).
Charge cross section = 2 segments of PE (from Table 5-3, Serial 3,

Column (c)).
Number of segments = Length of cut (mm) = 1900

Length of segment (mm) 40
= 47.5 segments, round up to 48.
48 segments x cross section (2 segments) = 96 segments in total.
Divide by 5 to determine the number of blocks:
96 ÷ 5 = 19.2 blocks.
Total charge = 19 blocks and 1 segment (9.6 kg).

a. The cross section of the charge required to cut rectangular steel sections
is calculated using the formula:
C = t2 x Length of segment (mm)

x 380,000 Weight of segment (kg)

RESTRICTED
where Cx is the charge cross section in segments, rounded up to the

whole number
t is the thickness of the target in mm.
The results of the formula are rounded up to the next whole segment
and divided by 5 to determine the number of PE blocks and segments
required.
b. To calculate the total number of blocks needed, divide the length of cut
by the length of a segment (40 mm), round up to the next whole number
and multiply this result by the cross section of charge. This figure then is
divided by 5 to determine the number of blocks and segments.
Note: Do not round up when minimum charge sizes are required.
c. Example. Determine the number of blocks of PE required to cut a steel

plate 35 mm thick and 1900 mm wide.
Charge cross section = 352 x 40

380,000 0.1
= 1.3, round up to 2 segments PE.
Number of blocks and segments =
Length of cut = 1900 = 47.5, round up to 48 segments.

Length of segment 40
48 segments x cross section (2 segments) = 96 segments in total.
96 ÷ 5 = 19.2 blocks.
Total charge = 19 blocks and 1 segment (9.6 kg).

Note: This method is more exact than calculating by table only. Tables are designed to be
expedient, whereas the formula is more deliberate. When calculating the total charge, 0.2 of
a block is equal to 1 segment (0.1 kg) of PE.

RESTRICTED
STEEL BEAMS AND GIRDERS
0519. Method of Calculation. The charges for beams and girders are calculated
by considering each part (ie top flange, web and bottom flange) separately.
The thicknesses of each part may not be uniform (eg the webs may taper,
there may be angle pieces joining the web and flange, and rivet heads may
protrude). The following rules apply in calculating charges:
a. Flange. The thickest dimension of the flange, including any angle pieces,
is used.
b. Web. The thinnest dimension of the web is used.
c. Rivet Heads. Where rivet heads protrude on both sides of a flange, the
thickness of the rivet head on one side is added to the thickness of the
flange.
Note: When using CD14 as a necklace charge, the cut on one part of the target may reduce the
length of cut required on another part (eg CD14s on the top and bottom flange will cut
into the web), thereby reducing the number of charges required.
0520. Positioning Charges on Steel Beams and Girders. There are four ways
in which charges may be positioned on steel beams and girders. These
are illustrated in Figure 5/2. Their use is governed by the accessibility of
the target but, where possible, preference for their use should be in the
numerical order shown. Flange and web charges on the opposite sides of a
web or flange should be displaced as shown in Figure 5/3 to avoid opposed
charges cancelling each other. Note that in Figure 5/2d the flange charges
are doubled and with this method the compression flange (top flange) is not
completely cut if it is more than 25 mm thick.

RESTRICTED
C1 Total = C1 Total = C1 (C1 x 2)
Web
C2 C2
Flange
C3 C3 Total = C3 (C3 x 2)

a. b. c. d.
Note: C1, C2, C3 are charges for top flange, web, and bottom flange respectively. If the compression (top)
flange plate is more than 25 mm thick, it will not be completely cut if charges are placed as in (d).
Figure 5/2. Positioning charges on steel beams and girders.
PE moulded 520 mm Board

Wire windlassing Board
over rivet heads
Wooden t = 45 mm
block
to wedge
charges
Wire windlassed
in position around charges
PE
1000 mm Boards Method of
fixing omitted
for clarity
Wooden
block
t = 75 mm
650 mm
Board
Figure 5/3. Charges on fabricated steel girder.
0521. Securing Charges. Charges must be held securely and tightly against the
target with no air gaps between the charge and target. A typical charge
fixing is illustrated in Figure 5/3.

RESTRICTED
0522. Example Calculation. Determine the number of PE blocks required to cut

the girder illustrated in Figure 5/3 using Table 5-3.
a. Top Flange.
Thickness including one rivet head = 45 mm
Length of cut = 520 mm
From Table 5-3, Serial 5, Columns (j) to (l)
Charge = 6 blocks and 3 segments (3.3 kg).
b. Web.
Thickness = 20 mm
From Table 5-3, Serial 1, Columns (p) to (r)
Charge = 3 blocks (1.5 kg).
c. Bottom Flange.
Thickness including one rivet head = 75 mm
From Table 5-3, Serial 11, Columns (m) to (o)
Charge = 24 blocks (12 kg).
d. Total Charge.
Top flange = 6 blocks 3 segments
Web = 3 blocks
Bottom flange = 24 blocks
Total = 33 blocks and 3 segments
(16.8 kg).
STEEL RAILS
0523. The following charges are required to cut railway lines:
Plain line 1 block PE (0.5 kg)

Fish plated joint 2 blocks and 2 segments PE (1.2 kg)
Crossing angle 5 blocks and 1 segment PE (2.6 kg).
The charge should be fixed along the length of the web (see Paragraph
0914).

RESTRICTED
RECTANGULAR TIMBER
0524. General. Cutting charges for timber are described below but, because of
the tough and fibrous nature of timber, they are relatively uneconomical and
where time permits borehole charges (see Section 5.6) should be used. The
cutting charges are fixed to the target along the line of the desired cut (see
Paragraph 0511).
a. The cutting charges required to cut rectangular timber are summarised in

Table 5-4. The table provides the total charge requirement for cuts up to
750 mm in thickness and 1200 mm in length. Borehole charges should
be used for targets thicker than 750 mm.
b. To determine the charge requirement for a cutting charge, select the

thickness of the target to be cut and the length of cut. At the intersection
of the row and column, the total charge required is shown.
Note: Calculation by table is not as accurate as calculation by formula. If deliberate calculations
are required, use the formula.
c. Example. Determine the number of PE blocks required to cut a

300 mm x 300 mm timber baulk.
Total charge (from Table 5-4, Serial 2, Columns (g) to (i))
= 2 blocks (1.0 kg).

5-16 TABLE 5-4 CUTTING CHARGES FOR RECTANGULAR TIMBER - 0.5 kg PE BLOCKS AND 0.1 kg SEGMENTS
Total charge in 500 g blocks (length 200 mm) plus 100 g segments (length 40 mm) per length of cut (mm) (iii)(iv)(v)(vi)
Charge
Target
cross section Up to 200 201 - 400 401 - 600 601 - 800 801 - 1000 1001 - 1200
thickness
Serial (100 g
(mm) NEQ NEQ NEQ NEQ NEQ NEQ
segments)
(i) Blocks Segments (kg) Blocks Segments (kg) Blocks Segments (kg) Blocks Segments (kg) Blocks Segments (kg) Blocks Segments (kg)
(ii)
(vii) (vii) (vii) (vii) (vii) (vii)
1 200 1 0 2 0.2 0 4 0.4 1 1 0.6 1 3 0.8 2 0 1.0 2 2 1.2
2 300 1 1 0 0.5 2 0 1.0 3 0 1.5 4 0 2.0 5 0 2.5 6 0 3.0
3 400 2 1 3 0.8 3 1 1.6 4 4 2.4 6 2 3.2 8 0 4.0 9 3 4.8
4 450 2 2 0 1.0 4 0 2.0 6 0 3.0 8 0 4.0 10 0 5.0 12 0 6.0
5 500 3 2 2 1.2 4 4 2.4 7 1 3.6 9 3 4.8 12 0 6.0 14 2 7.2
6 550 3 3 0 1.5 6 0 3.0 9 0 4.5 12 0 6.0 15 0 7.5 18 0 9.0
7 600 4 3 3 1.8 7 1 3.6 10 4 5.4 14 2 7.2 18 0 9.0 21 3 10.8

RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
8 650 5 4 1 2.1 8 2 4.2 12 3 6.3 16 4 8.4 21 0 10.5 25 1 12.6
9 700 5 4 4 2.4 9 3 4.8 14 2 7.2 19 1 9.6 24 0 12.0 28 4 14.4
10 750 6 5 2 2.7 10 4 5.4 16 1 8.1 21 3 10.8 27 0 13.5 32 2 16.2
Notes: i. For target thickness in excess of 750 mm, use borehole charges.
ii. Segment used to calculate cross section; each segment 40 mm long, with NEQ of 100 g.
iii. Do not interpolate; round up to next target thickness.
iv. In operational circumstances where thickness of target cannot be ascertained, estimate (eg from thickness of other parts of structure) and
then double charge shown in table.
v. For lengths of cut not shown, calculate by table and formula.
vi. Number of 500 g blocks and 100 g segments MUST BE ADDED TOGETHER for specified length of cut.
vii. NEQ of blocks and segments required (indicated in columns preceeding it) for specified length of cut.
RESTRICTED
0526. Calculation using Table and Formula.
a. To calculate the total number of PE blocks for lengths of cut not shown
in Table 5-4, divide the length of cut by the length of a segment (40 mm),
round up to the next whole number and multiply the result by the charge
cross section in Column (c) of Table 5-4. This number is then divided by
5 to calculate the total amount of blocks.
b. Example. Determine the number of blocks of PE required to cut a

200 mm thick and 1200 mm wide timber target.
Charge cross section = 1 segment (from Table 5-4, Serial 1, Column (c))
Number of = Length of cut = 1200 = 30 segments.

segments Length of charge 40
30 segments x cross section (1 segment) = 30 segments.
30 ÷ 5 = 6 blocks
Total = 6 blocks (3 kg) PE.

a. The cross section of the charge required to cut rectangular timber is

calculated using the formula:
Cx = t x Length of segment (mm)

2
42,000,000 Weight of segment (kg)
where Cx is the charge cross section in segments, rounded up to the

next whole number
b. To calculate the total number of blocks needed, divide the length of cut
by the length of the segment (40 mm), round up to the next whole number
and multiply this result by the cross section of charge. This figure then is
divided by 5 to determine the number of blocks and segments.
Note: Do not round up when minimum charge sizes are required. When calculating the total
charge, 0.2 of a block is equal to 1 segment (0.1 kg) of PE.

RESTRICTED
c. Example. Determine the number of blocks of PE required to cut a

300 mm x 300 mm timber baulk.
Charge cross section = 3002 x 40

42,000,000 0.1
= 0.86, round up to 1 segment PE.
Number of = Length of cut = 300 = 7.5, round up to 8.

segments Length of segment 40
Total charge = 8 x 1 = 8 segments PE.
8 ÷ 5 = 1.6 blocks, ie 1 block and 3 segments (0.8 kg).

expedient, where as the formula is more deliberate. When calculating the total charge, 0.2 of
ROUND TIMBER
0528. General. Cutting charges for timber are described below but, because of
the tough and fibrous nature of timber, they are relatively uneconomical and
where time permits borehole charges (see Section 5.6) should be used.
a. The cutting charges required to cut round timber targets up to 750 mm

diameter are summarised in Table 5-5; the explosive charge is rounded
to the nearest block of PE. Borehole charges should be used for
timbers of greater diameter than 750 mm as cutting charges would be
uneconomical.
b. To calculate the charge requirement, select the diameter of the timber in

Column (b) and read across to Columns (c) to (e) to obtain the required
quantity of PE blocks and segments.
Note: Calculation by table is not as accurate as calculation by formula. If deliberate calculations
are required, use the formula.

RESTRICTED
TABLE 5-5 CUTTING CHARGES FOR ROUND TIMBER -

0.5 kg PE BLOCKS AND 0.1 kg SEGMENTS
Timber Total charge required in 500 g Timber Total charge required in 500 g
diameter blocks and 100 g segments diameter blocks and 100 g segments
Serial (d) (ii)(iii)(iv) Serial (d) (ii)(iii)(iv)
(mm) NEQ (kg) (mm) NEQ (kg)
(i) Blocks Segments (i) Blocks Segments
(v) (v)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j)
1 175 0 2 0.2 23 550 10 3 5.3
2 225 0 4 0.4 24 560 11 1 5.6
3 250 1 0 0.5 25 570 11 4 5.9
4 300 1 4 0.9 26 580 12 2 6.2
5 330 2 2 1.2 27 590 13 1 6.6
6 350 2 4 1.4 28 600 13 4 6.9
7 360 3 0 1.5 29 610 14 3 7.3
8 380 3 3 1.8 30 620 15 1 7.6
9 400 4 0 2.0 31 630 16 0 8.0
10 410 4 2 2.2 32 640 16 4 8.4
11 420 4 4 2.4 33 650 17 3 8.8
12 440 5 2 2.7 34 660 18 2 9.2
13 450 5 4 2.9 35 670 19 1 9.6
14 460 6 1 3.1 36 680 20 1 10.1
15 470 6 3 3.3 37 690 21 0 10.5
16 480 7 0 3.5 38 700 22 0 11.0
17 490 7 3 3.8 39 710 23 0 11.5
18 500 8 0 4.0 40 720 23 4 11.9
19 510 8 2 4.2 41 730 24 4 12.4
20 520 9 0 4.5 42 740 26 0 13.0
21 530 9 3 4.8 43 750 27 0 13.5
22 540 10 0 5.0
Notes: i. For targets with diameter in excess of 750 mm, calculate borehole charges using prescribed
formula.
ii. Do not interpolate; round up to next diameter.
iii. Number of 500 g blocks and 100 g segments MUST BE ADDED TOGETHER for specified
diameter.
iv. Each segment 40 mm long, with NEQ of 100 g.
c. Example. Determine the charge required to cut a 540 mm diameter

timber tree using Table 5-5.
Charge (from Serial 22, Columns (c) to (e)) = 10 blocks PE.

RESTRICTED
a. The charges required to cut round timber targets are calculated using the
formula:
Charge C = 32d3 kg
where d is the diameter of the target in metres.
b. Example. Determine the charge required to cut a 320 mm diameter tree.
Charge = 32 x 0.323 = 1.05 kg.

1.05 ÷ 0.5 = 2.1, round up to 2 blocks and 1 segment of PE (1.1 kg).

expedient, whereas the formula is more deliberate. When calculating the total charge, 0.2 of
0531. Placing Charges. The charge must be in contact with the target. The
bark should be removed to ensure close contact between the explosive
and the solid wood. In tree felling, if using a chainsaw is not an option, the
charge should be placed on the same side as the desired direction of fall
(see Figure 5/4). If the tree is leaning in another direction or is affected by
wind, a charge of 1 block of PE (0.5 kg), placed at two-thirds of the height of
the tree on the side opposite the main charge assists in ‘kicking’ the tree in
the desired direction.

RESTRICTED
Direction of fall
PE blocks and Kicking charge

segments moulded
round tree
Binding
Charge 2/3 height

PE blocks of tree
Timber
packing Timber
packing
Section through trunk
Figure 5/4. Tree felling.
0532. Spare.
to
0540.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
SECTION 5.3 CUTTING CHARGES - MASONRY

AND CONCRETE
INTRODUCTION
0541. The section covers the use of PE as a cutting charge for masonry (brick
and stonework) and concrete. The charges are considered under four main
headings:
a. Masonry and Unreinforced Concrete. (See Paragraphs 0543 to 0548).

Although cutting charges provide a quick and effective method of
attacking masonry and unreinforced concrete, they are relatively
expensive in explosives and should not be used for targets thicker than
1.5 m. Borehole charges are slower to prepare but are more economical
in explosives and can be used for targets over 1.5 m thick.
b. Reinforced Concrete - Small Beams and Slabs. (See Paragraphs 0549

to 0552). Cutting charges are an uneconomical method of attacking
reinforced concrete and are only reliable against small beams and slabs
up to 225 mm thick. An alternative method is to use shaped charges.
c. Reinforced Concrete - Large Beams and Slabs. (See Paragraphs 0553

to 0556). Against reinforced concrete beams and slabs deeper than
225 mm, the cutting charges described in this section do not cut all the
reinforcement and therefore are termed ‘concrete stripping charges’. If
sufficient concrete is removed, the structure should collapse under its
own weight.
d. Reinforced Concrete Arches. (See Paragraph 0557).
0542. Principles. The following principles apply to the charges:
a. The shattering effect of the explosive is mainly used, therefore:
(1) In general, no tamping is necessary. However, in the case of

concrete stripping charges, the use of tamping may allow the
charge to be reduced (see Paragraph 0554a(2)).
(2) Close contact between the charge and the target is essential.
The explosive must be moulded so there are no air gaps between
the target and the explosive. With larger charges when complete
full containers of explosives are used, the containers must be
positioned as close together as possible. Large gaps must be
filled with loose explosive.

RESTRICTED
b. The charge must be continuous over the complete line of the cut.
c. The cross section of the charge should be such that the width is between
one and three times the thickness.
d. Charges should be initiated so the detonation wave is at right angles to

the target.
e. The charge should be initiated every 1.5 m or fourth container.
MASONRY AND UNREINFORCED CONCRETE
0543. Walls up to 1.5 m Thick.
a. Calculation using Tables.
(1) The cutting charges required to cut masonry and unreinforced

concrete wall (blocks, kerbs, etc) are summarised in Table 5-6. The
table provides the total charge requirement for cuts up to 1500 mm
thick and 1200 mm in length.
(2) To determine the charge requirement for a cutting charge, select

the thickness of the target to be cut and the length of cut. At the
intersection of the row and column, the total charge required is
shown.
(3) Example. Determine the number of PE blocks required to cut an

unreinforced concrete block 500 mm thick and 1000 mm wide.
Total charge (from Table 5-6, Serial 2, Column (p-r)) = 4 blocks

(2 kg) PE.

TABLE 5-6 CUTTING CHARGES FOR MASONRY AND UNREINFORCED CONCRETE -
0.5 kg PE BLOCKS AND 0.1 kg SEGMENTS
Charge Total charge in 500 g blocks (length 200 mm) plus 100 g segments (length 40 mm) per length of cut (mm) (iii)(iv)(v)(vi)
Target cross
Up to 200 201 - 400 401 - 600 601 - 800 801 - 1000 1001 - 1200
thickness section
Serial
(mm) (100 g NEQ NEQ NEQ NEQ NEQ NEQ
(i) segments) Blocks Segments (kg) Blocks Segments (kg) Blocks Segments (kg) Blocks Segments (kg) Blocks Segments (kg) Blocks Segments (kg)
(ii) (vii) (vii) (vii) (vii) (vii) (vii)
1 400 1 0 3 0.3 1 1 0.6 1 4 0.9 2 2 1.2 3 0 1.5 3 3 1.8
2 500 1 0 4 0.4 1 3 0.8 2 2 1.2 3 1 1.6 4 0 2.0 4 4 2.4
3 600 2 1 1 0.6 2 2 1.2 3 3 1.8 4 4 2.4 6 0 3.0 7 1 3.6
4 700 2 1 3 0.8 3 1 1.6 4 4 2.4 6 2 3.2 8 0 4.0 9 3 4.8
5 800 3 2 1 1.1 4 2 2.2 6 3 3.3 8 4 4.4 11 0 5.5 13 1 6.6
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
6 900 3 2 3 1.3 5 1 2.6 7 4 3.9 10 2 5.2 13 0 6.5 15 3 7.8
7 1000 4 3 1 1.6 6 2 3.2 9 3 4.8 12 4 6.4 16 0 8.0 19 1 9.6
8 1100 4 4 0 2.0 8 0 4.0 12 0 6.0 16 0 8.0 20 0 10.0 24 0 12.0
9 1200 5 4 4 2.4 9 3 4.8 14 2 7.2 19 1 9.6 24 0 12.0 28 4 14.4
10 1300 6 5 3 2.8 11 1 5.6 16 4 8.4 22 2 11.2 28 0 14.0 33 3 16.8
11 1400 7 6 2 3.2 12 4 6.4 19 1 9.6 25 3 12.8 32 0 16.0 38 2 19.2
12 1500 8 7 1 3.6 14 2 7.2 21 3 10.8 28 4 14.4 36 0 18.0 43 1 21.6
Notes: i. For targets over 1.5 m thick, calculate by table and formula.
iii. Do not interpolate; round up to next target thickness.
iv. In operational circumstances where thickness of target cannot be ascertained, estimate (eg from thickness of other parts of structure) and then
double charge shown in table.
v. For lengths of cut not shown, calculate by table and formula.
vi. Number of 500 g blocks and 100 g segments MUST BE ADDED TOGETHER for specified length of cut.
vii. NEQ of blocks and segments required (indicated in columns preceeding it) for specified length of cut.
5-25
RESTRICTED
b. Calculation using Table and Formula.
(1) To calculate the total number of PE blocks and segments for

lengths of cut not shown in Table 5-6, divide the length of cut by the
length of a segment (40 mm), round up to the next whole number
and multiply the result by the charge cross section in Column (c) of
Table 5-6.
(2) Example. Determine the number of PE blocks and segments

required to cut an unreinforced concrete wall 650 mm thick and
2100 mm high, obtaining the charge cross section from Table 5-6,
Column (c).
Charge cross section = 2 segments of PE (Table 5-6, Serial 4,

Columns (c-f)).

106 ÷ 5 = 21.2, therefore 21 blocks and 1 segments (10.6 kg).
c. Calculation using Formula.
(1) The cross section of the charge required to cut masonry and
unreinforced concrete walls (blocks, kerbs, etc) is calculated using
the formula:
Cx = 8t
2
x Length of segment (mm)
1,000,000,000 Weight of segment (kg)
where Cx is the charge cross section in segments, rounded up to

the next whole number.

RESTRICTED
(2) To calculate the total number of blocks and segments needed,

divide the length of cut by the length of the segment, round up to
the next whole number and multiply this result by the cross section
of charge.
(3) Example. Determine the number of PE blocks required to cut an

unreinforced concrete wall 520 mm thick and 2100 mm high.
Charge cross section = 8 x 5202 x 40

1,000,000,000 0.1
= 0.87, round up to 1 segment.

segments Length of segments 40
53 ÷ 5 = 10.6 blocks, therefore 10 blocks and 3 segments (5.3 kg).

Note: This method is more exact than calculating by table only. Tables are designed
to be expedient, whereas the formula is more deliberate. When calculating the total
0544. Arch Rings up to 1.5 m Thick.
a. Calculation using Table. Due to the numerous sizes (lengths of cut) of

arch rings that could be encountered, it is not practical to provide a table
with total charge requirements.
b. Calculation using Tables and Formula.
(1) To calculate the total number of blocks and segments required,

divide the length of cut by the length of the segment, round up to
the next whole number and multiply the result by the charge cross
section in Table 5-7, Column (c) for PE segments.
(2) Example. Determine the number of PE blocks required to cut a

masonry arch ring 600 mm thick and 8550 mm wide.
Charge cross section = 2 segments PE (from Table 5-7, Serial 4,

Column (c)).

RESTRICTED
Number = Length of cut = 8550 = 213.75,

of segments Length of segment 40
round up to 214 segments.
Total charge = 214 x 2 = 428 segments.
428 ÷ 5 = 85.6 blocks, therefore 85 blocks and 3 segments

(42.8 kg).
TABLE 5-7 CUTTING CHARGES FOR MASONRY AND UNREINFORCED

CONCRETE ARCH RINGS CUTTING CHARGES
Serial Target thickness (mm) (i) Charge cross section (100 g segments) (ii)
(a) (b) (c)
1 300 1
2 400 1
3 500 2
4 600 2
5 700 3
6 800 4
7 900 4
8 1000 5
9 1100 6
10 1200 7
11 1300 9
12 1400 10
13 1500 11
Note: i. Do not interpolate; round up to next target thickness or calculate by formula.

(1) The cross section of the charge required to cut arch rings is
calculated using the formula:

RESTRICTED
Cx = 12t
2
x Length of segment (mm)
1,000,000,000 Weight of segment (kg)

the next whole number
(2) To calculate the total number of segments needed, divide the length
of cut by the length of the segment, round up to the next whole
number and multiply this result by the cross section of charge.
0545. Inferior Masonry. For inferior masonry, eg. loose brickwork, stone walls
without mortar, etc, charges may be reduced by up to one half. Charges
may only be reduced when circumstances allow a second attempt if the first
charge is inadequate.
0546. Position of Charges. The following rules apply:
a. Walls. Charges should be continuous along the desired line of cut.
b. Arch Rings. (See Figure 5/5). Charges must be calculated to cut the
full width of the arch ring including any portions beneath spandrel and
parapet walls, etc. The walls must also be cut using the calculations
below.
(1) Top Attack. If the arch ring is to be attacked from the top, any fill
above the line of cut must be removed to allow the charges to be
placed directly on the arch ring. Charges for sections of the arch
ring that are inaccessible, due to spandrel walls, etc, should be
placed against the base of the wall as illustrated in Figure 5/5(a).
(2) Bottom Attack. If the arch ring is to be attacked from below without
removing any fill from above the ring (see Figure 5/5(b)), the charge
must be increased to allow for the support given to the masonry by
the fill:
(a) Solid Concrete Fill. The full thickness of the concrete must
be added to the thickness of the arch ring in calculations.
(b) Well Consolidated Earth or Rubble Fill Topped by a Metalled

Road. Add one half the thickness of the fill to the thickness
of the arch ring in calculations.

RESTRICTED
(c) Loose Earth or Rubble Fill. Add one quarter of the thickness
of the fill to the thickness of the arch ring in calculations.
c. Skew Arches. For economy of explosives, the charge should be at right

angles to the centre line of the bridge. However, this may cause difficulties
in placing the charge on skew arches (eg because of additional fill to be
removed, charge to follow the curvature of arch). Therefore with arches
of small radius or pronounced skew, it is usually necessary to site the
charge nearly parallel to the axis of the vault. In some cases a suitable
intermediate position may be found.
d. Piers. Piers should be destroyed using either breaching charges (Section

5.4), pier footing charges (Section 5.5) or borehole charges (Section 5.6).
Parapet wall
1000 mm 300 mm thick
Charges
2000 mm Spandrell wall
500 mm thick
600 m
Road surface
and fill removed
Charge calculated over line of cut
for portion of arch Charge
ring under spandrell wall
6000 mm
a. Method of placing charges - top attack.
Parapet wall Road surface

Charges
Fill
Spandrell wall
Arch ring t - Thickness
Charge
Width
b. Method of placing charge - bottom attack.
Figure 5/5. Typical masonry arch span.
0547. Example. Determine the number of PE blocks and segments required to

cut the masonry arch span illustrated in Figure 5/5 using a top attack.

RESTRICTED
a. Arch Ring.
Charge cross section = 2 segments (from Table 5-7, Serial 4,

Column (c))
Number of = Length of cut = 6000 = 150.

Total charge = 150 x 2 = 300 segments of PE.
300 ÷ 5 = 60 blocks PE.
b. Spandrel Walls.
Charge cross section = 1 segment (from Table 5-6, Serial 2,

Column (c))
Number = Length of cut = 2000 = 50.

of segments Length of segment 40
Charge = 50 x 1 = 50 segments of PE.
50 ÷ 5 = 10 blocks of PE per wall.
Total charge for two walls = 10 x 2 = 20 blocks of PE.
c. Parapet Walls.
Charge = 3 blocks PE (from Table 5-6, Serial 1,

Columns (p, q and r))
Total charge for two walls = 2 x 3 = 6 blocks of PE.
d. Total Charge for Cut.
Arch ring = 60 blocks

Spandrel walls = 20 blocks
Parapet walls = 6 blocks
Total = 86 blocks of PE.

RESTRICTED
e. Total Charge for Bridge.
Unless there is insufficient time (where one cut at the crown is the
alternative), the bridge should be cut at both haunches.
Total charge = 2 x 86 = 172 blocks (86 kg) of PE.
0548. Opposed (or Counter-force) Charges. The technique uses two charges
placed directly opposite each other and detonated simultaneously.
Therefore the length of detonating cord to the two charges must be equal. It
is effective for demolishing small columns, or blocks of concrete or masonry
not greater than 1 m thick or wide. It is not effective against piers or long
objects. The target must have at least three exposed faces. The total
charge, which is determined by the formula below, is divided into two equal
charges. These are fixed directly opposite each other on two opposing
faces of the target.
a. Calculation using Formula.
Total charge C = 2.24t kg
where t is the thickness of the target in metres.
b. Example. Determine the number of PE blocks required to demolish a

concrete block 0.9 m2.
Charge C = 2.24t kg = 2.24 x 0.9 = 2.016 kg.
Divide by 0.5 to give the number of blocks:
2.016 ÷ 0.5 = 4.032 blocks of PE, or 4 blocks and 1 segment

(rounding up).
Divide by 2 for two charges:
4.1 ÷ 2 = 2 blocks and ½ of a segment on each side of the concrete

block.
REINFORCED CONCRETE - SMALL BEAMS AND SLABS
0549. General. Cutting charges are effective but uneconomical in explosives for
cutting small reinforced concrete beams and slabs up to 225 mm thick.
Therefore, charges are calculated as described in Paragraphs 0550 to 0552.

RESTRICTED
0550. Reinforced Concrete Beams up to 225 mm Thick. The charge must be

continuous over the full depth of the beam.
(1) The cutting charges required to cut small reinforced concrete

beams are summarised in Table 5-8. The table provides the total
charge requirement for cuts up to 225 mm thick and 1200 mm in
length.

shown.

required to cut a reinforced concrete beam 420 mm long and 215
mm thick.
Total charge (from Table 5-8, Serial 20, Columns (j, k and l)) =
36 blocks (18 kg) of PE.
(1) To calculate the total number of PE blocks for lengths of cut

not shown in Table 5-8, divide the length of cut by the length of
a segment, round up to the next whole number and multiply the
result by the charge cross section in Column (c) of Table 5-8.

required to cut a reinforced concrete beam 225 mm thick and
1325 mm in length.
Charge cross section = 13 segments of PE (from Table 5-8,

Serial 22, Column (c)).
Number of = Length of cut = 1325 = 33.125,

round up to 34.

5-34 TABLE 5-8 CUTTING CHARGES FOR SMALL REINFORCED CONCRETE BEAMS
- 0.5 kg PE BLOCKS AND 0.1 kg SEGMENTS
Charge Total charge in 500 g blocks (length 200 mm) plus 100 g segments (length 40 mm) per length of cut (mm) (ii)(iii)(iv)(v)
cross Up to 200 201 - 400 401 - 600 601 - 800 801 - 1000 1001 - 1200
Target
section
Serial thickness NEQ NEQ NEQ NEQ NEQ NEQ
(100 g
(mm)
segments) Blocks Segments (kg) Blocks Segments (kg) Blocks Segments (kg) Blocks Segments (kg) Blocks Segments (kg) Blocks Segments (kg)
(i) (vi) (vi) (vi) (vi) (vi) (vi)
1 90 3 2 1 1.1 4 2 2.2 6 3 3.3 8 4 4.4 11 0 5.5 13 1 6.6
2 100 3 2 3 1.3 5 1 2.6 7 4 3.9 10 2 5.2 13 0 6.5 15 3 7.8
3 110 4 3 1 1.6 6 2 3.2 9 3 4.8 12 4 6.4 16 0 8.0 19 1 9.6
4 115 4 3 2 1.7 6 4 3.4 10 1 5.1 13 3 6.8 17 0 8.5 20 2 10.2
5 125 4 4 0 2.0 8 0 4.0 12 0 6.0 16 0 8.0 20 0 10.0 24 0 12.0
6 130 5 4 2 2.2 8 4 4.4 13 1 6.6 17 3 8.8 22 0 11.0 26 2 13.2
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
7 140 6 5 1 2.6 10 2 5.2 15 3 7.8 20 4 10.4 26 0 13.0 31 1 15.6
8 150 6 5 4 2.9 11 3 5.8 17 2 8.7 23 1 11.6 29 0 14.5 34 4 17.4
9 155 7 6 1 3.1 12 2 6.2 18 3 9.3 24 4 12.4 31 0 15.5 37 1 18.6
10 160 7 6 3 3.3 13 1 6.6 19 4 9.9 26 2 13.2 33 0 16.5 39 3 19.8
11 165 7 7 0 3.5 14 0 7.0 21 0 10.5 28 0 14.0 35 0 17.5 42 0 21.0
12 175 8 8 0 4.0 16 0 8.0 24 0 12.0 32 0 16.0 40 0 20.0 48 0 24.0
13 180 9 8 2 4.2 16 4 8.4 25 1 12.6 33 3 16.8 42 0 21.0 50 2 25.2
14 185 9 8 4 4.4 17 3 8.8 26 2 13.2 35 1 17.6 44 0 22.0 52 4 26.4
15 190 10 9 2 4.7 18 4 9.4 28 1 14.1 37 3 18.8 47 0 23.5 56 2 28.2
16 195 10 9 4 4.9 19 3 9.8 29 2 14.7 39 1 19.6 49 0 24.5 58 4 29.4
17 200 11 10 2 5.2 20 4 10.4 31 1 15.6 41 3 20.8 52 0 26.0 62 2 31.2
18 205 11 10 4 5.4 21 3 10.8 32 2 16.2 43 1 21.6 54 0 27.0 64 4 32.4
19 210 12 11 2 5.7 22 4 11.4 34 1 17.1 45 3 22.8 57 0 28.5 68 2 34.2

20 215 12 12 0 6.0 24 0 12.0 36 0 18.0 48 0 24.0 60 0 30.0 72 0 36.0
21 220 13 12 2 6.2 24 4 12.4 37 1 18.6 49 3 24.8 62 0 31.0 74 2 37.2
22 225 13 13 0 6.5 26 0 13.0 39 0 19.5 52 0 26.0 65 0 32.5 78 0 39.0
iii. In operational circumstances where thickness of target cannot be ascertained, estimate (eg from thickness of other parts of structure) and then double charge shown in table.
RESTRICTED

(44.2 kg) of PE.
Note: When calculating the total charge, 0.2 of a block is equal to 1 segment (0.1 kg)
of PE.
(1) The cross section of the charge required to cut small reinforced
concrete beams is calculated using the formula:
C = 0.64t2 x Length of segment (mm)

x Weight of segment (kg)

t is the thickness of the target in metres.
(2) To calculate the total number of blocks and segments needed,

divide the length of the cut by the length of a segment, round up to
the next whole number and multiply this result by the cross section
of the charge.
(3) Example. Determine the number of blocks and segments PE

required to cut a reinforced concrete beam 215 mm thick and 420
mm in length.
Charge cross section = 0.64 x 0.2152 x 40

0.1
= 11.83, round up to 12 segments of PE.


(13.2 kg).

RESTRICTED
0551. Reinforced Concrete Slabs up to 225 mm Thick. The charge must be

continuous over the full width of the slab.
(1) The results of the formula for small reinforced concrete slabs are
summarised in Table 5-9. The table provides the total charge
requirement for cuts up to 225 mm thick and 1200 mm in length.

shown.
(3) Example. Determine the number of PE blocks required to cut a

reinforced concrete slab 210 mm thick and 1200 mm in length.
Total charge (from Table 5-9, Serial 10, Columns (s,t and u)) =
34 blocks and 4 segments (17.4 kg) of PE.
(1) To calculate the total number of PE blocks and segments for

lengths of cut not shown in Table 5-9, divide the length of cut by
the length of a segment, round up to the next whole number and
multiply the result by the charge cross section in Column (c) of
Table 5-9.

required to cut a reinforced concrete slab 210 mm thick and 2150
mm in length, obtaining the charge cross section from Table 5-9,
Column (c).
Charge cross section = 6 segments of PE (Table 5-9, Serial 10,

Column (c)).


TABLE 5-9 CUTTING CHARGES FOR SMALL REINFORCED CONCRETE SLABS
Charge Total charge in 500 g blocks (length 200 mm) plus 100 g segments (length 40 mm) per length of cut (mm) (ii)(iii)(iv)(v)
cross
Target Up to 200 201 to 400 401 - 600 601 - 800 801 - 1000 1001 - 1200
section
Serial thickness
(100 g NEQ NEQ NEQ NEQ NEQ NEQ
(mm)
segments) Blocks Segments (kg) Blocks Segments (kg) Blocks Segments (kg) Blocks Segments (kg) Blocks Segments (kg) Blocks Segments (kg)
(i) (vi) (vi) (vi) (vi) (vi) (vi)
1 90 2 1 1 0.6 2 2 1.2 3 3 1.8 4 4 2.4 6 0 3.0 7 1 3.6
2 110 2 1 3 0.8 3 1 1.6 4 4 2.4 6 2 3.2 8 0 4.0 9 3 4.8
3 125 2 2 0 1.0 4 0 2.0 6 0 3.0 8 0 4.0 10 0 5.0 12 0 6.0
4 140 3 2 3 1.3 5 1 2.6 7 4 3.9 10 2 5.2 13 0 6.5 15 3 7.8
5 155 4 3 1 1.6 6 2 3.2 9 3 4.8 12 4 6.4 16 0 8.0 19 1 9.6
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
6 165 4 3 3 1.8 7 1 3.6 10 4 5.4 14 2 7.2 18 0 9.0 21 3 10.8
7 180 5 4 1 2.1 8 2 4.2 12 3 6.3 16 4 8.4 21 0 10.5 25 1 12.6
8 190 5 4 4 2.4 9 3 4.8 14 2 7.2 19 1 9.6 24 0 12.0 28 4 14.4
9 200 6 5 1 2.6 10 2 5.2 15 3 7.8 20 4 10.4 26 0 13.0 31 1 15.6
10 210 6 5 4 2.9 11 3 5.8 17 2 8.7 23 1 11.6 29 0 14.5 34 4 17.4
11 220 7 6 1 3.1 12 2 6.2 18 3 9.3 24 4 12.4 31 0 15.5 37 1 18.6
12 225 7 6 3 3.3 13 1 6.6 19 4 9.9 26 2 13.2 33 0 16.5 39 3 19.8
iii. In operational circumstances where thickness of target cannot be ascertained, estimate (eg from thickness of other parts of structure) and then double charge shown
in table.
5-37
RESTRICTED
324 ÷ 5 = 64.8 blocks of PE, therefore 64 blocks and 4 segments

(32.4 kg) of PE.
Note: When calculating the total charge, 0.2 of a block is equal to 1 segment (0.1 kg)
of PE.
(1) The cross section of the charge required to cut small reinforced
concrete slabs is calculated using the formula:
Cx = 0.32t2 x Length of segment (mm)

Weight of segment (kg)

t is the thickness of the target in metres.
(2) To calculate the total number of blocks needed, divide the length
of the cut by the length of the segment, round up to the next whole
number and multiply this result by the cross section of the charge.
0552. T-Beams. T-beams (composite beam and slab constructions) are cut using
the appropriate table or formula for each section of the construction.
REINFORCED CONCRETE - LARGE BEAMS AND SLABS

(CONCRETE STRIPPING CHARGES)
0553. General. Cutting charges do not cut all the reinforcing bars in large beams
and slabs. The best that can be achieved is to remove all the concrete
and damage the reinforcing bars sufficiently to enable the beam or slab
to collapse under its own weight. This is possible with simply supported
beams up to 2 m deep. A typical result of a concrete stripping charge
is illustrated in Figure 5/6. All the concrete in a specified wedge shape
must be removed from the top of the beam or slab, if it is not to jam during
collapse (see Figure 5/7). The minimum width of this wedge for successful
collapse is Lc. Further details of Lc are given in Chapter 10. Top attack is
necessary to create the wedge shape and the overall effect is to:

RESTRICTED
a. Remove all concrete down to the main reinforcement.
b. Remove all concrete below the main reinforcement by spalling.
c. Destroy minor reinforcement near the surface on which the charge is

placed.
d. Damage the main reinforcement.
Minor reinforcement
destroyed by charge
Main reinforcement
slightly damaged
Concrete removed by spalling
Figure 5/6. Effect of concrete stripping charge.
R2 R2
R1 R1
For collapse, wedge thickness must be

such that R2 is less than R1
Figure 5/7. Minimum width of wedge for collapse.
a. The concrete stripping charges required to cut large beams and slabs are
summarised in Table 5-10. The table provides the following information:
(1) PE charges in kilograms per metre run for targets ranging from
0.3 m to 2.0 m in depth, in 50 mm increments.

RESTRICTED
(2) Tamped PE charges in kilograms per metre run for targets ranging
from 0.3 m to 2.0 m in depth, in 50 mm increments.
Note: Tamping with two filled sandbags per kilogram of explosive allows the weight
of the charge to be reduced by one third.
(3) Width of wedge formed (‘wedge width’), for PE charges in kilograms

per metre run for targets ranging from 0.3 m to 2.0 m in depth, in 50
mm increments.
b. To determine the charge requirement where Lc for a top attack is not

applicable:
(1) Select the appropriate depth in Column (b) and read across for
either the untamped or tamped charge of kilogram per metre run.
(2) Multiply the width of the slab or beam in metres by the charge
selected.
(3) Divide the answer by 2 (explosive weight of an Inner Tactical

Package (ITP)).
Notes: 1. For small targets, it is more economical to divide the answer by the weight
of a PE block.
2. For a two-stage attack, calculations to cut the reinforcement must be based
on CD14 (length of cut divided by 241 mm).
(4) Example. Determine the number of ITP required to strip a concrete

slab 0.4 m thick and 1.75 m wide (charge untamped).
Charge per metre run (from Table 5-10, Serial 3, Column (f))
= 9.1 kg/m.
Total charge = 9.1 x 1.75 = 15.925 kg.
Divide by 2 to determine the number of ITP:
15.93 ÷ 2 = 7.97, round up to 8 ITP.
c. To determine the charge requirement to ensure the wedge width exceeds

the Lc required by the method of attack:
(1) Determine Lc as described in Chapter 10.

RESTRICTED
(2) Select the appropriate depth in Column (b) and compare the
wedge width with Lc. If the wedge width is equal to or greater
than Lc, read across for either the untamped or tamped charge of
kilogram per metre run. If the wedge width is less than Lc, refer to
Sub-paragraph 0554c(3).
(3) Select the wedge width in Column (c) that is equal to or greater
than Lc and read across for either the untamped or tamped charge
of kilogram per metre run.
(4) Multiply the width of the target (slab or beam) in metres by the
charge selected.
(5) Divide the answer by 2 (explosive weight of an Inner Tactical

Package (ITP)).
(6) Example. Determine the number of ITP required to strip a simply

supported concrete slab 1 m thick and 6 m wide with an Lc of
2.31 m (charge untamped).
Wedge width = Select 2.4 m from Table 5-10, Serial 16,

Column (c).
Charge per metre run (from Table 5-10, Serial 16, Column (f))
= 93.6 kg/m.
Total charge = 93.6 x 6 = 561.6 kg.
Divide by 2 to determine the number of ITP:
561.6 ÷ 2 = 280.3, round up to 281 ITP.

5-42 TABLE 5-10 CONCRETE STRIPPING CHARGES - 0.5 kg PE BLOCKS AND 0.1 kg SEGMENTS
Total charge (untamped) Total charge (untamped)

Total charge (tamped) weight Total charge (tamped) weight
weight in 500 g blocks and weight in 500 g blocks and
Wedge in 500 g blocks and 100 g Wedge in 500 g blocks and 100 g
Depth 100 g segments per metre Depth 100 g segments per metre
width segments per metre run (ii) width segments per metre run (ii)
Serial (m) run (ii) Serial (m) run (ii)
(m) (m)
(i) NEQ NEQ (i) NEQ NEQ
(i) (i)
Blocks Segments (kg) Blocks Segments (kg) Blocks Segments (kg) Blocks Segments (kg)
(iii) (iii) (iii) (iii)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i)
1 0.30 0.9 10 0 5.0 6 4 3.4 19 1.20 2.7 266 1 133.1 177 3 88.8
2 0.35 1.0 13 3 6.8 9 1 4.6 20 1.25 2.8 296 4 148.4 198 0 99.0
3 0.40 1.1 18 1 9.1 12 1 6.1 21 1.30 2.9 329 4 164.9 220 0 110.0
4 0.45 1.2 23 3 11.8 15 4 7.9 22 1.35 3.0 365 0 182.5 243 2 121.7
5 0.50 1.3 30 0 15.0 20 0 10.0 23 1.40 3.1 402 3 201.3 268 3 134.3
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
6 0.55 1.4 37 2 18.7 25 0 12.5 24 1.45 3.2 442 4 221.4 295 2 147.7
7 0.60 1.5 45 4 22.9 30 3 15.3 25 1.50 3.3 485 3 242.8 323 4 161.9
8 0.65 1.6 55 3 27.8 37 1 18.6 26 1.55 3.4 531 1 265.6 354 1 177.1
9 0.70 1.7 66 3 33.3 44 2 22.2 27 1.60 3.5 579 2 289.7 386 2 193.2
10 0.75 1.8 79 0 39.5 52 4 26.4 28 1.65 3.6 630 2 315.2 420 2 210.2
11 0.80 1.9 93 0 46.5 62 0 31.0 29 1.70 3.7 684 1 342.2 456 1 228.1
12 0.85 2.0 108 2 54.2 72 2 36.2 30 1.75 3.8 741 1 370.6 494 1 247.1
13 0.90 2.1 125 2 62.7 83 3 41.8 31 1.80 3.9 801 1 400.6 534 1 267.1
14 0.95 2.2 144 1 72.1 96 1 48.1 32 1.85 4.0 864 2 432.2 576 2 288.2
15 1.00 2.3 164 4 82.4 109 4 54.9 33 1.90 4.1 930 4 465.4 620 3 310.3
16 1.05 2.4 187 1 93.6 124 4 62.4 34 1.95 4.2 1000 3 500.3 667 1 333.6
17 1.10 2.5 211 2 105.7 141 0 70.5 35 2.00 4.3 1073 4 536.9 716 0 358.0
18 1.15 2.6 237 4 118.9 158 3 79.3
Notes: i. If depth of target/wedge width not shown, round up to next depth/wedge width or calculate by formula.
ii. NEQ of blocks and segments required (indicated in columns preceeding it) for specified length of cut.
iii. Number of 500 g blocks and 100 g segments MUST BE ADDED TOGETHER for specified length of cut.
RESTRICTED
a. Calculate the charge using the following formulae:
(1) Charge Weight.
Cw = 1.5 (3.3h + 0.5)3 kg/m
where Cw is the charge weight per metre across the beam or slab
h is the overall depth of the beam or slab in metres,
including any covering such as road surfacing. The
minimum value is 0.3 m.
(2) Width of Wedge Formed.
D = 2h + 0.3
where D is the width of the wedge in metres

h is the overall depth of the beam or slab in metres,
including any covering such as road surfacing. The
minimum value is 0.3 m.
b. Example: Determine the untamped charge required to strip a beam 0.35 m

wide and 1.2 m deep.
Cw = 1.5 (3.3 x 1.2 + 0.5)3 = 133.08 kg/m run
Therefore C = 133.08 x 0.35 = 46.58 kg.
Divide by 2 to determine the number of Inner Tactical Package (ITP):
46.58 kg ÷ 2 = 23.29, round up to 24 ITP.
Wedge width = 2 x 1.2 + 0.3 = 2.7 m.
0556. Beam and Slab Constructions. For spans consisting of beams and slabs,
the charge is calculated separately for each beam and slab. However, if
time is short, the charge should be calculated for the greatest depth and
then applied across the full width of the span. This saves time but wastes
explosive.
a. Example 1. Determine the charge required to demolish the beam and

slab span illustrated in Figure 5/8.

RESTRICTED
2 ITP (2 kg) PE
24 ITP (2 kg) PE
3 ITP (2 kg) PE
0.30 m
1.2 m
Slab
Beam 0.9 m
0.35 m 0.45 m
Figure 5/8. Section through span.
(1) Each Beam.
Charge weight for beam depth of 1.2 m = 133.1 kg/m

(from Table 5-10, Serial 19, Column (f))
Beam width = 0.35 m
Therefore charge = 133.1 x 0.35 = 46.59 kg.
Divide by weight of Inner Tactical Package (ITP) (2 kg) = 23.30.
Round up to 24 ITP.
(2) Inner Slabs.
Charge weight for slab depth of 0.3 m = 5 kg/m

(from Table 5-10, Serial 1, Column (f))
Slab width = 0.9 m
Therefore charge = 5 x 0.9 = 4.5 kg.
Divide by weight of ITP (2 kg) = 2.25.
Round up to 3 ITP.
(3) Outer Slabs.
Charge weight for slab depth of 0.3 m = 5 kg/m

(From Table 5-10, Serial 1, Column (f))
Slab width = 0.45 m
Therefore charge = 5 x 0.45 = 2.25 kg.
Round up to 2 ITP.

RESTRICTED
(4) Total Charge for Span.
5 x beams = 5 x 24 = 120
4 x 0.9 m slabs = 4 x 3 = 12
2 x 0.45 m slabs = 2 x 2 = 4
Total = 136 ITP.
Note: When ordering bulk explosive on AF W4012, round up to nearest 10 kg Outer
Tactical Package.
b. Example 2. Determine the charge required to demolish the beam and

slab span illustrated in Figure 5/8 using tamped charges.
(1) Each Beam.
Charge weight for beam depth of 1.2 m = 88.8 kg/m

(from Table 5-10, Serial 19, Column (i))
Beam width = 0.35 m
Divide by weight of Inner Tactical Package (ITP) (2 kg) = 15.54.
Round up to = 16 ITP.
Sandbags required = 31.08 x 2 = 62.16

= 63 sandbags.
(2) Inner Slabs.
Charge weight for slab depth of 0.3 m = 3.4 kg/m

Slab width = 0.9 m

= 7 sandbags.

RESTRICTED
(3) Outer Slabs.
Charge weight for slab depth of 0.3 m = 3.4 kg/m

Slab width = 0.45 m
Therefore charge = 3.4 x 0.45
= 1.53 kg.

= 4 sandbags.
(4) Total Charge for Span.
5 x beams = 5 x 16 = 80
4 x 0.9 m slabs = 4 x 2 = 8
2 x 0.45 m slabs = 2 x 1 = 2
Total = 90 ITP.
(5) Total Sandbags for Span.
5 x beams = 5 x 63 = 315
4 x 0.9 m slabs = 4 x 7 = 28
2 x 0.45 m slabs = 2 x 4 = 8
Total = 351 sandbags.

RESTRICTED
REINFORCED CONCRETE ARCHES
0557. Reinforced concrete arch rings may be supporting a vertical load, eg in a

bridge, or a horizontal load such as in the wall of a dam (see Chapter 9).
a. Bridges. Where the reinforced concrete arch ring is part of a bridge to be

demolished and a complete cut across the span is required, a concrete
stripping charge is used. It is placed on the arch ring in a similar way to
a cutting charge for unreinforced concrete (see Paragraph 0544).
b. Dams. Where the reinforced concrete arch ring is part of a structure such
as a multiple arch dam (see Chapter 9) and the requirement is to punch a
hole in the arch, the size of the charge is calculated by the formula below.
The charge should be placed below the surface of the water at a depth at
least equal to the thickness of the arch ring.
(1) Calculation by Formula.
Charge C = 32t3 kg
where t is the thickness of the arch ring in metres at the point of

attack.
0558. Spare.
to
0560.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
SECTION 5.4 BREACHING CHARGES

0561. Introduction. Breaching charges provide a rough and ready method of
destroying reinforced concrete piers, obstacles such as dragons teeth and
walls. Charges are calculated from Table 5-11 and are very expensive in
explosives. They utilise the shattering effect of explosive therefore:
a. No tamping is necessary.
b. Close contact between the charge and the target is essential. The
explosive must be fixed so that there are no air gaps between the target
and the explosive. With larger charges when complete full containers of
explosives are used, the containers must be positioned as close together
as possible. Large gaps must be packed with explosives.
c. Charges should be initiated so that the detonation wave is at right angles

to the target.
TABLE 5-11 BREACHING CHARGES FOR OBSTACLES, WALLS

AND REINFORCED CONCRETE PIERS
Serial Target Weight of explosive Remarks

per m3 to be
removed (kg)
(a) (b) (c) (d)
1 Reinforced concrete obstacles, 16 If reinforcement is heavy,
eg blocks, dragons’ teeth and double charge
cubes
2 Masonry walls with no 16 Length of wall attacked
reinforcement should not be less than
height
3 Reinforced concrete walls with 32 As for Serial No 2
reinforcement not denser than
230 mm spacing
4 Reinforced concrete piers, and 64 As for Serial No 2
walls with reinforcement denser
than 230 mm spacing
0562. Calculation by Table and Formula.
a. To determine the total number of PE blocks required for breaching

charges, calculate the volume of the obstacle or required breach in m3
and multiply the result by the weight of explosive per m3 from Table 5-11,
Column (c).

RESTRICTED
b. Volume Formula.
Wall = width of breach x thickness x height = m3.
Cube/block = width x thickness x height = m3.
Pyramid = base width x thickness x height = m3.

3
0563. Small Obstacles (Dragons’ Teeth, Cubes, etc).
a. Reinforcement should be assumed to be heavy in the absence of other

information. The ratio of the width to thickness of charge should be
approximately 4:1. The centre of the charge should be at about one third
of the height of the obstacle. Dragons’ teeth prepared for demolition are
illustrated in Figure 5/9.
b. Example. Determine the number of PE blocks required to demolish a

dragon’s tooth with heavy reinforcement and the following dimensions:
length 1.5 m, width 1.3 m and height 1.5 m.
Volume = 1.5 x 1.3 x 1.5 = 0.975 m3.

3
Weight of explosive = 32 kg/m3 (from Table 5-11, Serial 1,

Columns (c) and (d)).
Charge = 0.975 x 32 = 31.2 kg.
Divide by 0.5 to give the number of blocks:
31.2 ÷ 0.5 = 62.4 blocks of PE, therefore 62 blocks and 2 segments.


RESTRICTED
Figure 5/9. Dragons’ teeth prepared for destruction.
0564. Walls (including Reinforced).
a. The charge should be placed on the face of the wall as illustrated in

Figure 5/10. The bottom edge of the the charge should be at least 300
mm above ground level. Three quarters of the charge should be placed
to outline the area of the breach (ABCD in Figure 5/10) and the remainder
placed in the centre of the breach (E in Figure 5/10). The ratio of the
width to thickness of charge should be approximately 4:1. The maximum
thickness is normally one box of explosives but with exceptionally large
charges this maximum may be exceeded in order to position the charges
correctly.

RESTRICTED
A E
B
Timber strutting
D
300 mm minimum
above ground level
Boxes of Packing
explosives
Figure 5/10. Breaching charge on concrete wall.
b. Example. Determine the charge required to form an 8 m wide breach in

an unreinforced masonry wall 5 m high and 1 m thick.
Volume to be removed = 8 x 1 x 5 = 40 m3.
Charge = 16 (from Table 5-11, Serial 2) x volume = 16 x 40 = 640 kg PE.
Divide by 2 to determine the number of Inner Tactical Packages (ITP):
640 ÷ 2 = 320 ITP or 64 Outer Tactical Packages (OTP).
Charge placement:
64 ÷ 4 = 16, therefore place 16 OTP in the centre of the breach and 48

OTP around the perimeter.
0565. Reinforced Concrete Piers. Breaching charges are suitable for attacking
reinforced concrete piles and trestles, and relatively slender reinforced
concrete piers (an alternative is to use linear shaped charges). For piers
over approximately 1 m thick, borehole charges should normally be used to
economise on explosives. The following must be observed when calculating
and positioning charges:

RESTRICTED
a. In calculating the volume of concrete to be removed, the full width of

the pier must be taken and the height must be at least equal to the pier
thickness.
b. The reinforcement must be assumed to be heavy and Serial 4 of Table

5-11 used in calculations. Serial 3 may only be used if it is definitely
known, ie from drawings, that the reinforcement is light.
c. The charge should be continuous across the full width of the pier as
illustrated in Figure 5/11. The height above ground level of the centre of
the charge should be at least equal to the thickness of the pier. If the pier
is standing in water, increased effect is obtained if the charge is placed
below the water surface.
d. The maximum thickness of charge is one Outer Tactical Package.
Centre of
charge at least
thickness
of pier (t)
above
Height taken
ground level
must not be
H
less than
pier thickness (t)
Charge
Volume to be
attacked
pier thickness (t)
Figure 5/11. Breaching charge on reinforced concrete pier.
0566. Spare.
to
0570.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
SECTION 5.5 PIER FOOTING CHARGES

0571. Introduction. Pier footing charges are used to demolish masonry and
unreinforced concrete piers. They are not as economical in explosives as
borehole charges (see Section 5.6) but are much quicker. They utilise both
the shattering and pressure effects of the explosion and therefore:
a. The charges must be in close contact with the target.
b. The charges must be tamped with two filled sandbags per kg of explosive.
If tamping is impossible the charges must be doubled.
Note: As an expedient when time is short and if the position of the charges allows, an
equivalent thickness of earth may be placed directly over the charges, eg using a tipper or
tractor. Special care must be taken to protect the firing circuits and charges from damage.
c. The face of the target opposite to that on which the charges are placed
must be free to move.
TABLE 5-12 WEIGHT OF PIER FOOTING CHARGES FOR

MASONRY AND UNREINFORCED CONCRETE PIERS
Serial Target Weight of charge in kg

(a) (b) (c)
1 Piers up to 1.8 m thick Each charge 15 times the thickness of the pier in
metres
2 Piers from 1.8 to 2.7 m thick Each charge 30 times the thickness of the pier in
metres
Note: For piers over 2.7 m thick, use borehole charges.
0572. Position and Shape of Charges. The charges should be placed not more
than the thickness of the pier apart, with the outer charges no more than half
the thickness of the pier from the ends, as illustrated in Figure 5/12b. Ideally
the shape of each charge should be placed using the following ratio:
Length : height : thickness = 4 : 2 : 1,
ie the length of the charge should be twice the height and the height should
be equal to twice the thickness of the charge.

RESTRICTED
0573. Calculation using Table. The charges are calculated from the parameters
shown in Table 5-12. The charge calculations are summarised in Table 5-13:
the charges are calculated and rounded up to the nearest 2 kg charge holder
of PE in its tactical packaging.
Note: This allows for economy of explosives, however part charges require containers to provide
protection from tamping and moisture.
0574. Example. Determine the charges required to destroy an unreinforced

concrete pier 10 m long and 1.5 m thick.
a. Individual Charge. From Table 5-13, either:
Serial 6, Column (c) = 22.5 kg PE

Serial 6, Column (d) = 2.4 Outer Tactical Packages (OTP) (10 kg).
b. Number of Charges.
Number = Length of pier = 10 = 6.66, round up to nearest

Thickness of pier 1.5 whole number = 7.
c. Total Explosives. Either:
22.5 x 7 = 157.5 kg PE
2.4 OTP (10 kg) x 7 = 16.8 OTP.
Note: When ordering bulk explosive on AF W4012, round total explosive charge up to whole
containers.
d. Position of Charges.
(1) Inner Spacing Distance. Divide the length of the pier by the number
of charges:
10 ÷ 7 = 1.43 m (centre-to-centre).
(2) Outer Spacing Distance. Divide the charge spacing by 2:
1.43 ÷ 2 = 0.72 m (from outer edge of pier to centre of charge).

Note: There is a negligible difference between the width of the pier and the total
spacing distance due to rounding up.

TABLE 5-13 PIER FOOTING CHARGES (TAMPED WEIGHT) FOR MASONRY AND UNREINFORCED
CONCRETE PIERS - 0.5 kg PE BLOCKS AND 0.1 kg SEGMENTS
PE charge (tamped) PE charge (tamped)

Pier thickness NEQ of footing required (ii) Pier thickness NEQ of footing required (ii)
Serial (t) charge in kg Serial (t) charge in kg
(m) (i) (t x 15) PE 10 kg Outer (m) (i) (t x 30) PE 10 kg Outer
Tactical Package (iii) Tactical Package (iii)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (d)
1 1.0 15.0 1.6 10 1.90 57.0 5.8
2 1.1 16.5 1.8 11 2.00 60.0 6.0
3 1.2 18.0 2.0 12 2.10 63.0 6.6
4 1.3 19.5 2.0 13 2.20 66.0 6.8
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
5 1.4 21.0 2.4 14 2.30 69.0 7.0
6 1.5 22.5 2.4 15 2.40 72.0 7.4
7 1.6 24.0 2.6 16 2.50 75.0 7.6
8 1.7 25.5 2.8 17 2.60 78.0 8.0
9 1.8 27.0 2.8 18 2.70 81.0 8.4
Notes: i. If target thickness not shown, round up to next pier thickness.

ii. Double charge if tamping of two filled sandbags per kg not possible. For piers in water, see Sub-paragraph 0575.
iii. Charges rounded up to 0.2 of 10 kg Outer Tactical Package (ie 4 x 0.5 kg PE blocks).
5-57
RESTRICTED
Probable breach
a. General view. B
b. Enlargement of
pier at B
t
(tamping omitted). 2
t
Ma t
xim t
um
dis 2
tan
ces
Charges
Ideal shape for each charge:
Length : Height : Thickness = 4:2:1
Filling and
tamping Difference Tamping
in ground
Charge
level
Platform 0.45 m
minimum 0.45 m
Charge
c. Charge placement for pier on hillside. d. Charge raised 0.45 m (where excavation
is not possible).
Earth dug or
Filling and Water level
dozed away
tamping
to minimum
Depth t or
Charge depth of 0.45 m
Charge in greater
close
contact
with pier
e. Charge placed at ground level. f. Charge placed on pier standing in water.
Figure 5/12. Pier footing charges.

RESTRICTED
0575. Location of Charges. There are three locations of a pier that affect the
placing of charges:
a. Pier on Slope. (See Figure 5/12c). When the pier is located on a slope,
the charges must be placed on the uphill side, either at ground level or
just below ground level. The latter assists in tamping the charge. The
difference in height between the bottom of the charge and ground level
on the opposite side of the pier must be a minimum of 0.45 m.
b. Pier on Level Ground. When the pier is on level ground the charges must
be positioned so there is a difference in height of 0.45 m between the
bottom of the charges and the level of the ground on the opposite side
of the pier. This can be achieved either by raising the charges off the
ground, as illustrated in Figure 5/12d, or by digging away the ground on
the opposite side as shown in Figure 5/12e.
c. Pier Standing in Water. (See Figure 5/12f). When a pier is standing in

water, the charges may be placed under water and the water acts as
tamping. If the depth of water to the top of the charges is equal to or
great than the thickness of the pier, no tamping is required. If the charges
are placed at a lesser depth, they must be increased proportionately
to compensate for the reduced tamping. For example, if the charges
are placed at a depth equal to half the thickness of the pier, the charge
weight should be increased by one half; if the charges are at or above the
water surface, they should be doubled.
0576. Spare.
to
0580.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
SECTION 5.6 BOREHOLE CHARGES

INTRODUCTION
0581. Borehole charges are charges placed in holes drilled into the target. They are
an effective and economical way of demolishing masonry or large concrete
walls, piers and arch rings, timber supports and trees. They may also be used
to destroy reinforced concrete beams and piers but, although economical in
explosives, it is a slow method because of the time taken to drill the holes.
Borehole charges are not suitable for destroying either abutments, where
only one face is exposed, or hollow or rubble-filled piers. With abutments,
the detonation tends to produce a series of cones on the open side of the
abutment without causing collapse. With hollow or masonry-filled piers, the
boreholes tend to collapse making charging difficult if not impossible and, if
successfully charged, the effects of the detonation may be dissipated in the
loose filling.
0582. Borehole charges utilise both the shattering and pressure effects from
detonation, therefore:
a. The PE charge must be pushed firmly into the borehole with a wooden
tamping rod so it is squashed into contact with the sides of the borehole.
b. The unfilled entrance to the hole must be filled with tamping material.
0583. Drilling Holes. Forming the boreholes is the critical and time consuming
aspect of using borehole charges. The following methods may be used:
a. Power Tools. The use of power tools is a reliable but comparatively

slow method, especially when drilling into reinforced concrete when it
is a matter of trial and error whether the drill hits the reinforcing bars.
The most likely tools to be used are the Combat Power Tool Kit or the
Hydraulic Power Tool Kit. The drill sizes available with these kits are
given below and the kits are described in Military Engineering Volume II
Pamphlet 1, Part 2 Tools and Skills.
(1) Combat Power Tools - Makita Drilling and Braking Hammer. The
equipment has rock drill bits of 45 and 51 mm diameter. The
length of the bits are 900 mm and two 900 mm extension rods are
supplied. Other drills in the kit have various masonry drill bits with
diameters up to 50 mm, but with the exception of one 51 mm bit of
length 400 mm, their lengths are limited to 250 mm.

RESTRICTED
(2) Hydraulic Power Tool Kit - Sinker Drill. The drill has bit diameters
of 25 to 75 mm and is capable of drilling to depths of 6 m. The
time taken to drill boreholes with these equipments in masonry or
concrete varies between 7 and 12 minutes per metre run depending
on conditions. This does not include the time required for setting
up. Drilling times for reinforced concrete cannot be accurately
predicted owing to the unknown position of the the reinforcing
bars. If the reinforcement is very dense, the use of conical shaped
charges or the thermic lance is recommended. (See Table 9-2).
b. Conical Shaped Charges. Conical shaped charges produce a hole

relatively quickly but the results are less predictable and the depth of the
hole is limited. It is only practicable to blow holes in piers from one side,
which limits the thickness of the pier that can be prepared in this way.
c. Thermic Boring. Thermic boring is a quick method of producing holes

in metal or concrete. A thermic lance is used to melt the target material
and thus produce a hole. The Military Engineer (Fabricator and Welder) is
trained in the technique; though the equipment is not a standard Service
item, it can be obtained on the civil market. It gives a considerable
saving in time and labour if extensive boring is required, but the lance and
oxygen are rapidly consumed. An indication of the equipment required
and performance is given below:
(1) Equipment.
Lance holder and vale, into which the lance is screwed.

A stand to hold oxygen bottles, fitted with a manifold, valve and
high pressure regulator.
An armoured hose connecting the lance holder to the oxygen
supply.
An oxy-acetylene welding torch.
Protection for the operator in the form of a shield or asbestos suit.
(2) Output. The following figures are for a lance of 9.4 mm internal
diameter drilling in concrete:
Diameter of hole 58 mm very approximately

Rate of drilling 0.3 m in 1.5 to 2.0 min
(including changes of lance)
Oxygen used 0.85 m3 per 0.3 m drilled
Lance used 2.15 to 2.45 m per 0.3 m drilled.

RESTRICTED
BRIDGE PIERS
0584. To demolish a pier, a number of rows of boreholes are constructed in the

pier. The procedure is as follows:
a. Determine the position at which the pier is to be demolished and measure

the width and thickness. In arch bridges, the boreholes should be below
the springing line of the arch, ie the line along which the lower side of
the arch and the vertical face meet. Attacking above the springing line
is uneconomical because of the increased thickness of the piers and
unreliable as the charge may merely blow away the fill above the arch
ring leaving the pier and span intact.
b. Calculation by Tables and Formula. Determine:
(1) The number of horizontal rows of boreholes (from Table 5-14,

Column (d)).
(2) Calculate the number of boreholes in each row. They are normally
at 1 m spacing and must extend across the full width of the pier.
The boreholes at the ends of the row must be at least 0.5 m from
the ends of the pier.
(a) When two or more rows are required, the boreholes in

adjacent rows must be staggered. This normally results in
one row having one hole less than the other. When three
rows are necessary, the top and bottom rows should be long
with the short row in the centre.
(b) When piers are drilled from both sides, the rows of holes on
opposite sides must correspond in level and be staggered
horizontally, so there is one less borehole on one side.
(3) The vertical spacing between rows (from Table 5-14, Column (e)).
(4) The depth of boreholes (from Table 5-14, Column (f)).
(5) The charge per borehole (from Table 5-15).
(6) The total charge required, by multiplying the charge per borehole
by the number of boreholes.

RESTRICTED
TABLE 5-14 CONFIGURATION OF BOREHOLE CHARGES IN PIERS
Number of Vertical
Pier description Depth
horizontal spacing
Serial of holes
rows of between
Material Thickness (t) (m) (m)
holes rows
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
1 Brick or masonry Up to 1.8 m 2 2t 2t
3 3
2 Plain or reinforced Up to 1.8 m 3 2t 2t
concrete 3 3
3 Brick, masonry, plain or Over 1.8 m to 2.7 m 3 2t 2t
reinforced concrete 3 3
4 Brick, masonry, plain or Over 2.7 m to 3.6 m 3 each side 2t t
5 Brick, masonry, plain or Over 2.7 m to 3.6 m 3 on one side 2t 2t
6 Brick, masonry, plain or Over 3.6 m to 4.8 m 3 each side 2t t
7 Brick, masonry, plain or Over 3.6 m to 4.8 m 3 on one side 2t 2t
Note: Serial 7 applies when using hydraulic power tools.
0585. Example. Determine the explosive required to demolish a reinforced

concrete pier 1.2 m thick and 8.0 m wide using borehole charges (see Figure
5/13).
Number of rows of boreholes = 3 (from Table 5-14, Serial 2, Column (d))
Number of boreholes = 8 in row 1

7 in row 2
8 in row 3
Total number of boreholes = 23 boreholes
Vertical spacing between rows = 2t = 2 x 1.2 = 0.8 m (from Table 5-14,

3 3 Serial 2, Column (e))
Depth of boreholes = 2t = 2 x 1.2 = 0.8 m (from Table 5-14,

3 3 Serial 2, Column (f))

RESTRICTED
Charge per borehole = 2.3 kg of PE7 (from Table 5-15,

Serial 3, Column (e))
Total charge = 23 x 2.3 = 52.9 kg PE.
Divide by 2 to determine the number of Inner Tactical Packages:
52.9 ÷ 2 kg = 26.45, round up to 27 Inner Tactical Packages.
2t
3 = 0.8 m
1.0 m
0.5 m
2t
3 = 0.8 m
2t
3 = 0.8 m
8.0 m
t = 1.2 m
Figure 5/13. Example of borehole charges in reinforced concrete pier.
0586. Preparing Boreholes in Piers.
a. Boreholes should be horizontal.
b. In masonry and unreinforced concrete piers, the boreholes should be half

filled with explosive. The remainder of the hole should be well tamped
with damp earth.

RESTRICTED
c. In reinforced concrete piers, the boreholes must be completely filled with

explosive, unless it can be ascertained without doubt that the pier only
contains light reinforcement; in the latter case, half-filled boreholes may
be sufficient. On operations, the boreholes should always be completely
filled with explosive.
Note: If the diameter of the boreholes differs from that recommended in Paragraph 0587,
there may be a surplus or deficiency of explosives. The spacing of the boreholes (and number
of boreholes per row) should be adjusted so when the boreholes are correctly filled, the total
explosive per row is that calculated.
TABLE 5-15 BOREHOLE CHARGES IN MASONRY AND REINFORCED

CONCRETE - 0.5 kg PE BLOCKS AND 0.1 kg SEGMENTS
Reinforced concrete Masonry and unreinforced concrete
Total charge required in 500 g Total charge required in 500 g blocks
Depth of
blocks and 100 g segments and 100 g segments
Serial borehole
(i)(ii)(iii)(iv) (i)(ii)(iii)(iv)
(m)
NEQ (kg) NEQ (kg)
Blocks Segments Blocks Segments
(v) (v)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h)
1 0.40 2 2 1.2 1 2 0.7
2 0.60 3 4 1.9 2 0 1.0
3 0.80 4 3 2.3 2 2 1.2
4 1.00 6 0 3.0 3 2 1.7
5 1.20 7 0 3.5 3 4 1.9
6 1.40 8 0 4.0 4 1 2.1
7 1.60 8 4 4.4 4 3 2.3
8 1.80 9 4 4.9 5 1 2.6
9 2.00 10 3 5.3 5 3 2.8
10 2.20 11 3 5.8 6 0 3.0
11 2.40 12 0 6.0 6 0 3.0
12 2.60 13 0 6.5 6 3 3.3
13 2.80 13 2 6.7 7 0 3.5
14 3.00 13 4 6.9 7 0 3.5
Notes: i. Charge rounded up to nearest whole segment.

ii. Borehole charges calculated as follows:
a. Up to 1.25 m deep - 51 mm bit.
b. 1.25 m to 2.25 m deep - 45 mm bit.
c. 2.25 m to 3 m deep - 38 mm bit.
iii. If using different drill bit sizes, caluculate borehole capacity from Paragraph 0587.
iv. Number of 500 g blocks and 100 g segments MUST BE ADDED TOGETHER for specified depth of
borehole.
v. NEQ of blocks and segments required (indicated in columns preceeding it) for specified depth of
borehole.

RESTRICTED
0587. Borehole Capacity. The explosive capacity per 100 mm of borehole is:
Diameter of hole Capacity (PE)

75 mm 604 gm
63 mm 426 gm
58 mm 361 gm
51 mm 280 gm
45 mm 218 gm
38 mm 155 gm
32 mm 110 gm
When drilling deep boreholes, it is recommended to taper the hole in steps

to prevent the drill jamming. The recommended depth for typical bits is:
Up to 1.25 m deep - 51 mm
1.25 to 2.25 m deep - 45 mm
2.25 to 3 m deep - 38 mm.

For boreholes in excess of 2.25 m, the 38 mm hydraulic sinker drill bit could
be used. These figures have been used in preparing the Table 5-15. For
boreholes in excess of 51 mm diameter, special tools may be required.
0588. Placing Charges.
a. Unwrap the blocks of PE and mould them to just under the diameter of
the borehole. Insert each block individually into the borehole and press
it well home with a wooden tamping rod so it fills the hole.
b. When half the charge for the borehole has been positioned, insert the
knotted end of a detonating cord initiation lead (it may be convenient to
mould the knot into a PE segment before insertion).
c. Insert the remainder of the charge for the hole, pressing each cartridge
well home.
d. Insert the damp earth tamping, pressing it well home as it is inserted.

RESTRICTED
REINFORCED CONCRETE BEAMS
0589. 51 mm diameter boreholes are drilled from the top of the beam down to the
tension reinforcement in the bottom of the beam.
a. Beams up to 450 mm Wide. A single hole is drilled in the centre of the

beam.
b. Beams over 450 mm Wide. Holes are drilled at 200 mm centres across
the width of the beam.
The holes are filled with PE as described in Paragraph 0588 and the explosive
required is calculated either by using Table 5-15 or from Paragraph 0587.
The effect of the charges is to shatter the concrete and cause sufficient
damage to ensure collapse. The advantage of this method is that it allows
a bridge to remain in use with the charges prepared, although protection of
the ring mains is necessary.
BRICK OR MASONRY WALLS
0590. To demolish brick or masonry walls, one or two rows (see Sub-paragraph
0590d) of 51 mm diameter boreholes are drilled along the length of the wall:
a. The boreholes should be drilled downwards at an angle between 30° and

45° to the horizontal.
b. They should finish just beyond the centre line of the wall so the charge
is in the best position for bursting both faces of the wall, and just above
ground level so flying debris may be more easily smothered.
c. The boreholes should be filled with explosive using the procedure in

Paragraph 0588. Good tamping is essential.
d. Brick Walls. In brick walls up to 450 mm thick, the borehole spacing

should be between 350 and 450 mm. In thicker walls, the spacing should
be approximately equal to the thickness of the wall. In walls over 500
mm thick, two rows of boreholes spaced about 600 mm apart should be
used to ensure collapse.
e. Masonry Walls. Where the material is stronger than brick, it is better to

reduce the spacing of the boreholes rather than increase the charge per
hole.

RESTRICTED
TIMBER
0591. Preparing and Placing Borehole Charges in Timber.
a. Trees, Baulks, etc, up to 0.5 m Thick. One 50 mm diameter borehole is

required to a depth of two-thirds the thickness of the target. In the case
of rectangular timber, the hole should be bored along the longest axis of
the cross section and placed as described in Paragraph 0588.
b. Trees, Baulks, etc, over 0.5 m Thick. Two 50 mm diameter boreholes,

two-thirds the thickness of the target in depth, are bored at right angles
to each other and 50 mm apart (see Figure 5/14). The charge is divided
equally between the boreholes and placed as described in Paragraph
0588. For very large trees, it may be necessary to cut away part of the
trunk before drilling in order to achieve the required depth.
50 mm
Auger holes
Knots
Charge
Charge
Tamping Auger holes

Tamping
Detonating cord
Detonating cord
Over 0.50 m diameter Up to 0.50 m diameter
Figure 5/14. Borehole charges in timber.

RESTRICTED
a. The borehole charges required to cut round or rectangular timber up

to 1.2 m in diameter or thickness are summarised in Table 5-16; the
explosive charge is given in PE blocks and segments.
b. To calculate the charge requirement, select the diameter or average

thickness of target in Column (b) and read across to Column (c) for the
depth of boreholes, Column (d) for the number of boreholes, Columns (e)
and (f) for the charge in PE blocks and segments, and Column (g) for the
charge in kg.
c. Example. Determine the charge, number and depth of boreholes required

to fell a tree 850 mm in diameter using Table 5-16.
Use 0.85 m (from Serial 13, Column (b))
Depth of boreholes = 0.57 m (from Serial 13, Column (c))
Number of boreholes = 2 (from Serial 13, Column (d)).
Charge = 3 blocks of PE (from Serial 13,

Columns (e) and (f))
1.5 kg (from Serial 12, Column (g))
Charge per hole = 3 ÷ 2 = 1.5 blocks PE.
Diameter of holes = 50 mm (from Table 5-16, Note 1).

RESTRICTED
TABLE 5-16 BOREHOLE CHARGES IN TIMBER

Diameter Total charge required in 500 g blocks and

Depth of
or average Number of 100 g segments (ii)(iii)(iv)(v)
Serial boreholes
thickness of boreholes
(m) (i) Blocks Segments NEQ (kg) (vi)
target (m)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)
1 0.25 0.17 1 0 2 0.2
2 0.30 0.20 1 0 2 0.2
3 0.35 0.23 1 0 3 0.3
4 0.40 0.27 1 0 4 0.4
5 0.45 0.30 1 1 0 0.5
6 0.50 0.33 2 1 0 0.5
7 0.55 0.37 2 1 2 0.7
8 0.60 0.40 2 1 3 0.8
9 0.65 0.43 2 1 4 0.9
10 0.70 0.47 2 2 0 1.0
11 0.75 0.50 2 2 2 1.2
12 0.80 0.53 2 2 3 1.3
13 0.85 0.57 2 3 0 1.5
14 0.90 0.60 2 3 2 1.7
15 0.95 0.63 2 3 4 1.9
16 1.00 0.67 2 4 0 2.0
17 1.05 0.70 2 4 3 2.3
18 1.10 0.73 2 5 0 2.5
19 1.15 0.77 2 5 2 2.7
20 1.20 0.80 2 5 4 2.9
Notes: i. Calculated for 50 mm wood auger.

ii. Do not interpolate; round up to next target thickness or calculate using formula.
iii. Charge rounded up to nearest whole segment.
iv. Where two boreholes used, one half of total charge in each borehole.
v. Number of 500 g blocks and 100 g segments MUST BE ADDED TOGETHER for specified depth
of borehole.
vi. NEQ of blocks and segments required (indicated in columns preceeding it) for specified depth of
borehole.

RESTRICTED
a. The borehole charges required to cut round or rectangular timber are

calculated using the formulae:
(1) Round Timber. Total charge C = 2d2 kg.
(2) Rectangular Timber. Total charge C = 2t2 kg.
Where d is the diameter of the timber in metres

t is ½ (width + depth) of rectangular timber in metres.
b. Example. Determine the borehole charge(s) required to fell a tree 800

mm in diameter.
Charge = 2d2 = 2 x 0.82 = 1.28 kg.
1.28 ÷ 0.5 = 2.56 blocks, round up to 2.6, ie 2 blocks and 3 segments.

Charge per hole = 2.6 ÷ 2 = 1.3 blocks of PE (1 block and 1½ segments).

Therefore 1 block and one segment should be placed in each hole, with
the remaining segment being split between the two holes.
0594. Spare.
to
05100.

RESTRICTED
SECTION 5.7 CRATERING CHARGES

05101. Introduction. Cratering charges are comparatively large charges placed
under or within the target. They mainly utilise the pressure effect of the
detonation and therefore tamping of the charge is important. They are used
for cratering roads, airstrips, etc, and for the destruction of retaining walls,
bridge abutments and rubble-filled masonry piers. They may also be used
in a row or rows to form a ditch, to break up hard ground to assist digging
or to remove tree stumps.
ROADS AND AIRFIELDS
05102. Craters are produced by detonating a charge below ground level. The size
of the crater depends on the size of the charge, the depth at which it is
buried (one-third the diameter of the crater is the optimum depth) and the
ground conditions. Methods of placing charges are outlined in Paragraph
05109.
05103. Cratering Roads. Cratering roads to form obstacles to tanks is one of the
most common uses of cratering charges. The minimum crater needed for
this purpose is:
Diameter 6.0 m
Depth 2.0 m.
If a number of craters is to be used to block a road, the craters should be

placed in line at 45° to the axis of the road. The angle presents a greater
hazard to tracked vehicles, especially where the site is restricted so that
they cannot manoeuvre to meet the obstacle at right angles; they tend to
slip a track when squaring to climb out of the crater. To calculate an angled
crater line, the width of the road is multiplied by the constant 1.41.
05104. Use of Rapid Cratering Equipment. When cratering using rapid cratering
equipment (Camouflet or RCK), the calculations are based on a charge of
30 kg PE (60 blocks) or 19.6 kg granular explosive placed at 2 m depth,
which is the minimum to give a good assurance of meeting the parameters
in Paragraph 05103. Multiple charges should be placed at 3 m centres to
produce a continuous obstacle about 2 m deep and 6 m wide.
a. Cratering charge calculations for the Camouflet and RCK are summarised
in Table 5-17 for crater lines up to 22.49 m.

5-74 TABLE 5-17 CRATERING CHARGES USING RAPID CRATERING EQUIPMENT
For crater diameter of

Number (No.) of charges and total PE (kg) required per length of crater line (ii)
approximately 6 m
4.5 - 7.5 - 10.5 - 13.5 - 16.5 - 19.5 -
Charge
Serial Equipment 7.49 m 10.49 m 13.49 m 16.49 m 19.49 m 22.49 m
PE
NEQ
Spacing Depth blocks No. kg No. kg No. kg No. kg No. kg No. kg
(kg)
(i)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)
1 Camouflet (i) 60 30 60 90 120 150 180 210
3m 2m 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 RCK N/A 19.6 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
Notes: i. Camouflet charge (30 kg PE) inclusive of pilot hole charge (200 g or 2 segments PE).
ii. For crater lines in excess of 22.49 m, calculate:
a. Number of charges:
(1) Multiply width of target by 1.41 (if angled crater group required).
(2) Divide answer by 3 (spacing).
(3) Round up or down to nearest whole number.
b. Total PE Charge (kg). Multiply number of charges by 30 kg.
RESTRICTED
b. Example.
Determine the charges required to crater a road 15 m wide when using

the Camouflet Set.
Length of crater line at 45° to road axis = 1.41 (constant) x road width =
1.41 x 15 = 21.15 m.
Spacing = 3 m (from Table 5-17, Serial 1, Column (c))
Depth of charge = 2 m (from Table 5-17, Serial 1, Column (d))
Weight of charge = 30 kg (from Table 5-17, Serial 1, Column (f))
Number of charges = 7 (from Table 5-17, Serial 1, Column (q))
Total charge = 210 kg PE (from Table 5-17, Serial 1, Column (r))
Divide by 10 to determine the number of Outer Tactical Packages (OTP):
210 ÷ 10 = 21 OTP.
05106. Known Subgrades. When cratering in a known nature of subgrade using

PE7 and where placement timings are not critical, the calculations and
parameters in Paragraphs 05107 and 05108 may be used.

RESTRICTED
a. Cratering charge calculations are summarised in Table 5-18, which

assumes a diameter of 6 m for crater lines up to 29.99 m.
b. Example.
Determine the charges required to crater a road 15 m wide with a chalk

subgrade.
Length of crater line at 45° to road axis = 1.41 (constant) x road width
= 1.41 x 15 = 21.15 m.
Size of charge = 73 blocks PE (from Table 5-18, Serial 2,

Column (e))
Number of charges = 5 (from Table 5-18, Serial 2, Column (j))
Total charge = 5 x 73 = 365 blocks PE.
Divide by 4 for the number of Inner Tactical Packages (ITP) (2 kg)
= 91.25, round up to 92 ITP.

Note: If Tactical Packaging is used, the total explosive quantity should be divided by 10 kg
(the weight of a box of Outer Tactical Packaging) or 2 kg (the weight of a box of the Inner
Tactical Packaging) to give the number of boxes required.

TABLE 5-18 CRATERING CHARGES IN KNOWN SUBGRADE USING PE BLOCKS AND ASSUMING
6 m CRATERS
For single crater (diameter of

Number of craters required per length of crater line (i)
approximately 6 m)
Serial Equipment Charge
6- 10 - 14 - 18 - 22 - 26 -
Spacing Depth PE blocks NEQ (kg) 9.99 m 13.99 m 17.99 m 21.99 m 25.99 m 29.99 m
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l)
Most subgrades, eg
1 37 18.5
gravel, sand and clay
4m 2m 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 Chalk 73 36.5
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
3 Rock 145 72.5
Notes: i. For crater lines in excess of 22.49 m, calculate:

a. Number of charges:
(1) Multiply width of target by 1.41 (if angled crater group required).
(2) Divide answer by 4 (spacing).
(3) Round up or down to nearest whole number.
b. Total PE Charge (kg). Multiply number of charges by relevant charge in Column (e).
5-77
RESTRICTED
a. Cratering charges are calculated using the following formula:
(1) Length of crater line = width of target.

Angled crater line = 1.41 (constant) x width of target.
(2) Diameter of crater required (D) in metres (normally 6 m).
(3) Weight of charge, determined from Table 5-19.
(4) Depth of charge is D⁄3. (If ground conditions prevent the charge
being placed at the required depth, a smaller crater in depth and
diameter is inevitable. Consideration could be given to increasing
the charge or number of craters or recratering.
(5) Spacing of charges = 2D

.
3
(6) Number of charges = crater line

spacing of charges
(rounded to the nearest whole number).
(7) Total charge = weight of charge x number of charges.
TABLE 5-19 CRATERING CHARGE CALCULATIONS
Serial Nature of subgrade Weight of charge (kg)

(a) (b) (c)
1 Most subgrade materials, ie sand, gravel, clay, etc D3
12
2 Chalk D3
6
3 Rock D3
3
Notes: 1. D is required diameter of crater.

2. When cratering paved roads and airfields, no increase in explosives is normally required to
compensate for the presence of the pavement. Although the pavement is usually stronger than
the subgrade material, it helps to confine the effects of the explosion and this improves the
efficiency of the charge.

RESTRICTED
b. Example. Determine the charges required to crater a road 14 m wide

with a subgrade of gravel.
Length of crater line = 1.41 x 14 = 19.74 m
Assume crater diameter, D = 6.0 m
= D = 6 = 18.0 kg
3 3
Size of charge
12 12
18 ÷ 0.5 = 36 blocks PE
Depth of charge = D = 6 = 2.0 m

3 3
Spacing of charges = 2D = 2 x 6 = 4.0 m

3 3
Number of charges = 19.74 = 4.93, round up to 5

4
Total charge = 5 x 36 = 180 blocks PE.
05109. Placing Cratering Charges. The following techniques may be used:
a. Camouflet Set. (See Section 3.4). The Camouflet Set provides a rapid
means of placing a cratering charge. The limiting factors are the depth
at which the camouflet chamber can be formed, the capacity of the
chamber and the nature of the ground (it is difficult to drive the tube
in rocky ground and the camouflet chamber may collapse in very wet
ground).
b. Rapid Cratering Kit. (See Section 2.4). The RCK provides a faster means
of cratering than the Camouflet Set and requires fewer men (normally two
men per crater). The charge is 19.6 kg but, in suitable soil conditions, this
can produce a satisfactory crater. It is of little value in rocky or sandy soil.
c. Shaped Charges. If RCKs are not available other conical shaped charges
may be used to form the pilot hole. They are particularly useful in medium
or hard soils and where there is a hard surface to confine the effect.
The size of the pilot hole depends on the size of the conical charge and
ground conditions. However, if it is not large enough or if the sides have
collapsed, it can usually be enlarged manually or with an earth auger as
the bottom of the hole is normally filled with loose material.

RESTRICTED
d. Earth Auger. The 230 mm earth auger makes a suitable hole, although
it cannot be used in rock and large stones are apt to jam it. The hole
should be tamped with earth after placing the charge.
e. Making Holes in Pavements. If RCKs or other conical shaped charges

are not used, driving the initial hole through the pavement of roads or
runways can be very slow. Where a number of holes are required, either
power tools should be used or small charges can be detonated on the
surface to break up the pavement and facilitate the use of hand tools.
f. Wet Ground. A high water table makes it difficult to place buried charges
and a large number of smaller charges at a lesser depth may have to be
used. However, a deep crater filled with water is a greater obstacle and
the extra effort expended in its formation is often worthwhile. An RCK
and an earth auger are likely to be the most successful method of placing
the charge in wet ground.
05110. Shallow Cratering. If RCKs are not available, shallow cratering provides
a quick alternative to the camouflet and earth auger methods, although the
crater produced is not as deep. A hole is blown through the road surface
by detonating a charge on the surface. The charge varies from about 2.5
kg for macadam to 7.0 kg for reinforced concrete. This produces a shallow
hole with the subsoil thoroughly loosened, allowing a hole to be dug about
1 m deep and 0.3 m square. This hole is charged with 30 kg of explosive
and spoil is backfilled as tamping. The crater produced is about 6 m in
diameter and 1.5 m deep.
RELIEVED FACE CRATERING
05111. The relieved face cratering technique creates a crater with a relatively flat
bottom and one side (the home side) near-vertical. This type of crater is a
more effective obstacle to tanks than the standard V-shaped crater. The
procedures and charge sizes are described below and are illustrated in
Figure 5/15. The charges are normally placed using the Camouflet Set. The
crater produced is about 2 m deep and 7.5 m wide.
a The home side charges are each 41 blocks of PE (20.5 kg) and are placed
at a depth of 1.5 m in a line at 2 m spacing.
b. The enemy side charges are in a line 4 m behind the line of the home
side charges. Each charge is 31 blocks of PE (15.5 kg) and is placed at
a depth of 1.2 m at 2 m spacing. They are staggered in relation to the
home side charges and there is one less charge on the enemy side.
Note: The charge sizes are inclusive of the pilot hole charge of 1 segment of PE.

RESTRICTED
c. The enemy side charges are fired first, followed after a delay of
approximately 1.5 seconds by the home side charges. The delay can be
achieved by firing the enemy side charges by safety fuze and then the
home side by electrical means.
4m
2m
Enemy side 2m Home side
2m
a. Location of charges.
4m
Fired second
1.2 m after 1.5 1.5 m
seconds delay
30 PE blocks and 4 segments
40 PE blocks and 4 segments
b. Depth and size of charges.
7.5 m approximately
2 m approximately
c. Effect.
Figure 5/15. Relieved face cratering.

RESTRICTED
d. Example. Determine the PE charge required to relieve face crater a road

and verges 12 m wide.
Home side charge = 20.5 kg
Number of charges = 12 ÷ 2 = 6
Total home side charge = 6 x 20.5 = 123 kg PE
Enemy side charge = 15.5 kg
Number of charges = 5 (one less than home side)
Total enemy side charge = 5 x 15.5 = 77.5 kg PE
Total charge = 123 + 77.5 = 200.5 kg PE.
DITCHING
05112. A ditch is formed by firing a line of overlapping cratering charges as illustrated

in Figure 5/16. Initially the spacing of the charges should be approximately
equal to their depth; this ratio can be adjusted in the light of experience.
The initial ditch can be widened by firing further charges along the line of
the banks. The charge weight depends on the depth and width of the ditch
required, the nature of the ground and the charge spacing (see Table 5-20).
A
B
Figure 5/16. Ditching with explosives.

RESTRICTED
TABLE 5-20 DATA FOR DITCHING WITH EXPLOSIVES IN AVERAGE

GROUND
Depth of Charge per hole at Charge per hole at Probable depth of

Serial
hole A (m) spacing A (kg) (i) spacing 1.0 m (kg) (i) channel, B (m)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
1 0.55 0.25 (½) - 0.70
2 0.70 0.5 (1) - 0.90
3 0.85 1 (2) - 1.00
4 1.00 1.75 (3½) 1.75 (3¼) 1.25
5 1.25 3 (6) 2.5 (5) 1.50
6 1.45 4.75 (9½) 3.25 (6½) 1.75
7 1.85 9.5 (19) 5.5 (11) 2.00
8 2.00 12 (24) 6 (12) 2.40
Note: i. Figures in brackets give number of PE blocks.
05113. Calculation using Table. Table 5-20, which relates to Figure 5/16,
recommends charges to be used initially in average ground where the
subgrade is sand, gravel, clay, etc.
05114. Calculation using Formula. For other types of ground or for different
charge spacing, the charge may be calculated as follows:
Charge Cw = 3Kd kg/m run of ditch

2
where d is the depth of the charge in metres

K is a constant depending on the nature of the ground and lying
between 1.5 for hard ground and 0.7 for soft ground.
This assumes the width of the ditch is about 3 x d.
05115. Drainage Ditching. Rough open ditches 0.75 m deep and 1.5 m wide, or
larger, can be made in this way to drain marshy ground inaccessible to plant.
The size of charge depends on the nature of the ground but, as a rough
guide, 1.0 kg PE may be used per cubic metre of soil to be removed. If a
quantity of water can be accumulated upstream and released immediately
after the line of charges has been fired, the soil disturbed by the blasts
should be washed away.

RESTRICTED
DIGGING IN HARD GROUND
05116. Cratering charges can be used to assist in breaking up hard ground for
digging. The size of the charge depends on many factors including the
nature of the ground and the extent to which scattering of soil is acceptable.
Normally, test firings should start with half a block of PE. The following may
assist in estimating charge sizes:
a. The charge is likely to be between 3d2 and 4d2, where d is the depth of
the charge in metres.
b. As a general guide, one block (0.5 kg) PE buried at 0.6 m depth breaks
up soil within a radius of about 0.6 m and to a depth of about 0.9 m.
05117. Standard Field Fortifications. Where the final excavation needs a precise
outline, either straight or curved, this should be marked, before placing
the charges, by digging a channel 100 mm deep and about the width of a
spade. Charges and procedures to be used to assist in the construction
of standard field fortifications are discussed in Section 6.5 and Military
Engineering Volume II Pamphlet 2 Field Fortifications.
CONTINUOUS CRATERING CHARGES
05118. Continuous cratering charges are a continuous line of explosives placed

horizontally in an existing pipe or culvert to produce an elongated crater or
trench across a road or embankment. The charge is placed at depth ‘L’,
where L is the line of least resistance between the charge and the ground
surface. L is measured from the ground surface to the base of the pipe or
culvert.
a. Continuous cratering charges for pipes and culverts with an L

measurement of between 2 m and 4 m (in increments of 0.2 m) are
summarised in Table 5-21.
b. To determine the charge required, select the appropriate L measurement

from Column (b) and read across for the likely crater width from Column
(c). Select the charge required (PE kg or blocks) from the appropriate
nature of subgrade column.

TABLE 5-21 CONTINUOUS CRATERING CHARGES
Nature of subgrade
Most subgrade materials,
Depth of Chalk Rock
eg sand, gravel, clay, etc
charge Crater
Serial (L) width NEQ of
NEQ of Charge PE (blocks NEQ of Charge PE (blocks and
(m) (m) charge Charge PE (blocks and
charge and segments/m run) charge segments/m run)
(i) (kg/m run) segments/m run) (iii)(iv)
(kg/m run) (iii)(iv) (kg/m run) (iii)(iv)
(ii)
(ii) (ii)
Blocks Segments Blocks Segments Blocks Segments
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l)
1 2.0 4.0 2.7 5 2 5.3 10 3 10.7 21 2
2 2.2 4.4 3.2 6 2 6.5 13 0 12.9 25 4
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
3 2.4 4.8 3.8 7 3 7.7 15 2 15.4 30 4
4 2.6 5.2 4.5 9 0 9.0 18 0 18.0 36 0
5 2.8 5.6 5.2 10 2 10.5 21 0 20.9 41 4
6 3.0 6.0 6.0 12 0 12.0 24 0 24.0 48 0
7 3.2 6.4 6.8 13 3 13.7 27 2 27.3 54 3
8 3.4 6.8 7.7 15 2 15.4 30 4 30.8 61 3
9 3.6 7.2 8.6 17 1 17.3 34 3 34.6 69 1
10 3.8 7.6 9.6 19 1 19.3 38 3 38.5 77 0
11 4.0 8.0 10.7 21 2 21.3 42 3 42.7 85 2
Notes: i. For L measurement not shown, round up to next L shown or calculate by formula.
ii. Charges per metre run.
iii. PE charge rounded up to next complete segment.
iv. If surface concrete slab or heavy pavement, increase charge by 50%.
5-85
RESTRICTED
c. Example. Determine the continuous cratering charge in PE blocks that

will produce a continuous crater across a road 8 m wide. A culvert
under the road is 0.8 m in diameter with an L measurement of 3 m. The
subgrade is clay.
Depth of charge = 3 m (Table 5-21, Serial 6, Column (b))
Crater width = 6 m (Table 5-21, Serial 6, Column (c))
Charge/m run = 12 blocks PE (Table 5-21, Serial 6,

Columns (e) and (f))
Total charge = 12 x 8 (road width) = 96 blocks PE.
a. Weight of Charge. The weight of charge is determined by the need to

break through the line of least resistance (L) between the charge and the
ground surface. The weight of charge is calculated from Table 5-22.
b. Depth of Charge. The charge is placed at depth L, in which case a crater

of 2L width is likely to be formed.
TABLE 5-22 CONTINUOUS CRATERING CHARGES - WEIGHT OF

CHARGE IN kg/m RUN
Weight of charge
Serial Nature of subgrade Remarks
(kg/m run)
(a) (b) (c) (d)
}
1 Most subgrade material, ie sand, 2L2
gravel, clay, etc 3 If the surface is a
4L2 concrete slab or heavy
2 Chalk
3 pavement, increase the
8L2 charge by 50%
3 Rock
3
Note: L is line of least resistance in metres.
05121. Placing Continuous Cratering Charges. The charge should be positioned

continuously through the pipe or culvert so the calculated charge per metre
covers the calculated length. The air void between the charge and the top
of the pipe or culvert and also the ends of the pipe or culvert should be
tamped with filled sandbags. Charges should be initiated every 1.5 m and
care should be taken to protect the ring mains when tamping.

RESTRICTED
MASONRY PIERS
05122. Cratering charges can be used to demolish rubble-filled masonry and solid
masonry piers. However, if there are no voids in the structure of the target,
excavations to allow the charges to be positioned may be difficult and slow.
a. Weight of Charge. The formula is the same as that used for the calculation
of craters in rock (from Table 5-19),
ie charge weight, C = D kg
3
where D = 3 x t
2
and t is the thickness of the pier in metres.
b. Spacing Charges. Charges should be spaced t metres apart.
c. Number of Charges. Width of pier in metres

t
(rounded to the nearest whole number).
d. Placing Charges.
(1) The charges must be well tamped.
(2) In masonry arch bridges, the charges must be placed below the
springing line of the arch (as for borehole charges).
ABUTMENTS AND RETAINING WALLS
05124. Abutments and retaining walls can be destroyed by detonating one of the
following types of charge behind them:
Small mined charges

Cratering charges.

RESTRICTED
05125. Placing Charges against Abutments and Retaining Walls. Charges may
be placed:
a. From Above. The RCK, Camouflet Set or earth auger are used as
described in Paragraph 05109.
b. Through Face of Wall or Abutment. Holes are bored through the face of
the wall using power tools or conical shaped charges and then camouflet
chambers are formed behind the wall using PE. This method is not likely
to be successful if the filling behind the wall is rubble containing many
voids.
c. Using Existing Voids. Charges should be packed tight to the sides of the
void as air gaps between the charge and the walls surrounding the void
tend to cushion the effects.
05126. Key Dimensions for Charge Calculation. Depending on the type of charge
used, the following dimensions (see Figures 5/17 and 5/18) are important:
L is the line of least resistance. This is the measurement from the outer
face of the abutment or retaining wall to the centre of the charge. L can
be established by measurement of the top or ends of the abutment or
retaining wall or, if this is not possible and time allows, by exploratory
drilling or research of technical drawings.
h is the height from charge to ground level; h must be greater than or equal
to 3 L .
2
D is the diameter of required crater when cratering charge used.
S is spacing between charges.
05127. Calculations for Rapid Cratering Equipment.
a. The Camouflet Set or RCK can be used in accordance with Table 5-17 to
destroy the following abutments and retaining walls:
(1) Masonry and Unreinforced Concrete. Where the line of least

resistance, L, is less than or equal to 1.5 m.
(2) Reinforced Concrete. Where the line of least resistance, L, is less

than or equal to 1.2 m.

RESTRICTED
Road surface
H ≥ 3L
2
Springing line
L Charge centre
Figure 5/17. Position of charge in relation to exterior face

of target and ground level.
S
= 2D for cratering charges
D 3 Roadway
= 4L for small mined charges
3
S
Charge centre
Figure 5/18. Spacing of charges behind an abutment.

RESTRICTED
b. Example. Determine the RCK requirement to destroy an unreinforced

concrete abutment wall 10 m wide with an L measurement of 1.4 m.
Length of abutment = 10 m
Number of RCK = 3 (from Table 5-17, Serial 2, Column (i)).
05128. Masonry and Plain Concrete Abutments.
a. Small Mined Charges. The charges are placed in close contact with the
rear face of the wall, using camouflet or borehole techniques as illustrated
in Figure 5/19. The effect is to destroy the abutment wall without
necessarily cratering the ground behind it. The line of least resistance,
L, is determined during reconnaissance. The number of charges is the
width of the target divided by the space between charges and rounded
up to the nearest whole number.
(1) Calculation using Table.
(a) Small mined charges for abutments and retaining walls with
an L measurement up to 3 m are summarised in Table 5-23.
(b) To determine the charge required, select the appropriate L

measurement from Column (b) and read across to Column
(c) to obtain the depth, h, of charge, to Column (d) to obtain
the size of charge (PE blocks) and to Column (g) to obtain the
charge spacing.

RESTRICTED
(c) Example. Determine the small mined charges required to

destroy an unreinforced abutment wall 12 m wide with an L
of 2.3 m :
L = 2.3 m but use 2.4 m (Table 5-23, Note (i)

and Serial 10, Column (b))
h = 3.6 m (Table 5-23, Serial 10, Column (c))
Charge = 55 blocks and 1 segment PE (Table 5-23,

Serial 10, Columns (d) and (e))
Spacing = 3.2 m (Table 5-23, Serial 10, Column (g))
Number 12 (width of abutment) ÷ 3.2 = 3.75 = 4

of = (round up to the nearest whole number)
charges
Total = 4 x 55.2 (0.2 of a block is equal to 1 segment)

= 220.8 blocks, therefore 220 blocks and
4 segments (110.4 kg PE).
Divide by 2 to determine the number of Inner Tactical

Packages (ITP):
110.4 ÷ 2 = 55.2, round up to 56 ITP.

Note: If Tactical Packaging is used, the total explosive quantity should be
divided by 10 kg (the weight of a box of Outer Tactical Packaging) or 2 kg (the
weight of a box of the Inner Tactical Packaging) to give the number of boxes
required.

5-92 TABLE 5-23 ABUTMENTS AND RETAINING WALLS - MINED AND CRATERING
Masonry and plain concrete Reinforced concrete
Distance Depth Cratering charges for crater diameter D Cratering charges for crater diameter D
Small mined charges
from h = 3L D = 2L D = 3L D = 3L
Serial face 2
L (i) (ii) Spacing Spacing Spacing Spacing
PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE
(m) (m) blocks segments NEQ 4L
D (m) blocks segments
NEQ 2D
NEQ 2D
NEQ 2D
(kg) 3 (kg) 3 (kg) 3 (kg) 3
(iii) (iii) (iii) (iii) (iii) (iii) (iii) (iii)
(m) (m) (m) (m)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r) (s) (t) (u) (v)
1 0.6 0.9 0 4 0.4 0.8 1.2 1 1 0.6 0.8 1.8 3 4 1.9 1.2 1.8 23 4 11.9 1.2
2 0.8 1.2 2 0 1.0 1.1 1.6 2 4 1.4 1.1 2.4 9 1 4.6 1.6 2.4 29 1 14.6 1.6
3 1.0 1.5 4 0 2.0 1.3 2.0 5 2 2.7 1.3 3.0 18 0 9.0 2.0 3.0 38 0 19.0 2.0
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
4 1.2 1.8 7 0 3.5 1.6 2.4 9 1 4.6 1.6 3.6 31 1 15.6 2.4 3.6 51 1 25.6 2.4
5 1.4 2.1 11 0 5.5 1.9 2.8 14 3 7.3 1.9 4.2 49 2 24.7 2.8 4.2 69 2 34.7 2.8
6 1.6 2.4 16 2 8.2 2.1 3.2 21 4 10.9 2.1 4.8 73 4 36.9 3.2 4.8 93 4 46.9 3.2
7 1.8 2.7 23 2 11.7 2.4 3.6 31 1 15.6 2.4 5.4 105 0 52.5 3.6 5.4 125 0 62.5 3.6
8 2.0 3.0 32 0 16.0 2.7 4.0 42 3 21.3 2.7 6.0 144 0 72.0 4.0 6.0 164 0 82.0 4.0
9 2.2 3.3 42 3 21.3 2.9 4.4 56 4 28.4 2.9 6.6 191 3 95.8 4.4 6.6 211 3 105.8 4.4
10 2.4 3.6 55 1 27.6 3.2 4.8 73 4 36.9 3.2 7.2 248 4 124.4 4.8 7.2 268 4 134.4 4.8
11 2.6 3.9 70 2 35.2 3.5 5.2 93 4 46.9 3.5 7.8 316 2 158.2 5.2 7.8 336 2 168.2 5.2
12 2.8 4.2 87 4 43.9 3.7 5.6 117 0 58.5 3.7 8.4 395 1 197.6 5.6 8.4 415 1 207.6 5.6
13 3.0 4.5 108 0 54.0 4.0 6.0 144 0 72.0 4.0 9.0 486 0 243.0 6.0 9.0 506 0 253.0 6.0
Note: i. L represents distance from outer face of wall to centre of charge. When L is between two serials in Column (b), higher figure must be used.
ii. Charges may have to be placed at greater depth to be below springing line of arch.
iii. Charges rounded up to nearest PE block or segment and do not include pilot hole charges. Number of 500 g blocks and 100 g segments MUST
BE ADDED TOGETHER.
RESTRICTED
(2) Calculation using Formulae.
(a) Small mined charges for abutments and retaining walls are
calculated using the formulae:
Charge weight = 2 x L3 kg
Spacing = 4L metres
3
Depth of = 3L metres.
charge 2
Excavate hole to increase
depth of camouflet
Depth of
charge
2.10 m
Note: Depth of charge = 2.10 m + depth of hole.

Note: See Paragraph 0583
for borehole lengths.
Camouflet technique Borehole technique
Figure 5/19. Placing small mined charges behind abutments.
b. Cratering Charges. Cratering charges are used when it is intended

to destroy an abutment wall and produce a crater. The line of least
resistance, L, is determined during reconnaissance. The diameter of the
crater, D, in relation to L is selected (D should be between 2L and 3L).
The number of charges is the length of the target divided by the charge
spacing and rounded to the nearest whole number.
(1) Calculation using Table.
(a) Cratering charges for abutments and retaining walls with an

L measurement up to 3 m are summarised in Table 5-23.
(b) To determine the charge required, select the appropriate L

measurement from Column (b) and read across to Column

RESTRICTED
(c) to obtain the depth h, of charge. Select the crater diameter

required and, from there, the size of charge (PE blocks) and
charge spacing.
(c) Example. Determine the cratering charges required to

destroy an unreinforced abutment wall 13 m wide and 1.4 m
thick. From site investigation, the centre of the charge can
be placed 0.3 m behind the rear face of the wall.
L = 1.4 + 0.3 = 1.7 m but use L of 1.8 m

(Table 5-23, Note (i))
D = 2L (for economy = 3.6 m

(Table 5-23, Serial 7, Column (h))
Charge = 31 blocks and 1 segment (Table 5-23,

Serial 7, Columns (i) and (j))

Spacing = 2.4 m (Table 5-23, Serial 7, Column (l))
Number
of = 13 (width of abutment) ÷ 2.4 = 5.42
charges
= 5 (round to the nearest whole number)
Total = 5 x 31.2 (0.2 of a block is equal to

1 segment) = 156 blocks PE.
required.
(2) Calculation using Formulae.
(a) Cratering charges for abutments and retaining walls are

calculated using the following formula:
Each charge = D kg
3

RESTRICTED
Spacing = 2D metres
3
Depth of charge = 3L metres.

2
(b) Example. Determine the charge needed to destroy an

abutment 13 m wide and 1.4 m thick using cratering charges.
From site investigation, the centre of the charge can be
placed 0.3 m behind the rear face of the wall.
L = 1.4 + 0.3 = 1.7 m
Depth of = 3L = 2.55 m
charge 2
Let D = 2L (for economy) = 3.4 m
Charge = D3 = 13.11 kg
weight 3

13.11 ÷ 0.5 = 26.2 blocks PE, therefore 26 blocks and
1 segment.
Spacing of = 2D = 2.4 m
charges 3
Number of = 13 = 5.4
charges 2.4
= 5 (to nearest whole number)
Total charge = 5 x 26.2 = 131 blocks of PE.

required.

RESTRICTED
05129. Calculations for Reinforced Concrete Abutments. Cratering charges are

used. The effect is to collapse the wall by blowing away the concrete and
bending the reinforcing bars. The line of least resistance, L, is determined
during reconnaissance. The number of charges is the length of the target
divided by the charge spacing and rounded to the nearest whole number.
a. Calculation using Table.
(1) Cratering charges for reinforced concrete abutments and retaining

walls with an L measurement up to 3 m are summarised in Table
5-23.
(2) To determine the charge required, select the appropriate L

measurement from Column (b) and read across to Column (c) to
obtain the depth, h, of charge. Select the crater diameter required
from Column (r), the size of charge (PE blocks) from Columns (s)
and (t), and charge spacing from Column (v).
(3) Example. Determine the cratering charges required to destroy

a reinforced concrete abutment wall 13 m wide and 1.4 m thick.
From site investigation, the centre of the charge can be placed
0.3 m behind the rear face of the wall.
L = 1.4 + 0.3 = 1.7 m

but use L of 1.8 (Table 5-23, Note i)
D = 3L = 5.4 m (Table 5-23, Serial 7, Column (r))
Charge = 125 blocks of PE (Table 5-23, Serial 7,

Columns (s) and (t))
Spacing = 3.6 m (Table 5-23, Serial 7, Column (v))
Number = 13 (width of abutment) ÷ 3.6 = 3.62 = 4

of charges (round to the nearest whole number)
Total charge = 4 x 125 = 500 blocks of PE.

Note: If Tactical Packaging is used, the total explosive quantity should be divided by
10 kg (the weight of a box of Outer Tactical Packaging) or 2 kg (the weight of a box of
the Inner Tactical Packaging) to give the number of boxes required.

RESTRICTED
b. Calculation using Formulae.
(1) Cratering charges for reinforced concrete abutments and retaining

walls are calculated using the following formulae:
D = 3L
Charge = D + 10 kg
3
weight 3
Charge = 2D metres
spacing 3
Depth of = 3L metres.
charge 2
TREE STUMPS
05130. Calculation by Formula.
a. Estimate the diameter, D, in metres of the crater containing the root

system.
b. Place a charge, C, at a depth D under the centre of the stump.

3
c. Place a charge C close to each main lateral root.

2
d. The charge is determined from the formula:
C = D kg.
3
Notes:
1. If the stump is dead, the charge may be reduced by one third.

2. If the ground around the stump is very hard, the charge may be doubled.

RESTRICTED
05131. Example. Determine the number of PE blocks required to remove a tree

stump with a root system 2 m in diameter. The tree stump has five main
lateral roots and the ground is very hard.
D = 2 m
Depth of charge = D = 2 = 0.67 m.

3 3
Main charge weight = D = 2 = 0.67 kg PE.

3 3
Double for hard ground = 0.67 x 2 = 1.34 kg PE.
1.34 ÷ 0.5 = 2.68 blocks of PE, therefore 2 blocks and 4 segments.

Charge for each lateral root = C = 0.67 = 0.335 kg PE.

2 2
0.335 ÷ 0.5 = 0.67 blocks PE, therefore 4 segments.

Total charges for lateral roots = 5 x 4 segments = 4 blocks of PE.

Total charge for tree stump = 2 blocks and 4 segments + 4 blocks
= 6 blocks and 4 segments of PE.
05132. Spare.
to
05140.

RESTRICTED
SECTION 5.8 CONCUSSION CHARGES

05141. Introduction. Concussion charges are bulk charges detonated inside a
building which utilise the pressure effect of the detonation. All gaps and
weak spots in the structure such as doors and windows must be blocked
with sandbags or other suitable material; or alternatively, explosive tamping
(see Paragraph 05145) may be possible. Concussion charges are not
effective where one side of a building is much weaker than the others, eg
a strong brick building with a light corrugated iron roof would only lose its
roof. Similarly, they are not effective against frame-constructed buildings,
where the walls would be blown out leaving the framework standing.
05142. Calculation by Formulae.
a. Light Constructions. The following formula is only applicable to

comparatively light buildings, such as stone or brick dwelling houses,
with walls not exceeding 0.35 m thick. Charges in buildings of two or
more stories need only be calculated for the ground floor.
The charge, C = V kg
3
where V is the internal volume in m3.
If all apertures have been effectively blocked, the charge (C) may be
halved.
b. Heavy Constructions. The following formula must be used for buildings

in which the walls exceed 0.35 m in thickness or are made of reinforced
concrete.
(1) Buildings of Timber, Brick or Masonry.
The charge, C = Vt kg
2
where V is the internal volume of the ground floor, including

interior walls, in m3
t is the thickness of the exterior walls in metres.
The minimum value of t to be used is 0.3 m.

RESTRICTED
(2) Buildings of Light Reinforced Construction.
The charge, C = Vt kg
where V and t are as in Sub-paragraph 05142b(1).
(3) Reinforced Concrete Buildings and Defences.
The charge, C = 16Kt√ Vt kg
where v is the internal volume of the structure, including interior

walls, in m3
t is the thickness of the exterior walls in metres. However,
if the roof thickness is greater than the wall thickness and
is also greater than one third of the internal height, then
t is the roof thickness in metres.
K is a factor depending on:
(i) The strength of the materials in the construction.
(ii) The shape of the structure.
(iii) The number of openings or weak spots in walls and
roof.
Guide values for K are given in Table 5-24. These may be modified
in the light of experience.
TABLE 5-24 VALUES OF K IN CALCULATING CONCUSSION

CHARGES FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES
Serial Type of structure Value of K

(a) (b) (c)
1 Brick structures up to 30 m internal volume with reinforced concrete
3
0.1
roofs up to 0.60 m thick (surface or semi-buried type).
2 Brick structures of larger internal volume than Serial 1. 0.2 to 0.4
3 Reinforced concrete air-raid shelters (surface or below ground with no 0.4
more than 1.5 m of cover).
4 Reinforced concrete tunnels in normal soil. 1.0
Calculate the charge for each 30 m run.
5 Reinforced concrete fortifications with walls up to 0.6 m thick. 0.4
6 Reinforced concrete fortifications with walls between 0.6 and 1.2 m thick. 0.7
7 Reinforced concrete fortifications with walls over 1.2 m thick. 1.1

RESTRICTED
05143. Placing Charges. The total charge should normally be divided into
individual charges of between 25 and 100 kg. Individual charges should not
be smaller than 45 kg if the wall thickness is greater than 1.8 m.
a. The shattering effect of the charges can be used locally by placing

the charges against particularly strong parts of the building such as
supporting columns, chimney breasts and buttresses.
b. The best concussion effect is obtained when the charges are placed near
the corners of rooms. If the building has two adjacent rooms of the same
size and with walls of the same strength, an excess charge should be
placed in one room and a reduced charge in the other. The sum of the
two charges should equal the total charge calculated for both rooms.
05144. Water Concussion Charges. Where a building can hold water without
collapsing, a charge immersed in the water destroys the building without
the debris flying. The building should be filled with water to three quarters
of its internal height; the charge can then be reduced to one quarter of that
calculated in Paragraph 05142. If the water level in the building is restricted
to one third of the internal height, the charge should be reduced to one
third of that calculated. All apertures and weak spots above the water level
must be blocked as for normal concussion charges. Care must be taken to
ensure charges and initiation arrangements are not damaged by the water.
05145. Explosive Tamping.
a. In some cases, eg in light structures where the main charges do not

exceed 120 kg, openings can be blocked by firing tamping charges
placed in the openings simultaneously with the main charges. This
method, which replaces physical tamping with solid materials, saves
time but the effect is momentary, and a strong blast may still come
through the opening causing damage to nearby buildings; it should
therefore only be used on unrestricted sites. The tamping charge, which
is calculated using the formula below, should be suspended in the centre
of the opening. In a large opening, the total charge should be divided
into individual charges of about 5 kg which should be suspended in a
pattern to cover the opening.
b. The tamping charge, T = 5 x A1 x C kg

A2
where T is the weight of tamping charge per opening

A1 is the area of opening in square metres
A2 is the internal area of roof, walls and floor in square metres
C is the weight of main charge in kg.

RESTRICTED
c. Example. Determine the PE concussion charges, main and tamping,

required to destroy the reinforced concrete sanger.
Opening 1 m2
Walls and roof 1 m thick
All dimensions internal
3m
4m
2m
Main charge:
C = 16Kt√ Vt kg
K = 0.7 (Table 5-24, Serial 6, Column (c))
= 16 x 0.7 x 1 √ 24 x 1
= 11.2 x 4.89
= 54.86 kg
Divide by 2 to determine the number of Inner Tactical Packages (ITP):
54.86 ÷ 2 = 27.43, round up to 28 ITP.

Note: If Tactical Packaging is used, the total explosive quantity should be divided by 10 kg
(the weight of a box of Outer Tactical Packaging) or 2 kg (the weight of a box of the Inner
Tactical Packaging) to give the number of boxes required.
Tamping charge:
T = 5 x A1 x C
A2
= 5 x 1 x 55.20 = 5.308 kg
52

RESTRICTED
5.308 ÷ 0.5 = 10.62 blocks PE; therefore 10 blocks and 4 segments.

Note: A2 = (2 x 3) x 2 = 6 x 2 = 12
+ (2 x 4) x 2 = 8 x 2 = 16
+ (3 x 4) x 2 = 12 x 2 = 24
Total = 52 m2.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
CHAPTER 6 SPECIAL CHARGES

SECTION 6.1 INTRODUCTION
0601. The chapter covers charges that may be encountered by combat engineers
but which have special features. Such features include the explosive used,
the skills required, particular techniques, the safety arrangements and the
circumstances.
0602. The chapter is divided into the following sections:
a. Section 6.2 Demolitions under Water.
b. Section 6.3 Charges using Charge Demolition Sheet Explosive No 4.
c. Section 6.4 Use of Linear Cutting Charges.
d. Section 6.5 Use of Explosives to Aid Digging.
f. Section 6.6 Use of Explosives for Improvised Armoured Vehicle Track

Cutting.
0603. The use of explosives for assault breaching and simulation of battle noise
are covered in Chapters 7 and 8 respectively.
0604. The general principles governing the use of explosives and safety measures
set out in other chapters of this pamphlet apply to the charges described in
this chapter unless specifically stated otherwise.
0605. Spare.
to
0610.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
SECTION 6.2 DEMOLITIONS UNDER WATER

0611. Introduction. The techniques required to carry out demolitions under
water are similar to those used on dry land, although the surrounding water
modifies the effects of the detonating explosive as described in Chapter 1.
Subject to the limitations described in this section, service explosives and
accessories are suitable for use under water. However, the environment
(surface swell, depth, current and poor visibility) greatly increases the
problems of placing charges. In addition, working periods may be limited
by tides and the time the divers may remain under compression. Therefore
the potential for accidents and misfires is much greater. This emphasises
the need for the correct supervision and safety arrangements, which are
covered in Paragraphs 0629 to 0631.
0612. Typical Tasks. Typical tasks that may be carried out under water include:
a. Fragmentation of rock pinnacles, bed rock, hard coral and conglomerates.
b. Cutting or clearing trenches in rock, conglomerates and soft sediment.
c. Breaking and scattering obstructions and wrecks.
d. Dismantling underwater structures such as anchor chains, platforms,

piers, etc prior to their removal.
e. Route denial, eg bridge piers and abutments.
f. Destruction of unexploded ordnance.
0613. Reconnaissance and Planning. A thorough reconnaissance is necessary.

The plan must ensure as much preparation as possible is completed on the
surface to ease the task of the diver. Measures may have to be taken to
waterproof the charges, as described in Paragraphs 0625 and 0626.
0614. Calculation and Emplacement of Charges. In general, the types of

charge, calculations and methods of emplacement are similar to those for
normal demolitions. Unless variations are specifically mentioned in this
section, the principles governing the design and positioning of charges
given in the remainder of this pamphlet should be followed. General points
on the emplacement of charges under water are as follows:

RESTRICTED
a. As far as possible, charges must be prepared on the surface so they fit

the target when placed by the diver. This entails accurate measurement
of the target.
b. To ease fixing, line or rope charges should be used whenever possible.
c. The use of the under water bolt gun greatly eases the fixing of charges.
All studs must be fixed in place before explosives are attached.
d. Water pressure obviates the need for tamping on pressure charges

placed at a depth of 3.5 m or more.
Specific points on particular types of charge are in Paragraphs 0615 to

0620.
0615. Shaped Charges. Great care must be taken in placing shaped charges to
ensure they are secure. They should normally point downwards; if pointed
in any other direction, particular attention must be paid to safety. When
shaped charges are placed under water, the water within the stand-off
distance absorbs much of the effect of the shaped charge and therefore
measures must be taken to exclude the water. This can be done by:
a. Placing the shaped charge and the appropriate stand-off distance in a

water tight container.
b. Filling the stand-off space with a low density plastic foam.
c. Using the bubble delay technique outlined in Paragraph 0627.
0616. Cutting Charges. Problems of placing and securing the charge make it
difficult to ensure the charge is in contact with the target.
a. Steel. The charge size is obtained from Table 5-3 and then doubled. The
positioning of charges to break welded and riveted joints and for cutting
chains is illustrated in Figure 6/1.

RESTRICTED
Anchor chain
Riveted plate
Welded plate
After detonation
After detonation
Figure 6/1. Positioning charges for breaking steel joints.
b. Timber. The charge size is obtained from Table 5-4 or Table 5-5 and then
doubled. However, experience may show the charge can be reduced.
c. Pile Cutting. The technique for cutting a single pile or upright obstruction
is illustrated in Figure 6/2 and is as follows:
(1) If it is required to clear the obstruction at seabed level, excavate a

pit 1 m deep around the base of the pile.
(2) Calculate the charge required and form it into a necklace charge at
least 1.3 times the circumference of the pile. The construction of a
line or rope charge to form the necklace is shown in Figure 6/3.
(3) Using a light line, lower the charge complete with the initiation lead
down over the pile into the pit around the base.
(4) Position the charge so it lies at an angle around the pile with one
side higher than the other. If in less than 1.5 m of water, back fill
the hole over the charge.

RESTRICTED
Initiation set
Detonating cord looped

on to light line
Pile footing
dug out Necklace
charge
Figure 6/2. Cutting a pile.
Centre reinforcing rope
Explosive
Detonating cord
Lashing
Figure 6/3. Construction of line or rope charge.

RESTRICTED
d. Linear Charges. The use of copper or plastic pipes filled with explosive
and bent to conform to the shape of the target can be an effective method
of placing cutting charges.
0617. Breaching Charges. Calculate and position the charges as shown in

Section 5.4. For hasty work on small targets, a charge of 32 kg explosive
per cubic metre of concrete to be removed should suffice.
0618. Borehole Charges. Calculate and position the charges as described in

Section 5.6. A template should be used to position the holes when drilling
and to ensure they can be easily found again. A template can be made of
scaffolding as shown in Figure 6/4. Boreholes are not to be drilled closer
than 2 m to a previously charged hole. Back-filling of holes by overburden
or silt can be a problem. This may be prevented by plugging the holes after
drilling or it may be necessary to pass the drill through an outer casing, which
penetrates the sediment to the surface of the base rock, thus preventing
back-filling. The charge is then loaded down the tube. When charging the
holes, the detonating cord leads must go under the template to prevent
snagging when it is removed. The frame should be lifted from one side, with
the diver ensuring the detonating cord leads do not snag.
Note: Holes should be drilled on the same side of each junction.
Figure 6/4. A template for boreholes.

RESTRICTED
0619. Plaster Shooting and Cratering. Plaster shooting and cratering techniques
are often used to break up submarine rock, or to create a channel or trench
in silt or sand. They are similar to the shallow cratering techniques described
in Section 5.7.
a. Breaking up Submarine Rock. The charges are placed on the surface of

the rock. A typical pattern with charge sizes is illustrated in Figure 6/5.
It should not be used in depths of water less than 8 m because of the
shock waves produced.
Detonating cord
Figure 6/5. Plaster shooting to break up submarine rock.
b. Creating a Channel or Ditch. A channel or ditch can be created by placing

a series of cratering charges as described in Section 5.7. Charges of 0.5
kg placed as shown in Figure 6/6a should produce a trench 1 m deep
and 2 m wide at the mud line. An alternative, simpler method for shallow
trenches is to attach the charges to a weighted rope as illustrated in
Figure 6/6b. When trenching under water, the complete trench needs
to be blasted in one operation as water flow quickly silts up the trench
created.

RESTRICTED
Distance between
holes 0.5 to 0.6 m
Depth of hole
0.5 to 0.6 m Probable
depth of
channel
Possible width of channel
a. Using line of cratering charges.
River
Charges
Det. cord
b. Using charges attached to weighted rope.
Figure 6/6. Creating a channel or trench under water.
0620. Wreck Dispersal. Small vessels (up to 60 m long or 1,000 tonnes

displacement) can often be broken up by firing three heavy charges, one in
the forepart, one amidships and one aft. The size of the charge depends on
the construction of the ship and the depth of water but, as a guide, a ship of
1,000 tonnes may require a total of 450 kg of explosive, with approximately
half being placed amidships and the remainder being divided equally fore
and aft. The resultant heavy surge of water helps to level the sides and
plates loosened by the explosion. Further charges may be required later to
break up boilers, etc.
0621. Initiation. All underwater charges must be initiated by detonating cord.

The detonating cord must be initiated either:
a. On land, where either safety fuze or electrical initiation may be used.
b. On a float as illustrated in Figure 6/7, where a safety fuze initiation set

must be used.

RESTRICTED
0622. Initiation Accessories. Although the initiation set must always be out of
the water, the environment means there is always a risk of water affecting
demolition accessories and the following points should be borne in mind:
a. Safety Fuze. Safety fuze does not ignite if damp at the point of initiation.
It burns under water and its rate of burning is increased by depth.
b. Electric Detonator. Care must be taken to waterproof the joint to the

cable.
c. Firing Device Demolition Grip. The striker pin is liable to rust. It operates
in shallow water.
d. Initiator Flash. A good seal must be made with the safety fuze.
e. Coupler Kit Demolition. The coupler provides a waterproof junction

between detonating cord, detonator and safety fuze.
0623. Detonating Cord. A minimum of 300 mm spare end is essential to ensure

it is not affected by water penetration. The outer plastic casing is more
easily damaged when wet and therefore must be treated with added care.
Particular attention should be paid to preparing and placing the leads as, in
the event of a misfire, they are extremely difficult to untangle under water.
The leads may be long and may be affected by tides and currents; they must
be firmly secured. If necessary, they should be attached at intervals to a
secure light line to take the strain off the detonating cord.
Float with
CURRENT initiation set
Detonating cord looped
on to light line
Target: Detonating cord junctions

underwater
obstruction
Detonating cord leads
Charges
Figure 6/7. Typical arrangement for underwater demolition.

RESTRICTED
0624. Detonating Cord Junctions. The following may be used to secure

detonating cord junctions made under water:
a. Light gauge binding wire.
b. Thin cord or spun yarn.
c. Plastic ties.
Where junctions are made on the surface prior to immersion, black masking
tape may be used. Detonating cord junction clips are not to be used under
water as the cord may be pulled out of the clip by the current.
0625. Waterproofing. If a charge is to be left submerged for more than 1 hour,

precautions must be taken to prevent water penetrating the explosives.
This may be achieved by placing the charge in:
a. Plastic bags or sheeting, knotted and sealed with masking tape.
b. Fire hoses.
c. Vehicle inner tubes.
d. Plastic containers of various kinds.
e. Standard ordnance ammunition boxes.
0626. Waterproof Sealing. Special care must be taken to achieve a good seal
where the detonating cord enters the charge. Suitable materials to use at
this point are:
a. Bitumastic (tar).
b. Plumber’s sealing compound.
c. Car body filler or a fibre glass resin on rigid containers.
0627. Bubble Delay Technique. The effect of breaching, cutting and shaped
charges is reduced if there is water between the charge and the target.
This can be overcome by a technique known as ‘bubble delay’. The water
between the charge and the target is expelled by the detonation of a small
charge and the creation of an air bubble momentarily before the main charge
is initiated. The technique requires special non-Service demolition stores to
provide the delay.

RESTRICTED
0628. Recovery of Targets. It is sometimes necessary to recover parts of the

target. To ease recovery, a line and float are attached to the target as
illustrated in Figure 6/8. The first 15 m of the line is weighted to keep it on
the bottom and thus prevent it being cut by the detonation.
Float
Target recovery
line
Line
Shot
Figure 6/8. Recovery line attached to target.
0629. Command and Control. There are two aspects to be considered, control
of the demolitions and supervision of the diving. The diving operation is
controlled by a Diving Supervisor, however he does not normally dive and
therefore the Demolitions Conducting Officer, as defined in Chapter 12,
must be another person. The Demolitions Conducting Officer must be both
a qualified diver and qualified in demolitions as stated in Chapter 12.
0630. Safety. The following precautions supplement those in Chapter 12 and

must be observed whenever explosives are used under water:
a. After the charges have been prepared and fixed, all divers are to leave
the water and retire the authorised safety distance (see Paragraph 0631)
before the charges are initiated.
b. If initiation is from a surface float (see Paragraph 0621), the float must
be at a safe distance (not secured or anchored over the target) so, in the
event of a misfire, the Demolitions Conducting Officer is able to approach
the initiation set without undue risk from the main charge detonating.

RESTRICTED
c. When working from a craft:
(1) The crew must be a minimum of two men.
(2) If applicable, the engine must be running before the initiation set is
ignited.
(3) Paddles or oars must be available in the boat.
(4) The crew must be briefed on the action to be taken in the event of
an engine failure.
d. Neither Service detonators nor safety fuze are to be used under water.
0631. Safety Depths and Distances. The safety depths and distances to be
applied when explosives are used under water are given in Table 6-1. The
factors that must be considered are:
a. Fragmentation and Out of Water Safety.
(1) A fragmentation hazard exists when there is an insufficient depth of

water above the charge to prevent fragments becoming airborne.
The safety distance is measured from the centre of the charge to
the water surface. If the depth is less than that specified in Table
6-1, the full safety distance given in Table 10-1 must be applied.
(2) It should be noted that even when the depth of water is sufficient
to eliminate the fragmentation hazard, there remains a hazard from
the combustion products surfacing and being dispersed by the
wind. Therefore all personnel on the surface must be at least 25 m
upwind of the point on the surface immediately above the seat of
the explosion.
b. Shock or In Water Safety. There is a hazard to personnel and items in

the water from the shock wave transmitted through the water. The safety
distance is the minimum distance from the centre of the charge at which
personnel in the water are safe from the effects of shock. However, it is
recommended all personnel are out of the water when a charge is fired,
unless there is an operational requirement or some other practical reason
for personnel to be in the water.

RESTRICTED
TABLE 6-1 SAFETY DEPTHS AND DISTANCES FOR UNDER

WATER EXPLOSIVE CHARGES
PE Safety PE Safety
distance Safety distance Safety
for depth for for depth for
Serial Serial
(lb) (kg) personnel fragmentation (lb) (kg) personnel fragmentation
in water (m) in water (m)
(m) (m)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
1 0.50 0.22 194.39 4.10 39 19.50 8.84 665.79 6.63
2 1.00 0.45 246.75 4.40 40 20.00 9.07 671.52 6.65
3 1.50 0.68 283.16 4.60 41 30.00 13.60 768.60 7.15
4 2.00 0.90 310.89 4.75 42 40.00 18.14 846.06 7.53
5 2.50 1.13 335.39 4.89 43 50.00 22.67 911.32 7.85
6 3.00 1.36 356.75 5.00 44 60.00 27.21 968.50 8.13
7 3.50 1.58 375.04 5.10 45 70.00 31.75 1019.62 8.38
8 4.00 1.81 392.42 5.19 46 80.00 36.28 1065.97 8.60
9 4.50 2.04 408.38 5.28 47 90.00 40.82 1108.70 8.81
10 5.00 2.26 422.56 5.36 48 100.00 45.35 1148.28 8.99
11 5.50 2.49 436.44 5.43 49 110.00 49.89 1185.39 9.17
12 6.00 2.72 449.48 5.50 50 120.00 54.43 1220.31 9.33
13 6.50 2.94 461.29 5.56 51 130.00 58.96 1253.26 9.49
14 7.00 3.17 473.02 5.62 52 140.00 63.50 1284.64 9.63
15 7.50 3.40 484.19 5.68 53 150.00 68.03 1314.49 9.77
16 8.00 3.62 494.42 5.74 54 160.00 72.57 1343.10 9.91
17 8.50 3.85 504.67 5.79 55 170.00 77.11 1370.54 10.03
18 9.00 4.08 514.53 5.84 56 180.00 81.64 1396.87 10.15
19 9.50 4.30 523.61 5.89 57 190.00 86.18 1422.30 10.27
20 10.00 4.53 532.79 5.94 58 200.00 90.71 1446.80 10.38
21 10.50 4.76 541.66 5.98 59 300.00 136.07 1656.19 11.33
22 11.00 4.98 549.88 6.03 60 400.00 181.43 1822.88 12.06
23 11.50 5.21 558.22 6.07 61 500.00 226.79 1963.65 12.68
24 12.00 5.44 566.31 6.11 62 600.00 272.15 2086.69 13.20
25 12.50 5.66 573.85 6.15 63 700.00 317.51 2196.72 13.67
26 13.00 5.89 581.52 6.19 64 800.00 362.87 2296.71 14.09
27 13.50 6.12 588.99 6.23 65 900.00 408.23 2388.68 14.48
28 14.00 6.35 596.28 6.27 66 1000.00 453.59 2474.06 14.83
29 14.50 6.57 603.08 6.30 67 1100.00 498.95 2553.93 15.16
30 15.00 6.80 610.04 6.34 68 1200.00 544.31 2629.09 15.47
31 15.50 7.03 616.84 6.37 69 1300.00 589.67 2700.18 15.76
32 16.00 7.25 623.21 6.41 70 1400.00 635.02 2767.70 16.03
33 16.50 7.48 629.73 6.44 71 1500.00 680.38 2832.09 16.39
34 17.00 7.71 636.12 6.47 72 1600.00 725.74 2893.67 16.54
35 17.50 7.93 642.12 6.50 73 1700.00 771.10 2952.75 16.77
36 18.00 8.16 648.27 6.54 74 1800.00 816.46 3009.55 17.00
37 18.50 8.39 654.30 6.57 75 1900.00 861.82 3064.28 17.22
38 19.00 8.61 659.97 6.60 76 2000.00 907.18 3117.12 17.43
0632. Spare.
to
0640.

RESTRICTED
SECTION 6.3 CHARGES USING CHARGE

DEMOLITION SHEET EXPLOSIVE
0641. Introduction. The section gives an introduction to the use of Charge
Demolition Sheet Explosive (SX), which has a similar explosive performance
to PE. Its sheet form (460 x 250 x 3 mm thick) enables it to be cut into
precise shapes and thus, by accurately matching the charge to the target,
the noise and shock levels of the detonation can be minimised. Although
this section gives examples of its use, the precise charge required for a
particular task must normally be determined by trials on an exactly similar
target.
0642. Preparation of Charges. The sheets may be cut with a sharp knife on a
non-metallic surface or with scissors. They may be built up in layers to form
thicker charges, or be butted together and held by joining clips to make
extended charges.
0643. Initiation of Charges. Charges may be initiated by flash or electric

detonators, detonating cord boosters or detonating cord. Initiation may be
either end on (see Figure 6/9) or at right angles to the sheet explosive (see
Figure 6/10).
a. End-on Initiation using Detonators. There are three ways of securing the
detonator:
(1) Using a detonator holder as illustrated in Figure 6/12.
(2) Using part of the sheet wrapped around the detonator.
(3) By sandwiching the detonator between two sheets or using an

extra patch as illustrated in Figure 6/9.
b. End-on Initiation using Detonating Cord. End-on initiation using

detonating cord is not very reliable. If detonating cord must be used,
four 50 mm lengths of detonating cord should be cut and bound to the
end of the detonating cord lead; this parcel of detonating cord is then
sandwiched between two sheets of SX.
c. Initiation at Right Angles to Charge. The detonator or knotted end of

detonating cord is either held in a knob (approximately 100 g) of plastic
explosive as illustrated in Figures 6/10, or the detonator is held in a
detonator holder as shown in Figure 6/12.

RESTRICTED
Figure 6/9. End initiation of SX using patch.
a. Using electric detonator. b. Using detonating cord.
Figure 6/10. Initiation of SX at right angles to charge.

RESTRICTED
0644. Maintenance of Detonation Wave. In long thin charges, when the

charges are formed around a sharp curve, the detonation wave may not be
maintained. A SX strip, or bridge, is used to carry the detonation wave to
other parts of the charge. This is illustrated in Figure 6/11.
0645. Typical Charges for Cutting Steel.
a. Ribbon Charge. The charge that is illustrated in Figure 6/11 produces a

longitudinal cut. The following should be used as a guide in estimating
the size of the charge required:
Charge thickness = Half target thickness

Charge width = Twice target thickness.
Figure 6/11. Ribbon charge used to cut a steel beam.
b. Diamond Charge. The diamond charge, which is illustrated in Figure

6/12, uses colliding shock waves to produce a tensile fracture in steel
bars and rods. The following should be used as a guide in estimating the
size of the charge required:
Long axis - Circumference of target

Short axis - Half the circumference
Thickness - Two layers for 50 mm mild steel
- Four layers for 50 mm high carbon steel
The charge should be initiated simultaneously at each end of the short

axis, which is aligned along the length of the bar as illustrated.

RESTRICTED
Figure 6/12. Diamond charge on steel bar.
c. Disc Cutting Charge. The detonation of a sheet charge placed in close

contact with a steel plate tears a slab of metal from the plate roughly the
same size as the charge. Figure 6/13 illustrates a disc charge and the
results.

RESTRICTED
Figure 6/13. Disc charge and effect.
0646. Preparation of Rear Surfaces. When cutting steel plate with ribbon or disc
charges, the rear surface of the plate should be free of any form of backing,
otherwise a heavier charge is required.
0647. Spare.
to
0650.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
SECTION 6.4 USE OF LINEAR CUTTING

CHARGES
0651. Introduction. The section gives an introduction to the use of the Flexible
Linear Cutting Charge (FLCC), known as ‘Sabre’ (see Section 2.3), and
user-filled charge containers (UFCC), such as DIOPLEX (brand name) (see
Section 3.4). Shaped but malleable forms of explosive make extremely
versatile cutting charges with comparatively low weights of explosive
content and UFCCs provide pre-formed shaped charges.
FLEXIBLE LINEAR CUTTING CHARGE (FLCC)
0652. Preparation of Charges.
a. Cutting. FLCC may be cut with a sharp knife or hacksaw on a smooth

non-metallic, non-sparking and grit free surface such as wood.
b. Shaping. Shaping should be carried out on a hard, plane surface to

avoid distortion. The minimum bend diameters are in Table 6-2.
0653. Placing of Charges. Cut the FLCC to length, remove the backing tape
and place the charge on the target surface. Press down firmly to ensure
the double-sided adhesive tape is firmly adhered to the target. In some
applications, additional adhesive tape may be required to secure the charge
to the target. Care should be taken to ensure total contact with the material
being cut, otherwise performance may be impaired, especially on curved
surfaces.
0654. Linking Lengths. Lengths of FLCC can be linked together using the
following methods:
a. Linking using detonator cord boosters.
b. Linking using flash detonators.
c. Linking using detonating cord.
d. Linking same sizes using a butt joint.
e. Linking different sizes using butt joints.
f. Linking using corner and ‘T’ joints.

RESTRICTED
0655. Initiation. All types of FLCC, except 63 g/m, can be top or end-initiated.
If end initiating, the charge should be cut 40 to 60 mm longer than required
for the charge. This is to allow the shock wave from the detonator sufficient
space to build up to its maximum velocity. Both methods of initiation
use the detonator holder or suitable adhesive tape to provide stability for
the detonator when fitted. Initiation can be carried out using an electric
detonator, a flash detonator, Detonation Cord Booster or a Shock Tube.
There are three methods of initiation:
a. Top initiation using detonator holder (see Figure 6/14a).
b. Top initiation using adhesive tape.
c. End initiation (see Figure 6/14b).
a. FLCC top initiation using detonator holder. b. FLCC end initiation.
Figure 6/14. FLCC initiation.
0656. Performance. The performance of FLCC against steel is listed in

Table 6-2 and illustrated in Figure 6/15a. The penetration depth is the
depth at which FLCC penetrates a target that is thicker than its maximum
severance distance. When FLCC charges are placed directly opposite to
each other (see Figure 6/15b), the depth of cut is double the penetration
depth.

RESTRICTED
a. Trial of 1150 g/m FLCC (‘Sabre’) on 20 mm steel plate.
Single Opposed
b. Single and opposed charges.
Figure 6/15. Flexible Linear Cutting Charge (FLCC).
TABLE 6-2 FLCC PERFORMANCE AGAINST STEEL
Serial Nature Effective bend radius (mm) Penetration Severance Opposed

(g/m) Tubular surface Flat surface (mm) (mm) charges(mm)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

1 40 50 200 2 3 4
2 100 50 200 5 6 10
3 350 50 200 10 12.5 20
4 600 50 300 15 20 30
5 1150 100 400 22 25 44

RESTRICTED
USER-FILLED CHARGE CONTAINERS (UFCCs) – DIOPLEX
0657. General. UFCCs such as the DIOPLEX family of aluminium-bodied

containers (see Figure 6/16) are supplied in kit form and user filled. They
have an insert for use as cutting charges. The charge containers are
assembled in sizes corresponding to particular applications and then filled
with plastic explosive. The user cuts DIOPLEX to the lengths required, fills
them and fits plastic end-caps to each end of the charge. The charges
are capable of cutting between 10 mm and 110 mm of steel. DIOPLEX
is available in 1 m and 50 cm lengths. The ½ m kits contain all necessary
components to build two charges of ½ m or less in length, while the 1 m kits
offer the components for the building up to three charges.
Figure 6/16. Sizes of DIOPLEX.
0658. Initiation. Each DIOPLEX charge may be initiated at either or both ends by
insertion of a detonator (see Figure 6/17) or detonating cord booster (DCB).
Alternatively, or in addition, it is possible to initiate the 40 mm charge at any
point along the centre line of the back by means of a clip-on initiator. This,
in turn, is initiated by means of a detonator, DCB or detonating cord. The
initiator is designed to be placed easily in conditions of zero visibility. It
provides a particularly convenient way to interconnect an array of charges
after they have been attached to the targets. When end initiating a length of
DIOPLEX, the DIOPLEX should be cut 40 mm longer than required to allow
the shock wave from the detonator to build up to its full velocity. Failure to
do this may result in reduced performance at the end of a charge.

RESTRICTED
Figure 6/17. End cap for 40 mm DIOPLEX with detonator.
0659. Attachment to Target. DIOPLEX is attached to the target using velcro

strips supplied with the kits (see Figure 6/18). Alternatively, normal tape or
strong magnets can be used.
Figure 6/18. Dioplex attached to steel tower.
0660. Sizes and Performance. DIOPLEX comes in four basic sizes: 20 mm, 30
mm, 40 mm and 80mm. Each size is available in ½ m and 1 m lengths.
Table 6-3 details the specification of DIOPLEX.

RESTRICTED
TABLE 6-3 SPECIFICATION AND CAPABILITY OF DIOPLEX
Serial Size PE required (kg) per metre length Maximum severance of steel
(a) (b) (c) (d)
1 20 mm 0.2 10 mm
2 30 mm 0.8 30 mm
3 40 mm 1.7 40 mm
4 80 mm 4.7 110 mm
0661. Use under Water. It is possible, after sealing the end-caps in position
and sealing the longitudinal junction between the body and the liner, to use
DIOPLEX at water depths of several metres. Advice is available from the
manufacturers. The end-caps must be sealed with silicone rubber for use
under water.
0662. Spare.
to
0670.

RESTRICTED
SECTION 6.5 USE OF EXPLOSIVES TO AID

DIGGING
GENERAL
0671. The principle of explosive digging is that a number of small charges are
exploded below ground to loosen the soil, so most can be dug out with
shovels and without the need for pickaxes. No attempt should be made
to blow the soil out of the ground, ie to form a crater, as this results in soil
being scattered over a wide area with consequent loss of concealment; it
also weakens the sides of the trench. If charges of the correct size are used,
a crater should not be formed.
0672. The method can be used for digging battle trenches or larger earthworks,
considerable advantage being gained when excavating large areas such as
gun or vehicle pits. However, preliminary work and safety precautions are
necessary and these may cancel out the time saved in digging, especially on
small tasks such as a single trench. Nevertheless, it is usually a worthwhile
method when several trenches and pits are to be dug.
0673. Safety. The safety rules and procedures given in Chapter 12 apply to
explosive digging.
0674. Site Marking. For larger excavations, a channel should be dug by hand
around the perimeter about 0.15 m deep and 0.15 m wide (a spade’s depth
and width). This helps to produce a clean face to the excavation. For small
areas, eg a battle trench, it is sufficient to spitlock the edge of the trench.
CHARGES
0675. Size of Charges. The required charge depends on the type of soil and size
of excavation, and can only be determined by trial. CGI sheets propped up
vertically and secured with pickets round a trial charge help limit the scatter
of earth. Charges for large pits are likely to be between a half a block and
one and a half blocks of PE (0.25 kg to 0.75 kg). When, as is usual, it is
important to avoid scattering debris, trials should start with half a block of
PE and increase progressively until a suitable size is established. However,
for excavations of less than 1.2 m widths, trials should start with smaller
charges (one segment of a block of PE (100 g) is normally suitable for battle
trenches).

RESTRICTED
0676. Spacing of Charges. Charges should be placed either in parallel rows

and staggered, or in concentric rings. The distances between charges in a
row or ring, and the distance between rows or rings of charges, should be
between one and one and a half times their depth (see Paragraph 0677). A
wider spacing means fewer charges and less work digging them in, but, in
general, the results are not as good as with closer spacing. This does not
apply to narrow excavations, such as battle trenches, where a single row of
charges is sufficient.
0677. Layout of Charges. Figure 6/19 shows the layout for charges for various
types of excavation. The charges should not be less than 0.60 m from the
planned edge of the excavation. Where the total width is less than 1.20 m,
ie the minimum distance of 0.60 m cannot be achieved, as in a battle trench,
reduced charges are used.
Channel edge approximately

0.60 m 0.15 m x 0.15 m
0.60 m
Outer edge
of pit
a. Layout of boreholes for rectangular pit.
Outer edge of pit
0.60 m
Channel approximately
0.15 m x 0.15 m
b. Layout of boreholes for circular pit.
Figure 6/19. Spacing of explosive charges.

RESTRICTED
2.0 m
Channel approximately
0.15 m x 0.15 m
1.20 m 0.60 m 1.10 m 0.30 m
0.60 m
Outer edge
of pit
c. Layout of boreholes for hairpin shelter pit.
1.8 m
0.60 m 0.60 m 0.60 m
d. Layout of boreholes for two-man battle trench.
Figure 6/19 (continued). Spacing of explosive charges.
0678. Depth and Placing of Charges. Charges should be placed below ground
at a depth of between 0.60 m and 1.20 m, depending on the required depth
of pit. The explosions loosen the earth to a depth from 0.15 m to 0.30 m
below the charges, so the charges should be placed about 0.30 m above the
required floor level of the excavation. There is usually no difficulty in making
the holes for the explosives with a manual borehole driver. However, if
manual borehole drivers are not available, slower alternatives are crowbars,
earth augers or picks and shovels, but with these methods it may be difficult
to make a hole to the required depth. In this case, it may be advisable to
explode one set of charges at half the full depth, dig out the earth as far
down as it has been loosened, and then dig holes to the full required depth
and place a second set of charges.

RESTRICTED
TWO-MAN SURVIVAL HOLE
0679. The procedure for digging a two-man survival hole is as follows. The
procedure when digging any other type of excavation is similar.
a. Spitlocking Outer Edge of Trench. (1.80 m x 0.60 m).
b. Marking Holes for Charges. Three charges are used on the longitudinal
centre line of the trench, one at the centre and the others 0.60 m either
side.
c. Making Holes to Receive Charges. Three holes, 0.05 m minimum

diameter and 0.90 m deep, are made using the manual borehole driver
(or other means if the manual borehole driver is not available).
d. Preparing Charges. Each charge of one segment of a block of PE

(100 g) is prepared by moulding it around the knotted end of a length
of detonating cord (one charge at the end of a 3 m length of detonating
cord for the centre hole and the other two at either end of a 4 m length
as shown in Figure 6/20). The charges may be secured by tape or in a
plastic bag. The charges are then lowered down the holes.
e. Preparing Firing Circuit. The detonating cords are connected with

a detonating clip as shown in Figure 6/20. If no detonating clip is
available, the detonating cord leads should be brought together to form
a detonating cord junction box.
f. Firing. Ensure all personnel except those concerned with the initiation
of the charges have withdrawn to a safe distance, then ignite the safety
fuze, preferably using a Firing Device Demolition Grip.

RESTRICTED
Initiation set
One 3 m length (minimum 0.6 m safety fuze)
detonating cord
Firing device demolition
One 4 m length grip switch Proposed trench
detonating cord
Detonating clip
Loosened soil
Camouflet chamber
0.9 m
1.20 m
0.6 m 0.6 m 100 g

1.8 m
PE
a. Position of charges and circuit. b. The result.
Figure 6/20. Charges for two-man survival hole.
In most soils the detonation of the charges produces three small camouflet
chambers about 0.60 m below ground level, loosening the earth above, as
shown in Figure 6/20. When shovelling out the earth, standing in the trench
unnecessarily should be avoided, preferably until the camouflet chambers
are reached, as this re-compacts the soil.
MANUAL BOREHOLE DRIVER
0680. The manual borehole driver produces 0.05 m diameter holes simply and
quickly. A set of the equipment, which is illustrated in Figure 6/21, consists
of a driver (‘thumper’), a driving tube, a collar and two rotating and lifting
spanners. The set weighs approximately 23 kg and requires two men to
use it.

RESTRICTED
Square cap to
100 x 100 x 40 mm
fit extractor
steel head
attachment
Handles 1.70 m
0.70 m
30 mm diameter
60 mm (internal
diameter) tube
a. Driver. b. Driving tube.

Ring to fit over
driving tube
Metal lug Welds
Square spanner
attachment
50 mm diameter
Loose washer
c. Collar (expendable). d. Rotating and lifting spanner.
Figure 6/21. Manual borehole driver.
0681. Driver. The driver consists of a steel tube 0.70 m long and 60 mm internal
diameter. One end is open while the other is closed by a solid steel block.
The handles, which are fitted one to either side, run parallel to the tube and
extend almost its whole length; they enable the operators to work without
undue stretching or bending. The driver fits over the driving tube and, when
repeatedly lifted and dropped (or forced down), drives the tube into the
ground.
0682. Driving Tube. The driving tube is 1.7 m long and has a solid point and cap.
The cap is square in section to provide a purchase for the rotating and lifting
spanner; the remainder is 32 mm in diameter. When, during the driving, the
bottom of the driver touches the ground, the tube has reached the required
depth.
0683. Collar. The collar, which is expendable, slips over the point of the driving
tube. Being slightly larger in diameter than the tube, it provides a tolerance
that eases both the driving and withdrawal of the tube. When the point of
the tube is lifted, the collar remains at the bottom of the hole.

RESTRICTED
0684. Rotating and Lifting Spanner. The spanner has two purposes:
a. To rotate and loosen the sunken driving tube.
b. To withdraw the sunken tube.
The tube is rotated by fitting the spanner to the square top of the driving
tube, and turning. For withdrawal, two spanners are required; their looped
ends are placed over the protruding tube, the other ends being in opposite
directions. An upward movement of the outer ends establishes a grip on the
tube and the spanners then act together as a lifting bar.
0685. Spare.
to
0690.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
SECTION 6.6 USE OF EXPLOSIVES FOR

IMPROVISED ARMOURED VEHICLE
TRACK CUTTING
GENERAL
0691. When a track is partially thrown or suffers battlefield damage, the increased
track tension may make slackening at the track adjuster impossible and
necessitate cutting with explosives before the vehicle can be moved. Track
cutting is usually the responsibility of Royal Electrical and Mechanical
Engineers recovery crews.
0692. Royal Engineers may be required to cut the tracks of armoured vehicles in
an emergency when the tactical situation requires rapid action and a Royal
Electrical and Mechanical Engineers recovery team is not available; minor
collateral damage to the vehicle may have to be accepted. The method
described in this section should be used only in such circumstances.
FLEXIBLE LINEAR CUTTING CHARGE
0693. Flexible Linear Cutting Charge (FLCC), or a user-filled charge container

(UFCC) system such as ‘DIOPLEX’ (brand name), should be used in
preference to the improvised method described in this section. FLCC,
or a UFCC system, is quicker to use and likely to be more effective; the
principles for its use are the same as those for the improvised charge. The
sizes of FLCC for cutting different types of track are listed in Table 6-4. An
example of the effect of DIOPLEX is shown in Figure 6/22.
a. DIOPLEX secured in position. b. Effect.
Figure 6/22. Use of DIOPLEX for track cutting.

RESTRICTED
IMPROVISED SHAPED CHARGE
0694. Tracks can be cut with explosives using 0.6 m or 1.8 m angle iron pickets
to form a shaped charge. The picket, or pickets if one is needed each side
of the track horn, must cover the width of the track. They are windlassed
in place across the track above the track pins on single-pinned track (see
Figures 6/23 and 6/24) and between the pins on double-pinned track (see
Figure 6/25). If a picket is too long, the overhang should be supported by
earth or sandbags.
Plastic explosive
moulded over picket
Angle iron picket
Plastic explosive
moulded over
picket Detonating
cord
Detonating cord
secured by tape
Picket
windlassed
to track
Picket overhang
supported by
earth or sandbags
Figure 6/23. Improvised cutting of single-pinned track without lug.

RESTRICTED
Picket overhang
supported by
earth or sandbags
Detonating cord
secured by tape
Picket Plastic explosive

windlassed moulded over
to track picket
Detonating
cord
Figure 6/24. Improvised cutting of single-pinned track with lug.
Figure 6/25. Improvised cutting of multi-pinned track.

RESTRICTED
0695. The track is cut on the track angle between the track adjusting wheel and
nearest road wheel or between the final drive (sprocket) wheel and nearest
road wheel (see Figure 6/25) where the track is clear of the ground. If this is
not possible, a space has to be cleared under the track to allow windlassing
of the picket to the track.
0696. The plastic explosive (see Table 6-3) is packed around the picket, distributed
evenly, and must cover the whole width of the track. Detonating cord is
connected and secured. It is essential the area between the charge, the
underside of the hull, suspension, and track adjusting or sprocket wheel and
nearest road wheel is packed with sandbags to provide tamping and protect
vulnerable areas such as suspension units, road wheels and, particularly,
pannier fuel tanks. Initiation can be by an electrical or a flash initiation set.
TABLE 6-4 EXPLOSIVE FOR TRACK CUTTING
FLCC UFCC Improvised Method

Serial Vehicle (i) Approximate NEQ Number of 0.5 kg PE blocks
(g/m) (mm) (kg) (ii)
(a) (b) (c ) (d) (e) (f)
1 Challenger 2 1150 40 1 2
2 Trojan, Titan 1150 40 1 2
3 Warrior, Terrier 600 40 0.5 1
4 FV 430 Series 600 40 0.5 1
5 CVR(T) 600 40 0.5 1
Notes:
i. Based on DIOPLEX.
ii. To be opened and moulded.
SAFETY
0697. Subject to tactical requirements, the vehicle should be unoccupied and

hatches should be closed but not locked.

RESTRICTED
CHAPTER 7 USE OF EXPLOSIVES FOR

ASSAULT BREACHING
SECTION 7.1 GENERAL
0701. Introduction. The chapter covers generic explosive assault breaching
techniques for forcing entry into buildings and other fortified structures,
which is a component capability of engineer close support to dismounted
close combat operations. Most of the techniques described apply to wall
breaching, with some advice on door and window breaching. Until the
anticipated introduction of special purpose assault breaching charges and
accessories, which will enable more consistent and predictable breaching,
all the techniques described are improvised. The tactics and procedures
used to create a breach and exploit it successfully are outside the scope
of this chapter. There are other methods of assault breaching that do not
involve the use of explosives and commanders should choose a method
that suits the tactical situation; these other methods include:
a. Mechanical Breaching. Using manual and powered hand tools such

as sledge hammers, axes, crow bars, battering rams and chainsaws to
break open an entrance way (see Figure 7/1).
Figure 7/1. Use of manual breaching tools.
b. Ballistic Breaching. Using ballistic projectiles such as those from the in-
service shotgun to break or disrupt the locking mechanisms and hinges
on doorways (see Figure 7/2).

RESTRICTED
Figure 7/2. Use of shotgun to disrupt locking mechanism.
c. Thermal Breaching. Using thermal breaching equipment such as the

BROCO thermal lance to cut metallic structures, locks and hinges (see
Figure 7/3).
Figure 7/3. Man-packed thermal lance.

RESTRICTED
BASIC PRINCIPLES
0702. The guiding principles of preparing and using explosive breaching charges
should, as far as possible, be employed at the same time to optimise the
effects and utility of the explosive breaching charge.
0703. Explosive Effects. Explosive breaching uses the compound effects of

direct shock and blast loading to the target to cause it to fail and create an
exploitable breach. The likely mode and extent of the failure depend on the
breaching charge employed and on the strength, toughness, coherence and
thickness of the target and the extent of any compressive or tensile stresses
acting on it. An effective breaching charge causes failure of the structure
immediately in the vicinity and over the area of the charge; the remainder of
the structure should be largely intact and thus safe to exploit.
0704. Exploitable Breach. An exploitable breach is one through which at least

one soldier can pass easily when loaded with personal equipment. This is
a breach approximately 1.0 m to 1.2 m high and 0.6 m to 0.8 m wide, with
the bottom of the breach not too high, nor the top so low, that it is difficult
to step through at speed. Different to an exploitable breach, a ‘mousehole’
is a form of breach that creates a smaller access hole, usually at ground
level, which has greatest utility in urban operations, doing minimal damage
to buildings and enabling movement between rooms within buildings.
Mousehole charges are typically of a much smaller net explosive quantity
(NEQ), though it does depend on the material the target is constructed from.
0705. Coupling. As much of the shock and blast as possible should couple
with the target to achieve the highest peak shock load (or ‘punch’) and for
the blast to be constrained and directed on to the target area for as long
as possible to apply the highest, longest duration impulse (‘push’). In an
inefficient charge, much of the effect does not couple with the target and
is wasted as extraneous blast. Uncoupled, free blast, particularly where
there are opposite and adjacent surfaces off which it can reflect, can lead
to blast pressure injury (barotrauma) to adjacent troops and to unplanned
and extensive structural damage, which can also present a physical hazard
during exploitation. Coupling is best achieved by ensuring intimate physical
contact between the charges and the structure and effective initiation of
individual charges within the breaching charge. The design should ensure
the shock and blast from individual charges within a breaching charge
interfere constructively with each other (ie add together). Tamping charges
with water or other non-flammable liquids, sand, soil, wood or any other
dense material also contributes to the coupling of the explosive and target.
Any material used to tamp the explosive should be free of elements that
could cause a fragmentation hazard to friendly troops.

RESTRICTED
0706. Dual Initiation. Where a breaching charge comprises several individual

charges, it is essential these are initiated simultaneously. This ensures
the peak shock load on the target is maximised, the internally reflected
shock does not detach and decouple un-detonated charges, and colliding
shockwaves from individual charges interfere constructively within the target
to best effect. Where a breaching charge comprises a continuous run of
explosive, simultaneous initiation from two points, usually at opposing ends,
creates colliding shock waves in the centre that interfere constructively.
Using dual initiation enhances the likelihood of success.
0707. Charge Weight Optimisation. The NEQ of the charge should be optimised
to give maximum planned effect and minimum unintended collateral effect,
which includes not only physical damage to structures but also injury to
assaulting troops. Ways to achieve charge weight optimisation are ideally
best used together; they are:
a. Charge Size and Distribution. An amount of explosive can be distributed

as a single point charge, a number of individual distributed charges, or a
run of explosive distributed continuously over a defined area. To create
an exploitable breach, it is best to distribute the explosive appropriately
over an area of approximately the required dimensions; ideally 1.0 m x
0.6 m. If the charges are too small and distributed too widely, the breach
will fail. Conversely, if the charge is not distributed widely enough,
the charge will fail to create the desired size of breach. Simultaneous
initiation of all parts of the charge is important in achieving charge weight
optimisation.
b. Tamping. The NEQ of the charge should be adequate to defeat the

target and guarantee success but not to cause catastrophic structural
failure that might hinder successful exploitation and not to cause blast
and fragment injury to the exploitation force. Tamping enhances the
effectiveness of a given mass of explosive; tamped charges are more
effective than bare charges of the same NEQ. Increasing the amount of
tamping material both decreases the amount of uncoupled (free) blast
and increases the effectiveness and efficiency of the charge, up to a
practical limit (see Section 5.5 Pier Footing Charges). Depending on the
tamping medium used and how it is applied, there is an optimum balance
between the quantity of explosive and of the tamping medium; this is
where increasing weight and bulk cease to be justified by increasing
effectiveness.

RESTRICTED
0708. Effect and Portability. A charge of the required dimensions with a large
NEQ and significant dense tamping material may not be adequately
portable, in bulk and weight, for the tactical conditions. A small, light and
un-tamped charge may be portable but might not produce the intended
effect on the target. For most targets, a balance has to be sought and the
following should be considered:
a. Principles. Application of the principles of explosive breaching to charge

design.
b. Anticipation. Optimisation of the generic design to match planned or

anticipated targets.
c. Modular Charges. Design of modular charges that can be carried in

parts and assembled in a number of configurations of increasing NEQ,
as required, or into the required breaching charge immediately before
use.
d. Secondary Charges. Carriage of a reserve or secondary breaching

charge and manual breaching and exploitation tools to complete a part
or failed breach. A shaped charge could be included to cut reinforcing.
e. Evaluation. Continuous test and evaluation against representative

targets, and the exploitation of performance data from operations, to
refine designs and enhance understanding.
0709. Staged Attacks and Reserve Charges. Some targets may be difficult to
defeat in a single-stage attack and without additional charges or breaching
and exploitation tools. The following methods depend on the tactical
situation and on the availability and suitability of specialist tools:
a. Hard and Reinforced Targets. Hard and reinforced targets may require a
second similar charge or a reserve charge of a different type or smaller
NEQ. Reinforced targets may require the reinforcing to be cut following
the stripping of the surrounding concrete from the target. This may be
achieved explosively using bar cutting charges or hand tools such as bar
cutting tools, high performance bolt cutters and disc cutters.
b. Boreholes. If tactically viable, borehole charges may be used against

very thick targets that would otherwise require a charge with a large NEQ.
Boreholes may be created using drills or shaped charges. Boreholes
may be packed with bulk plastic explosive and, depending on their size,
with items such as Barmines and Bangalore Torpedoes.

RESTRICTED
0710. Immediate Exploitation. The breaching and exploitation party must

assemble (or ‘stack’) as closely as possible to the breach, to complete the
breach and to exploit it immediately. This requires an understanding of the
characteristics of the charge and the associated safety distances, the use
of secondary or reserve charges and the employment of manual tools.
0711. Collateral Damage. The creation of an exploitable breach must be balanced

against the likely structural damage the target and any surrounding structures
will suffer and the impact of this damage on the capacity required for any
subsequent occupation of the target. Additionally, the damage caused by the
charge must be sanctioned within the theatre rules of engagement (ROE) (see
Sub-paragraph 0712d). Creating a breach by causing catastrophic collapse
in a run of free-standing wall may be preferable to creating an exploitable
hole through it, as it removes the risk of collapse of overlying material on to
the exploitation force. However, catastrophic collapse caused to buildings,
especially those with two or more stories, may make them unsafe to enter
and to occupy and may reduce their tactical utility. In designing or selecting
a charge, it should be considered whether catastrophic damage is likely to
facilitate or hinder exploitation and occupation. Where it has no adverse
tactical impact, which is more likely with free-standing protective walls, it
may be simpler and more appropriate to use physically small, simple, large
NEQ charges rather than design physically larger, more complex charges
with lower NEQ.
0712. Tactical Preparation. The following factors need to be taken into account
before conducting explosive breaching tasks:
a. Training and Knowledge. Particularly for improvised charges, the selected

configuration and placement of the charge to achieve an exploitable
breach require a developed understanding of the target construction and
its response under direct blast load and of the principles of explosive
breaching. Inadequate training and knowledge can lead to failure of
technique and to avoidable injury. Where possible, testing on targets of
similar design should be conducted. Rehearsals should also take place
where the operational situation permits.
b. Technical Factors. The construction and any subsequent fortification

of the target influence the type, configuration and placement of the
breaching charge.

RESTRICTED
c. Logistic Issues. For operations, breaching charges should, as far as

possible, be prepared in advance, as the materials required to construct
improvised charges may not be readily available once the task has
commenced. Breaching charges, especially for demanding, thick-walled
targets, can be bulky and heavy and tactical carriage and re-supply in
contact should be considered.
d. Rules of Engagement. The type and design of charge, particularly if the

target requires a large NEQ, may be influenced by rules of engagement
that require direct and collateral damage to be kept to a minimum.
Advice on or prior approval of the effects of the charge may need to be
sought.
INITIATION TECHNIQUES FOR BREACHING CHARGES
0713. For a breach to be successful, initiation of the main charge must be

controllable, predictable, reliable and effective. Broadly, the means of
initiation are remote electrical (radio-controlled); direct electrical (using
cables and a Shrike or other service electrical exploder, including electronic
timers); igniferous (using safety fuse and non-electric detonators); and non-
electric, instantaneous (using shock tube). Planning factors for the selection
of the technique most appropriate to the task include:
a. Availability of the relevant accessories.
b. Portability of the selected system.
c. Extent of pre-configuration required and the amount of preparation on

task.
d. Inherent reliability of the system, taking account of the reliability of each

individual element within the initiation train.
e. Scope for operator error in preparation.
f. Ease of use.
g. Stealth that each technique offers to the operator and the degree of
control over the timing of firing that each provides.
Pre-configured, fully-integrated shock tube systems are most widely used

for breaching as they offer the optimum overall performance against these
criteria.

RESTRICTED
0714. Dual Initiation. Initiation of the breaching charge using dual initiation trains
makes the breach less likely to fail because of a point failure in one initiation
method. For safety fuze initiation, it means incorporating two initiation trains
and firing them simultaneously or in very rapid succession. For electrical
initiation, it can be achieved by the use of separate firing circuits, where
the second is the reserve only, and by incorporating two detonators into
individual circuits. For initiation by shock tube initiating systems, the same
principles apply; dual circuit shock tube firing devices are purpose-made for
breaching.
0715. Multi-point Initiation within Charges. The error parameter in the delay
time for the initiation of electric detonators in the same circuit is too great
for reliable simultaneous initiation at several points. Simultaneous initiation
is best achieved using detonating cord tails radiating from a central point
of initiation by a detonator out to the individual charges. Individual charges
are then initiated either by a Detonating Cord Booster (DCB), the most
effective option, or by the tail ending in an embedded detonating cord
knot. Simultaneity is achieved by ensuring each length of each detonating
cord tail, from the point of initiation either to where it connects to the DCB
or meets the surface of the explosive where a knot is used, is identical.
The issues relating to the initiation of the Barmine as an assault breaching
charge are addressed in Paragraph 0734.
0716. Initiation of Charges with Knotted Detonating Cord.
a. The detonation shock waves in a mass of plastic explosive resulting from

initiation of a detonating cord knot emanate radially (ie in an expanding
sphere and thus in all directions) outwards from the knot. The principle of
effective coupling requires shock and blast to be directed into the target.
Therefore, when a detonating cord knot is embedded in the centre of a
mass of plastic explosive or, worse, is so deeply embedded it is close to
the surface in contact with the target, the result is reduced effectiveness,
especially in un-tamped charges.
b. The most effective and efficient bulk plastic explosive charges initiated
by knotted detonating cord are configured so the charge is broader at
the point of contact than at the point of initiation and the detonating cord
knot is embedded in sufficient depth of plastic explosive it detonates it
reliably, but not so deep much of the shock and blast does not couple
directly with the target. The use of knotted detonating cord should be
avoided where possible; either DCBs or slip-on boosters (see Figure 7/4)
are more efficient.

RESTRICTED
c. A more efficient means of creating a booster is to make a tight loop at

the end of a run of detonating cord, with the loose end taped off (see
Figure 7/5). The hole in the loop is filled with plastic or sheet explosive
(ideally, a PETN-based sheet explosive) (see Figure 7/6) and covered in
cling film or very thin plastic sheet, taped for security.
Figure 7/4. Slip-on detonating cord booster.
Figure 7/5. Booster created from detonating cord loop.

RESTRICTED
Figure 7/6. Improvised PETN sheet explosive slip-on booster over detonating cord.
0717. Charge Placement and Propping. When placing breaching charges, the
construction of the target must be considered. Features that may have
an impact on effectiveness are internal walls and buttresses, reinforcing,
corners, lintels, chimneys, internal fixtures and fittings such as radiators,
raised internal floors, the height above ground level at which the breach
is required, and the presence of blast-reflecting surfaces. After blast
overpressure, the principal danger to adjacent troops is from the rearwards
projection of the prop. Waterproofed medium density fibreboard poles and
wooden and plastic poles present a lower level of hazard than the use of
scaffold or other metal poles.
0718. Spare.
to
0720.

RESTRICTED
SECTION 7.2 ASSAULT BREACHING CHARGES

IMPROVISED BREACHING CHARGES USING BULK PLASTIC EXPLOSIVE
0721. Basic Improvised Cruciform Charge. (See Figure 7/7). The basic
improvised cruciform charge is one of the most expedient assault breaching
charges to construct:
a. Suitability. The basic improvised cruciform charge is best used against

simply constructed, weaker targets that do not require a large NEQ to
create an exploitable breach. Its size makes it relatively burdensome,
though it is typically lighter than other improvised charges. Its main use
is in mouse-holing.
b. Construction and Materials. The basic improvised cruciform charge is

constructed from a simple ‘X’, made by joining two pieces of softwood or
other material of low fragmentation hazard, eg lightweight mine marking
poles, each of which should be no more than 750 mm long. The cruciform
must not be joined with items such as nails or screws that would increase
the fragmentation hazard; a lap joint is ideal, enabling the charge to be
partially broken down to ease the burden of carrying.
c. Explosives and Initiation. PE blocks are taped on to the extremities of

each of the four limbs in the quantities required to create an exploitable
breach in the target. Each individual quantity of explosives should
be initiated with either a slip-on booster or, preferably, a Detonating
Cord Booster (DCB). Initiation by double thumb knot is not ideal, as it
necessitates the removal of the explosive from its clear film packaging,
leaving the charge vulnerable to disintegration before use and potentially
shortening the useful life of the explosive. Detonating cord tails of
identical length are taken from each individual charge, usually through a
borehole in the wood, back to a central, taped cradle, to which either a
single or dual initiation method is attached for firing. A centrally placed
‘kicking’ charge should be added to increase the effectiveness of the
charge, particularly if the limbs are too long and the individual charges
too small to be effective against the chosen target.
d. Prop. The charge is usually propped up against the target using a

wooden pole or other suitable and available material; the prop may be an
accessory or a fixed feature of pre-made charges.

RESTRICTED
e. Performance. The performance of this type of charge is unpredictable.

The size of each individual charge, the proximity of each charge to the
adjacent charge (defined by the length of the limbs), the simultaneity
of initiation and the presence of a kicking charge all determine its
effectiveness; experimentation has shown the size of the charges and
the dimensions of the cross can be critical. If the charges are too small
and too spread out, the breach will fail; if they are too large, the excessive
free blast can lead to catastrophic damage to the structure. The
dimensions of such charges tend to be small and, in many hard targets,
this does not produce an easily exploitable breach. Tactically, they are
awkward to carry, vulnerable to physical damage and have limited use in
any secondary roles. The overall weight of this charge is typically about
4.5 kg.
a. Construction.
Figure 7/7. Basic improvised cruciform charge.

RESTRICTED
b. In position.
Figure 7/7 (continued). Basic improvised cruciform charge.
0722. Advanced Improvised Cruciform Charge. (See Figure 7/8). More

advanced and larger NEQ cruciform charges have been developed on
operations:
a. Suitability. The advanced improvised cruciform charge has most

use against more complex targets; namely those that are of tougher
construction, possibly with minor or weak reinforcing. It is more
burdensome because of its slightly increased size and comparative
weight than the standard cruciform charge, though it is likely to create
a more exploitable breach. It tends to take longer to produce than the
basic improvised cruciform charge discussed in Paragraph 0721.
b. Construction. Advanced improvised cruciform charges are constructed

using two pieces of softwood 50 mm x 50 mm x 800 mm, joined by a
central lap joint. One member is bolstered by two pieces of 50 mm x
50 mm x 250 mm softwood that are joined to each side of it by dowel
pegs (to avoid metal fragment hazards); the other member fits into the
lap joint. If prepared carefully, so there is an interference fit, there is no
requirement to join the two cross members with any fixing means. These
two parts can be carried separately and joined when required. The frame
is constructed as shown in Figure 7/8.

RESTRICTED
c. Explosives and Initiation. The enhanced spar has two PE blocks taped
on at each end and four taped or tie wrapped on centrally over the area
where the additional bolsters are added. The other spar has two PE
blocks taped or tie-wrapped on to each end. Initiation should be by dual
detonating cord cradles leading to detonating cord, with initiating DCBs
inserted into the side or top of each PE block, so enabling the PE to stay
in its clear film packaging.
d. Prop. The charge is usually propped up against the target using a

wooden pole or other suitable and available material; the prop may be an
accessory or a fixed feature of pre-made charges. Given the weight of
this type of charge, a prop stick block fitted on to the charge can assist
in holding it against the target more efficiently.
e. Performance. The performance of this type of charge is more predictable

against small to medium and lightly reinforced targets; this is balanced
against the heavier weight for the soldier to carry. The overall weight of
this charge is typically about 6.5 kg. The charge is subject to the same
aspects as the basic improvised cruciform charge (see Sub-paragraph
0721e).
Figure 7/8. Advanced improvised cruciform design.

RESTRICTED
0723. Improvised Frame Charges. (See Figures 7/9, 7/10 and 7/11). Frame
charges are particularly suited to certain types of operations.
a. Suitability. Frame charges are suitable for charges that require a lower
NEQ than the improvised cruciform charge variants and are particularly
useful where precision is required; smaller NEQs can easily be applied
in the right area of the target to produce maximum effect with minimum
resources. However, frame charges require considerable preparation
and are bulkier and more difficult to carry than the cruciform variants.
b. Construction. Frame charges can be constructed in a number of ways.

Depending on the charge type to be used, the frame can be rectangular
or have angled edges, eg to form a ‘D’ shape.
(1) One-piece Frames. One-piece frames can be constructed from

pieces of softwood (typically 25 mm x 50 mm) to form an oblong
external frame approximately 1.0 m high and 0.6 m wide, with an
additional transverse bracing piece across the centre. Alternative
shapes can be created to conform to other target or charge sizes.
(2) Hinged Frames. Frames can be hinged in the centre to assist with
their carriage. The hinges should not be made from a material that
could cause an extra fragmentation hazard; cable ties are ideal
for this purpose. For ease of carriage, half frames can be carried
separately and assembled just before use.
c. Explosives and Initiation. The frame is a particularly useful for positioning

explosives to defeat a specific target:
(1) Detonating Cord. The frame may be loaded with detonating cord
loops taped on to the frame in the manner of a squared-off figure-
of-eight. There should be two points of initiation, eg cradles, ready
to accept detonators either off to each side, adjacent to the central
cross piece, or from both the top and bottom of the frame.
(2) Sheet Explosive. The frame may be loaded with sheet explosive in
the quantities required to defeat the target. This could be initiated
with a run of detonating cord around the timber frame, fitted with
slip-on boosters, or alternatively double thumb knots, to ensure full
initiation. Alternatively, multiple DCBs, fitted between the frame
and sheet explosive could be initiated by a run of detonating cord
around the frame. This could, in turn, be initiated by two cradles,
enabling dual initiation by either electric or non-electric means.

RESTRICTED
(3) Plastic Explosive. The frame can be loaded with bulk plastic
explosive blocks taped on to the frame if a continuous run of
charges is required. When using bulk explosive, initiation should
be from two points (top and bottom) using a variety of techniques
appropriate to the type of explosive being used. These may
be underlying detonating cord loops with knots or with slip-on
boosters fitted, detonating cord boosters placed into the body
of the charge at appropriate points, or electric or shock tube
detonators embedded directly into the charge.
(4) Shaped Charges. Variants of Flexible Linear Cutting Charge

(FLCC) can be attached to frame charges. These charges tend to
have an associated free blast and the foam backing contributes
to a significant fireball and the creation of a considerable quantity
of smoke, which must be taken into account if breaching into
enclosed spaces such as rooms in buildings. If using a shaped
charge such as FLCC, two options are recommended for mounting
the charge on the frame. A frame can be made out of wood with
the shaped charge mounted on to the ‘home’ side of the charge,
facing the ‘breach’ side and the wood placed against the target
(see Figure 7/10). When shaped charges are used, the most
effective method of initiation is by dual initiation at both ends and
by DCBs, connected by detonating cord, placed evenly along its
length. If smaller variants of DIOPLEX are used, the charge can
be secured to the ‘breach’ side of the frame, ensuring intimate
physical contact between the target and charge.
d. Prop. The improvised frame charge is usually propped up against the

target using a wooden pole or other suitable material; the prop may be
an adjunct or a fixed feature of the charge. Construction of the prop
should ensure coupling is achievable between the charge, particularly if
the frame is two-piece or hinged, and the target.
e. Performance. Experimentation has shown frame charges with even

apparently small NEQ loads are very effective as the wood provides
a degree of charge tamping. The dimensions are commensurate with
those of the desired breach and the frames lend themselves to loading
according to the target and the environment. The expectations of the
effect on target should be tempered against the quantity of explosives
used on the frame. Higher NEQ variants of Sabre provide an efficient
single-stage attack against most reinforced targets. The improvised
frame charge offers superior performance over improvised cruciform
charges of the same NEQ, though tactically they are awkward to carry
and difficult to carry in large quantities. The weight of the charge varies
greatly according to the frame size and nature and quantity of explosive.

RESTRICTED
a. Construction.
b. In position.
Figure 7/9. Improvised frame charge.

RESTRICTED
a. Construction.
b. With support.
c. In position.
Figure 7/10. Improvised charge using FLCC on one-piece frame.

RESTRICTED
Figure 7/11. Improvised charge using FLCC ‘Sabre’ on hinged frame.
0724. Fracture Sheet Charge. (See Figure 7/12). Fracture sheet is a purpose-
made explosive breaching, user-filled, charge system.
a. Suitability. Fracture sheet is only likely to be used on deliberate, planned

operations against targets to which it can easily be fixed.
b. Construction. Fracture sheet comes part-prepared. Charges are

constructed from lightweight plastic sheets fitted with pockets, into
which sheet explosive charges are loaded by the user. The distribution of
the pockets should create a figure-of-eight with eight pockets distributed
evenly along each half and two across the centre. The outside dimensions
of the figure-of-eight should be approximately 1.0 m x 0.6 m.
c. Explosives and Initiation. The sheet explosive charges should be 75

mm x 75 mm; individual charges may be one, two or three sheets thick,
depending on the target. Initiation is via detonating cord loops passing
through the sheet explosive charges. Where PETN-based sheet explosive
is used, the detonating cord needs to run between two sheets, rather
than over them. Sheet explosive (SX) requires the use of slip-on boosters
to initiate each set of charges. The detonating cord may be taken as
two separate loops, one for each half, which start and finish centrally,
between the two middle pockets; in this case, the four ends should be
taped together at the single point of initiation. A single loop may be
taken from this start point in a figure-of-eight through each pocket back
to the same start point, with both ends taped together to form the single

RESTRICTED
point of initiation. Preferably, two loops or two figures-of-eight should

be used to give two points of initiation, one at the top and the other
at the bottom of the charge; this increases redundancy and reliability
and creates colliding shockwaves in the centre of the charge. Wherever
two runs of detonating cord pass though one pocket, they should be
taped with insulating tape through the complete length of each individual
charge.
d. Fixing to Target. To be effective, fracture sheet charges must make

intimate contact with the target over their entire surface area; this is
usually achieved using medical ‘Hydrogel’ or purpose-made Breacher’s
Tape.
e. Performance. Fracture sheet charges are light and portable, but it can
be difficult to achieve the requirement for charge-to-target contact and
adhesion.
Figure 7/12. Fracture sheet charge.
0725. Charges using User-filled Charge Containers (UFCCs). (See Figures

7/13 to 7/16).
a. Suitability. Providing the correct equipment is available, UFCCs can

often be the most flexible charge type for the breaching. UFCCs are
plastic or metal containers designed to be packed with plastic explosive
and configured in any format required by the user, eg the 0.25 or 0.5 kg
Universal Demolition Block (UDB). UFCCs can also be designed to allow
users to make user-filled shaped charges, providing a one-stage attack
capability. They provide an intermediate capability between improvised

RESTRICTED
and purpose-made explosive charges; they often have the advantage

of being modular in nature and so the NEQ can be adapted to suit most
situations.
b. Construction. The construction of this type of charge depends greatly

on the type of inert charge container system available and the target.
All the assault breaching principles should be taken into account for the
construction of these charges. As a guide, it is acceptable to adapt
the improvised techniques stipulated in this section to accommodate the
inert charge container (see Figure 7/13). Figures 7/14 to 7/16 illustrate
options.
c. Explosives and Initiation. Inert charge container systems often come

with accessories designed to assist the initiation of explosives contained
within them. Maximum use of these accessories should be made to
minimise the need for more sensitive explosives to be included in the
charge, eg detonators, and to allow the principles of assault breaching to
be applied. For example, in a cruciform charge made up of 0.5 kg UDBs
filled with PE, it is desirable to have each set of UDBs, at the end of each
cruciform arm and in the centre, initiated with a Detonating Cord Booster
fitted to the charge by the detonator holder (supplied with the product)
and connected to the detonating cord leading to two central points of
initiation. Depending on the material that makes up the UFCCs, it may
be necessary to increase the protection of the firing party before the
charge is initiated to ensure the fragmentation from the system and any
shaped charges and liners are mitigated against.
d. Fixing to Target. UFCCs are often a uniform shape and construction and
therefore allow relatively easy fixing of the charge to the target. While
some UFCCs come with accessories that provide methods of fixing
the charge to the target, (eg the 0.5 kg UDB comes with accessories
that enable the charge to be hung or suspended close to the target),
improvised methods still work. For example, depending on the size and
weight of the target, Breacher’s tape can be applied to UDBs, taking
away the necessity to prop the target on relatively uniform targets.
e. Performance. The charge containers may incorporate shaped charges,

liners and integral tamping and thus are much more capable than plain
plastic explosive based improvised charges. Importantly, the plastic
explosive charges placed in UFCCs such as UDBs can sometimes be
kept in the clear wrapping the explosives are packaged in, increasing the
operational longevity of the charge. When explosive is taken out of its
wrapping to fill some UFCCs, eg DIOPLEX, the charge should either be
used or destroyed as the explosive cannot be returned once opened.

RESTRICTED
Figure 7/13. Improvised cruciform charge using UDBs.
Figure 7/14. Demolition charge using UDB.

RESTRICTED
Figure 7/15. UDBs secured to half Barmine.
Figures 7/16. Charge using UFCC (DIOPLEX).
0726. Spare.
to
0730.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
SECTION 7.3 BREACHING CHARGES USING

IN-SERVICE EXPLOSIVE STORES
BANGALORE TORPEDO
0731. The Bangalore Torpedo can be used for assault breaching even though its
main purpose is for breaching wire obstacles. It comes in tubular sections
(see Section 2.4), each just over 1 m in length and just over 2 kg in explosive.
One section can cause significant yielding in large targets.
0732. It can be suitable for assault breaching tasks where stacking close to the
target is not a concern. It has some use as a wall breaching charge, with
individual 1-m lengths bundled together to create a large demolition charge,
though the horizontal omni-directional fragmentation hazard must be
considered. The fire-formed fragments from the charge case produce the
fragmentation hazard that dictates operational firing must be from robust
hard cover.
IMPROVISED CHARGES USING MINES AND DEMOLITION STORES
0733. General. Where NEQ, fragmentation, associated blast and damage are not
an issue, Barmines and CD14 may be used to create breaches. Although,
when attached to a frame, a quantity of Barmines or CD14s is often unwieldy
to move around the battlefield, if sensibly used, it can have a significant
effect.
0734. Improvised Half-Barmine Charge. (See Figures 7/17, 7/18 and 7/19).
a. Suitability. Half-Barmine charges have proved to be particularly effective

for breaching thick mud walls, as there is significant over-match of most
targets. These charges have a large NEQ (approximately 4.2 kg); they
are compact though heavy, more portable and easier to carry in large
quantities than any of the improvised charges described elsewhere in
this chapter; they also have wider general utility for demolition tasks.
b. Construction.
(1) Barmines comprise two discrete blocks of pressed, prilled high

explosive in between which sits the fuze and booster assembly in
a fuze well. Figure 7/17 shows a Barmine section through the fuze
well and one half of the charge container. The primary fuze, complete
with magazine and any add-on fuze, must be removed prior to
issue. The fuze well may be covered by the arming lever mechanism
housing, which is inert and which should be unscrewed and removed.

RESTRICTED
Figure 7/17. Barmine sectioned through fuze well and half charge container.
(2) A half-Barmine charge must be prepared by an Ammunition

Technical Officer (ATO). The pressure pad, complete with hose,
is removed using a sharp knife to separate it from the body of the
mine (see Figure 7/18a). The empty fuse housing is cut through
with a hacksaw to sever the two halves of the Barmine at the exact
centre of the mine fuse well. (If required as a full-Barmine charge,
the top and sides only are cut through, with the bottom left intact;
this then acts as a hinge, allowing the mine to be folded in half
for ease of carriage (see Figure 7/18b). A hole is cut in each of
the top flanges and a large tie wrap inserted. The tie wrap should
be left loose for transit and pulled tight to hold the mine rigid for
deployment on target).
c. Initiation. The half Barmine is initiated by a booster charge. The preferred

booster is the Universal Demolition Block (UDB), which is packed with PE
(see Figure 7/18c) and secured to the half Barmine with tape or cable
ties (see Figure 7/18d). Preferably, each charge is initiated by two UDBs
(at the top and bottom of the charge), providing two points of initiation
and making use of colliding shock waves. If a UDB is not available,
a booster charge, or two booster charges, of plastic explosive should
be used. The booster charges should be initiated by an Integrated
Firing Device (IFD), but other in-service means of initiation may be used
provided normal safety precautions are observed and operationally
sanctioned. The Barmine is NOT to be drilled for direct initiation.
When initiated at their extremities, Barmines can snap in half without
undergoing full detonation, as they comprise two discrete charges and
a central fuze/booster well. At least two points of initiation, each using
a donor charge of 200 g plastic explosive, and simultaneous detonation

RESTRICTED
of both, are recommended; a third charge might be used for additional

confidence. The fuse well should be packed with PE. Figure 7/19 shows
a section through a Barmine fuze, highlighting the booster pellet.
a. Removal of Barmine pressure pad. b. Barmine hinged for ease of carriage.
c. Universal Demolition Block (UDB).
d. UDBs secured to half Barmine

supported on wood prop.
Figure 7/18. Improvised half-Barmine charge.

RESTRICTED
Figure 7/19. Section through Barmine fuze.
d. Disposal. Unused half Barmines prepared as demolition charges are to

be disposed of in theatre as there is no approved packaging for prepared
charges.
0735. Improvised Charges Using Service-provided Slurry Explosives.

(See Figure 7/20).
a. Suitability. Operationally, slurry explosives may be provided for quarrying;

they have also been used for the denial of caves and tunnels.
b. Construction. 5 kg charges are provided in soft plastic tubes, crimp-

sealed at each end and colloquially described as ‘sausages’. These
have a limited shelf life and are very vulnerable to physical damage if
unprotected. For tactical use, they can be carried in individual 81 mm
mortar ammunition tubes (which come as pairs and must be cut to give
individual tubes). A PE booster charge is required and is initiated by a run
of detonating cord, led in through a hole drilled into the lid and knotted
inside the PE. Colloquially, these are known as ‘greenie’ charges.
c. Performance. Such charges lack the appropriate degree of intimate

target contact, directional initiation and brisance required to be efficient
as breaching charges; they would be much more effective if packed
with bulk PE. They are likely to be more useful as concussion charges
for the collapse of enclosed structures. The shelf-life issues with slurry
explosives and their poor brisance effect makes them a low-grade

RESTRICTED
alternative to high explosive charges configured for breaching. Figure

7/20 shows a ‘greenie’ charge suspended from a stud on a length of cord
ready for firing.
Figure 7/20. Improvised charge using slurry explosive.
0736. Spare.
to
0740.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
SECTION 7.4 DOOR AND WINDOW BREACHING

TECHNIQUES
GENERAL
0741. There may be situations where the preferred means of entry is using a door
or window, which may or may not have been fortified. Manual tools can
be used to breach doors and windows, but explosive breaching may be
used for shock effect. The large variety in proprietary types of doors and
windows mean that only broadly generic techniques are outlined. Until
the introduction into service of purpose-made door and window breaching
charges, only improvised techniques are described.
DOORS AND DOOR FRAMES
0742. The method of attack of doors depends on the material used to construct
the door, including internal reinforcing, and the door frame; the quantity and
the strength of locking and securing mechanisms between the door and
the frame; how securely the frame is fastened within the wall; and on the
presence of any external bars and grilles.
0743. UPVC Doors. The required damage mechanism for UPVC doors needs the
door to be detached from the frame, which is left in place. Attacking the
panels can lead to these being breached while the door and frame remain
intact. These targets are usually attacked by placing a detonating cord
strip, of a minimum of four strands, along the length of the door immediately
adjacent to the stile on the hinge side.
0744. Wooden Doors. Wooden doors are usually set into wooden door frames.
The same method as for UPVC doors can be used. A detonating cord
bundle placed along the edge of the door, top to bottom and immediately
adjacent to the frame, should cause the hinges to fail and the door to be
pushed in. A charge placed top to bottom in the middle of the door is
usually sufficient to sever the door and push it in through the frame.
0745. Steel (Solid) Doors. Incorrect use of linear cutting charges to attempt
to breach steel doors can lead to the steel being perforated but the door
remaining otherwise intact. Cutting charges must attack the hinges, locks
and fixings. If it is known where the hinges are, these parts can be attacked
without the need for full length charges. A kicking charge on the body of
the door may be required to complement the effect of the cutting charges.
Charges that do not breach the door but which so buckle it that it is pushed
in through the frame (if it is inward-opening) may be equally effective.
A high NEQ strip charge, eg very large detonating cord bundle or lengths of

RESTRICTED
Bangalore Torpedo, placed top to bottom in the middle of the door may be
sufficient to cause physical yielding.
0746. Roller Shutter Doors. Charges that penetrate roller shutter doors easily
may also leave them otherwise intact. Attack of roller shutter doors should
focus on the edges, attempting to uncouple the door from the roller guide
and cause heavy distortion in the adjacent door body to create an exploitable
breach. This may involve parallel strip charges on the frame and the door
body about 1 m to 1.5 m from the edge, or strip charges on the frame and
a parallel cutting charge on the door body. Sometimes a second kicking
charge is required to release the guides from the bottom of the frame.
Most industrial roller shutter doors have a steel reinforcing ‘T’ bar along the
bottom edge that must be bent or cut once the door has been removed from
the roller guide: linear cutting charges or heavily water-tamped charges are
used for this purpose. Where roller shutter doors incorporate access doors,
breaching may also focus on these, as yield mechanisms can be created
more easily than in the body of a wide door, where significant buckling can
occur before an exploitable breach is created. A Bangalore Torpedo may
be appropriate for this task if fragment hazards and large NEQ are not a
concern.
WINDOWS AND WINDOW FRAMES
0747. Most windows, including those made from bullet-resistant glass, can be
breached by attacking the frame effectively. In most domestic buildings, it
is usually sufficient to place an improvised charge, made up from lengths of
detonating cord bundled and taped together, around the frame. The charge
should be placed so any locking mechanisms around the frame are damaged
and the internal frame destroyed or so distorted it can be projected through
or pulled out of the mounting frame. The number of strands of detonating
cord required depends on the design of the frame. Lower specific NEQ
variants of FLCC (Sabre) can also be used for this application.
ADDITIONAL FIXTURES
0748. Doors and windows may be covered by external grilles and bars and may
have these features inside; shutters may be present. External fixtures
should be removed using hand tools prior to the breach if they are likely to
interfere with the damage mechanism or are likely to reduce exploitability.
Such fittings, particularly if internal, may need to be removed following
the breach, if they are still intact. This can be achieved using hand tools,
secondary breaching charges, eg FLCC (Sabre), or Bar Cutting Charges
(Special Forces only, at present).

RESTRICTED
OTHER BREACHING TECHNIQUES
0749. ‘C’-Cuts. A C-cut is used on a door to separate the locking mechanism

from the remainder of the door (see Figure 7/21). As it is not intended to
destroy the entire doorway, the size of charge tends to be less than for other
methods. FLCC is highly desirable for C-cuts. FLCC 100 g/m can be used
effectively against light wooden doors, while FLCC 350 g/m can be used for
heavier wooden and light steel doors.
a. b. c.
a. FLCC used to create a C-cut.

b. Effect of FLCC C-cut on wooden door.
c. Improvised C-cut using detonating cord.
Figure 7/21. C-cuts.
0750. Strip Charges. Strip charges are used to separate the hinging mechanism
from the remainder of the door (see Figure 7/22). Charges made of
detonating cord can be highly effective against light targets such a wooden
door, as well as light and easy to apply. The use of FLCC can also be highly
desirable for this method. FLCC 100 g/m can be used effectively against
light wooden doors, while FLCC 350 g/m can be used for heavier wooden
and light steel doors.

RESTRICTED
Figure 7/22. Strip charge on wooden door.
0751. Breachers Tape. A linear strip charge can be improvised using Breachers
tape and detonating cord. The charge can be rapidly applied to a target
to create long cuts, eg along the length of a door. It is made by placing
detonating cord on to a length of tape (see Figure 7/23) and then attaching
another (non-adhesive) cover on top (such as more tape doubled back on
itself) that be easily removed at the target to allow the charge to be applied
to the target.
Figure 7/23. Improvised linear strip charge.

RESTRICTED
0752. Hinge Charges. A hinge charge aims to separate the hinging mechanism
from the reminder of the doorway. Breachers tape can be used to create a
continuous line along the hinge side of the door or special purpose charges
such FLCC can be used to attack the hinges (see Figure 7/24). The use
of FLCC for doors inside structures can be highly effective. For example,
a charge made up of three 20 cm lengths of 100 g/m FLCC gives a 60 g
NEQ. This is less than the maximum charge size (70 g) that should be used
inside enclosed spaces (see Table 7-2). While the NEQ of the charge is low,
the effect can still be significant. The charges can be attached using either
double-sided tape or Hydro Gel if available.
Figure 7/24. Use of FLCC as hinge charge.
0753. Door Lock Charges. A door lock charge is designed to blow out the
locking mechanism on a door. The charge should be placed between the
door handle and outside of the door (see Figure 7/25). FLCC can be highly
effective for these types of charges.

RESTRICTED
Figure 7/25. Door lock charge using one block (0.5 kg) of PE.
0754. Spare.
to
0760.

RESTRICTED
SECTION 7.5 SAFETY IN ASSAULT BREACHING

GENERAL
0761. Assault breaching is inherently dangerous and the safety guidance in

Chapter 12 should always be followed. Where different rules apply for
assault breaching, these are listed in this chapter; the rules governing
training are prescriptive, whereas for operations the procedures can be
adapted depending on the threat. Soldiers should not be exposed to
unnecessary assault breaching charges in training; such exposure should
be balanced against the value of some training on inert equipment, perhaps
with simulation (see Paragraphs 0842 and 0843). Regardless of the
method, the Demolitions Conducting Officer (DCO), who must be qualified
in accordance with Table 12-6, is responsible.
CONSIDERATIONS FOR PERSONNEL
0762. Assault breaching is different to normal demolitions in that troops are

exposed to exaggerated and more intense effects from fragmentation throw
and pressure.
0763. Reflecting Surfaces and Blast Traps. Reflecting surfaces, such as walls
immediately in the vicinity of the breach and immediately opposite, can
considerably increase the blast overpressure experienced by nearby troops.
Similarly, blast can be funnelled or channelled by confined and restricted
spaces, which can also increase the overpressure experienced by nearby
troops. This must be considered when selecting the ‘stacking’ location for
the assaulting troops (see Paragraph 0766).
0764. Mach Stem Intensification of Blast. (See Figure 7/26). Where a

charge is elevated off of the ground, there is a risk the blast overpressure
experienced by personnel in close proximity to it might be greater than that
predicted from simple NEQ-based calculations; this is because of Mach
stem intensification. The phenomenon occurs where blast reflected from
the ground passes through the rarefied, low pressure zone behind the blast
wave front emanating from the detonation, enabling it to catch up. These
wave fronts combine to form a more intense, higher pressure wave front.
The point at which the wave fronts meet is described as the ‘triple point’
and the enhanced wave front, which grows as the blast radiates, is known
as the ‘Mach stem’. It is to create this effect that high yield blast bombs
tend to be air-bursts, rather than ground detonations. A simple ‘rule-of-
thumb’ calculation is that a Mach stem forms if the height of the burst above
ground (metres) divided by the cube root of the NEQ (kg) is less than ten.

RESTRICTED
Figure 7/26 shows the incident blast (solid line) and reflected blast (dotted
line), the path of the triple point (dotted, arrowed line) and the Mach stem
(bold line).
Explosion
Shock waves
Path of
Reflected triple
shock point
waves
Mach
stem
Figure 7/26. Development of Mach stem.
0765. Fragment Throw. Fragment throw, particularly for effectively coupled

charges, is almost exclusively through the breach and is highly directional,
debris being ejected outwards in a very narrow field. Charge carriers,
frames and prop sticks are projected backwards by the blast, and this is the
most significant fragment hazard on the ‘home’ side. Stacking should be off
to the side, along a wall and round the corner from the charge if possible. A
useful rule of thumb calculation, using the concept of ‘scaled distance’ from
civilian demolition practice, is that the majority of fragments from the breach
are thrown a distance in metres equivalent to fifty times the cube root of the
NEQ in kilograms.
0766. Safe Stacking Positions. Where the firing party and exploitation force
are required to stack in close proximity to the breach, especially without
hard cover, the commander or DCO should select a position that minimises
exposure to reflected and intensified blast and to fragmentation throw.
These effects are at their greatest perpendicular to the wall and directly
opposite the charge; they are at their lowest values adjacent to the wall.
The relationship between the position and the cumulative potential hazards
is not linear. Figure 7/27 illustrates the principles only.

RESTRICTED
Explosion
Wall
Least intensive
blast and lowest
fragmentation risk
PLAN VIEW Most intense blast and

highest fragmentation risk
Figure 7/27. Representative danger areas from blast and fragmentation.
0767. Dust, Smoke and Gas. Breaching charges raise a considerable amount
of dust by pulverising the target material. Some of this can be hazardous,
particularly if the target includes glass, glass reinforced plastic, asbestos
and other hazardous materials. Breaching charges, and especially Flexible
Linear Cutting Charge (FLCC), which is wrapped in expanded plastic foam,
also produce thick smoke in addition to gaseous detonation products.
When breaching into buildings and closed structures, these are all projected
into the exploitation area. This can make vision and breathing difficult and
uncomfortable. Water-tamped charges can make smooth surfaces slippery.
These phenomena are generally not experienced on demolition training
ranges because of safety concerns, and operational planning must consider
the use of goggles and some form of protection from dust, eg shemagh or
face veil, or respirators, for immediate exploitation.
0768. Method of Initiation. It is essential all personnel are aware of the method
of initiation, eg immediate or delay (including length of delay).

RESTRICTED
CHARGE INITIATION USING 30-m IFD
0769. The 30-m IFD (see Section 3.2) provides a considerable enhancement in
safety, reliability and training over user-configured standard non-electrical
initiation sets and is the preferred operational method for the initiation of
assault breaching charges.
BREACHING CHARGES ON OPERATIONS
0770. Operationally, the safety distance depends on whether the charge is in the
open or in an enclosed space.
0771. In Open. On tactical operations, the minimum safe stacking distance in

the open, in line of sight from the charge, is dictated by the NEQ of the
charge and the presence of opposite and adjacent blast reflecting surfaces.
Tamping has been shown quantitatively to reduce blast considerably. The
safety distances at Table 12-3 apply to large NEQ charges. These have been
refined for smaller and medium NEQ charges, as shown in Table 7-1. The
blast overpressure threshold is considered to be 23.5 kPa and all distances
are rounded up to the nearest metre. Where charges are beyond the scope
of Table 7-1 and there is adequate protection, Table 12-3 should be used to
determine the correct safety distance.
TABLE 7-1 MINIMUM ‘SAFE STACKING’ DISTANCES FOR SMALL

AND MEDIUM-SIZED BREACHING CHARGES IN THE OPEN
Serial Charge NEQ (g) Safe stacking distance (m)

(a) (b) (c)
1 125 5
2 250 6
3 500 7
4 750 8
5 1000 9
6 1500 10
7 2000 11
0772. Enclosed Spaces. For internal charges, the blast overpressures created
by charges of various sizes in rooms of a variety of volumes have been
calculated as shown in Table 7-2. The safe overpressure threshold is
considered to be 23.5 kPa. The safe area is in the light zone, above the
stepped thick line. The grey zone below the line is where overpressure will
cause hearing damage and barotraumas. To use the table, round down to
the next smallest room and up to the next biggest charge. No more than

RESTRICTED
40 g should be used in a corridor and no more than 70 g in a room, regardless

of volume, to avoid structural damage. Explosive breaching with charge
sizes exceeding those in Table 7-2 should NOT be conducted in
enclosed spaces.
TABLE 7-2 BLAST PHENOMENA AND SAFETY DISTANCES FOR

SMALL BREACHING CHARGES IN ENCLOSED SPACES
Charge Volume of room (m3): Minimum safety

Serial NEQ acceptable (white)/unacceptable (grey) overpressure distance
(g) 10 14 18 20 30 35 40 50 60 (m)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l)
1 10 3
2 20 4
3 30 4
4 40 6
5 50 6
6 60 7
7 65 7
8 70 7
ASSAULT BREACHING TRAINING
0773. During routine training, military personnel are to use the safety distances in
Tables 7-1 and 7-2 as long as the conditions listed in Paragraphs 0764 to
0772 are met. If all these conditions cannot be met, personnel are to adhere
to the safety distances in Table 12-1. Advice on applying for dispensation,
in special circumstances, to deviate from the conditions in Tables 7-1, 7-2
and 12-1 can be obtained from Capability Directorate Combat Support
(CD Cbt Sp), Military Engineering Branch (Mil Eng) (SO2 Training Policy (SO2
Trg Pol)).
0774. Range Conduct and Qualifications. Participation on all assault breaching

ranges is subject to the following qualification restrictions:
a. Range Conducting Officer. Must be a qualified in accordance with Table

12-6.
b. Participating Troops. All troops conducting assault breaching training

must be trained in accordance with Table 12-6.

RESTRICTED
0775. Range Planning. Exercising units are to ensure range permanent staff are
briefed on and fully conversant with the current procedures prior to any
planning for reduced safety distance assault breaching training.
0776. Charge Size. The maximum charge to be used in assault breaching training
is 2 kg.
0777. Method of Initiation. All assault breaching training is to be conducted

using electrical initiation or an Integrated Firing Device (IFD). The IFD is the
preferred and most realistic method.
0778. Range Layout and Safety Distances. The range layout template at
Appendix 1 to Annex B is to be used when training away from purpose-
made assault breaching ranges. This is the approved layout for assault
breaching range practices; any deviation from the layout, including the
use of alternative blast protection barriers, requires specific authorisation
from CD Cbt Sp, Mil Eng (SO2 Trg Pol). Barrier construction is detailed in
Appendix 2 to Annex B. Several purpose-built ranges and training facilities
that do not follow this template exactly have been sanctioned for training
troops for operations; where this is the case, the DCO is to ensure the safety
features included in the above range layout are reflected.
0779. Structural Protection. Troops conducting the demolition are to be

afforded physical protection by barriers, either of precast concrete
(see Appendix 2 to Annex B) or Hesco Bastion Concertainers® built
two stories high (three Mil 1 (2 x 1.37 m); three Mil 3 (2 x 1 m); or one
Mil 5 on top of one Mil 1 (0.6 m on top of 1.37 m). All personnel in the firing
party are to be within the safety area indicated (red box) in Appendix 1 to
Annex B during initiation of the charges.
0780. Targetry. All targetry is to be constructed from wood or man-made fibre

board. Brickwork, masonry, concrete and steel are not authorised for
assault breaching practice at the reduced safety distance.

RESTRICTED
0781. Personal Protection. All exercising troops and any supervisory staff
operating within the danger area are to wear the following:
a. Body armour – the minimum is Enhanced Combat Body Armour (ECBA).
b. Helmets.
c. Ear protection – the minimum is issue aural defence; yellow ear plugs are
not suitable.
d. Eye protection – ballistic goggles, safety goggles or safety glasses.
0782. Further Information. Further information should be sought from CD Cbt

Sp, Mil Eng (SO2 Trg Pol).

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
CHAPTER 8 SIMULATION OF BATTLE NOISE

USING SERVICE EXPLOSIVES
AND ACCESSORIES
SECTION 8.1 GENERAL
0801. Introduction. The noise of battle can be realistically simulated by the use
of Service demolition explosives. Purpose-made simulators are available
and details are in Joint Service Publication (JSP) 482 Part 3 and in the
instructions issued with the simulators. This chapter is concerned only with
simulators made up in the field from Service explosives.
SAFETY
0802. The safety rules and procedures given elsewhere in this pamphlet apply to
the simulation of battle noise unless it is specifically stated otherwise in this
chapter. Safety distances are listed in Chapter 12.
0803. Initiation of Charges. Precise control of the time of initiation is usually

essential to ensure safety. Charges are normally initiated electrically.
a. Electrical Initiation. When men are moving in close proximity to the

charges, eg in the assault on an enemy position, electrical methods of
initiation must be used.
b. Safety Fuse. When exercising or demonstrating troops and spectators

are at a safe distance, and there is no chance of anyone moving into the
danger area, safety fuse initiation may be used.
c. Shrike. The Shrike exploder (see Section 3.3) can be used to initiate
charges electrically. Batteries and ripple switches are NOT to be used.
d. Battlefield Inoculation Remote Initiation System (BIRIS). BIRIS (see

Section 3.3 and Annex A) is designed to command detonate pyrotechnics
and explosives during battle noise simulation.
0804. Burying of Charges. Unless specified in this chapter, charges are not to be
buried but placed in locations where they will not cause flying debris. This is
important as the initiation train must be identifiable if it is necessary to deal
with a misfire.

RESTRICTED
0805. Size of Charges and Safety Distances. The maximum size of charge and
the safety distance for charges are given in Chapter 12 (Table 12-2).
0806. Warnings, Signs, etc. All troops training in the area are to be warned of the
location and nature of the battle noise simulation arrangements. The danger
to helicopters and aircraft flying at low level must be appreciated. All pilots
must be warned of the nature and location of the charges. The following are
the minimum precautions to be taken on site:
a. Fences. Where visual control is not possible, the charges are to be

enclosed within a fence. The fence must be sited to ensure safety from
all charges.
b. Night. When fired at night, charges are to be enclosed within a white

taped fence of 100 m minimum radius, or appropriate safety distance as
per Table 12-2, from the nearest charge. This fence is a warning only and
does not replace the safety distances given in Table 12-2.
c. Vehicles. Where vehicles are required to move at night, at least two

sentries are to be posted on each area containing charges. They must
possess red warning lights.
d. Impact Areas. Charge areas located in the impact area of live firing
exercises and into which vehicles will advance at night are to have their
fences marked with red warning lights.
0807. Spare.
to
0810.

RESTRICTED
SECTION 8.2 METHODS OF REPRESENTING

BATTLE NOISES
0811. The noises and effects to be simulated are divided into the following groups
and the methods used are described in the paragraphs indicated:
a. Small arms (rifle and machine gun) - Paragraph 0812.
b. Infantry section firing rapid - Paragraph 0813.
c. GPMG fire - Paragraphs 0814 to 0815.
d. Mortar and artillery - Paragraphs 0816 to 0818.
e. Rocket propelled anti-tank weapons (where back blast is to be indicated)

- Paragraph 0819.
f. Blast incendiary devices - Paragraph 0820.
g. Smoke - Paragraph 0821.
h. Nuclear - Paragraphs 0822 to 0830.
i. Strafing fire - Paragraphs 0831 to 0833.
j. Mk83 1,000 lb bomb - Paragraphs 0834 to 0841.
Guidance on assault breaching is in Paragraphs 0842 to 0843.
SMALL ARMS FIRE
0812. Rifle and machine gun fire are simulated using detonators. The noise may
be increased by taping between 100 and 200 mm of detonating cord to
the detonator in the form of a ‘U’ (100 mm is recommended to simulate
SA80 fire). A burst of fire can be simulated by the arrangement shown in
Figure 8/1. The number of shots can be adjusted as required. The first shot
is produced by an electric detonator with detonating cord attached (see
Figure 8/1 DETAIL A); the remaining shots are each made up of an Igniter
Safety Fuze Electric (ISFE), safety fuze and a flash detonator with detonating
cord attached (see Figure 8/1 DETAIL B). The interval between the shots
is controlled by adjusting the lengths of safety fuze; the lengths shown in
Figure 8/1 produce an irregular burst of fire. The minimum length of safety
fuze permitted is 50 mm. The minimum length of firing cable (Cable Special
Purpose Electric (CSPE)) to be used is 50 m.

RESTRICTED
B
B B
105 mm SF
B
140
SF
mm
mm
16
SF
SF
100
0
m
m
B
m
B
SF
70
170 F
mm S
SF mm
65
B 175 mm SF 60 mm SF B
SF 55
mm
mm SF
180
B
SF
50
B
m
m
m
m
SF
0
SF
20
mm
B
210
A
B
Twisted cable (CSPE)
ISFE
Safety fuze (SF)
Electric
detonator
Flash Shrike
detonator exploder
Note:
100 mm detonating cord
Lengths of safety fuze (SF) shown
DETAIL DETAIL produce an irregular burst of fire;
OF A OF B they can be varied as desired.
Figure 8/1. Rapid small arms fire.

RESTRICTED
0813. Infantry Section Fire (Alternative). An infantry section firing rapid can be
represented by using 0.50 m of fuze instantaneous with an ISFE at one end
(see Figure 8/2). The fuze instantaneous is cut at 100 mm intervals along
its length, so the inner gunpowder core is exposed; care should be taken
not to cut through the entire core which could lead to a malfunction of the
completed simulation. Bound on to these cuts in the fuze instantaneous
with electrical PVC insulating tape are 100 mm lengths of similarly cut safety
fuze. Flash detonators are fitted and crimped on the exposed ends of the
safety fuze and 200 mm loops of detonating cord are added as shown in
Figure 8/2 to enhance the simulation. The fuze instantaneous is initiated by
the ISFE, ie electrically.
200 mm detonating cord loop

bound on to flash detonator
100 mm
Igniter Safety Fuze

Flash
100 mm Electric (ISFE)
detonator
100 mm
Safety
fuze Electric cable
(CSPE)
Fuze Instantaneous
0.50 m
Detail of joints
Figure 8/2. Infantry section rapid fire.

RESTRICTED
0814. GPMG. (See Figure 8/3). The simulation is made up of six 150 mm lengths
of fuze instantaneous bound at intervals of 1.2 m to a 7.2 m length of fuze
instantaneous, the joints being prepared as shown in Figure 8/2. Flash
detonators are fitted and crimped on to the exposed ends of the fuze
instantaneous and 100 or 200 mm of detonating cord is bound on to the
detonators to enhance the simulation. It is essential the fuze instantaneous
is pegged out at each end and as straight and taut as possible to ensure it
does not whip up and cause a malfunction.
200 mm detonating cord loop

bound on to flash detonator Flash
detonator
Igniter Safety Fuze

Electric (ISFE)
150 mm
Electric cable
(CSPE)
Fuze Instantaneous
1.2 m 1.2 m 0.6 m
7.2 m
Figure 8/3. GPMG fire.
0815. GPMG Bursts. Short bursts of GPMG fire, each of three or four rounds,
can be simulated in the same manner as for rapid rifle fire described in
Paragraph 0812. The interval required between shots is achieved by
varying the lengths of the safety fuse, while the initiation of each short burst
is controlled by using the separate firing buttons on the Shrike exploder.

RESTRICTED
MORTAR AND ARTILLERY FIRE
0816. Mortar and artillery fire are simulated by detonating charges of PE. The
sizes of charges required are:
a. Mortar.
(1) Light - 0.10 kg.
(2) Medium - 0.25 kg.
(3) Heavy - 0.50 kg.
b. Artillery. Charges representing field and medium artillery should normally

be 0.25 and 0.50 kg respectively. For demonstrations where spectators
are at a distance, it may be necessary to increase these amounts to 0.50
kg for field artillery and up to 1 kg for medium artillery.
0817. Layout of Mortar and Artillery Charges. Charges may be laid on the
ground or on sand-filled sandbags. The appropriate safety distance from
Table 12-2 is then applied. The sandbags may be surface laid or dug in.
0818. Mortar and Artillery Charge Firing Arrangements. Firing arrangements

are illustrated in Figure 8/4. The leads between the charges should be slack
to prevent whip and the possible dislodgement of detonators. The charges
should be initiated via a detonating cord initiation set as illustrated. The
charge furthest from the exploder is usually initiated without delay using
an electric detonator. Other charges are detonated at irregular intervals by
inserting a length of safety fuze between an Igniter Safety Fuze Electric and
a flash detonator in a similar manner to that described in Paragraph 0812.

RESTRICTED
CSPE
Minimum
length 50 m
Shrike
Minimum space
between charges
Up to 0.5 kg - 4 m
Flash detonator Over 0.5 kg - 8 m
Safety fuze
Cradle
Detonating cord
ISFE
HE Charges
Normal
Field - 0.25 kg CSPE
Medium - 0.5 kg
Exceptional Safety fuze lengths
Field - 0.5 kg Must be minimum of
Medium - 1 kg 50 mm and then vary
according to irregular
effect required
Electric detonator
Detonating cord
Figure 8/4. Mortar and artillery fire.
ROCKET PROPELLED ANTI-TANK WEAPONS
0819. The requirement is to simulate the back blast as the weapon is fired and,
after a short delay, the round striking the target. The arrangement in Figure
8/5 is recommended. The delay between back blast flash and the target
strike detonation is created by using fuze instantaneous. To minimise the
possibility of a misfire, a second means of initiation is incorporated using an
additional ISFE and 75 m length of safety fuze.

0.25 - 0.5 kg
white powder
5 m coil of Firing
detonating position
cord
Cradle in
detonating Detonating
cord 2 m to 70 m Fuze cord
Instantaneous
Flash
ISFE detonator
Electric
Lap joint
detonator
Cradles in
CSPE 2 m to 70 m CPSE ISFE detonating cord
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
Y junction
20 m Flash PE
75 mm Safety fuze
detonator
To firing
point
Figure 8/5. Rocket propelled anti-tank weapon.

8-9
RESTRICTED
BLAST INCENDIARY DEVICE
0820. The arrangement in Figure 8/6 gives a realistic simulation of the detonation
of a blast incendiary device. The following points should be noted:
a. The effect depends on the quantity of petrol in the container.
b. The device is secured off the ground on a wooden picket to reduce the
fire hazard. The following fire precautions must be taken:
(1) A sufficient quantity of fire beaters and water fire extinguishers

should be available on site.
(2) Prior to firing the device, a fire fighting team should be nominated
and briefed.
(3) The area around the device should be clear of all flammable
material for a radius of 20 m.
c. A wooden picket reduces the danger from flying metal fragments but
ignites and may increase the fire hazard.
5 ltr
Plastic
container
1.8 m
Petrol Wooden
picket
One cup
Electric
of sugar
Cable Special detonators Detonating Cardboard
Purpose Electrical cord packing as
(CSPE) stand-off
To firing PE secured
point with tape
Lap joint
Cradles in
detonating cord
Figure 8/6. Blast incendiary device.

RESTRICTED
SMOKE
0821. Smoke can be produced in the following ways:
a. From Field Artillery or Heavy Mortar Shell. PE enclosed in a small bag of

soot and fired on the ground surface produces black smoke to represent
the rounds exploding.
b. Smoke Screens. Smoke screens can be produced using the Generator

Smoke No 24.
NUCLEAR
0822. Only Royal Engineers officers and SNCOs, who are qualified as Demolitions
Safety Officers (DSOs), are authorised to construct nuclear simulators. The
air danger heights for nuclear simulators in Table 12-2 should be noted.
a. Large Nuclear Simulator. The large nuclear simulator is described in

Paragraphs 0823 to 0826. It yields a fire-ball approximately 30 m in
diameter and a grey-black mushroom cloud rising to a height of about
100 m.
b. Small Nuclear Simulator. The small nuclear simulator is described in

Paragraphs 0827 to 0831.
LARGE NUCLEAR SIMULATOR
0823. The simulator is illustrated in Figure 8/7. In outline, the drum of fuel gel is
ignited first to produce the fire ball, and then the shaped charge and flash
powder blow upward through the fire ball to produce the mushroom cloud.
0824. Stores. The following stores are required:
200-litre drum, empty clean and liquid tight Qty 1

Diesel fuel, gasoline or 50/50 mixture 180 litres
Soap flakes 3.6 kg
Bangalore Torpedo, 50.8 mm 1.13 m (or approximately Qty 1
3 kg PE taped to 1.2 m stick)
Improvised conical charge using 1.2 kg PE Qty 1
Detonating cord 6m
Flash powder 0.125 kg
Detonator electric Qty 1
Detonator flash (required only if Bangalore Torpedo used) Qty 1
1.8 m pickets, angle iron or timber (50 x 50 mm) Qty 3.

RESTRICTED
Flash detonator (or knotted

Detonating clip detonating cord and PE)
Bangalore Torpedo (or plastic

A explosive securely taped to stick)
Electric detonator
Hole in drum lid for
B Bangalore Torpedo
Detonating cord
Length:
AB = 0.30 m
BC = 3.30 m
Stand (angle-iron or
50 x 50 mm timber)
Surplus cord Improvised

buried shaped charge
C
(1.2 kg PE)
Figure 8/7. Large nuclear simulator.
0825. Construction.
a. Construct an improvised conical shaped charge, as described in Chapter

2, using a can and 1.2 kg PE.
b. Connect a 3.6 m length of detonating cord to the conical shaped charge

(at Point C) and set the shaped charge in the ground so the cone of
the charge is at ground level. Ensure the axis of the shaped charge is
vertical, otherwise the mushroom cloud may be at an angle.

RESTRICTED
c. Construct a stand for the drum with three legs using the 1.8 m pickets.
The drum should stand 0.6 m above the ground.
d. Prepare the drum by cutting a hole in the top large enough to admit the
Bangalore Torpedo (or stick taped with explosives). Place the drum on
its stand.
e. Thicken 180 litres of fuel oil with 3.6 kg of soap flakes and stir well. Pour
the mixture into the 200-litre drum.
f. Pass the Bangalore Torpedo (or stick taped with PE) through the hole in
the top of the drum and wedge it in a vertical position. If it is not vertical,
the fireball may be misformed.
Note: When a 1.2 m stick and 3 kg PE are used in lieu of the Bangalore Torpedo, mould and
secure half blocks each side along the length of the stick so the explosive is continuous, and
initiate from one end using knotted detonating cord.
g. Connect the free end of the 3.6 m detonating cord lead to the initiation
point (Point A) of the Bangalore Torpedo.
h. Connect the detonating cord lead coming from the initiation set to the
3.6 m detonating cord lead at Point B, such that AB = 0.3 m and
BC = 3.3 m.
0826. Safety Considerations. In addition to the general safety measures specified

in this pamphlet and the safety distances given in Chapter 12 (Table 12-2):
a. An area of 100 m radius from the device must be clear of flammable

material.
b. The device is only to be prepared by Royal Engineers DSOs (officers,

warrant officers and SNCOs) who are qualified and in date as a DSO.

RESTRICTED
SMALL NUCLEAR SIMULATOR
0827. The simulator is illustrated in Figure 8/8. It yields a fire ball and a mushroom
cloud.
0828. Stores. The following stores are required:
PE 0.5 kg
Detonating cord 7m
Detonating clips Qty 1
Electric detonator Qty 1
Diesel fuel 5 litres
Gasoline 5 litres
Heavy oil 5 litres
20-litre can Qty 1
Small tin (150 mm x 75 mm diameter) Qty 1
Plastic bag Qty 1
Thunder flashes Qty 8
Twisted demolition firing cable 100 m (minimum).
0829. Construction. (See Figure 8/8).
a. Prepare an improvised shaped charge in a small tin, as described in

Chapter 2, using 0.5 kg of PE.
b. Tie eight thunderflashes in a bundle and place them inside the cone of
the shaped charge in the small tin.
c. Enclose the small tin and its contents in a plastic bag, ensuring one end
of the detonating cord is protruding out of the top of the bag by about
3 m.
d. Place the 20-litre can into a hole in the ground so the top of the can is
flush with ground level.
e. Pour 5 litres each of diesel, gasoline and heavy oil into the can. Submerge
the plastic bag containing the small charge into the mixture.
f. Lay a ring of detonating cord approximately 1 m in diameter around

the top of the can and connect the detonating cord lead from the small
charge in the bag to it.
g. Connect the detonating cord lead from the initiation set to the circle of
detonating cord.

RESTRICTED
0830. Safety Considerations. In addition to the general safety measures specified

in this pamphlet and the safety distances given in Chapter 12 (Table 12-2):
a. An area of 20 m radius from the device must be clear of flammable

material.
b. The device is only to be prepared by Royal Engineers DSOs (officers,

warrant officers and SNCOs) who are qualified and in date as a DSO.
From initiation set
270 mm
l
d leve
Groun
Level of
mixture
20-litre
can
Plastic bag
430 mm Detonating
cord
Bundle of eight
Thunderflashes Small tin
75 x 150 mm
0.5 kg PE
Figure 8/8. Small nuclear simulator.

RESTRICTED
STRAFING FIRE
0831. A realistic strafing fire effect can be achieved using PE and either fuze
instantaneous or safety fuze. Figure 8/9 details the arrangement to be used
for a ‘V’ type strafing fire using either method.
CSPE
10 m Firing point
A
B
C
D Fuze Instantaneous Lengths Safety Fuze Lengths
E Detail A 1.75 m 50 mm
Detail B 3.75 m 52 mm
F Detail C 5.75 m 54 mm
Detail D 7.75 m 56 mm
E Detail E 9.75 m 58 mm
D Detail F 12.5 m 60 mm
10 m C
B
A
a. Layout and fuze lengths.
Details A-E Detail F

Flash Flash
detonator ISFE detonator ISFE
0.1 kg PE 0.5 kg PE
Detonating cord Fuze Instantaneous/ Detonating cord Fuze Instantaneous/

cradle Safety fuze cradle Safety fuze
b. Charges.
Figure 8/9. Layout for strafing fire.
0832. Preparation. Care must be taken to ensure the fuse instantaneous or safety
fuse is cut accurately and placed into the circuit in the correct order.
0833. Strafing Fire with Blast Incendiary. It is possible to combine both strafing
fire and a blast incendiary as detailed in Figure 8/10. To minimise the
possibility of a misfire on the blast incendiary, a second means of initiation
is incorporated using an additional ISFE and 75 mm length of safety fuze.

RESTRICTED
100 m
CSPE
20 m Firing point
A
B
C Detail F to Firing Point: 150 m minimum
D
E Fuze Instantaneous Lengths Safety Fuze Lengths
Detail A 1.75 m 50 mm
Detail B 3.75 m 52 mm
F
Detail C 5.75 m 54 mm
Detail D 7.75 m 56 mm
See E Detail E 9.75 m 58 mm
Figure 8/10b Detail F 12.5 m 60 mm
D
C
B
20 m A
a. Layout and fuze lengths.
Details A-E
Flash
detonator ISFE
0.1 kg PE
Detail F
Detonating cord Fuze Instantaneous/

5 ltr Plastic container
cradle Safety fuze
with petrol and sugar mix
1.8 m
Wooden
picket
Detonating cord
12.5 m Fuze
Instantaneous
or 60 mm Flash
detonator Cardboard
ISFE Safety fuze Lap joint packing as
stand-off
CSPE
0.1 kg PE
ISFE secured
Y junction with tape
CSPE
0.4 kg PE
75 mm Safety fuze
Flash
detonator
b. Charges.
Figure 8/10. Blast incendiary for strafing fire.

RESTRICTED
Mk83 1000 lb BOMB
0834. The Mk83 1000lb bomb simulation is to be conducted only on ranges

that allow the large amount of explosives. It is imperative all appropriate
precautions for the reduction of fragmentation are taken.
0835. Range Conduct and Qualifications. The following qualification restrictions

apply:
a. Range Conducting Officer. The range conducting officer must be a

qualified and current Demolitions Safety Officer or Demolitions Safety
Officer (Restricted).
b. Preparation of Charge. The charge is only to be set up by Royal Engineeers

DSOs (officers, warrant officers and SNCOs) who are qualified and in
date as a DSO.
0836. Charge Size. The maximum total charge may be achieved using Barmines
or PE as shown in Table 8-1.
TABLE 8-1 MAXIMUM CHARGE SIZE FOR 1000 lb BOMB SIMULATION
Quantity of bulk explosive charge equivalent to

Nominal bomb bare charge weight of bomb - options
Serial
designation (lb)
Barmines PE 0.5 kg blocks
(a) (b) (c) (d)
1 1000 14 234
0837. Charge Construction. Barmines are to be unfuzed and contain no metal.

Preparation of charges (see Figure 8/11) should be as follows:
a. All wood, metal and plastic packaging must be removed from the charge.
Barmines should have the pressure pad cut off.
b. Barmine fuze wells should be packed with PE and have a detonating

cord booster or knot of detonating cord embedded in it.
c. The Barmines should be bundled together to ensure sympathetic

detonation.
d. The charges must be placed on a sandbag platform three sandbags

deep. The sand fill should be uncontaminated, ideally dry fine sand, to
minimise the likelihood of associated fragment throw and transmission of
ground shock.

RESTRICTED
e. The area around each charge should be cleared of stones and other
debris out to a distance of 10 m.
Figure 8/11. Charge construction of 1000 lb bomb simulation.
0838. Method of Initiation. The charge is to be initiated electrically.
0839. Range Safety Distances. The following safety distances are to apply:
a. Exercising troops and intimately involved safety staff should be not less
than 200 m away.
b. Those personnel not directly involved in the training should be at a

minimum of 1000 m.
c. The air danger height is 2000 ft.
0840. Protection. The following protective measures should be taken:
a. Exercising troops and intimately involved safety staff must wear helmets,
ballistic goggles, ear defence and body armour.
b. A warning, appropriate to the tactical situation, should be sounded or

broadcast prior to detonation. This allows:
(1) Exercising troops to adopt the most appropriate posture. It is

sufficient for troops in the open to go to ground.
(2) Appropriate, realistic situational awareness.
0841. Targetry. No targetry is to be used.

RESTRICTED
ASSAULT BREACHING
0842. Effective simulation of assault breaching is important when training for such
operations. The training should be progressive, with drills practised with
inert equipment before live charges are used. The guidance in Chapter 7
must be followed.
0843. Where possible, training in assault breaching drills should be conducted

with inert charges and other methods of battle simulation used to provide
the noise and impetus. This reduces dramatically the risk of a barotraumatic
injury being sustained because of overzealous staff. Some ranges provide
purpose-made facilities that enable battle noise to be simulated close to a
closable method of entry with a robust entry point (see Figures 8/12 and
8/13). There are many variations in these facilities and users should consult
the range standing orders of the estate for more specific information.
Figure 8/12. Assault breaching simulation facility (open).

RESTRICTED
Figure 8/13. Mousehole simulation facility (closed).

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
CHAPTER 9 DEMOLITION TASKS

SECTION 9.1 GENERAL
0901. Introduction. The chapter and Chapter 10 outline the methods of
demolishing or rendering unusable different types of target. The general
principles to be borne in mind when planning attacks on all types of target
are outlined in this section, together with a guide to the time and labour
required to complete typical demolition and associated tasks.
0902. Tactical Aim. Most demolitions are undertaken in support of a tactical plan
involving a combined arms effort. The tactical aim and the commander’s
intent must be clearly understood before technical planning of the demolition
can start. In any situation, there is a minimum amount of damage that must
be inflicted to achieve the tactical aim. The technical plan must achieve
this damage in the most efficient manner, taking account of the time and
resources available. Whether it is worth exceeding this minimum damage
depends on the relationship of the task with other factors.
0903. Strategic and Political Aspects. When planning the demolition of some
targets, particularly those of an industrial or commercial nature, the long term
strategic and political aspects may have to be considered. Comprehensive
intelligence preparation of the environment should be carried out before
plans are formulated. For example, the pollution caused by the destruction
of a fuel installation or services running through a bridge could affect the
water supply over a large area for a long period. Such factors may constrain
the demolition. In general, the damage inflicted should be limited to that
required to achieve the tactical aim.
0904. Principles of Demolition Task Planning. The planning of a successful

demolition requires:
a. Knowledge of Enemy Counter-measures. The measures likely to be

used by the enemy to counter the effects of the demolition govern the
minimum damage that must be inflicted to achieve the aim.
b. Knowledge of Target. Knowledge of the target includes:
(1) An appreciation of the overall target and the general principles to

be followed in planning the attack (see Paragraph 0908).
(2) An understanding of the structure of the individual items selected

for destruction.

RESTRICTED
For example, the creation of an obstacle in a road or rail network by

destroying bridges firstly requires the overall network to be studied
to determine which bridges require destruction and, secondly, the
individual bridges selected must be assessed to determine the method
of demolition. In considering the denial of an industrial complex, first the
vital elements must be identified and then the method of rendering them
unusable considered. Advice may have to be sought from experts to
determine the best points of attack.
c. Knowledge of Demolition Techniques. Knowledge of demolition

techniques normally entails the use of the charges described in Chapters
5 and 6 but non-explosive methods such as fire, the use of plant and
hand tools, or the running of mechanical equipment without lubricants or
coolants should be considered.
0905. Generic Task Priorities. The tasks to be completed to achieve a successful

demolition are normally divided into two priorities:
a. Priority One. Those tasks that must be completed to achieve the

minimum tactical aim. It is desirable all the charges used on Priority One
tasks should be fired at the same time.
b. Priority Two. Tasks to improve the effectiveness of the demolition when

time and resources allow.
0906. Task Stages. The destruction of a target with explosives may be carried
out in a single stage, ie all the charges required to destroy the target are
positioned and then initiated simultaneously, or the attack may be in two or
more stages, ie one set of charges is placed and initiated to partially destroy
the target and then further charges are placed to complete the destruction.
Multi-stage attack is used when sections of the target are too large or
complex to be destroyed by a single set of charges, or where there are
constraints on the size of charge that can be used. In tactical demolitions,
all Priority One tasks should be completed in a single stage if possible.
0907. Types of Target. Bridges are probably the most common type of demolition
target. The methods of demolishing bridges are described in Chapter 10.
The demolition of targets other than bridges is described in the remaining
sections of this chapter, which are:
a. Section 9.2 - Roads and railways.
b. Section 9.3 - Airfields, ports and inland waterways.
c. Section 9.4 - Buildings.

RESTRICTED
d. Section 9.5 - Industrial and commercial installations.
e. Section 9.6 - Military equipment and vehicles.
f. Section 9.7 - Ammunition and explosives.
0908. Principles of Target Selection. The following principles apply particularly

to industrial and commercial targets and, to a lesser extent, to others:
a. Destroy machinery specially made for an installation.
b. Destroy the source of power.
c. Prevent cannibalisation, ie attack the same part on all equipment.
0909. Method of Attack. The use of industrial machinery can be denied by the
following methods:
a. Demolition by explosives, particularly of vulnerable items such as the

windings of electric motors and transformers, and materials that cannot
be easily repaired, eg cast iron.
b. Self destruction, eg by running a machine without lubricants or cooling

water.
c. Removal of items of high intrinsic value, eg optical instruments.
d. Demolition using plant.
e. Demolition by hand, eg using sledgehammers on vital pieces of

equipment such as control equipment and governors.
f. Fire.
g. Flooding.
0910. Time and Labour. A guide to the time and labour required for demolition
tasks is given in Tables 9-1 and 9-2.

RESTRICTED
TABLE 9-1 ESTIMATES OF TIME AND LABOUR FOR DEMOLITION TASKS (i)
Time
Serial Task Manpower Remarks
(hr)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
1 Prepare bridge over major river (100 m) One fd tp 4-5
for demolition, with some peacetime
preparation.
2 Cut one span of bridge over river or One fd sect 2-3
canal using RDD steel.
3 Cut span of masonry or concrete arch One fd sect 4-6 Including power
bridge. tools.
4 Cut one span of reinforced concrete Two fd sects 4 Perhaps two-stage
slab and girder bridge, up to 12 m attack.
span.
5 Prepare one bridge abutment using One fd sect 3-4
camouflet equipment.
6 Destroy pier using pier footing charge. One fd sect 2-3
7 Crater road using three pre-prepared One fd sect 1 Ten anti-tank mines.
shafts, plus mines in debris.
8 Crater road using camouflet One fd sect 3-4 As per Serial 7.
equipment; three craters plus mines in
debris.
9 Crater road using RCK; three craters One fd sect 1 As per Serial 7.
plus mines in debris.
10 Prepare ferry and ferry site for One fd sect 3
demolition using camouflet equipment
and mines.
11 Tree felling and mining to make road One fd sect 2
block.
12 Prepare pylon using PE block. One fd sect ½ Using service bolt
gun.
13 Destroy four Dragon’s Teeth. One fd sect ½
14 Prepare two-storey building using One fd sect 1 Depending on
concussion charges. number of apertures
to be blocked.
Note:
i. Based on full strength sections working in daylight. For night working, multiply time by factor of 1.3.

TABLE 9-2 GENERAL INFORMATION ON MAKING HOLES AND CUTTING CHANNELS IN PIERS,
ABUTMENTS, ETC
Time (i)
Serial Task Medium Unit of calculation
Using hand tools Using power tools
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
1 Cutting holes Good brickwork Hole about 0.30 m square, ie 0.30 m deep ¾ hr 0.30 m deep ¼ hr
or channels in one and a half bricks wide and 0.60 m deep 1½ hr 0.60 m deep ½ hr
abutments or four bricks high (ii) 0.90 m deep 2½ hr 0.90 m deep ¾ hr
retaining walls 1.20 m deep 4 hr 1.20 m deep 1¼ hr
2 Good quality masonry Hole about 0.30 m square (iii) 0.30 m deep 3½ hr 0.30 m deep ¾ hr
or hard concrete 0.60 m deep 7 hr 0.60 m deep 1½ hr
0.90 m deep 11 hr 0.90 m deep 2½ hr
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
1.20 m deep 18 hr 1.20 m deep 4 hr
3 Drilling boreholes in Brickwork Per metre run of horizontal hole 3 - 4 hr 8 - 9 min
piers, etc up to 2.45 m maximum (iv) (v) (iv) (v)
4 Concrete Per metre run of horizontal hole 4 - 7½ hr 7 - 10 min

up to 2.45 m maximum (vi) (iv) (v) (iv) (v)
5 Sandstone (vii) Per metre run of horizontal hole 5 - 9 hr 8 - 12 min

up to 2.45 m maximum (iv) (v)
6 Cutting holes or Concrete Per 0.1 m excavated

3
About 7½ hr About 1½ hr
channels in roads or
floor surfaces
7 Cutting holes or Metalled road surface Per 0.1 m3 excavated About 1½ hr About 25 min
channels in roads or
floor surfaces
8 Making auger holes Good easy soil Per metre run up to 3.00 m Using 152 mm earth About 3 min (ix)
auger about 20 min,
230 mm auger 35
min (viii)
9-5
9-6 Time (i)
Serial Task Medium Unit of calculation
Using hand tools Using power tools
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
9 Green timber Per 25 mm run up to 0.60 m Using 50 mm About 5 sec
straight cut type
auger, about 1 min
10 RCK Average soils (not hard Four craters in
rock or compacted 20 - 25 min by one
gravel) section
11 Blowing craters with Three craters in 2 hr
camouflet equipment by one section
Notes:
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
i. Times for hand tools based on team of three men on task; times for power tools, on one drill. Times do not allow for setting up, eg erection of staging
for holes more than about 1.5 m above ground level, nor for charging holes.
ii. Horizontal cuts are along joints between courses. Times for larger holes in proportion to length of vertical sides.
iii. Times for larger holes in proportion to area.
iv. Depending on size of bit.
v. Depending on density of medium.
vi. Deeper holes may be made in concrete using thermic boring.
vii. For similar holes in limestone increase time by 1⁄6, in slate by 1⁄3, and in granite by 1⁄2.
viii. Probable average rates of progress by two men with frequent reliefs and under entirely favourable conditions; in hard or stony ground, rates of progress
diminish rapidly.
ix. Based on performance of commercial truck-mounted machine used for erecting telegraph and power-line poles.
0910. Spare.
RESTRICTED
SECTION 9.2 ROADS AND RAILWAYS

0911. General. The section covers the attack of roads and railways, apart from
the destruction of bridges which is covered in Chapter 10. The destruction
of roads and railway track formation has much in common, although
railways have some additional features which are described at the end of
this section.
0912. Methods of Attack.
a. Cratering Charges. Cratering charges (see Section 5.7) are the best
methods of destroying road and railway track formations.
b. Shallow Cratering. Shallow cratering (see Section 5.7) is a quick

alternative but mines should always be laid in the debris to create an
effective obstacle.
0913. Points of Attack. Apart from bridges, the common points of attack are:
a. Destruction of Tunnels. Where tunnels pass through solid rock they are
unlikely to be lined and their destruction is likely to be difficult. They are
best attacked where they pass through loose or shifting ground, which is
normally indicated by the tunnel being lined. The brick or concrete lining
should be destroyed for a length of 15 to 25 m using a series of small
mined charges placed in or behind the lining by the borehole method.
The charges should be placed along both side walls at a height of about
1 m. If the borehole method is not practicable, a cutting charge should
be used. Depending on the nature of the soil, it may be sufficient to
destroy one side of the arch ring in this manner, so the pressure of the
overburden brings down the roof.
b. Obstruction of Tunnels. In some circumstances, it may not be desirable

to destroy a tunnel permanently and an effective obstruction may be
created by causing a collision of heavy vehicles or railway rolling stock.
The removal of wreckage within the cramped space of a tunnel is a
difficult and lengthy procedure that can be made hazardous by the use
of mines and booby traps.
c. Hillsides. It is better to blow away the road or railway track than to bring
down the hillside on top of it, as the latter permits the use of the road or
track after clearance of the debris. The charge should be calculated to
blow outwards as well as upwards. Unless the ground is hard rock, it is
usually better to position the demolition at a re-entrant rather than a spur
as the repair is likely to take longer.

RESTRICTED
d. Embankments. Blocked embankments are often difficult to get off and,

where they cross marshy ground, are difficult to divert around. Therefore,
they are good sites for demolitions, especially on roads, but see Sub-
paragraph 0913f.
e. Cuttings. Cuttings are not normally good sites for cratering as much of
the debris falls back into the cutting. In deep cuttings with steep banks,
it may be more effective to blow in the sides of the cutting.
f. Culverts, Manholes and Sewers. Culverts, manholes and sewers may

provide ready-made charge chambers but the charge must be well
tamped if it is to destroy the road or track. If more than one charge is used,
there is no need to tamp between charges but tamping must be placed
from the outside charges to the outer extremities of the construction.
Such charges are seldom worth using as a single obstacle. If the aim is
to block the drainage, the destruction of a culvert is a quick method. A
cutting charge propped against the underside of the arch over a length
of 3 m should ensure sufficient collapse to block the drainage.
g. Towns and Villages. Although towns and villages may provide good sites
for craters, they provide a ready supply of fill material and diversions may
be easily constructed. It is often more effective to carry out extensive
demolition of buildings to create obstacles.
0914. Railway Track.
a. Plain line is most economically destroyed by a cutting charge at each

alternative rail joint (see Figure 9/1a), thus damaging every rail at one
end. To deny the route for any length of time, the damage must extend
over a kilometre or more.
b. Points, crossings and curved rails should be attacked where possible as

these are more difficult to replace. Figure 9/1b illustrates where charges
should be positioned.
c. To ensure the derailment of a train, about 6 m of straight rail or 3 m of rail

on the outside of a curve must be removed.

RESTRICTED
Plain line: one block PE (0.5 kg) Plain line: one block PE (0.5 kg) Plain line: one block PE (0.5 kg)
Fish-plated joint: two blocks and Fish-plated joint: two blocks and Fish-plated joint: two blocks and
two segments PE (1.2 kg) two segments PE (1.2 kg) two segments PE (1.2 kg)
a. Position of charges on straight track.
Crossing angle: five blocks and

one segment PE (2.6 kg)
b. Position of charges on points and crossings.
Figure 9/1. Position of charges on rail track.
0915. Railway Repair Materials. Stocks of sleepers, timbers and rails should be
destroyed by burning timber items and placing metal items on top of the fire
so they distort beyond repair, or alternatively they may be destroyed with
explosives.
0916. Locomotives. Locomotives should be removed or rendered unusable as

part of a coordinated plan. Although electric locomotives can be damaged,
electrified systems are best attacked at the central power supply lines.
Steam locomotives may be severely damaged using explosives in the boiler,
fire box and smoke box, and attached to cylinders, valve mechanisms and
driving wheels. Diesel locomotives may be attacked in a similar manner; the
cylinder block being damaged with explosives, and injectors, pumps and
similar ancillary items being removed or damaged.

RESTRICTED
0917. Railway Communications. The operation of a railway system is very reliant

on communications. The destruction of signals, telephone, telegraph, block
instruments and signal cabins prevents the operation of all but a rudimentary
service. Although explosives may be used, destruction by sledgehammer
or fire may also be effective.
0918. Spare.
to
0920.

RESTRICTED
SECTION 9.3 AIRFIELDS, PORTS AND INLAND

WATERWAYS
GENERAL
0921. Airfields and ports are extensive demolition targets and advice should
be sought from the Royal Air Force and Royal Navy when planning the
operation. Military Engineering Volume XIX, Royal Engineers Support for Air
and Aviation Operations is the authoritative Royal Engineers document for
advice on airfields.
AIRFIELDS
0922. Modern airfields include large areas of aircraft operating surfaces constructed
to high standards. They are generally sufficiently extensive to provide a
choice of several minimum operating strips meeting operational standards.
In addition, many nations maintain equipment, on or near an airfield, to
restore airfield surfaces rapidly after major air attacks. This equipment must
be destroyed if damage to airfield surfaces is to be worthwhile. Even so,
the denial of airfield surfaces may be effective for only a relatively short time,
say 48 hours. Airfield services that are essential to support flying are more
vulnerable and, although their denial does not stop flying, it imposes severe
limitations for an extended period.
0923. Runways and Taxiways. The disruption of runways and taxiways should
be the first priority if time and resources permit. It should be so planned
that no length of 500 m remains usable. Cratering using shaped charges to
pierce the hard surface is the usual method. Other methods include:
a. Pre-constructed pipes that have been positioned under the runways on

some airfields to allow explosives to be placed as a continuous mined
charge.
b. Plant may be employed to damage surfaces.
c. If the pavement is of flexible construction, a major fuel spillage has a long

term degrading effect.
d. Disruption of the storm water drainage system at the sides of the runway
may also have a long term degrading effect.

RESTRICTED
0924. Fuel Stocks. (See also Section 9.5). Aviation fuel is critical and vulnerable
and bulk fuel installations are prime targets. The fuel pumping system,
valves, pumps and manifolds should be attacked. Aviation fuel is relatively
easy to contaminate by the addition of water or gasoline to the tanks. To
inhibit the removal of these contaminants, the filters should be blocked by
the addition of a lightweight material, such as silt or a powder, that remains
in suspension rather than settling out naturally, or by putting foam from fire
extinguishers into the tanks. Fire is also an option.
0925. Other Targets. Other airfield targets include:
Electrical power generation and distribution systems

Airfield ground lighting
Navigational aids
Command, control, communication and information systems and facilities
Water supply systems
Sewerage and drainage systems
Maintenance facilities
Hangars and hardened aircraft shelters (HAS)
Aircraft arresting systems
Explosive storage areas (ESAs).
PORTS
0926. Demolitions within a port are normally a joint Army/Navy task with the
Navy responsible for demolitions in navigable channels and anchorages.
Measures to be considered include:
a. Removal of craft, floating cranes, etc.
b. Tipping cranes, etc into the dock by cutting the legs nearest the water.
c. Destroying quays and jetties with mined charges.
d. Destroying roll-on/roll-off facilities.
e. Damage to road and rail systems.
f. Destroying the electrical power source.

RESTRICTED
INLAND WATERWAYS
0927. The easiest way to make inland waterways unusable is to cause obstructions
by sinking tugs and barges, and to remove or destroy vital parts of lock
gate mechanisms. The destruction of lock gates, weirs and sluices is likely
to lower the water level and probably cause flooding in the surrounding
area, the effects of which must be appreciated before such action is taken.
Aqueducts can be destroyed by breaching or pier footing charges. Earth
banks retaining water are very vulnerable to mined charges.
0928. Spare.
to
0930.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
SECTION 9.4 BUILDINGS

0931. Introduction. It is often necessary to demolish buildings to clear fields of
fire, create obstacles or to prevent their use by the enemy. The method
used depends on the material of construction, size of building and type of
construction as well as the time and resources available.
0932. Methods of Destruction. The methods available include:
a. Fire. Wooden buildings are often best destroyed by fire. Masonry

buildings may be gutted by fire but chimney stacks and some walls may
remain. These may be destroyed mechanically.
b. Mechanical. Mechanical means include light or medium crawler tractors

either pushing or winching, excavators swinging a drop ball, and hand
tools.
c. Explosives. While explosive charges are very effective, the use of tank
fire within built up areas to destroy buildings is rarely effective. A HESH
round has a minimum arming distance that may not be attainable and
APDS rounds are unsuitable.
0933. Types of Building. The buildings to be demolished are divided into the
following groups:
a. Traditional construction - houses and larger buildings.
b. Modern structures - framed buildings, etc.
c. Industrial chimneys.
d. Damaged buildings.
0934. Traditional Construction. The group is divided into houses and larger
buildings:
a. Houses, huts, etc that are not framed structures and which are sufficiently
small or are sub-divided into rooms that allow high air pressures to be
created are most economically destroyed by concussion charges. On
restricted sites and for large or heavy structures, water concussion
charges should be used. Domestic gas, if still connected, may be a
suitable demolition medium.

RESTRICTED
b. Large rooms and framed structures should normally be destroyed by

attacking the main supporting walls and pillars with cutting charges that
should be placed at intervals of 0.3 to 0.45 m rather than as a continuous
charge. Linear shaped charges or borehole charges may be required for
large pillars. Particular attention should be paid to strong points such
as junctions of partition walls, corners, buttresses, etc. The charges
should be placed on the inside of the building or room and be fired
simultaneously to utilise the air pressure produced.
0935. Large Modern Structures. Most modern offices, factories, etc are steel or
concrete framed buildings, the construction of which allows the supporting
columns to be attacked with cutting charges sufficient to guarantee
destruction. It is probably only necessary to attack the columns on one side
of the building, particularly if they are of reinforced concrete, as this causes
the building to tilt and the reinforcing in the other pillars to fail in tension by
the bars pulling out of the concrete.
a. Tall Buildings with Central Cores. The design of some tall buildings relies
on a massive central core, normally reinforced concrete, with other forms
of struts or hangars to carry the vertical loads of the floors. The size of
the core may make a two-stage attack necessary. Shaped charges are
used to create boreholes that are charged to cut or damage sufficient
reinforcement to drop the core or render it useless.
b. Structures with Dovetailed Floors. The floors in modern structures are

often dovetailed into the fabric of the main structure and, if displaced,
collapse like a pack of cards. Therefore, if charges are placed where the
floors are dovetailed into both the outer and inner walls, the building is
likely to be so badly damaged to be of no use to the enemy.
c. Structures with Large Spans. Structures such as railway stations,

airports, etc normally incorporate large spans and easily identifiable
columns, which makes their demolition relatively easy. The columns may
require a two-stage attack depending on their size.
0936. Chimneys. Two staggered rows of boreholes should be made at a convenient

height, extending around slightly more than half the circumference of the
chimney so the required direction of fall bisects the arc of the boreholes.
The boreholes should penetrate to within 75 to 100 mm of the inner face
and should be spaced so the disruptive force of each borehole merges into
the next. Therefore, in good brick work, the holes should be spaced about
0.45 m apart in each row with 0.3 m between rows. The boreholes should
be completely filled with PE and all charges should be fired simultaneously.

RESTRICTED
0937. Damaged Buildings. The destruction of damaged buildings depends on

the construction and safety of the parts remaining. Normally, cutting or
borehole charges can be used. Drilling makes the safety considerations
more important with borehole charges.
0938. Spare.
to
0940.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
SECTION 9.5 INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL

INSTALLATIONS
GENERAL
0941. Industrial and commercial targets cover a very wide field, some of which
is discussed in previous sections. This section gives general advice on
attacking such targets, with more specific information on water services
and POL installations. The aim of this type of demolition is not so much
to destroy as to stop production, or to stop the use of the facility without
wholesale destruction. Strategic and political considerations are likely to
be of greater significance with this type of target. Dams, dykes and nuclear
electrical engineering stations enjoy special protection under international
law, and shall not be made the object of attack, even when these objects
are military objectives, if such attack may cause the release of dangerous
forces and consequent severe losses among the civilian population. If
a dam, dyke, nuclear electrical engineering station, or other industrial or
commercial object is deemed a lawful target by appropriate authority, the
destruction must be accomplished within the limits of acceptable collateral
damage.
0942. Selection of Targets. For its continued functioning, commerce and industry
rely on:
a. Communications and transport.
b. Electrical power.
c. Fuel of all types.
d. Chemicals such as oxygen and chlorine.
Of these, electrical power is the most vulnerable and a few well conceived
attacks may achieve widespread paralysis.
WATER SERVICES
0943. In areas where water is plentiful, attacking water services is unlikely to affect
the tactical battle but it may be detrimental to the civil population. In arid
regions, it could force the enemy to transport water and may affect his
tactical manoeuvres. The following paragraphs indicate the best methods
of attacking the water supply system.

RESTRICTED
0944. Water Pumping Stations and Reservoirs. Pumping stations and reservoirs
are usually the most vulnerable points for attack. The machinery should be
destroyed with small charges or otherwise put out of action. The retaining
walls and dams of reservoirs can be destroyed as follows but the effects of
flooding must be anticipated:
a. Earth Retaining Walls. Earth retaining walls can be destroyed using

mined charges.
b. Masonry or Concrete Gravity Dams. Masonry or concrete gravity dams

may be destroyed by a single mass charge under the water and in
contact with the face of the dam; however, a very large charge is needed.
Alternatively, borehole charges may be used. A task of this nature
requires specialist knowledge and is not normally undertaken without
special training.
c. Multiple Arch Dams. (See Figure 9/2). Multiple arch dams have relatively
thin arches of reinforced concrete, up to a maximum of 1.8 m thick. A
breach can be made by lowering a charge down the face so it rests
in contact with the arch either at the crown or at the haunch. Where
possible, several arches should be attacked simultaneously. The formula
for the size of the charge given in Section 5.3 allows for the fact that there
may not be close contact between the explosive and arch; however,
every effort must be made to ensure close contact is attained. Larger
charges may be used to ensure rapid emptying of the dam.
0945. Water Tanks. Water tanks are easily rendered useless by knocking holes
in the bottom and sides with a cold chisel or riddling them with small arms
fire. If explosives are used, the charge is calculated on the basis of 1 kg
of explosive per 6 m3 capacity of the tank. The charge is fired in the tank
when the tank is full of water. The water provides a good medium for shock
transmission.
0946. Pipelines. Surface-laid pipes are simple to demolish; junctions and bends
are the most suitable points of attack. If wholesale destruction is carried
out, charges should be placed at alternate joints. Buried pipelines may be
destroyed by draining them and firing an explosive charge within them.

RESTRICTED
Water face
a. General view. b. Position of charges

(plan view).
Figure 9/2. Demolition of multiple arch dam.
0947. Wells.
a. Wells in friable soils may be destroyed by cutting the lining. If time allows,
the wells should be filled with earth before firing the charges.
b. Wells in hard soil or rock and having little or no lining may be destroyed
by exploding a mined charge close to the mouth of the well. The charge
should be placed about 3 m from the edge of the well and at a depth of
between 2 and 5 m. The charge should be sufficient to blow a crater
between 5 and 10 m in diameter. The exact position of the well is thus
obliterated and is difficult to re-establish. Bulky items that are difficult to
remove may be thrown into the well before firing the charge.
c. Sometimes, where it is unlikely the enemy has, or can obtain, information

about the existence of a well, it is preferable to fill it in and conceal it by
camouflaging the surface, rather than to draw attention to the presence
of water bearing strata by an obvious demolition.

RESTRICTED
0948. Deep Boreholes. Deep boreholes can be effectively put out of action by
detonating one to one and a half blocks PE in the lining at a considerable
depth below the surface but above the natural water level. When possible,
the rising main and pump rods should be disconnected and dropped into
the bottom of the borehole.
POL STORAGE INSTALLATIONS
0949. Valve Pits, Pipes, etc. Valve pits and exposed piping are vulnerable targets
and should always be attacked even when time and resources are limited.
The physical removal of parts such as pumps, valves or manifolds can make
the extraction of stocks from storage tanks difficult, if not impossible.
0950. Above-ground Tanks. Fire is the obvious method to use but the attack
must be well organised. All storage depots are designed to minimise the
effect of the outbreak of fire and so the firing of one tank does not necessarily
affect the rest of the depot. Tanks are normally surrounded by a bund or
dwarf wall that is spaced from the tank so it can hold the complete contents
of the tank. Heavy oils need plenty of oxygen (from the air) to ignite. Tanks
containing heavy oils or diesel must be drained and the fuel allowed to settle
for a short time before ignition. The quickest and most effective method is
to breach the bund walls before rupturing the tanks and then to ignite the
most volatile product, allowing the fire to spread throughout the installation.
If bund walls are not breached, each tank must be ignited separately.
Gasoline can be ignited by a hand flare fired over the surface. Heavy oils,
especially in cold weather, may need a quantity of gasoline poured on to the
surface to assist ignition.
0951. Underground Storage. Large underground storage systems are very

difficult to attack and, due to the variety of designs, each has to be treated
individually. The danger of fumes must be considered before entering
any form of inspection chamber. The tanks may be able to be ruptured
by a concussion charge, placed by removing the inspection plates. Fuel
leaking by seepage can then be ignited. Many underground installations
use semi-buried tanks hardened by an earth and concrete cover. These
can be attacked by uncovering the side of the tank at ground level and
placing a charge against it, causing fuel spillage that can be ignited. Heavy
earthmoving equipment is likely to be required to expose the side of the
tanks. With small roadside tanks, it may be possible to use water to displace
the fuel which can then be ignited.

RESTRICTED
0952. Contamination of Stocks. Contamination by cross-mixing fuels is not

recommended except for aviation fuels (see Section 9.3). The quantities
of diesel fuel and gasoline required to cross contaminate each other in
bulk storage tanks is large. Considerable time is needed to cross pump
and mix properly if the fuel stocks are to be rendered unusable. Similarly,
the contamination of bulk fuel by the addition of other raw materials such
as sugar is unlikely to be successful, although sugar added to vehicle fuel
tanks that are well shaken may be effective.
MISCELLANEOUS TARGETS
0953. There are many targets in the category of miscellaneous and, due to the
complexities of modern industrial equipment, expert advice, if available,
should always be sought as to the positioning of charges to achieve the
maximum damage.
0954. Oil Engines. Charges should be placed in the water jacket immediately
opposite a cylinder. The water then transmits the shock and bursts the
cylinder wall. Care must be taken not to place the charge on unessential
parts such as camshaft covers. Charges placed on the camshaft itself are
effective.
0955. Boiler Fans. The bearing pedestal of the fan should be destroyed while the
fan is running. If it is of built-up construction, all members should be cut. If
it is of cast iron, cutting charges should be placed across two adjacent faces
of the pedestal.
0956. Centrifugal and Reciprocating Pumps. A charge should be placed in an

angle of the most complicated casting.
0957. Winch Gear. A charge should be placed on the inside of, and in contact
with, the casting of the winch drum.
0958. Dockside Cranes. The winch drums should be destroyed and at least two
legs cut on the side on which the crane is to fall. Two cuts should be made
in each leg.
0959. Transformers. Transformers are the most important targets in an electrical

supply system. All in the area should be put out of action to avoid their
replacement by spares. The charge should be placed to damage the
windings.

RESTRICTED
0960. Electrical Supply Lines. Electrical supply lines are the least effective target
as most distribution systems work on a grid, making any damage easy to
bypass. In addition, overhead lines are easy to replace and underground
cables are difficult to locate.
0961. Telecommunications Equipment. Destruction or removal of equipment

is usually carried out by the Royal Signals. Instruments, exchange boards,
etc should be smashed and wires cut. Main telephone cables should be cut
where they enter buildings.
WARNING
0962. When using explosives against a target with a temperature exceeding 60°C,
the following precautions must be observed:
a. A detonator must never be placed directly into a charge that is in contact

with a hot target.
b. There must be no undue delay between placing the charge and firing it.
If this is not practicable, the charge should be insulated from the target
with non-inflammable material.
0963. Spare.
to
0970.

RESTRICTED
SECTION 9.6 MILITARY EQUIPMENT AND

VEHICLES
GUNS
0971. The sights and similar high value mechanisms should always be removed
or destroyed on guns to prevent them being used as spares. However,
such action only temporarily renders the gun useless. To destroy a gun
permanently, the breech end of the barrel must be broken using explosives.
The charge of PE required is obtained using the following formula:
C = d kg
2
where c is the weight of the charge required
2800 d is the bore of the gun in mm.
Note: If the charge is carefully moulded so it is in close contact with the breech and there are no
voids, the charge may be reduced by 25%.
0972. Preparation. The barrel of the gun must be blocked just above the breech
before the charge is placed. With small calibre weapons using fixed
ammunition (shell and propellant in one piece), the first 0.5 to 1 m of the
barrel should be well tamped with earth. With larger calibre weapons where
the shell and propellant are separate, tamping can be achieved by loading
the gun with the shell only.
0973. Charge Preparation. The charge is packed into the breech immediately
behind the tamping and initiated by detonating cord. The charge should
be moulded so it is in close contact with the chamber. The detonating cord
lead is taken out through the rear of the chamber and the breech closed as
far as possible, taking care not to damage the detonating cord lead (if the
vent tube of the breech is sufficiently large, it may be used as a channel for
the detonating cord and the breech closed completely).
0974. Improvised Method. If explosives are not available, a gun may be

destroyed using its own ammunition. One shell is inserted into the muzzle
and a second, complete with propellant charge, is inserted into the breech.
The gun is fired by remote control, with the firing party under cover.
ARMOURED FIGHTING VEHICLES (AFVs)
0975. A charge of about 10 kgs detonated inside the hull damages an AFV beyond
repair. The charge may be one large charge or a number of smaller ones of
equivalent total weight. The charge is initiated by a detonating cord lead
taken to the outside of the vehicle. All hatches and other apertures should
be closed. If time permits, charges should be placed in contact with the
turret and driving controls. The charge creates sufficient pressure within

RESTRICTED
the hull to blow it apart. The gun should be destroyed simultaneously as

described in Paragraphs 0971 to 0974.
0976. If it is not possible to enter the AFV, charges should be placed under the gun
mantlet and against the turret ring and final drives as illustrated in Figure
9/3. An AFV can also be destroyed by fire and its gun destroyed using its
own ammunition as described in Paragraph 0974.
D - Internal controls
B - Turret ring
A - Gun mantlet C - Final drive
Figure 9/3. Charges placed on outside of tank.
B VEHICLES
0977. B vehicles may be rendered useless by attacking the radiator, ignition

system and crank case with a sledge hammer or detonating a charge of one
block (0.5 kg) of PE on the engine cylinder head. If possible, the axles and
chassis should also be damaged with one block of PE cutting charges. The
fuel tanks should be pierced and ignited. In the absence of explosives, the
sump and radiator should be drained of oil and coolant and the engine run
at full throttle until it seizes. The vehicle should always be set on fire.
COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
0978. Communications equipment, including that in vehicles, should be removed

and recovered where possible. If this is not achievable, it should be
‘E-purged’ and the equipment contents and casing broken and burnt to
render the equipment unusable and beyond reverse engineering. When
using explosives to destroy vehicles or equipment, care should be taken not
to scatter components, especially microchips and printed circuit boards.
Detailed instructions for sensitive equipment should be specified in theatre
standing orders.

RESTRICTED
0979. Spare.
to
0980.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
SECTION 9.7 AMMUNITION AND EXPLOSIVES

0981. General. The section covers the destruction of stocks of ammunition and
explosives to deny them to the enemy. The destruction of ammunition and
explosives in other circumstances is covered in:
a. The destruction of misfired demolition charges - Chapter 12.
b. The destruction of blind and misfired ammunition:
(1) Artillery Training Volume III, Pamphlet No 19 - Planning, Control,

Conduct and Safety for Firing Practices (Army Code No 71035).
(2) Infantry and Armoured Training Volume IV, Pamphlet No 21 -

Regulations for Training with Armoured Fighting Vehicles, Infantry
Weapon Systems and Pyrotechnics (Army Code No 71855).
c. The disposal of ammunition - Joint Service Publication (JSP) 482 MOD

Explosives Regulations, Volume 3.
d. Explosive ordnance disposal operations - Joint Service Explosive

Ordnance Disposal (EOD) Manual (JSP 364).
e. Breaching operations - Military Engineering Volume II, Pamphlet No 6

- Breaching Minefields and Other Explosive Obstacles (Army Code No
71780).
0982. Planning. The destruction of stocks of ammunition and explosives requires

careful planning as their storage will have been planned to minimise damage
caused by enemy action or accidental fire. The detonation of one or a group
of items may not detonate or ignite neighbouring stocks. The nature of the
items to be destroyed must be established, together with their susceptibility
to mass explosion or fire. This can be found from the Hazard Classification
Code of the explosive store (see Chapter 1) or the advice of an Ammunition
Technical Officer may be sought.
0983. Shells and Bombs. Shells and bombs may be detonated as described in
Chapter 2 (Section 2.5, Paragraph 0281).
0984. Small Arms Ammunition. Small arms ammunition cannot be destroyed

with explosives. The boxes should be stacked in close contact, soaked with
gasoline or kerosene and ignited.

RESTRICTED
0985. Explosives. High explosives may be destroyed by burning, however, in

peace time, the only personnel authorised to carry out this task are Royal
Engineers Bomb Disposal Officers and Royal Logistic Corps Ammunition
Technical Officers. On operations, high explosives may be burnt by combat
engineers to prevent them falling into enemy hands, but advice should
be sought from a Bomb Disposal Officer or Ammunition Technical Officer
whenever possible. If the fire becomes too fierce during burning, the
remaining explosive is liable to detonate. The following procedure is to be
followed:
a. Carefully search the explosive to be burnt and remove any ammunition or

explosive of a different nature from that to be burnt (eg loose detonators
or detonating cord).
b. No more than 800 kg is to be burnt in a lot.
c. Cased charges are to be burnt separately as there is a high risk of

detonation.
d. Spread the explosive out in a thin layer.
e. Ignite by a remote means from the downwind end.
f. If ignition is difficult, a rag soaked in gasoline assists combustion.
g. Extreme care is to be taken with nitroglycerine-based explosives as

nitroglycerine crystallises at 13.2°C and becomes very sensitive below
this temperature.
h. The safety distances given in Chapter 12 are to be observed.
i. The debris from the burning is not to be discarded in areas where it could
pollute the water supply.
0986. Spare.
to
0990.

RESTRICTED
SECTION 9.8 CAVES AND TUNNELS

CAVES
0991. Denial. The denial of caves is best achieved by deliberate, rather than
improvised, means, eg using borehole or concussion charges (see
Chapter 5). Tamping, eg using sandbags or explosive tamping charges (see
Paragraph 05145), is needed to reduce the quantity of explosives. Cracks,
fissures and areas of loose, unstable or weak rock should be identified; a
useful indicator is where lining or revetting has been used. These areas
should be attacked with borehole charges, if possible, or concussion charges
where rock is fractured or friable. Cutting charges may be appropriate for
some rock formations, eg as an arch ring attack. Solid rock requires drilling
and blasting techniques; Military Plant Foremen are trained in quarrying. It
may only be feasible to obstruct the entrance and narrow passages over a
reasonable length.
0992. Clearance. Improvised methods may be appropriate. Overpressure,

caused by the detonation of high explosive or mines, incapacitates
personnel; tamping is likely to be necessary. Incendiary charges are suitable
for destroying materiel, but are not to be used against people. A typical
incendiary charge is six or more jerrycans of benzene or benzene/diesel mix
with about 250 g of PE as an ignition charge at the base of each can. A
secondary means of ignition (‘failsafe’) is essential.
TUNNELS
0993. Denial. The destruction and obstruction of tunnels are discussed in Section
9.2, Paragraph 0913.
0994. Clearance. See Paragraph 0992.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
CHAPTER 10 BRIDGE DEMOLITION

SECTION 10.1 PRINCIPLES
1001. Introduction. Bridge demolition and the conditions for success should
be framed within the operational context. For success in major combat
operations, the demolition must:
a. Priority One. Achieve the required gap.
b. Priority Two. Cause the maximum difficulty to the enemy in re-bridging

the gap. Priority Two tasks are designed to improve the effectiveness of
the obstacle.
However, in other circumstances, eg hybrid operations, the aim may be to

prevent use for a limited period and avoid long-term damage.
1002. Tactical Aim. The method of attacking a bridge must be selected with a
view to achieving the tactical aim with the minimum expenditure of time,
labour and explosives. Normally, destruction of all the components, ie
spans, piers (if any) and abutments, is not necessary to meet the tactical aim
and therefore is not worthwhile. Knowledge of the enemy’s gap crossing
capability is required in order to select the best method of demolition. The
state in which the structure is left can seriously affect the enemy’s re-bridging
effort. For example, a pier left standing in the gap above the level of the
two bank seats may hinder the use of assault bridging; the destruction of
an abutment may increase the gap but it may also leave rubble that can be
easily dozed to form a ramp for amphibious vehicles or a floating bridge.
1003. Major Combat Operations Priorities. The following are minimum

requirements for Priority One and Priority Two tasks during major combat
operations:
a. Priority One Task (Minimum Gap). The minimum gap required depends
on the situation and the enemy’s capability to overcome the obstacle.
Normally, the gap should be sufficient to defeat the enemy’s assault
bridging and can be taken as 25 m for most mechanised armies. If the
total gap spanned by the bridge does not meet this requirement, the
gap itself may be regarded as unsuitable as an obstacle and engineer
effort may be better employed elsewhere. Alternatively, the gap may
be artificially increased by blowing out abutments and cratering the
immediate approaches. In this case, all nearby sites suitable for bridging
must be attacked; the ideal being that all sites should be made equally
difficult to the enemy.

RESTRICTED
b. Priority Two Tasks. Priority Two tasks improve the effectiveness of

the demolition when this is required and resources permit. In bridge
demolitions, Priority Two tasks are tackled in a standard order, deviation
from which should only occur in exceptional circumstances or if specified
by the tasking authority. The standard order is:
(1) Crater and mine the home abutment.
(2) Mine likely adjacent bridging sites.
(3) Crater and mine enemy approaches.
(4) Destroy piers.
1004. Hybrid Warfare Priorities. Work priorities for hybrid warfare must take
a holistic view of the operation and the long-term consequences of the
demolition.
a. Priority One. Priority One should be the effect required to neutralise the
threat of the adversary crossing the obstacle.
b. Priority Two. Priority Two should be to hinder the adversary’s ability to

use the targeted, or nearby, crossing sites, during the operational time
frame.
1005. Conditions for Bridge Collapse. There are two conditions that must prevail
for a bridge span to collapse:
a. Condition 1 – Collapse Mechanism. A collapse mechanism must be

formed, ie the bridge must be attacked in such a way that it becomes
unstable.
b. Condition 2 – Freedom of Movement. Once the collapse mechanism has

been formed, the bridge span must have sufficient freedom of movement
acting under its own weight to create the desired obstacle.
The collapse mechanism often entails the formation of a hinge in parts of the
bridge; such a hinge is illustrated in Figure 10/2. The position of this hinge
affects the freedom of movement required for Condition 2.

RESTRICTED
1006. Condition 1 - Collapse Mechanism. Normally a bridge is a stable

structure. The aim of a demolition is to destroy sufficient parts to make
it unstable so it collapses under its own weight, ie a collapse mechanism
must be formed. There are three types of collapse mechanism that may be
formed by demolition:
a. See-saw. The see-saw collapse mechanism is shown in Figure 10/1.
Cause
See-saw
Effect
a. Diagrammatic.
b. In practice.
Figure 10/1. See-saw collapse mechanism.

RESTRICTED
b. Beam. The beam collapse mechanism is illustrated in Figure 10/2. Note

the plastic hinge formed in the top girder in Figure 10/2b.
Cause
Effect
movement
Beam mechanism
Or
a. Diagrammatic.
b. In practice.
Figure 10/2. Beam collapse mechanism.

RESTRICTED
c. Member-without-Support. The member-without-support collapse

mechanism is illustrated in Figure 10/3.
Cause
Effect
a. Diagrammatic.
b. In practice.
Figure 10/3. Member-without-support collapse mechanism.

RESTRICTED
1007. Lack of Collapse Mechanism. If a collapse mechanism is not formed, the

bulk of the bridge is likely to remain standing after the demolition charges
have been fired. A typical example of no collapse mechanism, resulting in
the formation of cantilevers, is illustrated in Figure 10/4. As many modern
bridges are of continuous construction (see Section 10.4), care must be
taken if such situations are not to occur.
Cause
Effect
Figure 10/4. Formation of cantilevers - no collapse mechanism.
1008. Condition 2 - Freedom of Movement. When a collapse mechanism has

been formed, the bridge span must have sufficient freedom of movement to
allow it to collapse without jamming.
1009. Conditions Leading to Jamming. The jamming of a bridge span occurs

under different conditions for bottom and top attack. These are described
below and the calculations necessary to check jamming will not occur are
described in other sections of this chapter.
a. Bottom Attack. When a span is attacked from the bottom, it hinges

about the top as illustrated in Figure 10/5. As the span falls, the ends
move outwards. If the distance the ends must move during collapse is
greater than the total clearance between the ends of the span and the
abutment faces, the span will jam, forming a three-pin arch as shown
in Figure 10/5b. Therefore, if a three-pin arch situation is unavoidable,
bottom attack must not be used.

RESTRICTED
a. Cause - insufficient end clearance.
b. Effect.
Figure 10/5. Three-pin arch effect.
b. Top Attack. When a span is attacked from the top, it hinges around the
bottom as illustrated in Figure 10/6. If the length of the span removed at
the top is insufficient, the bridge may jam along the faces of the cut, as
shown in Figure 10/6b, before the ends of the span have fallen off their
supports. This is known as the ‘cranked beam effect’.
a. Cause - insufficient concrete removed.
b. Effect.
Figure 10/6. Cranked beam effect.

RESTRICTED
c. Example of Jamming. A bridge that had insufficient freedom of movement

and therefore jammed and failed to collapse completely is illustrated in
Figure 10/7.
Figure 10/7. Jammed bridge span due to insufficient freedom of movement.
1010. Spare.

RESTRICTED
SECTION 10.2 CATEGORISATION OF BRIDGES

1011. Introduction. The method used to demolish a bridge depends on its
construction. For demolition purposes, bridges are divided into three
categories:
a. Simply Supported.
b. Continuous. In demolitions, the term ‘continuous bridge’ has a wider

meaning than it does in normal engineering usage (see Paragraph 1013).
c. Miscellaneous.
1012. Simply Supported. A simply supported condition exists when an individual

span is supported freely at each end on bearings without rotational restraint,
and with at least one end free to move horizontally, and in which the main
load bearing members are not fixed at their ends to an adjacent span. The
ideal simply supported span is illustrated in Figure 10/8.
Fixed Free
bearing bearing
(Horizontal restraint) (No horizontal restraint)
Figure 10/8. Ideal simply supported span.
In practice a bridge is categorised ‘simply supported’ provided it approaches

this theoretical ideal. A free bearing is taken to be any bearing that allows
some horizontal movement for expansion and contraction with temperature,
ie roller bearings, sliding bearings, rubber bearing pads, etc. Multi-span
bridges may be made up of several simply supported spans as shown
in Figure 10/9. The method of destroying simply supported bridges is
described in Section 10.3.

RESTRICTED
Figure 10/9. Examples of multi-span simply supported bridges.
1013. Continuous. For demolition, a bridge is categorised as continuous:
a. If it is of single span construction and the span is not supported on

bearings at each end but is a continuation of the abutment wall or other
support, ie arch or portal bridges.

RESTRICTED
b. If it is of multi-span construction and the main load bearing members are

continuous over intermediate supports (see Figure 10/10), ie cantilever
and cantilever with suspended span bridges that have breaks in their
structure within a span but not over a pier.
c. It is not categorised as simply supported or miscellaneous.
If a bridge is not simply supported and does not fall into the miscellaneous
category (see Paragraph 1014), it must be treated as continuous. Therefore,
for demolition purposes, cantilever, portal and arch bridges are categorised
as continuous because they are attacked in a similar manner to true
continuous bridges. The method of destruction of continuous bridges is
described in Section 10.4.
Figure 10/10. Example of continuous multi-span bridge.
1014. Miscellaneous. The miscellaneous category forms a very small proportion

of bridge structures. Examples include suspension bridges, swing or lift
bridges and cable-stayed bridges. The method of demolishing these
bridges is described in Section 10.5.
1015. Categorisation Guidelines. Consideration of the following points helps to

differentiate between simply supported and continuous bridges:
a. Continuity. (See Figure 10/11a). Multi-span simply supported bridges

usually have distinct breaks over the piers. In comparison, in a continuous
bridge the main structural members are continuous over intermediate
piers.

RESTRICTED
b. Construction Depth. (See Figure 10/11b). In multi-span simply supported

bridges, the construction depth may decrease at the piers whereas in
continuous bridges it frequently increases at a pier.
c. Flange Thickness. (See Figure 10/11c). In simply supported bridges,

the thickness of the flange plate often increases at mid-span, whereas in
continuous bridges it frequently increases over the piers. This guideline
only applies to steel plate girder bridges.
d. Bearings. (See Figure 10/11d). Multi-span simply supported bridges

require two lines of bearings at piers; continuous bridges only require
one.
1016. Difficulties in Categorisation. The external appearance of a bridge can

sometimes be deceptive. Features such as an arch may be added for purely
aesthetic appeal and have no structural strength or purpose. Whenever
possible, construction drawings should be consulted to determine the
category of a bridge. However, if this is not possible and there is uncertainty
about the support condition of a bridge span, the guiding principle is:
IF IN DOUBT TREAT AS CONTINUOUS
This ensures an adequate method of attack, although at times it may entail

unnecessary demolition effort.

RESTRICTED
Feature Simply supported Continuous
a. Continuity.
Main structural members

are continuous
b. Construction
depth.
Construction depth may Construction depth frequently

decrease at piers increases at piers
c. Flange plates
of steel plate
girders. Flange plates frequently Flange plates frequently
thicken at midspan thicken over piers (they may
also thicken at midspan)
d. Bearings.
Two bearings at Generally a single line of

intermediate piers bearings at each pier
Figure 10/11. Differentiation between simply supported and continuous spans.
1017. Spare.
to
1020.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
SECTION 10.3 DEMOLITION OF SIMPLY

SUPPORTED BRIDGES
1021. Categorisation of Simply Supported Bridges. Simply supported bridges
are sub-divided as shown in the categorisation chart at Figure 10/12. The
chart is entered from the left and the lines and arrows are followed across to
the right. The route taken includes all categorisation terms applicable to a
particular bridge. Examples of categorised bridges are:
Simply supported, steel beam, deck bridge, bottom support.

Simply supported, steel truss, through bridge.
Simply supported, bowstring, normal.
Steel Beam
Through
Bridge
Top
Steel Truss Support
Deck
Bridge
Simply
Supported Bottom
Concrete Support
Beam/slab
Normal
Bowstring
Reinforced
Figure 10/12. Simply supported categorisation chart.
1022. Categories of Simply Supported Bridges. The terms used in the chart in
Figure 10/12 are amplified below:
a. Steel Beam Bridge. In the steel beam category, the main girders may be
standard steel sections, plate girders or steel box girders.
b. Steel Truss Bridge. There are many varieties of truss used in bridge
construction; three are illustrated in Figure 10/13. Note that all truss
bridges contain diagonal members in the truss.

RESTRICTED
Pratt truss
Warren truss with verticals
Parker truss
Figure 10/13. Examples of steel trusses.

RESTRICTED
c. Concrete Beam/Slab Bridge. There is no need to distinguish between

reinforced and pre-stressed concrete bridges as the methods of attack
are the same for both. The common configurations of concrete load
bearing members are illustrated in Figure 10/14. At mid-span, the
majority of the reinforcing bars are located in the bottom section of the
load bearing member. This is usually the most difficult part of the target
to attack and has been taken into account when recommending the
methods of attack for concrete bridges.
Typical Typical
Type of span Section at midspan construction span
depth limit
(a) (b) (c) (d)
Slab 0.3 - 0.75 m 12 m
T - beam 0.5 - 3.0 m 30 m
M - beam 1.0 - 1.5 m 18 - 28 m
100 m
Box 1.5 - 10.0 m plus
Voided slab 0.6 - 10.0 m 16 - 30 m
Figure 10/14. Typical mid-span cross sections of concrete bridges.

RESTRICTED
d. Deck or Through Bridge. In a deck bridge, the load is carried on top

of the main longitudinal members. In a through bridge, the load is
transmitted via cross girders to main longitudinal members at either side
of the bridge. These principles are illustrated in Figure 10/15.
Concrete deck
Steel beams
a. Deck bridge.
Main girders
Stringers
Deck
Cross girder
b. Through bridge.
Figure 10/15. Cross section of deck and through bridge.

RESTRICTED
e. Top or Bottom Support. With deck bridges, the bearings may support
either the top or bottom chord or flange, as illustrated in Figure 10/16.
Their location influences the possibility of the bridge jamming during
demolition and therefore it must be specified. A through bridge can only
be supported at the bottom.
Deck
a. Simply supported, steel truss, deck bridge, bottom support.
Deck
b. Simply supported, steel truss, deck bridge, top support.
Figure 10/16. Top and bottom support of deck bridges.
f. Normal Bowstring. The normal bowstring has the form shown in Figure
10/17a. The following points should be noted:
(1) The bow is mainly in compression.
(2) The bow may be a steel beam, box girder, concrete beam or steel
truss.
(3) The deck acts as a tie and resists the outward force applied by the
bow.
(4) The deck is designed as a weak beam spanning between hangers.
(5) There is no diagonal bracing between the hangers.

RESTRICTED
g. Reinforced Bowstring. Occasionally, a bowstring is used to reinforce a

steel or concrete beam or truss bridge, in which case it is categorised
as a ‘bowstring, reinforced’. The existence of a steel beam or steel
truss extending the full length of the span indicates the bowstring bridge
should be regarded as reinforced. A reinforced bowstring is illustrated in
Figure 10/17b. If there is doubt, the bowstring should be assumed to be
reinforced. Care must be taken not to confuse the arch bridge illustrated
in Figure 10/33 with a bowstring.
Bow in compression
Hangers
Deck in tension
No horizontal force at the abutment
a. Normal bowstring.
b. Reinforced bowstring.
Figure 10/17. Normal and reinforced bowstring bridges.
1023. Examples. Examples of simply supported bridges are illustrated in Figures

10/18 to 10/25.

RESTRICTED
Figure 10/18. Simply supported steel beam through bridges.

RESTRICTED
Figure 10/19. Simply supported, steel beam, deck bridges, bottom support.

RESTRICTED
Figure 10/20. Simply supported, steel truss, through bridge.
Figure 10/21. Simply supported, steel truss, deck bridge, bottom support.

RESTRICTED
Figure 10/22. Simply supported, concrete beam, through bridge.
Figure 10/23. Simply supported, concrete beam, deck bridge, top support.

RESTRICTED
Figure 10/24. Simply supported, bowstring bridge, normal.
Figure 10/25. Simply supported, bowstring bridge, reinforced.

RESTRICTED
1024. Principles of Attack. There are two general principles that apply to the
attack of a simply supported span:
a. Point of Attack. The point of attack should be at or near mid-span

because:
(1) Bending moments due to the weight of the bridge are at a maximum
at mid-span.
(2) The probability of jamming during collapse is reduced.
b. Line of Attack. The line of cut should be parallel to the lines of the
abutments, as shown in Figure 10/26. This reduces the risk of restraining
moments forming from opposite corners of the bridge, which could
prevent collapse of the bridge under its own weight. Bridges are best
demolished without twisting. The line of attack should avoid cutting
transverse beams and, if necessary, should be repositioned to pass
between them.
Recommended
cut lines
Figure 10/26. Recommended lines of attack.
1025. Methods of Attack. There are three possible methods of attacking a simply
supported bridge span:
a. Top attack.
b. Bottom attack.

RESTRICTED
c. Angled attack.
The recommended methods of attack for each category of bridge are listed
in Table 10-3 at the end of this section. The method likely to produce the
most economical solution is described first. However, variations in detailed
construction (span, loading (eg road/rail), gap and abutment conditions)
within each category influence the selection of the most suitable method.
Therefore the method listed first in Table 10-3 may not always be the most
suitable.
1026. Planning Demolition of Simply Supported Bridges. The procedure for

planning the demolition of a simply supported bridge is:
a. Categorise the bridge in accordance with Paragraphs 1021 to 1023.
b. Using Table 10-3, provisionally select the method of attack.
c. Take the following measurements on the bridge (see Figure 10/27):
(1) Length, L, of the bridge span to be attacked. If L is less than

25 m (the minimum gap required), an additional span may have to
be attacked and therefore measured.
(2) The depth, H, from the top to bottom of the beam, truss or bow,
including the depth of the deck in the case of bottom support
bridges.
(3) The total end clearance, E.
(4) The mean of the bearing support lengths, Ls.
d. Establish, where relevant, there is sufficient end clearance for the method
of attack selected, in accordance with Paragraphs 1027 to 1031. If the
end clearance is not adequate, select a different method of attack and
check again.
e. Confirm the method of attack to be used.
f. Take the detailed measurements required to calculate the charges.
g. Complete AF W4012 (see Chapter 11).

RESTRICTED
E1 L E2
LS1 E = E1 + E 2 LS2
LS = LS1 + LS2
2
Figure 10/27. Measurements of simply supported spans.
1027. Jamming. It is essential to ensure jamming (see Paragraphs 1008 and

1009) cannot occur whichever method of attack is selected. The following
paragraphs show the calculations to ensure jamming will not occur.
1028. Top Attack. The formation of a cranked beam effect (see Sub-paragraph
1009b) leading to jamming must be avoided if top attack is to be successful.
Therefore a V-shaped section must be removed from the top of the span.
The depth of the V-shaped section is the full depth of the target. Lc is the
length of the section to be removed from the top of the span (this Lc should
not be confused with the length of cut that is usually the width of the bridge).
Lc is determined as follows:
a. Measure L, H, Ls1 and Ls2 (see Figure 10/27).
b. Calculate: H and Ls values.

L
c. Calculate Ls .
L
d. Determine the value of Lc from Table 10-1, by

L
rounding up the values of H and Ls to coincide with the figures in

L L
Table 10-1. The intersection point of these figures gives the value of Lc .
L
e. Calculate Lc by transposition, ie
Lc = L x Lc value from Table 10-1.

L

TABLE 10 -1 FACTOR Lc - DETERMINING MINIMUM LENGTH OF SECTION TO BE REMOVED FOR MID-SPAN TOP ATTACK
Issue No : 2.0 Jan 13
L
Ls
Serial L
H .004 .006 .008 .01 .012 .014 .016 .018 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .08 .1
L
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q)
1 .01 .003 .003 .004 .004 .005 .005 .005 .006 .006 .007 .009 .01 .011 .013 .015
2 .02 .005 .006 .007 .008 .009 .01 .011 .011 .012 .015 .017 .019 .022 .026 .03
3 .03 .008 .009 .011 .012 .014 .015 .016 .017 .018 .022 .026 .029 .033 .039 .045
4 .04 .011 .013 .015 .016 .018 .019 .021 .022 .023 .029 .034 .039 .043 .052 .06
5 .05 .013 .016 .018 .02 .022 .024 .026 .028 .029 .036 .043 .049 .054 .065 .075
6 .06 .015 .019 .022 .025 .027 .029 .031 .033 .035 .044 .051 .058 .065 .078 .09
7 .07 .018 .022 .026 .029 .031 .034 .036 .039 .041 .051 .060 .068 .076 .091 .105
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
8 .08 .021 .025 .029 .033 .036 .039 .042 .044 .047 .058 .068 .078 .087 .104 .12
9 .09 .023 .028 .033 .037 .04 .044 .047 .05 .053 .065 .077 .087 .097 .116 .135
10 .10 .026 .032 .036 .041 .045 .049 .052 .055 .058 .073 .085 .097 .108 .129 .15
11 .11 .028 .035 .04 .045 .049 .053 .057 .061 .064 .080 .094 .107 .119 .142 .165
12 .12 .031 .038 .044 .049 .054 .058 .062 .066 .07 .087 .102 .116 .13 .155 .18
13 .13 .033 .041 .047 .053 .058 .063 .067 .072 .076 .095 .111 .126 .14 .168 .195
14 .14 .036 .044 .051 .057 .063 .068 .073 .077 .082 .102 .119 .136 .151 .181 .21
15 .15 .038 .047 .054 .061 .067 .073 .078 .083 .088 .109 .128 .145 .162 .194 .225
16 .16 .041 .05 .058 .065 .072 .078 .083 .088 .093 .116 .136 .155 .173 .207 .24
17 .17 .043 .053 .062 .069 .076 .082 .088 .094 .099 .124 .145 .165 .184 .22 .255
18 .18 .046 .056 .065 .073 .08 .087 .093 .099 .105 .131 .154 .175 .194 .223 .27
19 .19 .049 .06 .069 .077 .085 .092 .099 .105 .111 .138 .162 .184 .205 .246 .285
20 .20 .051 .063 .073 .081 .089 .097 .104 .11 .117 .145 .171 .194 .216 .259 .3
Notes: 1. The figures in the Table are for Lc , where Lc is the minimum length of section to be removed (see Table 10-3, Serial 1, Column (d)).
L
Ls Ls 2 ½
2H L - L
Lc
10-29
2. Based on = .
L 1 - Ls
L 2 L
RESTRICTED
1029. Example (Top Attack). Reconnaissance established the details of a bridge

as given below. Determine the length of the V-section to be removed from
the top of the span to prevent jamming.
Category: Simply supported, bowstring, normal.
L = 62 m, H = 8.5 m, Ls = 1.15 m
H = 8.5 ÷ 62 = 0.137
L
Ls = 1.15 ÷ 62 = 0.0185
L
From Table 10-1, Lc = 0.082.

L
Therefore Lc = 0.082 x 62 = 5.1 m.
This means that the top of the bow must be cut in two places not less than
5.1 m apart.
1030. Bottom Attack. There must be sufficient end clearance to prevent the
three-pin arch effect (see Sub-paragraph 1009a) and jamming, for bottom
attack to be successful. This is checked as follows:
a. Measure L, H, E1 and E2 (see Figure 10/27).
b. Determine the required end clearance ER as follows:
(1) Calculate H .
L
(2) Read off the corresponding value of ER from Table 10-2.

L
(3) Calculate ER. (By transposition of formula, ie: ER = L x ER value

from Table 10-2). L
c. Compare the total clearance, E, with that required, ER:
(1) If E > ER, bottom attack can be used.
(2) If E < ER, bottom attack must NOT be used unless it is possible
to create the required end clearance by cropping the bottom

RESTRICTED
corners of the bridge at one abutment, or by destroying one of

the abutments where jamming would occur. Otherwise use top or
angled attack.
TABLE 10-2 REQUIRED END CLEARANCE AT SUPPORTS FOR

MID-SPAN BOTTOM ATTACKS
H ER H ER H ER
Serial Serial Serial
L L L L L L
(a) (b) (c) (a) (b) (c) (a) (b) (c)
1 0.010 0.0002 11 0.060 0.007 21 0.11 0.024
2 0.015 0.0004 12 0.065 0.008 22 0.12 0.029
3 0.020 0.0008 13 0.070 0.010 23 0.13 0.034
4 0.025 0.0012 14 0.075 0.011 24 0.14 0.039
5 0.030 0.0020 15 0.080 0.013 25 0.15 0.044
6 0.035 0.0025 16 0.085 0.014 26 0.16 0.050
7 0.040 0.0030 17 0.090 0.016 27 0.17 0.057
8 0.045 0.0040 18 0.095 0.018 28 0.18 0.063
9 0.050 0.0050 19 0.100 0.020 29 0.19 0.070
10 0.055 0.0060 20 0.105 0.022 30 0.20 0.077
Notes: 1. Where ER = Required end clearance.
H 2 ½
2. Based on ER = 4 +1 - 1.
L L
1031. Example (Bottom Attack). Reconnaissance established the details of a

bridge as given below. Determine the end clearance required for bottom
attack.
Category: Simply supported, steel beam, deck bridge, bottom support.
L = 25 m, H = 2.1 m, E = 0.4 m.
H = 2.1 ÷ 25 = 0.084
L
From Table 10-2, ER = 0.014.

L
Therefore ER = L x 0.014 = 25 x 0.014 = 0.35 m.
As E (0.4 m) is greater than ER (0.35 m), bottom attack may be used.

RESTRICTED
1032. Angled Attack. If the cut is positioned between a third of the span and mid-
span and at an angle of 70° to the horizontal, jamming should not occur with
an angled attack.
1033. Concrete Bridges.
a. With bottom attack, all the reinforcing bars in the bottom of the member
must be cut. Therefore the depth at which the charges available can cut
reinforcing bars may limit the use of bottom attack.
b. With top attack, it is not necessary for every bar to be cut provided all the
concrete in the indicated V-shaped section is removed.
c. If concrete stripping charges are employed, the resultant wedge width

must be equal to or greater than the required Lc.

TABLE 10-3 METHODS OF ATTACK - SIMPLY SUPPORTED BRIDGES
Serial Sub-category Type Method of attack Remarks

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
1 Steel beam Through bridge (I) Top attack Calculate Lc.
Lc
Lc
(i) Cut at mid-span.

RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
(ii) Cut beams including bottom flange in V.
(iii) Deck need NOT be cut.
H
2 Steel beam Through bridge (II) Bottom attack, E greater0.75H
than ER Calculate end clearance.
H 0.75H
(i) Cut at mid-span to depth 0.75 H as shown.

(ii) Deck must be cut across full width of bridge.
Lc
10-33
Lc
Lc
10-34 TABLE 10-3 METHODS OF ATTACK - SIMPLY SUPPORTED BRIDGES (continued)

H 0.75H
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
3 Steel beam Through bridge (III) Angled attack
H 0.75H
(i) Cut between 1⁄3 span and mid-span.

RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
Lc
(ii) Cut angle at approximately 70° to beam flange.
(iii) Deck must be cut across full width of bridge.
4 Steel beam Through bridge (IV) Bottom attack, E less than ER
As for Serial 2 and attack end of bridge or one

pier/abutment to create sufficient end clearance.
5 Steel beam Through bridge (V) Calculate Lc.
Lc

(ii) Where deck located well above level of
bottoms of beams, use cuts as shown.
Lc
TABLE 10-3 METHODS OF ATTACK - SIMPLY SUPPORTED BRIDGES (continued)

Lc
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
6 Steel beam Deck bridge top support Angled attack (i) Found in cantilever top
support and suspended
span bridges.
(ii) End clearance is NOT
a consideration.

(ii) Cut entire beam at approximately 70° to beam
flange.
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
7 Steel beam Deck bridge bottom support Bottom attack, E greater than ER Calculate end clearance.
(I)

(ii) Cut full depth of web and both flanges.
8 Steel beam Deck bridge bottom support Bottom attack, E less than ER
(II)
pier/abutment to create sufficient
Lc end clearance.
10-35
Lc

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
9 Steel beam Deck bridge bottom support Angled attack
(III)

RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
(ii) Cut entire beam at approximately 70° to beam
flange. Lc
10 Steel truss Through bridge (I) Top attack Calculate Lc.
Lc

(ii) Cut top chord twice, vertical (if necessary),
diagonal and bottom chord.
(iii) Wind bracing at top chord level must be
removed over Lc.
(iv) Deck need NOT be cut.
Lc

Lc
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
11 Steel truss Through bridge (II) Angled attack

RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
(ii) Cut top chord, diagonals and bottom chord in
one bay only. Cut is to be angled at 70° to top
chord.
12 Steel truss Deck bridge top support Bottom attack

one bay only.
10-37

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
13 Steel truss Deck bridge bottom support Bottom attack, E greater than ER Calculate end clearance.
Lc (I)

Lc
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
one bay only.
H 0.75H (iii) Deck need NOT be cut.
14 Steel truss Deck bridge bottom support Bottom attack, E less than ER
(II)
pier/abutment to create sufficient end clearance.
15 Steel truss Deck bridge bottom support Angled attack
(III)
H 0.75H

Lc
(ii) Cut angled at approximately
Lc 70° to top chord.
(iv) Cut top chord diagonals and bottom chord in
one bay only.
Lc
Lc
HTABLE 10-3
0.75H METHODS OF ATTACK - SIMPLY SUPPORTED BRIDGES (continued)
H Serial Sub-category
0.75H Type Method of attack Remarks
H (a) 0.75H (b) (c) (d) (e)
16 Concrete Through bridge Bottom attack

(ii) Complete cut through beam.
Lc (iii) Deck must be cut across
Lc full width of bridge.
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
17 Concrete Deck bridge top support Top attack (i) Found in cantilever
Lc and suspended span
Lc
Lc bridges.
Lc
(ii) Remove concrete over
length Lc to full width
and depth of beams.
Attack at mid-span using rapid bridge demolition (iii) Calculate Lc.
(RBD) charges or concrete stripping charges.
18 Concrete Deck bridge bottom support Bottom attack, E greater 0.15
thanmER Use of CD14 applies
(I) to slab bridges only as
depth of cut achieved
0.15 m
is 0.15 m. This cuts
0.15 m sufficient reinforcing bars
in RC slabs to cause
Lc collapse. Calculate end
clearance.
Cut at mid-span using CD
Lc 14 or Charge Demolition
10-39
Underbridge L11A1. Lc
Lc
Lc
Lc

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
19 Concrete Deck bridge bottom support Bottom attack, E less than ER m
0.15 As Serial 18.
(II)
0.15 m end clearance.
pier/abutment to create sufficient
20 Concrete Deck bridge bottom support Top attack Remove concrete over
(III) length Lc to full width
Lc
and depth of beam.
One-stage attack
Lc should cause collapse.
Calculate Lc.
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
Attack at mid-span using rapid bridge demolition
(RBD) charges or concrete
Lc stripping charges.
21 Bowstring Normal Top attack Calculate Lc.
Lc
Lc
(i) Cut at mid-span. Lc
(ii) Cut bow in two places.
Lc (iii) Cut any hangers between bow cuts.
Lc
(iv) Deck need NOT be cut.
Lc


(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
22 Bowstring Reinforced Top attack plus girders Calculate Lc.
Lc
Lc
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
As for Serial 21 and cut longitudinal beam/truss at
70° to allow heavy end to fall first.
10-41
RESTRICTED
1034. Spare.
to
1040.

RESTRICTED
SECTION 10.4 DEMOLITION OF CONTINUOUS

BRIDGES
1041. Categorisation of Continuous Bridges. The categorisation chart for
bridges treated as continuous is Figure 10/28. The chart is used in a similar
way to that for simply supported bridges in Section 10.3. Examples of
categorised bridges are:
Continuous, concrete, cantilever with suspended span.

Continuous, concrete, arch, solid spandrel, fixed footing.
Continuous, steel beam, with short side span.
Cantilever
Cantilever
with
suspended
span
With short
Concrete
side span
Beam, slab
Continuous
or truss
Without
Steel short side
span
Portal
Open Fixed
spandrel footing
Arch
Solid Pinned
spandrel footing
Brick or
masonry
arch
Figure 10/28. Continuous categorisation chart.
1042. Categories of Continuous Bridges. The terms used in the chart at Figure
10/28 are amplified below:
a. Concrete or Steel. If a continuous bridge is of both steel and concrete

construction, ie steel beams supporting a reinforced concrete deck, the
bridge should be categorised by the material of construction of the main
longitudinal load bearing members.

RESTRICTED
b. Cantilever Bridge. (See Figure 10/29). A cantilever bridge usually

consists of three spans, the centre span being formed from two cantilever
arms with a mid-span shear joint. The outer two spans are anchored at
the abutments and may be tied down or ballasted with large weights.
The full length of the anchor span may sometimes be built into the
abutments. A pure cantilever bridge is rare.
Shear joint
Figure 10/29. Cantilever bridges.
c. Cantilever with Suspended Span Bridge. (See Figure 10/30). A cantilever

with suspended span is a common design in modern reinforced concrete
bridges and may also be found in steel truss bridges. The suspended
span is simply supported between the ends of the two cantilevers and if
attacked separately is treated as a simply supported bridge. It is quite
common for the suspended span to be of different cross-section to the
cantilever and anchor spans.
d. Beam, Slab or Truss Bridge with or without Short Side Span. Beam or
truss bridges may have all spans of approximately equal length or the
side spans may be shorter than the main span(s). A short side span is
defined as being less than three-quarters of the length of the adjacent
span.

RESTRICTED
Suspended span
Suspended span
Figure 10/30. Cantilever bridges with suspended spans.
e. Portal Bridges. Typical designs of portal bridges, which may be single

or multi-span, are illustrated in Figure 10/31. Some portal bridges are
difficult to distinguish from arch bridges (see Figure 10/32), simply
supported spans or continuous beam bridges. The following points help
in recognition:
(1) In an arch bridge the points of support lie on the curve of the arch
but in a portal bridge the points of support are markedly below the
curve of the arch.
(2) When the ends of a portal bridge are buried it can appear to be
an arch bridge, but a higher span/rise ratio than 11 to 1 precludes
it being an arch bridge. The span is measured from where the
springing line starts on one side of the gap to the same point on the
opposite side of the gap. The rise is measured from an imaginary
line between the two springing points at the top of the arch ring at
mid-span.
(3) A single span flat portal frame may be confused with a simply
supported span; however, a narrow joint and some form of bearing
are always visible between the deck and abutments with a simply
supported span.

RESTRICTED
Shear joint
Wall can hide bearing
Figure 10/31. Typical portal bridges.
a. Arch.
Buried portal may Curve of

appear as an arch arch
b. Portal.
Figure 10/32. Comparison of portal and arch bridges.

RESTRICTED
(4) A multi-span flat portal frame may be confused with a continuous

beam bridge; however, a continuous beam bridge always has a
form of bearing at the intermediate supports whereas a portal
bridge does not.
f. Arch Bridges. The parts of an arch bridge, which may be single or multi-
span, are illustrated in Figure 10/33. The load is carried by the arch ring
down to the springing line. The haunch is that part of the arch from the
springing to approximately one quarter of the span. Arch bridges made
of concrete and masonry must not be confused (see Sub-paragraph
1042i).
Open spandrel Roadway Solid spandrel
Arch ring
Haunch
Springing
a. Parts of an arch bridge.
b. Typical arch bridges.

Figure 10/33. Arch bridge parts and shapes.

RESTRICTED
g. Open or Solid Spandrel. The type of spandrel indicates the construction

of the bridge and is a guide to the best method of attack. An open
spandrel gives easier access to the arch ring.
h. Fixed or Pinned Footings. It is often difficult to determine the type of

footing if the drawings are not available. If there is doubt, fixed footings
must be assumed.
i. Masonry or Brick Arch. The category is identified by the segmental arch

ring. Some reinforced concrete bridges are faced with masonry at the
sides, which can lead to incorrect categorisation. The underside of the
arch, which is rarely faced, should always be inspected.
1043. Examples. Examples of bridges that are treated as continuous are illustrated
in Figures 10/34 to 10/44.
Figure 10/34. Concrete cantilever bridges with suspended span.

(Treat as continuous).

RESTRICTED
Figure 10/35. Continuous concrete slab bridge with short side span.
Figure 10/36. Continuous concrete portal bridges with fixed footings.

RESTRICTED
Figure 10/37. Concrete portal bridge with pinned footing.

Figure 10/38. Concrete arch bridge, open spandrel, fixed footing.


RESTRICTED
Figure 10/39. Concrete arch bridges, solid spandrel, fixed footing.


RESTRICTED
Figure 10/40. Continuous steel beam bridge with short side span.
Figure 10/41. Continuous steel beam bridge without short side span.

RESTRICTED
Figure 10/42. Steel arch bridge, open spandrel

Figure 10/43. Brick arch bridge. (Treat as continuous).

RESTRICTED
Figure 10/44. Masonry arch bridge. (Treat as continuous).
1044. Principles of Attack. The point of attack depends on the category of the
bridge and the method of attack selected. The line of attack is similar to
that for simply supported bridges, ie parallel to the lines of the abutments
(see Figure 10/26), with the aim of demolishing the bridge without twisting.
If the recommended line of attack involves cutting transverse beams, the
line should be repositioned to cut between them.
1045. Freedom of Movement. To satisfy Condition 2 (freedom of movement) and

to prevent jamming during collapse:
a. Cuts should be angled at 70° to the horizontal so the angles:
(1) Allow free rotation if the see-saw mechanism is employed.
(2) Allow an uninterrupted fall for the member without support.
b. When employing the see-saw mechanism in which the end span is lifted,
the deck must be free to lift off the abutment.
c. When employing the see-saw mechanism, the longer arm must be at

least one and a quarter (1.25) times the length of the shorter arm to
ensure the deck tips satisfactorily.

RESTRICTED
1046. Concrete Bridges. Continuous concrete bridges are the most difficult type
of bridge to destroy and should not be selected as reserved demolitions
(see Chapter 11) unless success with a single-stage attack is assured. The
following points apply to the attack of continuous concrete bridges:
a. Where the recommended method of attack requires the removal of

concrete only, the charge must be applied as for a simply supported
bridge and collapse will occur.
b. Where the recommended method of attack requires a complete cut

through a span, either rapid bridge demolition (RBD) charges or a two-
stage attack must be used, for although a concrete stripping charge
should achieve sufficient damage to the steel reinforcement to cause
collapse, it is unlikely to cut all the reinforcement.
c. When using RBD charges to attack targets where the wedge width (Lc)
is a critical factor, careful consideration must be given to the placement
of charges as a second cut may be needed to achieve the freedom of
movement and prevent jamming.
d. Fixed Footing Concrete Arch Bridges. With this type of bridge, spans
greater or less than 35 m must be considered separately:
(1) Spans over 35 m. The removal of the concrete over the mid-span
section of length Lc (see Table 10-4) ensures collapse.
(2) Spans less than 35 m. It is probable the tensile strength of the

arch is sufficient to support it and prevent collapse, even when
the mid-span section of concrete has been removed. Therefore the
springing of the arch must also be attacked.
Note. For bridges with pinned footings, where there is a hinge at the arch springing, attack at the
springing is not required.
1047. Steel Bridges. All methods of attack for continuous steel bridges require
complete cuts through the span. Single-stage attack is possible provided
the charges can be correctly placed. When the deck is made of concrete,
it frequently provides much of the strength of the bridge and therefore it is
particularly important that it is cut. However, if the concrete deck is deep,
the charge may not sever the reinforcing steel and complete collapse may
not result. In such cases, a second-stage attack may be needed. This
eventuality must be considered during reconnaissance.

RESTRICTED
1048. Suspended Spans. If the suspended span is longer than 25 m, the removal
of the span alone produces a sufficient gap. Further demolition work may be
required to avoid leaving a gap that is easily bridged on top of the cantilever
spans.
1049. Masonry and Brick Arch Bridges.
a. It is assumed the tensile strength of the joints between the stone blocks
or bricks is negligible. Therefore the removal of a section or the arch ring
should cause collapse of the remainder of the ring and bring down the
superstructure as this is incapable of spanning from the abutments as
two cantilevers, being a member without support.
b. The horizontal component of the thrust developed in the arch ring is

resisted by the strength of the abutments or piers. If an abutment or
pier is removed or severely damaged, this resistance is removed, the
structure is no longer in equilibrium and the arch collapses. Similarly, in
a multi-span bridge, if the thrust on one side of the pier is removed, due
to cutting the arch ring of the span on that side, the thrust in the arch
ring on the other side of the pier can cause the pier to collapse. Figure
10/45 illustrates this type of damage. The domino effect may cause all
the spans and piers in the bridge to be affected.

RESTRICTED
Figure 10/45. Collapse of a pier.
c. Although a single charge at the crown of a masonry or brick arch should

suffice, in single-span bridges of good quality a crown charge usually only
creates a small gap which is easily bridged for light vehicles. Therefore,
whenever possible, both haunches should be cut and crown charges
should only be used if time is short.
d. If the arch ring is to be attacked from below, Condition 2 (freedom of

movement) must not be restricted by strong spandrel walls. When
attacking the arch ring from above, this is not a problem as the detonation
of the charge should also cause severe damage to the spandrel walls.
e. If a masonry arch is unusually flat, it should be examined carefully as it

may be reinforced concrete faced with masonry.

RESTRICTED
1050. Methods of Attack. The recommended methods of attack given in Table

10-5 provide a guide to the demolition of most continuous bridges. However,
the table is not exhaustive and, where different methods of construction or
materials are encountered, either one of the recommended methods must
be adapted or the demolition must be designed from first principles.
1051. Freedom from Jamming. If Table 10-5 recommends the removal of steel
or concrete over a particular length (Lc) to ensure freedom from jamming, Lc
is determined as follows:
a. Measure L and H (see Figure 10/46).
b. Calculate H.
L
c. Obtain the corresponding value of Lc from Table 10-4 (round up H value

if required). L L
d. Calculate Lc by transposition, ie L x Lc value from Table 10-4.

L
1052. Example. Reconnaissance established the details of a bridge as given

below. Determine the length to be removed to ensure freedom of movement.
Category: Continuous, concrete, arch, open spandrel, pinned footing (Table

10-5, Serial 10).
L = 58 m, H = 7.5 m.
H = 7.5 ÷ 58 = 0.129, round up to 0.14 for Table 10-4.

L
From Table 10-4, corresponding value of Lc = 0.04.

L
Therefore Lc = 0.04 x 58 = 2.32 m.
Therefore place a concrete stripping charge across the full width of the
target at mid-span to create a wedge width of at least 2.32 m.

RESTRICTED
TABLE 10-4 MINIMUM LENGTH OF SECTION TO BE REMOVED

FOR ARCH AND PINNED FOOTING PORTAL
BRIDGES
H Lc
Serial
L L
(a) (b) (c)
1 .04 .003
2 .06 .007
3 .08 .013
4 .10 .020
5 .12 .030
6 .14 .040
7 .16 .053
8 .18 .067
9 .20 .083
10 .22 .10
11 .24 .13
12 .26 .15
13 .28 .17
14 .30 .20
15 .32 .23
16 .34 .27
17 .36 .31
Notes:
1. Where Lc is the minimum length of section to be removed.
Lc H 2 ½
2. Based on = 1- 1-4 .
L L
1053. Planning Demolition of Continuous Bridges. The procedure is as follows:
a. Categorise the bridge in accordance with Paragraphs 1041 to 1043.
b. Using Table 10-5, provisionally select the method of attack.

RESTRICTED
c. Take the following measurements (see Figure 10/46):
(1) For all bridges, the span, L.
(2) For arch and pinned footing portal bridges, the rise, H.
d. If relevant, calculate the value of Lc.
e. Check the method provisionally selected is practicable and achieves the

aim.
f. Confirm the method of attack to be used.
g. Take the detailed measurements necessary to calculate the charges.
h. Complete AF W4012 (see Chapter 11).
Figure 10/46. Measurements of continuous bridges.

TABLE 10-5 METHODS OF ATTACK - CONTINUOUS BRIDGES

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
1 Concrete Cantilever Two complete cuts Two-stage attack probably required
to cut anchor span. Lc
Sheer joint
Use concrete stripping charge for

first stage. Lc
Sheer joint
One-stage attack possible if RBD

charges used.
(i) Cut anchor span as near pier as practicable.
(ii) Cut mid-span shear joint.
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
2 Concrete Cantilever and One complete cut Two-stage attack probably required
suspended to cut anchor span.
span
first stage.

charges used.
If demolition of suspended span

alone will create desired obstacle,
regard suspended span as simply
supported bridge, then categorise
(i) Cut anchor
x span as near pier
y as practicable. and attack accordingly.
x y
10-61
Lc
Lc
10-62 TABLE 10-5 METHODS OF ATTACK - CONTINUOUS BRIDGES (continued)

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
3 Concrete Beam/slab/ One complete cut Two-stage attack probably required
truss with short to cut longer span.
x
x yy
side span x y
first stage.
One-stage attack possible if RBD L

Lcc
Lc
charges used.
(i) Cut interior span so y is greater than 1.25x.
(ii) If necessary, cut other interior spans as in Serial 4.
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
4 Concrete Beam/slab/ Two or more complete cuts Two-stage attack probably required.
truss without x
x yy x
x yy
short span x y x y Use concrete stripping charge to
achieve first stage.

charges used.
Cut spans so y is greater than 1.25x.

5 Concrete Portal, fixed Two complete cuts Two-stage attack probably required. Lcc
L
footing Lc
Use concrete stripping charge to
achieve first stage.

charges used.
Cut span twice close to piers.
L
Lcc
L
Lcc Lc
Lc
TABLE 10-5 METHODS OF ATTACK - CONTINUOUS BRIDGES (continued)

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
6 Concrete Portal, pinned Stripping of concrete All concrete to be removed over
footing length Lc.
Lc
Lc
One-stage attack should be
adequate.
When footing conditions unknown,

method of attack must be as for
Serial 5.
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
Calculate Lc.
Lc
Lc
Remove concrete from mid-span over length Lc using

concrete stripping charge.
Lc Sheer joint
10-63
Lc

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
7 Concrete Arch, open Stripping of concrete Applies to arches of span greater
spandrel, fixed than 35 m only.
footing (I) Lc Sheer joint
adequate.
Calculate Lc.
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
Remove concrete over length Lc using concrete
stripping charge.
8 Concrete Arch, open Stripping of concrete Applies to arches of span less than
spandrel, fixed 35 m.
footing (II) Lc
joint
All concrete to be removed over
length Lc.

adequate.
Calculate Lc.
(i) Remove concrete from mid-span over length Lc

using concrete stripping charge.
(ii) Attack springing using CD 14 against top face of
arch ring.
x y

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
9 Concrete Arch, open Four complete cuts Two-stage attack probably required.
x y
spandrel, fixed
footing (III) Use concrete stripping charge to
achieve first stage. x y
Method alternative to Serial 8 and

applies to arches of span less than
35 m.
y
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
y 10 Concrete Arch, open Stripping of concrete One-stage attack should be x y x
spandrel, adequate.
pinned footing Lc x y x
Calculate Lc.
Lc
y x y
y x y
Remove all concrete over length Lc using concrete

stripping charge.
Lc
10-65
Lc
Lc
yy x
x yy

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
11 Concrete Arch, solid Stripping of concrete Applies to arches of span greater
spandrel, fixed than 35 m only.
L
Lcc
footing (I)
adequate.
Calculate Lc.
L
Lcc
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
stripping charge.
12 Concrete Arch, solid Stripping of concrete Applies to arches of span less than
spandrel, fixed 35 m. L
L
Lcc Lcc
L
Lcc footing (II)
adequate.
Calculate Lc.
L
Lcc (i) Remove all concrete over length Lc.
(ii) Attack both springing points by removing
concrete using concrete stripping charges either:
a. Against bottom faceLLccof arch ring.
or b. Against top face of arch ring, having removed
spandrel fill beneath roadway.
Lc
Lc
Lc Lc
Lc


Lc (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
13 Concrete Arch, solid Stripping of concrete One-stage attack should be
spandrel, adequate.
Lc pinned footing
Lc
Calculate Lc.
Lc
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
Lc
stripping charge.
Sheer joint
14 Steel Cantilever Two complete cuts
Lc Sheer joint
Lc
Lc
(i) Cut anchor span as near pier as practical.

(ii) Cut mid-span shear joint.
10-67

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
15 Steel Cantilever and One complete cut If demolition of suspended span
Lc suspended alone will create desired obstacle,
Lc span regard suspended span as simply
supported bridge, then categorise
and attack accordingly.
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
Cut anchor span as near pier as practical.
16 Steel Beam/truss, One complete cut
with short side
x y
span x y
(i) Cut interior span so y is greater than 1.25x.

(ii) If necessary, cut other interior spans as in Serial
17.
x y x y
x y x y
Lc
Lc
x y
x y


(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
17 Steel Beam/truss, Two or more complete cuts
with short side
span x y x y
x y x y
Lc
Lc
Cut spans so y is greater than 1.25x.

RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
18 Steel Portal, fixed Two complete cuts
footing
Lc
Lc
Cut span twice, close to piers.
Lc
Lc
10-69
Lc Lc
Lc Lc
Lc

Lc
(a) (b) (c) Lc
(d) (e)
19 Steel Portal, pinned Two complete cuts When footing conditions not known,
footing method of attack must be Serial 18.
Lc
Calculate Lc.
Lc Lc
Lc Lc
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
Remove section from mid-span overlength Lc.
Lc 20 Steel Arch, open Four complete cuts Align cuts in top cord to ensure
spandrel, fixed jamming does not occur when falling
footing through bottom cord.
Lc
r joint
r joint
Lc
r joint
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
21 Steel Arch, open Two complete cuts Calculate Lc.
spandrel,
pinned footing Lc
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
Remove section from mid-span over length Lc.
22 Masonry - Two complete cuts
arch (I)
(i) Cut at haunches.

(ii) Arch ring, spandrel walls and parapet should all
be attacked.
10-71

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
23 Masonry - One complete cut Use method as alternative to Serial
arch (II) 22 only when time insufficient to
allow attack at haunches.
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
Breach arch ring at crown.
1054. Spare.
to
1060.
RESTRICTED
SECTION 10.5 MISCELLANEOUS BRIDGES

1061. Introduction. Only a very small proportion of bridges fall into the
miscellaneous category. They are mainly suspension bridges, swing or
lift bridges and cable-stayed bridges. The method of demolition must be
worked out from first principles. Guidelines are given below.
1062. Suspension and Cable-stayed Bridges.
a. The cables, towers and anchorages of very large suspension (see Figure
10/47) and cable-stayed bridges (see Figure 10/48) may be too large to
be attacked effectively. In this case, the most economical method of
attack is either to cut an approach span or to cut out a section of the
deck in the main span. In the case of suspension bridges, this may be
done by cutting the hangers from the main cables and cutting the deck
at each end of the section to be removed.
Figure 10/47. Suspension bridge.

RESTRICTED
Figure 10/48. Cable-stayed bridge.
b. The main cables of smaller suspension bridges should be cut. The best
places to cut the cables are:
(1) Where they pass over the top of the suspension towers as they are
firmly supported at this point and the top of the tower is also likely
to be damaged.
(2) Where they emerge from their buried anchorages.
Depending on the time available, cuts should be made in the roadway,

and the suspension towers and their footings should be destroyed. The
pier foundations and the buried anchorages are probably too massive to
be attacked economically.

RESTRICTED
1063. Swing and Lifting Bridges. The bridge (see Figure 10/49) should be
opened and the operating mechanism destroyed. If time permits, the main
girders and abutments may be attacked.
Figure 10/49. Lifting bridges.
1064. Spare.
to
1070.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
SECTION 10.6 DEMOLITION OF UK CLOSE

SUPPORT BRIDGING EQUIPMENT
INTRODUCTION
1071. The destruction of UK bridging equipment to stop it falling into enemy

hands may need to be considered. Whereas general support bridges can
be attacked as described in Section 10.3, close support bridging (CSB)
requires particular methods and techniques. The authoritative document
on the destruction of CSB is Army Equipment Support Publication (AESP)
5420-C-114-201 (Chapter 11).
MANDATORY DIRECTIVE
1072. Destruction of equipment when subject to capture by the enemy is to

be undertaken by the user arm, only when, in the judgement of the unit
commander, such action is necessary in accordance with the orders of the
Army or divisional commander.
1073. The reporting of the destruction of equipment is to be through command

channels.
DEGREE OF DAMAGE
1074. The degree of damage to be inflicted to prevent the equipment being used
by the enemy is as follows:
a. Methods of destruction should achieve such damage to equipment and

essential spare parts that it is not possible to restore the equipment to a
usable condition in the combat area by repair or cannibalisation.
b. Any classified equipment must be destroyed to such a degree as to

prevent, whenever possible, duplication, or determination of operation or
function by the enemy.
c. Any classified documents, notes, instructions or other written material

pertaining to function, operation, maintenance or employment, including
drawings or parts lists, must be destroyed in a manner as to render them
useless to the enemy.
1075. General. In general, the destruction of essential parts, followed by

burning, is usually sufficient to render the equipment useless. However,
selection of the particular method of destruction requires imagination and
resourcefulness in the use of the facilities at hand under existing conditions.

RESTRICTED
Time is usually critical. Due consideration should be given to the modular

construction of CSBs. Components salvaged from partly-destroyed panels
or bridges could be used to assemble serviceable bridges. The priority area
to be destroyed on all CSBs is the bottom chord area, as this area, which
includes the bottom jaws, is the prime load bearing area of the bridge.
1076. Spare Parts. The same priority for destruction of the component parts of
a major item necessary to render the item inoperable must be given to the
destruction of similar components in the spares storage areas.
MEANS AND PROCEDURES FOR DESTRUCTION
1077. If destruction is ordered:
a. A location should be selected that causes greatest obstruction to enemy

movement and also prevents a hazard to friendly troops from fragments
or ricocheting projectiles.
b. Appropriate safety precautions should be observed.
1078. The means of destruction most generally applicable are:
a. Mechanical. Use of mechanical aids, eg spanners, sledge hammers,

axes, picks, crowbars or similar implements. The equipment should be
destroyed in accordance with the priorities given in AESP 5420-C-114-
201 Table 1.
b. Burning. Use of gasoline, oil or other flammables as follows:
(1) Place ammunition and charges in and about the equipment so the
greatest damage results from the explosion.
(2) Pour gasoline and oil over the equipment; ignite it using an
incendiary grenade fired from a safe distance, by a burst from a
flame thrower, by a combustible train of suitable length or other
appropriate means. Take cover immediately.
The highly flammable nature of gasoline and its vapour requires care in
its use.
1079. Gunfire. Tank guns, self-propelled guns, artillery, rifles using rifle grenades,
or launchers using anti-tank rockets can be used to destroy the equipment
by gunfire. The firing of artillery rounds at ranges of 500 m or less and the
firing of grenades and anti-tank rockets should be from cover.

RESTRICTED
1080. Explosives. Explosive charges should be placed as detailed in AESP 5420-

C-114-201 Annex A, B or C as appropriate. Each annex details denial and
destruction instructions for a complete bridge; individual panels are treated
in a similar manner.
PRIORITIES
1081. The priorities should be as follows:
a. Priority is to be given to the destruction of classified equipment and

associated documents.
b. When lack of time or means prevents complete destruction of the

equipment, priority is to be given to the destruction of essential parts,
and the same parts are to be destroyed on all like equipment.
1082. A guide to the priorities for destruction of the equipment detailed in AESP
5420-C-114-201 Chapter 11 is reproduced in Table 10-6.
TABLE 10-6 PRIORITIES FOR DESTRUCTION
Serial Action
(a) (b)
1 Removal of panel bottom jaws and attaching bolts. Removed items to be
transported away from bridge location, buried or otherwise hidden.
2 Removal of inter-trackway components. Removed items to be transported away
from bridge location, buried or otherwise hidden.
3 Cutting of bottom chords, eg oxy-acetylene cutting, hacksaws, etc.
1083. AESP 5420-C-114-201 Annexes A, B and C give specific instructions for the
denial and destruction of the CSB Nos 10, 11 and 12 respectively; individual
panels are treated in a similar manner.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
CHAPTER 11 TACTICAL AND LOGISTIC

ASPECTS
SECTION 11.1 TYPES OF DEMOLITION
1101. Responsibilities. A commander’s plan that includes demolitions is
considerably influenced by engineer factors, but the execution of the plan
is an All Arms responsibility. There are important tasks and responsibilities,
such as preventing the enemy capturing the targets intact and ensuring
there is no confusion as to the precise time at which the demolitions are
to be blown, in addition to the technical task of preparing the targets
for demolition. The doctrinal sources covering the various aspects of
demolitions are listed below and points of particular relevance to engineers
are amplified in this chapter.
}
Combined Arms
obstacle integration Army Field Manual (AFM), Volume 1, Part 1,
Formation Tactics (2007)(AC 71587)
Control of demolitions
Demolition guard
(tactical check notes) } All Arms Tactical Aide Memoire (AATAM)
(AC 71770)
1102. Purpose. The main uses of demolitions are:
a. In Defence. To delay the advance of the enemy by destroying road, rail

and water communications and installations and stockpiles that may be
of tactical or strategic importance.
b. In Offence. To weaken the resistance of the enemy by destroying his

communications, installations, etc in raids or by sabotage, and to clear
obstacles to ease the movement of friendly forces.
c. In Enabling Role. To enable other tasks.
1103. Classification of Demolitions. Demolitions are classified as ‘reserved’ or

‘preliminary’. The selection and classification of demolition targets are the
responsibility of the formation commander with engineer advice.

RESTRICTED
1104. Reserved Demolitions. A demolition is classified ‘reserved’ because

the authority to fire it is reserved to a specific commander (known as the
‘authorised commander’). This authority may be delegated to a lower
formation commander but is rarely delegated to unit commanders. A
reserved demolition target must be guarded until the demolition is completed.
Special control procedures and firing circuits are used to ensure it is fired at
the correct time. The control procedures are described in Section 11.3 and
the firing circuits in Chapter 4. Reasons for selecting a target as a reserved
demolition include:
a. The vital part played by the demolition in the tactical or strategic plan.
b. The importance of the structure itself.
c. The possibility the demolition may be executed in the face of the enemy.
1105. Examples of Reserved Demolitions. Typical examples of reserved

demolitions are the destruction of a bridge immediately after the last friendly
troops have withdrawn across it, and the blocking of a withdrawal route
through a defile or minefield after friendly forces have passed through.
Problems that may arise with a reserved demolition include:
a. The need to keep the route open to traffic until the last moment may
mean the simplest and quickest demolition techniques cannot be used.
b. The demolition techniques used must be such that the charges can
withstand traffic vibrations.
c. Firing circuits must be positioned so they cannot be damaged by traffic,

pedestrians or enemy action.
d. A demolition firing party must be permanently at the site, thereby tying up

manpower.
1106. Preliminary Demolitions. All demolitions not classified ‘reserved’ are

treated as ‘preliminary’. Preliminary demolitions may be fired immediately
after preparation provided prior authority has been granted. The authority to
fire a preliminary demolition is initially held by the authorised commander, but
is likely to be delegated to lower formation commanders. Finally, authority
to fire the demolition is passed to the demolition firing party. This is normally
through engineer channels but may be through battle group commanders,
thereby allowing them to coordinate the firing of demolitions with their
tactical plan. Although the majority of demolitions are classified preliminary

RESTRICTED
and orders to fire them are passed through engineer channels, it does not
follow that authority to fire them all is given at the same time. Authority for
each group or belt of demolitions is likely to be given separately.
1107. Advantages of Preliminary Demolitions. The advantages of preliminary

demolitions are:
a. Simple demolition techniques can be used as there is no need to take

elaborate precautions to ensure against failure.
b. Preparation and firing is less subject to interference by the enemy or

friendly troops.
c. Multi-stage attack can be used if necessary.
d. Engineer manpower is not tied up in firing parties. However, if authority

to fire preliminary demolitions is delayed and engineer troops have to
stay and guard the demolitions, manpower is quickly depleted.
1108. Spare.
to
1110.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
SECTION 11.2 RECONNAISSANCE

1111. Reconnaissance. Good demolition reconnaissance reports enable engineer
commanders to make sound appreciations, to advise the commanders and
staff during the preparation of tactical plans and to prepare engineer plans.
Although detailed demolition reconnaissance is not always possible for
offensive operations, it is essential for the success of demolition plans in
defence. Most demolition reconnaissance reports should include:
a. The method of tackling the demolition.
b. The time and labour required.
c. The quantity and types of explosives required.
d. Details of special equipment and stores needed.
1112. Reconnaissance Briefing. The officer or NCO making the reconnaissance

must be fully briefed before starting the reconnaissance. Points to be
covered are likely to include:
a. The location and nature of the target. This should include the use of
intelligence preparation of the environment (IPE) products and as much
information as possible, eg aerial and satellite images, information from
unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV) flights and other geographical products to
assist in the analysis of the target.
b. The aim of the demolition. This should include the delay the demolition
is to impose on the enemy, whether it is aimed at stopping tracked or
wheeled vehicles, etc.
c. Whether the demolition is reserved or preliminary.
d. Whether the preparation will be hampered by traffic and the conditions

for closing the route.
e. Restrictions on time and labour.
f. Restrictions on explosives.
g. Restrictions on availability of special equipment that may be required.
h. When, where and how the report is required.

RESTRICTED
1113. Reconnaissance Party Communications. The composition of the

reconnaissance party usually depends on technical considerations. The
reconnaissance of assault targets is strongly influenced by tactical
considerations, as the work has to be completed close to the enemy and
therefore protection is necessary. Protection is normally in the form of
concealment by darkness, or a covering party, or both.
1114. Composition of Reconnaissance Party. The composition of the party

must match the information to be obtained and the accessibility of the
target. When the target is straight forward and the critical components are
easily accessible, an officer or NCO with one assistant should suffice. For
complicated targets requiring numerous sets of measurements, some of
which may require the use of ladders or other aids, a larger party is required.
When the demolition of an industrial or technical installation is being planned,
the reconnaissance party should include a technician or subject expert, who
may be a civilian able to recognise the equipment. The commander of a
large reconnaissance party should be free to take an overall view of the
target and plan the method of demolition while the remainder of the party
takes detailed measurements.
1115. Equipment. The equipment required by the reconnaissance party may

include some or all of the following, depending on the nature of the target:
Pamphlet (concerning target) 1 Makefast Platform 1

Night vision equipment 1 Mine tape/6" Nails Qty
Binoculars/laser range finders 1 Rules, 500 mm 2
Rods, measuring, 2 m 2 Tape, 30 m 1
Rules, 2 m, flexible 2 Boat reconnaissance 1
Lead-line (for water depth) 1 Life preservers 2
Safety harness 1 Demolition ladder 1
Hammer 1 Chisel brick 1
AF W4012 pad 1 Lashings 2
Digital camera/video camera 1 Tape recorder 1.
Chalk and/or spray paint 1
1116. Tasks. As much information as possible should be gathered before

presence is demonstrated on the bridge by a reconnaissance party. The use
of UAVs, satellite or aerial imagery and geographical products can assist in
this process. The main tasks at the target are focused towards providing
the commander of the demolition task with different courses of action. As a
minimum:
a. Take sufficient measurements to determine the general method of attack,

including the types of charges and their location.

RESTRICTED
b. Take detailed measurements at the locations selected for charges so the

charges can be calculated and described.
c. Calculate the explosives, time and labour needed, and any other
requirements.
d. Enter the above information on AF W4012 (see Paragraph 1124).
e. Select the firing point or points (two in the case of reserved demolitions).
The location may have to be reviewed after consultation with the
demolition guard commander (see Paragraph 1135).
1117. Recording Information. Whenever possible, AF W4012 should be

completed on site with the target in view. If this is impossible, notes must be
taken from which AF W4012 can be completed in quieter surroundings. In
such situations, photographs and tape recorded descriptions are invaluable.
1118. Planning. (See Chapter 9). The aim of the demolition must be constantly
borne in mind when deciding the method of demolition. The aim dictates the
amount of damage to be inflicted, the conditions under which the charges
will be fired, the time likely to elapse between placing the charges and firing
them, and the firing arrangements required.
1119. Charge Calculations. The calculation of charges is described in Chapter 5.

Charges should never be reduced below the calculated quantities.
1120. Charge Initiation. (See Chapter 4). Great care must be taken to remove
any risk of failure, irrespective of the size of the demolition. The greatest risk
lies in damage to, or deterioration of, firing circuits. The design of a firing
circuit depends on the tactical situation under which the demolition is to be
fired and the technical complexity of the target. In a maximum firing circuit,
the risk of failure is reduced by duplication of the horizontal and vertical ring
mains, the method of initiation and the points of initiation. Maximum firing
circuits must be used in reserved demolitions and should also be used in
preliminary demolitions if there is any chance that there will not be a second
opportunity to fire the demolition should the first fail. Simple firing circuits
are used for the majority of preliminary demolitions.
1121. Priorities and Progressive Preparation. When the time for preparing the
target for demolition is short or may be reduced, the demolition plan must
indicate progressive stages in the preparation of the target. All Priority
One tasks must be completed first and connected into a firing circuit, so if
circumstances dictate they can be fired immediately. Priority Two tasks are
then completed in stages and the firing circuit is brought up to the simple or

RESTRICTED
maximum firing circuit required for the whole demolition. Although the tasks
are divided into priorities, work may proceed on them all simultaneously if
there is sufficient labour.
1122. Long Standing Demolitions. Extra precautions must be taken when a

target is likely to remain prepared for a lengthy period before being initiated.
Precautions must be taken against traffic vibration, weather (normally
heat or moisture), sabotage and possibly nuclear effects. The guarding of
demolitions is discussed in Section 11.3.
1123. Explosive Requirements. When the total explosive requirements have

been established from the demolition schedules (see Paragraph 1124), the
engineer staff should add an additional 30% for reserves. If a reserve is to
be held at any particular demolition site, the quantity should be added to
the relevant AF W4012 (see Paragraph 1124), which should be annotated
accordingly. Note: Makefast does not add 30% extra to totals specified on
that programme.
1124. Reports and Records. The main reports and records relating to the
reconnaissance and planning of demolitions are:
a. Reconnaissance Report and Makefast. The results of a demolition

reconnaissance should always be reported on Makefast in accordance
with unit standing operating procedures (SOPs) and AF W4012. Makefast
provides the rapid feedback of information to the chain of command. If
Makefast is being used, the paper AF W4012 should still be completed,
albeit at a slower pace, as it can prove useful for confirming and clarifying
information. The paper form should be completed with a soft pencil
or black pen. The information recorded must be complete and clear,
including dimensioned sketches and worked calculations. This enables
calculations to be checked and gives guidance to those carrying out the
demolition. Examples of completed AF W4012s are at Annex C.
b. Demolition Schedule. A demolition schedule contains a summary of

a number of targets for engineer planning. The information recorded
for each target in the demolition schedule includes the salient points
from the reconnaissance report (outline description of target, method of
attack, total resources required, etc). A separate schedule is normally
prepared for each sector of demolitions. AF W4012 may be used to
record a demolition schedule and an example is at Annex D.
1125. Spare.
to
1130.

RESTRICTED
SECTION 11.3 PROTECTION, MAINTENANCE

AND FIRING PROCEDURES
1131. Demolition Guard. A demolition guard is a force specifically nominated to
guard a demolition target against capture or interference until the demolition
has been successfully completed. It must:
a. Be sited to cover likely enemy approaches and prepared to fight off

surprise attacks including air strikes and airborne assaults.
b. Protect the target from sabotage or interference by refugees or local

civilians.
c. Protect the demolition firing party until the obstacle has been completed,
which may include laying mines after the demolition has been fired.
1132. Protection in Absence of Demolition Guard. A demolition guard must

be provided for a reserved demolition but is unlikely to be provided for
a preliminary demolition. Where a demolition guard is not provided, the
unit preparing the demolition or later providing the demolition firing party
is responsible for its protection. Fewer men are likely to be available for
protection duties but a warning sentry must be posted and emergency
action pre-planned.
1133. Demolition Firing Party. The demolition firing party is responsible for the
technical aspects of the demolition, once prepared, until after it has been
successfully fired. It is usually an engineer party. On a large and important
reserved demolition, it may be considered necessary to hold a second
demolition firing party in reserve but this is rare. The demolition firing party
should have access to all the reconnaissance information, whether paper
copies or Makefast data.
1134. Orders and AF W9811. Orders relating to demolitions must be clear and
unambiguous because of the important, and sometimes vital, part they play
in the tactical plan. It is mandatory that orders for reserved demolitions
are given in writing. Orders for preliminary demolitions are usually, but not
necessarily, given in writing. The format for the orders is standardised under
STANAG 2017 and is published by the UK as AF W9811 (Demolition Order)
(see Annex E).

RESTRICTED
1135. Responsibilities of Commanders.
a. Authorised Commander. The authorised commander is the military

commander with overall responsibility for the demolition, ie he is
empowered to order the firing of the demolition. He is initially the
commander responsible for the operational plan but at any stage he may
delegate his responsibilities for the demolition to the commander of a
lower formation, who then becomes the authorised commander. The
responsibilities of the authorised commander include:
(1) Selecting the demolition targets to be reserved.
(2) Ordering a formation or unit to provide the demolition guard.
(3) Deciding whether the demolition should be fired on the initiative

of the commander on the spot should the target be in danger of
imminent capture.
(4) Issuing AF W9811 for each reserved demolition target.
(5) Issuing AF W9811 for preliminary demolition targets if applicable.

Note 1. If the authorised commander is RE, AF W9811 is issued through engineer staff
channels.
Note 2. If the authorised commander is All Arms, AF W9811 may be issued through
battle groups.
(6) Ordering the change of state of readiness of reserved demolitions

(see Paragraph 1136).
(7) Ordering the firing of the demolition.
(8) Maintaining communications with the demolition guard commander

for all reserved demolitions.
b. Engineer Commander. The engineer commander’s responsibilities

include:
(1) Advising the authorised commander on the technical factors that

affect the choice of reserved demolition targets.
(2) Ordering the charging of the demolition targets when this is carried
out by engineers.

RESTRICTED
(3) Providing the demolition firing parties when ordered by the

authorised commander.
(4) Providing, where necessary, reserve firing facilities, eg by the use

of a standby air mobile firing party.
(5) Maintaining communications with the firing party commander for

all preliminary demolitions.
c. Demolition Guard Commander. The demolition guard commander

receives his initial orders on AF W9811, which contains details of his
responsibilities. These include:
(1) Guarding the site of the demolition from interference by the enemy
or local civilians.
(2) Commanding all troops at the demolition site including the

demolition firing party.
(3) Instructing the commander of the demolition firing party when to

change the state of readiness of the demolition target and giving
him the order to fire the demolition.
(4) Keeping the authorised commander informed of the operational

situation at the demolition site.
(5) Providing protection to the demolition firing party until the

completion of the obstacle.
d. Demolition Firing Party Commander. The orders for the demolition

firing party commander are contained in AF W9811, which details his
responsibilities. These include:
(1) Maintaining the state of readiness of the demolition target as

ordered.
(2) Determining the time required to change the state of readiness and
informing the demolition guard commander.
(3) Siting the firing points (see Sub-paragraph 1138b).
(4) Ensuring communication between the main and alternative firing

points, where relevant (see Sub-paragraph 1138e).

RESTRICTED
(5) Compiling the seniority roll of his firing party and obtaining the
seniority roll of the demolition guard (see Sub-paragraph 1138g).
(6) Ensuring each member of the demolition firing party is aware of his
responsibilities within the seniority roll.
(7) Periodically checking the charges and firing circuits for damage
(see Paragraph 1142).
(8) Advising the Demolition Guard Commander on safety distances

and, where possible, ensuring all troops are outside the danger
area.
(9) Firing the demolition when ordered and, as far as possible, ensuring
its success.
(10) Completing the obstacle with mines, etc as ordered.
(11) Reporting the results through engineer channels.
1136. States of Readiness. A demolition target on which all charges have been
placed is said to be ‘charged’. It is at one of the following states of readiness:
a. State of Readiness 1 (Safe). The demolition charges are placed and

secured. The vertical and horizontal ring mains are installed and the
charges connected to the vertical ring main, but the vertical and horizontal
ring mains are not connected together. Detonators and initiation sets are
not installed or connected.
b. State of Readiness 2 (Armed). The demolition is ready for immediate

firing. The vertical and horizontal ring mains have been connected
together, cross-over leads have been connected and initiation sets have
been placed into the demolition circuit.
The danger of premature firing, caused by the close explosion of a munition

or induced electric currents, when the demolition is at State of Readiness 2
(Armed) must be balanced against the time needed to bring the demolition
from State of Readiness 1 (Safe) to 2 (Armed).
1137. Communications. The authorised commander must ensure there is a clear

channel whereby he can pass orders to the demolition guard commander
to change the state of readiness and to fire the demolition. The means of
communication must be positive, secure, and known and understood by all
concerned. One of the following methods is usually used:

RESTRICTED
a. By the authorised commander, in person, being at the demolition site.
b. Through a liaison officer with a radio, located with the demolition guard
commander.
c. Through a dedicated radio link between the authorised commander and

the demolition guard commander.
d. Through normal command channels.
e. Through the engineer or artillery radio nets.
1138. Command and Control.
a. Command Post. The demolition guard command post should be sited

on the home side of the demolition where it can best command the
defence of the demolition site.
b. Firing Point. The demolition firing point is normally:
(1) As close to the demolition as safety allows (see Sub-paragraph

1138c).
(2) If possible, in view of the target.
(3) Where possible, located with the command post of the demolition
guard.
c. Safety. Safety distances between firing points and demolition targets

require careful consideration. The minimum safety distances for
protected personnel are given in Chapter 12 (Table 12-3). The possibility
of injury from broken glass, falling masonry, etc from nearby buildings
must also be considered when selecting the firing point. FFR vehicles (eg
APCs) should not be used as firing vehicles because of the RF hazards,
unless there is a minimum of 50 m of twin twisted firing cable between
the exploder and the detonator and all RF hazard safety precautions are
observed.
d. Collocation of Command Post and Firing Point. The requirements for

siting the demolition guard command post and the firing point often
conflict but the advantages of them being collocated usually justifies
compromise.

RESTRICTED
e. Alternative Command/Firing Point. An alternative command post and

firing point should be sited for all reserved demolitions. The alternative
positions may be on the opposite side of the target to the main positions
depending on the tactical situation, in which case separate initiation points
are required at either end of the horizontal ring mains. Communications
(normally radio or land line) must be arranged between the main and
alternative positions.
f. Check Point. A check point must be established at all reserved demolitions

to identify and control withdrawing units, and to control civilians. The
check point is manned by the demolition guard, although military police
may be placed under command to assist. Good communications are
essential between the check point and command post.
g. Seniority Rolls. Seniority rolls must be compiled for both the demolition
guard and the demolition firing party. The commander of the demolition
firing party must give a copy of his seniority roll to the commander of the
demolition guard and vice versa. All members of the firing party must be
aware of the seniority rolls of both the firing party and guard. There must
never be doubt as to who is in command.
1139. Recovery. A recovery vehicle should be located on the home side of a

reserved demolition so any blockage can be quickly cleared.
1140. Protection, Inspection, Maintenance and Repair. Charges on prepared

demolition targets are liable to damage and deterioration. Arrangements
must be made for this to be kept to a minimum, and to be quickly identified
and rectified.
1141. Protection. The common causes of damage and deterioration, and

methods of minimising their effects are described below. The effects of
nuclear explosions are discussed in Section 11.4.
a. Traffic. Charges may be damaged by vehicles or pedestrians knocking

them, or they may be loosened by traffic vibration. Therefore charges
must be securely fixed and, if necessary, they should be protected from
traffic by barriers of timber, sandbags, etc. Firing circuits should, as far
as possible, be run in protected places out of reach of pedestrian traffic.
Where this is impossible, they should be covered with boards, sandbags,
earth, etc. Long leads should be restrained at intervals.

RESTRICTED
b. Weather.
(1) Wet. In wet weather, measures should be taken to prevent water

running along leads and seeping into initiation points. Leads
should be bent into a shallow ‘U’ as near to the charge or detonator
as possible, so the water drips off the bottom of the ‘U’. Care
must be taken to protect safety fuze if used in initiation sets. If
necessary, an extra 150 mm and rubber sealing sleeves can be
added to the safety fuse connected to the detonator and cut off
just before firing.
(2) Heat. In very hot climates, charges and initiation sets should be
shielded from the direct rays of the sun. It may also be advisable
to place a thin layer of insulating material between a charge and a
metal surface. In warm weather, clay packing should be avoided
as it shrinks as it dries, making it liable to fall out.
c. Enemy Action. Blast and shrapnel may loosen and damage charges and
firing circuits. The precautions are similar to those for traffic.
1142. Inspection. Regular inspection and testing of long standing charges and
firing arrangements are essential. Points to look for include:
a. Moisture penetrating in to initiation points.
b. Faults in electric circuits.
c. Loose detonating cord leads and chaffing that may damage the covering.
d. Loose charges and fixings.
1143. Frequency of Inspection. The frequency of inspections depends on

the circumstances but, as a guide, charges and firing circuits should be
examined as follows:
a. Immediately after an enemy attack.
b. At State of Readiness 2 (Armed), continuity tests of electric firing circuits

every 15 minutes and other inspections as deemed necessary.
c. At State of Readiness 1 (Safe), as necessary depending on the threat to

the target.

RESTRICTED
1144. Rehearsals. The change of State of Readiness 1 (Safe) to State of

Readiness 2 (Armed) should be rehearsed to ensure the demolition firing
party can carry it out within the allotted time frame. At no time during the
rehearsals should any of the vertical ring mains or detonators be connected
into the horizontal ring mains. This is to prevent accidental premature firing
of the demolition from possible enemy action during rehearsals.
1145. Changing the State of Readiness. To change from State of Readiness 1

(Safe) to 2 (Armed):
a. The horizontal and vertical ring mains are connected together using
detonating cord junction clips. This operation is hastened if the positions
at which they are to be joined are clearly marked, eg with white tape.
b. The detonators are inserted into the firing circuit. This may be completed
by one of the following means (see Chapter 4), in the order of preference
listed:
(1) Cutting off 300 mm (100 mm if sealed) from the end of the
detonating cord lead and securing the end in a coupler containing
the detonator.
(2) Taping the detonator into a detonating cord cradle.
(3) Attaching the detonator to the detonating cord using a detonating

cord junction clip.
1146. Firing the Demolition. The method by which the order to fire is transmitted
is stated on AF W9811. When there is a demolition guard, the order to fire
is always passed to the demolition firing party commander in writing on
his copy of the AF W9811. All members of the firing party must know the
location of the AF W9811 and understand the instructions. Time should
be allowed for troops in the danger area to take cover and, if the situation
permits, for the demolition guard to be withdrawn from the enemy side of
the target.
1147. Inspection after Firing. The firing party commander must inspect the
demolition after it has been fired and either measure or estimate the damage
caused. If there has been failure or partial failure of the demolition, the firing
party must immediately rectify the fault and, if necessary, set new charges.

RESTRICTED
1148. Completion and Reporting. Mines are frequently laid in the debris of a
demolition as part of a nuisance minefield. The task is normally undertaken
by the demolition firing party. At a reserved demolition, the commander
of the demolition guard may order the laying of mines before the firing of
the demolition if the presence of the enemy is likely to prevent them being
laid afterwards. In all events, the demolition guard remains in position until
after the obstacle has been completed. The results of the demolition are
normally reported immediately by radio through engineer channels and the
completed AF W9811 returned to the authorised commander.
1149. Handover of a Demolition Target. Tactical redeployment may result in

a charged demolition target being handed over between demolition firing
parties. The incoming firing party must be taken on a full inspection of
charges and firing circuits and the AF W9811 handed over as per instructions
continued in the Demolition Order. If Makefast is being used, units taking
over the demolition must ensure they have the correct data (electronic
versions of the completed bridge demolition tool or AF W4012). AF W9811
includes a section to be used when handing over a demolition target.
1150. Spare.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
SECTION 11.4 EFFECTS OF NUCLEAR

EXPLOSION ON CHARGED
BRIDGE DEMOLITION TARGET
1151. General. The section considers the likely effects of a nuclear explosion
in the vicinity of a bridge charged for demolition and the possible counter-
measures. The firing circuits and exposed charges on girders, etc are the
most vulnerable part of the demolition. Therefore, if there is a threat of
nuclear attack, priority should be given to placing charges in prepared
demolition chambers in piers and abutments, or to the use of borehole
or pier footing charges. Particular aspects are covered in the following
paragraphs.
1152. Blast.
a. Effect. Blast tends to rip charges off girders and to destroy firing circuits.
Mined and borehole charges, being buried, are relatively safe although
their means of initiation may be damaged or destroyed.
b. Counter-measures. Charges must be fixed as securely as possible to

girders. Firing circuits should be positioned to obtain the maximum
protection from the structure itself and should be fastened to the structure
at frequent intervals.
1153. Heat.
a. Effect. Explosives may ignite, detonators may explode, the cover of

detonating cord may crack and the insulation on electric cable may burn.
b. Counter-measures. Where possible, exposed charges should be

provided with thermal shielding. Empty sandbags are probably the best
material available but direct contact with the detonating cord should be
avoided as a smouldering sandbag may ignite the cord. The protection
against blast given to the firing circuits by the structure should also
protect against heat, otherwise a thermal shield is required. Rigid thermal
shielding should be avoided as it increases the damage when caught by
blast.
1154. Radiation.
a. Effect. Most demolition stores are not affected by radiation but the target
could be contaminated by fall-out.

RESTRICTED
b. Counter-measures. The commander of the demolition firing party should

be equipped with radiac instruments. He must assess the degree of
contamination on the target and the rate of decay. He can then decide
the action to be taken.
1155. Reserves. A reserve of demolition stores must be kept for replacing charges
and firing circuits.
1156. Firing Point. The firing point must be well dug in with overhead cover and,
if time permits, with overhead protection. Protection must also be provided
for the reserve of demolition stores.
1157. Premature Firing. A demolition target charged to State of Readiness 1

(Safe) should not be susceptible to premature explosion in the event of a
nuclear explosion in the vicinity.
1158. Spare.
to
1160.

RESTRICTED
SECTION 11.5 SUPPLY OF DEMOLITION

STORES
1161. Explosives and accessories are supplied through the logistic supply chain
and are treated like any other commodity. Logistic support units normally
hold sufficient demolition stores and accessories to meet projected initial
requirements. Thereafter, demands for demolition stores and accessories
are submitted as required.
1162. Demands are usually channelled through the unit headquarters and support
squadron which arranges collection through the brigade replenishment
system. Stores are normally broken down and task loaded before being
sent forward to sub-units.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
CHAPTER 12 SAFETY
SECTION 12.1 GENERAL
1201. Introduction. The need for care in the use of live explosives, simulators and
accessories cannot be over emphasised. The Handbook of Defence Land
Range Safety, Joint Service Publication (JSP) 403, Volume 5, Chapter 3 sets
out the regulations governing the use of demolitions, ordnance disposal
and battle simulation ranges; further guidance should be sought from range
standing orders. This chapter gives rules and procedures that are mandatory
during instruction, training and demonstrations. They may only be varied
where a specific instruction has been issued to match a particular situation
or explosive store. (An example of such a variation is the precautions, set
out in JSP 364, to be taken by personnel in Explosive Ordnance Disposal
(EOD) appointments when dealing with EOD). Dispensation in training is
discussed in JSP 375 MOD Health and Safety Handbook, Volume 2, Leaflet
11. The instructions in this chapter do not absolve the DCO from taking
further precautions that may be required in dealing with a particular situation.
1202. Operations. On operations, the instructions in this chapter are to be followed

as far as possible; in departing from them, the Demolitions Conducting
Officer (DCO) remains responsible for all aspects of safety. Dispensation on
operations is discussed in JSP 454 Land Systems Safety and Environmental
Protection, Part 2, Regulation 7.
1203. Contents. The contents of this chapter are as follows:
a. The remainder of this section gives general guidance on explosives

training.
b. Section 12.2 contains the rules and procedures to be observed when

using explosives.
b. Section 12.3 gives additional safety precautions to be observed when

electrical initiation is used.
c. Section 12.4 summarises the rules governing the storage and transport
of explosives.
d. Section 12.5 contains details on qualifications relating to the use of

explosives.
e. Section 12.6 describes the organisation of a demolition range day.

RESTRICTED
1204. Spare.
to
1210.

RESTRICTED
SECTION 12.2 RULES AND PROCEDURES

WHEN USING EXPLOSIVES
BASIC SAFETY PRINCIPLES AND RULES
1211. The safety rules should be enforced by the Demolitions Conducting Officer
(DCO) for each explosive practice. Additional safety precautions for
electrical initiation are in Section 12-3.
1212. Aim and Planning. The demolition or demolition practice should have
a stated aim reflecting the intention of the commander; there should be
no unnecessary training. The DCO must plan the demolition practice
thoroughly and all personnel should be briefed on their responsibilities and
all safety precautions taken.
1213. Training with Inert Equipment. The handling of live explosives, simulators
and accessories in any form requires knowledge and confidence by the
handler. Soldiers should train with inert equipment until they have acquired
manual dexterity. It is only when they have gained confidence that they can
be entrusted with live explosives, simulators and accessories. Training with
live explosives should start with ‘confidence’ charges (see Sub-paragraph
12102b).
1214. Live and Inert Stores. Inert and live items must NEVER be used or stored
together for whatever reason.
1215. Treat Inert as Live. Inert stores, including inert bulk explosive and
detonators, should be treated as live. This is to avoid over-confidence with
live equipment.
1216. Tamping. Explosives should never be tamped with metal objects or in an

erratic manner, as this could transfer unintended shock and accidentally
initiate the explosive. If detonator crimpers are used, rubber bungs should
always be fitted to the tamping end. If crimpers are not available, a smooth
wooden or plastic tamping rod with no sharp edges should be used.
1217. Test Initiation Methods. The individual components comprising the

method of initiation should be tested at each stage of the demolition charge
assembly process to ensure failure or accidental initiation of the initiation
train cannot occur.
1218. Assess and Test Explosive Components. To minimise the need to deal
with a misfire or blind, individual explosive components and accessories
should be visually assessed and, where possible, tested for continuity,
before connection into the firing circuit. This includes the testing of electric

RESTRICTED
detonators and safety fuze burning rate and the visual inspection of Igniters
Safety Fuze Electric (ISFEs).
1219. Storage of Initiation Methods and Components. Detonators, even

if in service packs, should always be separated from bulk explosive by
a minimum of 1 m. Additionally, strict control of the method of initiation,
eg Shrike, DRFD or BIRIS, should be enforced to prevent unauthorised
connection to the firing circuit.
1220. Supervision. The rules and procedures in this chapter must be strictly
observed whenever live explosives, simulators or accessories are handled.
The most common cause of accidents is probably over confidence and it is
a command responsibility to ensure proper control of both experienced and
inexperienced soldiers and the materials.
1221. Burning Explosives. Guidance on burning explosives is given in

Section 9-7. Only Royal Engineers Bomb Disposal officers and Royal
Logistic Corps Ammunition Technical Officers are permitted to burn
explosives in peacetime.
DANGER AREAS
1222. Danger areas must be established for every practice involving live explosives,
accessories or simulators. The distance from the charge to the extremities
of the danger area is dependent on the size of charge and the type of target.
These distances are given in Tables 12-1 and 12-2. Where there is any
doubt as to the danger area, it must be assumed the materials in close
contact with the explosive will be cut and the appropriate distance applied.
SAFETY DISTANCES
1223. Peacetime. The peacetime safety distances to be applied for the firing
of bulk explosive, shaped charges and explosive accessories are listed in
Table 12-1.
1224. Battle Noise Simulation. The safety distances to be applied for battle
noise simulation are in Table 12-2.
1225. Operations. The operational safety distances at which various effects may
be expected from an explosion in the open are listed in Table 12-3. Table
12-3 is only to be used for operations.
1226. Assault Breaching. Tables 7-1 and 7-2 are to be used for assault breaching,
both on operations and in training, providing all safety criteria have been
met. For all circumstances other than the assault breaching itself, the

RESTRICTED
relevant Table 12-1, 12-2 or 12-3 should be used. UK rules on assault

breaching apply in peacetime on all MOD training estates and exercises,
unless dispensation is granted by Capability Directorate Combat Support
(CD Cbt Sp). Chapter 7 details restrictions to assault breaching training.
1227. Displays to Civilians and Military Spectators. When live explosives and
accessories are used in displays, exhibitions or demonstrations at which
civilian and military spectators are present, the safety distances at Serials 3
and 4 of Table 12-2 apply. The reduced distances at Serials 5 and 6 in Table
12-2 apply only to serving personnel undergoing training.
SENTRIES
1228. The danger area must be guarded by sentries and there must be sufficient
sentries to prevent people and livestock entering it. In particular, sentries
must be posted on roads passing through the danger area to stop traffic
entering the prescribed area. Sentries must be in contact with the control
point by radio, land line or pre-arranged signals.
1229. Equipment. A sentry is, as a minimum, to be equipped with the following:
a. Two means of communicating with the Demolitions Conducting Officer

(DCO).
b. Means of raising the alarm and attracting the attention of those intruding
into the range danger area.
c. Red flag to mark the range danger area.
d. Copy of the range orders for the post.
e. Map of the range showing the area of responsibility.
f. Other equipment as specified in the range standing orders.
1230. Orders. Orders for sentries are to cover the following points:
a. Detailed location of each sentry.
b. Boundary of the range danger area.
c. Specific area of responsibility for the post.
d. Reporting procedures and signals to be used.

RESTRICTED
e. Location of the charges and their firing points.
f. Action to be taken if there is unauthorised entry into the danger area.
g. Duration of the task.
h. Safety brief for the day’s activities.
COVER
1231. Peacetime. In peacetime, the firing point may remain within the danger
area as given in Table 12-1 only if:
a. Range Standing Orders. The range standing orders permit the use of
approved hard cover.
b. Terrain. The terrain, eg mountains or jungle, makes it impracticable to

move the firing point outside the danger area. In this case:
(1) Risk Assessment. A written risk assessment for the proposed firing
point must be made and approved by the exercise director.
(2) Line of Sight. The firing point must be out of line of sight of the
charges, must give adequate protection from fragmentation (direct,
indirect or from ricochet), noise and blast and be large enough to
provide the same degree of protection for all troops remaining at
the firing point.
(3) Personal Protective Equipment. Helmets, combat body armour

and aural protection must be worn by all those remaining at the
firing point.
(4) Danger Area. The full danger area for the charges in use must be
applied to all personnel not at the firing point.
(5) Dispensation. Dispensation is granted by higher authority. Advice

on dispensation should be sought from Capability Directorate
Combat Support (CD Cbt Sp).
1232. Operations. On operations, cover must give adequate protection from

fragmentation, ricochet, noise and blast, and the anticipated angle of
descent and size of fragments should be considered. When buildings
are assessed as potential cover, particular attention should be paid to the
glazing (if applicable) and roofs; damaged buildings should be avoided. The
distances at which various results may be expected from an explosion are

RESTRICTED
given in Table 10-3. The minimum safety distances, given in Table 10-3
Column (c), apply only to operational demolitions and are not to be used in
peacetime training.
CONTROL OF EXPLOSIVES
1233. Smoking and other naked flames are forbidden within 20 m of explosives.
An area should be designated for smoking and burning rubbish, etc and
such activities must only take place within this area.
1234. Explosives NCO. An Explosives NCO (with suitable experience) is to be

placed in charge of an explosives and accessories area at the demolition
site. All explosives not immediately being incorporated into charges are to
be held and accounted for in this area. The Explosives NCO is responsible
for ensuring:
a. Explosives and accessories are issued as per the task plan only when
and as required.
b. Detonators are kept well separated (by at least 1 m) from other explosives
until needed.
c. The explosives are not approached by unauthorised or untrained

persons.
d. All unused explosives and accessories are safe from fragments or blast
before a charge is fired.
e. Unused explosives and accessories returned after the preparation

of charges are annotated on the task plan and a balance kept of the
explosives and accessories remaining.
f. At the end of the practice, the quantity of explosives expended and

unexpended is entered on the Internal Unit Ammunition Demand/Issue/
Receipt Voucher (Army Form G8227 (AF G8227)) before the explosives
are returned.
PRECAUTIONS DURING PREPARATION OF CHARGES
1235. The DCO is responsible for ensuring safety precautions are observed during
the preparation of charges.
1236. Personnel. The minimum number of persons is employed on any one task.
All unnecessary personnel should be withdrawn to the designated waiting
area.

RESTRICTED
1237. Detonators. Detonators must be handled with care at all times and never
left unattended when they are out of their containers. In particular:
a. Detonators are to be removed singly from their container; the container is

not to be upturned to spill out more than one detonator.
b. When the required number of detonators has been removed from the
container, the container cover is to be replaced.
c. Detonators should not be pre-prepared or their packaging altered in any

way until the last possible safe moment.
d. When a detonator is issued other than in a special container, it should

be placed in a secure container separate from any charge until required.
The detonator issued with the RCK must be separated from the main
charge until it is required for use.
e. Detonators are not to be placed in unauthorised containers or carried

loose.
f. Detonators must never be buried or placed in boreholes. An exception

to this rule is in quarrying operations as described in Military Engineering
Volume V Part 3.
1238. Safety Fuze.
a. The precautions against damp in safety fuze (see Chapter 3) must be

observed.
b. The testing of safety fuze is not to be conducted within 20 m of any other

explosive or accessory.
c. Safety fuze is never to be buried.
d. Safety fuze initiated non-electrically must be of sufficient length to ensure

the firing party can reach the place of safety at a walk before the charge
is detonated. In peacetime training, the safety fuze must never be less
than 600 mm long.
e. In general, demolitions safety fuze lengths must be calculated to ensure

charges fire at intervals of not less than 10 seconds.
f. In battle noise simulation, charges may be fired at less than 10 second

intervals.

RESTRICTED
g. In battle noise simulation (see Chapter 8), the minimum length of safety
fuze to be used with electrical initiation is 50 mm.
1239. Detonating Cord.
a. The precautions against damp in detonating cord (see Chapter 3) must

be observed.
b. Loops, 90° bends and crossed leads in the detonating cord must be
avoided.
c. A tight double thumb knot in the end of the detonating cord should
always be used to initiate PE.
d. A cradle should always be formed in the end of the detonating cord to

accept the detonator.
1240. Charges. Demolition charges should be positioned on targets as described

in Chapter 5. The following criteria must be observed:
a. Undue force must never be used in preparing and placing charges.
b. Iron or steel instruments must not be used for tamping charges; instead,
blunt wooden or appropriate issued tools should be used.
c. Shaped charges must be arranged so as to fire into the ground.
PRECAUTIONS BEFORE INITIATING CHARGES
1241. Immediately before firing, the DCO must:
a. Ensure all sentries are alert, the danger area is clear and all troops and
spectators are outside the danger area or under cover.
b. Nominate two persons to count the explosions if a number of charges are

to be initiated separately using safety fuze. (If required, one person can
count the explosions while the other notes their timing).
c. Warn all personnel, if in the open, to look upwards for falling fragments
after the charge is fired.
d. Give a predetermined signal to all sentries that firing is about to start and
on acknowledgement of that signal, give the order to fire.

RESTRICTED
FIRING CHARGES
1242. When firing, the DCO must personally supervise the initiation of all charges.
AFTER FIRING CHARGES
1243. After the signal to fire, the DCO must ensure:
a. When several charges are being detonated simultaneously and the

DCO cannot confirm the detonation of all charges, the following times
elapse before the results are inspected:
Safety fuze initiation - 30 minutes.

Electrical initiation - 10 minutes.
b. The DCO inspects all charge locations and ensures all charges have
detonated before he allows anyone into the danger area.
MISFIRES AND BLINDS
1244. During peacetime training, the procedure in the event of a misfire or blind is:
a. No one is to approach the misfire or blind until the times specified in Sub-
paragraph 1243a have elapsed.
b. The DCO is to deal with the misfire personally. If possible, the DCO is to
determine the cause of the misfire by observation.
(1) Misfire. If the failure is due to the initiating circuit failing to detonate
the charge, eg through the detonating cord being cut or the safety
fuze failing to burn, the misfire is rectified by attaching a new
initiating circuit to the charge. Care should be taken not to touch
or disrupt the main charge.
(2) Blind or Partial Detonation. If the detonating cord appears to have

detonated but the charge has not detonated, or there has been a
partial detonation of the charge, it should be destroyed by making
up a new charge. Any scattered fragments of the existing charge
should be collected and placed alongside the new charge.
(3) Operations. On operations, it is the responsibility of commanders

to ensure troops undertaking demolitions are competent in dealing
with misfires. An alternative means of initiation is important. Where
the tactical situation permits, the ‘soak periods’ in Sub-paragraph
1243a should be used.

RESTRICTED
c. Reporting. All incidents involving ammunition and explosives are to be

reported in accordance with Joint Service Publication (JSP) 482, Volume
2 Chapter 8 and action taken as per the range standing orders.
IMMEDIATE ACTION FOLLOWING AN INCIDENT
1245. In any incident involving explosives or ammunition, the following action

must be taken:
a. Give first aid to the injured and call for medical assistance.
b. Inform Range Control/Range Administrative Unit. Then contact:
(1) In the UK. The Joint Service EOD Operations Centre (JSEODOC)
via the Ammunition Incidents Hotline DFTS 94234-3360/3361/
3362; civilian 01235 51 + extension. They will give advice on what
further action is to be taken.
(2) In Germany. Training Support Command (Germany) at the

Sennelager Training Centre (STC) on Sennelager Military extension
2315/2560 (emergencies only: extension 2200), out of hours STC
Guardroom extension 2232. They will give advice on what further
action is to be taken.
(3) In the Middle East and Cyprus. The SO3 Ranges J3 Operations/
Training in HQ British Forces Cyprus on extension 3957 and the
local Ammunition Technical Officer (ATO). They will give advice on
what further action is to be taken.
(4) In the Falkland Islands. The SO3 J3 (LAND) in HQ BFFI on BFFI

Military extension 4269 and the senior ATO. They will give advice
on what further action is to be taken.
(5) In the Rest of the World. When carrying out firing in locations
without ATO support, eg overseas exercises, consultation with an
ATO prior to departure is advised. The procedure outlined in Sub-
paragraph 1245b(1) is to be followed. Notification of the relevant
authorities should be carried out using any available channels, eg
signal via the local British Consulate.

RESTRICTED
c. The format for reporting incidents is:
(1) Name of person reporting the incident.
(2) Unit:
(a) Unit involved in the incident.
(b) Unit addresses and telephone numbers.
(c) Point of contact (if different from above).
(3) Incident:
(a) DTG of incident.
(b) Location of incident.
(c) Brief description of the incident including details of any

fatalities, injuries, damage caused and the type of explosives
or ammunition involved.
(4) Actions taken by the unit.
d. Seal off the area.
e. Do not attempt to strip out or alter any firing cables, charges or initiation
sets. Move all personnel to a safe area.
f. Record the batch, lot or work/manufacturer’s date (whichever is

applicable) of the explosive or ammunition concerned.
g. Segregate and ban the use of any explosive or ammunition of the batch
or lot involved.
h. Make a sketch or plan to hand to the ATO to record the distance and
position, in relation to the incident, of:
(1) All fragments.
(2) All personnel involved and witnesses, recording the direction they
were facing and their posture (standing, kneeling, etc) at the time
of the incident.

RESTRICTED
(3) Position of injured personnel involved, as in Sub-paragraph

1245h(2).
i. Carry out a preliminary investigation in conjunction with the ATO and

record all the circumstances, including:
(1) Actions taken by individuals at the time.
(2) Whether the explosive or ammunition was being used and handled
in the authorised manner.
(3) Whether the correct drills were carried out.
(4) What orders relevant to the incident were given.
(5) Any other factors required by the ATO.
j. Record the weather and ground conditions at the time.
k. If the incident involved a fire, whether the fire precautions were adequate
and whether the fire orders were carried out.

12-14 TABLE 12-1 DANGER AREAS FOR EXPLOSIVE CHARGES
(Note: These danger areas are always to be used in peacetime training. For assault breaching, see Chapter 7).
Serial Type of charge Target Size of charge Troops in open (i) Troops Troops in AFVs Air height Remarks
dug in (i)(ii) (i)(iii) (iv)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i)
1 Cutting a. Timber. See local Range a. 300 m. a. 250 m. a. 170/250 m. a. 980 ft. Metal fragments may fly up to
b. Concrete. Standing Orders b. 500 m. b. 250 m. b. 170/250 m. b. 1600 ft. 1000 m from small charges
c. Metal (eg girders, c. 1000 m. c. 250 m. c. 170/250 m. c. 2000 ft.
guns and vehicles).
2 Concussion Buildings and AFVs See local Range 1000 m 250 m 170/250 m 2000 ft Considerable blast effect to be
Standing Orders taken into account when selecting
buildings as shelters
3 Cratering Roads, etc. a. Up to 2 kg. a. 100 m. a. – a. – a. 330 ft.
Explosive digging b. 2 to 30 kg. b. 300 m. b. 250 m. b. 170/250 m. b. 980 ft.
c. Over 30 kg. c. 500 m. c. 250 m. c. 170/250 m. c. 1600 ft.
4 Mined Piers, abutments See local Range 500 m 250 m 170/250 m 1600 ft
and retaining walls Standing Orders
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
5 Borehole Rock, concrete, See local Range 300 m 250 m 170/250 m 980 ft
masonry, brick Standing Orders
6 Breaching, RC beams and See local Range 1000 m 250 m 170/250 m 2000 ft
footing, slabs, mass Standing Orders
pressure concrete walls and
obstacles
7 Shaped Concrete and steel CD No 14 1000 m 250 m 170/250 m 2000 ft
charges CD No 11
RCK shaped charge
8 Rapid bridge Masonry or concrete RBDs – L7A1, 1000 m 250 m 170/250 m 2000 ft
demolition bridges L11A1 and L12A1
charges (RBDs)
9 Bangalore Wire obstacles – a. At right angles to axis a. 250 m. a. 170/250 m. a. 2000 ft. When firing under Sub-para b, full
torpedo of torpedo – 1000 m. b. – b. – b. 2000 ft. body armour protection and helmet
b. In line of axis: to be worn

(1) Standing – 200 m.
(2) Lying – 100 m.
10 Underwater – – See Section 6.2 – – – In training, charges must not be
charges Table 6-1 exploded when swimmers in water
Notes: i. If distances are paced or taken from a map scale 1:50,000 or greater, add 20% to all safety distances.
ii. Fully dug in, under overhead cover and wearing combat helmets and hearing protection. Trenches of approved design with minimum depth 1.5 m, maximum width 0.6 m
and minimum overhead protection 0.45 m.
iii. Fully closed down under armour and wearing crewman’s helmet or ear protection:
a. Challenger and Warrior: 170 m. )
b. FV432, Saxon, AS90 and CVR(T): 250 m. ) }Optic covers should be closed.
iv. Air Danger Height (ADH) determined in feet Above Ground Level (AGL). ADH not direct conversion of Danger Area Radius.
TABLE 12-2 DANGER AREAS FOR EXPLOSIVE BATTLE NOISE SIMULATION CHARGES
Serial Type of Charge (i) Size of Charge (i) Danger Area – Remarks
Radius/Height
(ii) (iii) (iv)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
1 All detonators and detonating 20 m/60 ft a. For service personnel under supervision.
cord in open b. Metal detonating cord junction clips not to be used in battle noise
simulation charges; PVC detonating cord clips can be used.
c. If radio frequency hazard suspected, see Section 10.3.
2 Multiple detonator circuits (small 25 m/80 ft As Ser 1
arms fire) with up to 200 mm
detonating cord in open
3 Practice charges in open used in Maximum 1 kg a. Charge on sand-filled sandbag – When charges on ground, area to be free of loose stones and debris
demonstrations for both civilian 100 m/330 ft.
and military spectators (v) b. Charge on ground – 235m/770 ft.
4 Practice charges in open used in 1.1 to 2.5 kg 500 m/1600 ft As Ser 3
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
battle noise simulation for both
civilian and military personnel (v)
5 Confidence training or battle noise Maximum 1 kg a. Charge on sand-filled sandbag – As Ser 3
simulation charges in open for 50 m/160 ft.
participating military personnel (v) b. Charge on ground – 165 m/500 ft.
6 Practice charges in open used in Maximum 1 kg a. Charge on sand-filled sandbag – As Ser 3
battle noise simulation for military 25 m/160 ft.
personnel wearing CBA, helmet b. Charge on ground – 100 m/500 ft.
and aural protection (v)
7 Blast incendiary 0.115 kg 150 m/490 ft 20 m radius clearance of flammable material
8 Large nuclear simulator a. Bangalore Torpedo. a. 1000 m/2000 ft. 100 m radius clearance of flammable material for both simulators
b. 2.75 kg taped to b. 580 m/1600 ft.
timber.
9 Small nuclear simulator 0.46 kg 300 m/980 ft 20 m clearance of flammable material
10 1000 lb bomb simulation 14 Barmines or a. Exercising troops and intimately Exercising troops and intimately involved range staff to wear
13 M319 boxes of PE. involved safety staff - 200 m. helmets, ballistic goggles, ear defence and body armour. Troops in
b. Other personnel - 1000 m. open to go to ground. Warning to be sounded. No targetry.
c. Air danger height - 2000 ft.
Notes: i. Charges made up from PE.

ii. If distances paced or taken from map scale 1:50,000 or greater, add 20% to all safety distances.
iii. Air Danger Height (ADH) determined in feet Above Ground Level (AGL). ADH not direct conversion of Danger Area Radius.
12-15
iv. Sandbags to be free from stones, gravel or debris.

v. For purpose of explosive demonstrations, personnel such as ACF and CCF to be classed as civilians when planning safety distances.
12-16 TABLE 12-3 DISTANCES AT WHICH VARIOUS RESULTS MAY BE EXPECTED FROM AN EXPLOSION IN
THE OPEN - OPERATIONAL USE (i)(ii)
Injury from blast Damage to property

Distance up to Average Average distance Average distance
Distance at which Distance up to which men may distance up to up to which minor up to which 50%
men are safe Distance up which there is sustain serious Average distance which houses house damage of glass is broken
provided they to which men a likelihood of but probably not up to which are rendered occurs (iii)
Serial Weight of have adequate suffer acute aural ear injury and fatal injury and houses are badly uninhabitable.
explosive protection from discomfort and possibility of there is danger damaged and Extensive repairs
fragments and possibly some more serious of fatalities by require demolition necessary
debris ear damage injury blast pressure
or sudden
displacement
(kg) (m) (m) (m) (m) (m) (m) (m) (m)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j)
1 10 25 15 8 5 10 23
2 15 30 17 9 6 15 35
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
3 25 30 20 11 6 20 45
4 35 35 20 12 7 10 20 55
5 45 40 20 12 7 10 25 65
6 65 45 25 14 8 15 35 85
7 90 50 30 18 9 10 20 40 105
8 140 55 30 20 10 15 25 55 140
9 190 65 35 20 10 15 30 65 165
10 250 75 40 20 15 20 35 85 215
11 350 80 45 25 15 25 45 105 260
12 450 85 50 25 20 30 50 120 300
13 700 100 55 30 20 40 65 150 390
14 900 105 60 30 25 45 80 180 460
15 1100 115 65 35 25 50 90 200 520
16 1300 120 70 35 25 60 100 230 570
17 1800 135 75 40 30 65 115 270 670
18 2300 145 80 45 35 75 130 300 760

19 4500 180 100 55 45 85 150 350 860
20 7000 220 120 60 55 100 170 400 1000
21 9000 230 130 70 60 115 190 450 1100
22 13000 260 140 80 70 135 225 520 1300
23 18000 290 160 90 85 145 250 580 1450
Notes: i. These distances are for operational demolitions and are not to be used in peacetime training.
ii. Do not extrapolate figures.
iii. 10% of glass is broken at twice this distance, and the usual limit of glass breakage is three times the distance in this column.
RESTRICTED
1246. Spare.
to
1250.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
SECTION 12.3 ADDITIONAL SAFETY

PRECAUTIONS WITH
ELECTRICAL INITIATION
INTRODUCTION
1251. Charges may only be initiated electrically under the supervision of someone
with the appropriate qualification, in accordance with Table 12-6.
ELECTROSTATIC AND RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) HAZARDS
1252. When a charge is initiated by an electric detonator (see Figure 12/1), the
explosive train is started by the ignition of the match head composition by
the heating of the bridgewire when an electric current is passed through it.
Sleeve
Detonator tube
Lead wires Fuze-head Priming Base charge
Plug (includes charge
bridgewire
Figure 12/1. Electric detonator.
1253. Induced Currents. Unless care is taken, electric currents may inadvertently
be induced in the bridgewire, which could cause an accidental initiation of
the explosive train. Static charges may build up on the operator’s body and
clothes or on a vehicle, and subsequent contact with an electric detonator
may cause a catastrophic discharge of electrostatic energy within the
detonator. The most common cause of induced currents is the electro-
magnetic waves emitted by radio transmitters, radars, electronic counter
measures (ECM) equipment, etc. These induce currents in the leads of the
detonator, which act as an aerial. The danger is greatest when part of the
circuit, by coincidence, is the correct length and configuration to become
resonant to the frequency of the transmitter. Since the critical lengths
and configurations vary with the frequency, power and direction of the
transmitter, a circuit that is apparently safe in one condition may fire when
a radio changes frequency or is moved to another location. The induced
currents take two forms:

RESTRICTED
a. Common Mode Frequency Currents. Common mode frequency currents

flow together in the same direction in both leads to the detonator. The
flow is common to the pair of leads as though they were connected in
parallel up to the bridgewire in the detonator. From the bridgewire, the
current path is across the match head composition and the adjacent
insulation, which together act like the dielectric (insulation between the
plates) of an electric condenser. The circuit is completed through the
metal case of the detonator to an earth point such as the steel girder of a
bridge. A small amount of insulation between the case of the detonator
and the earth point may not effectively prevent the flow of common mode
current but merely acts as a dielectric. The common mode current ignites
the match head composition mainly because the composition acts as an
inefficient dielectric and overheats.
b. Circulating Mode. Circulating mode frequency currents follow the same

path around the detonator circuit as the normal firing current and, if of
sufficient magnitude, fire the detonator. The electric detonator is more
sensitive to circulating mode currents than to common mode currents.
1254. Unbalanced Electrical Discontinuities. Common mode currents can

be converted to circulating mode currents by unbalanced electrical
discontinuities. These are caused by electrical discontinuities in one lead to
the detonator and not in the other. The discontinuities may be joints, kinks,
loops or an added component such as an additional detonator. When radio
frequencies are emitted, an unbalance can occur if one lead is secured in a
different way to the other, or if the leads are of different lengths.
SAFETY PROCEDURES
1255. The dangers of the inadvertent initiation of an electric detonator are minimised
by following the procedures described in this section. In particular:
a. The hazard from common equipment is outlined in Paragraphs 1256 to

1263.
b. Specific techniques to be used to minimise the RF hazard when initiating

charges electrically are discussed in Section 4.3. Principles relating to
the use of electric detonators and firing cable are in Paragraphs 1264
and 1265.
c. Firing procedures are covered in Paragraph 1266.

RESTRICTED
1256. RF Hazard Safety Distances. Safety distances outside which military

mobile radio and field radar equipment do not affect electric detonators,
Igniters Safety Fuze Electric (ISFE), electric firing circuits in course of
preparation and completed circuits are given in Table 12-4. The RF hazard
safety distances for Bowman radios are given in Table 12-5. In addition,
where there is a real or suspected RF source, these safety distances must
be maintained between the nearest point of the electric circuit and the
source.
TABLE 12-4 RF HAZARD SAFETY DISTANCES FOR MILITARY EQUIPMENT
Hazard
Serial Demolition component
Service mobile Field radar equipment
(a) (b) (c) (d)
1 Electric detonators or ISFE No RF hazard No RF hazard.
in sealed service packs
2 Electric detonator or ISFE 40 m SAGW radar - 800 m
when leads are twisted Mortar locating radar - 70 m
together Infantry patrol radar - 2 m
3 Electric detonator or ISFE 30 m Artillery radar - 100 m
when connecting into a
single detonator circuit
4 Assembled single No RF hazard Artillery radar - 100 m
detonator circuit (or
single ISFE circuit) with a
minimum length of twin
twisted cable of 50 m
5 Assembled multi-detonator If the effect of a premature firing is critical, safety
circuit (or multi-ISFE circuit) distances as in Serial 2 must be observed. If the risk of
premature firing is acceptable, the only safety distances
that apply are those concerned with the explosive
hazard of the charges.

RESTRICTED
TABLE 12-5 RF HAZARD SAFETY DISTANCES FOR BOWMAN RADIOS
Safety distances (m) (i)

Serial Bowman radio For handling, loading and unloading For loaded electric
electric detonators (ii) detonators (iii)
(a) (b) (c) (d)
1 100 W HF radio 60 3
2 50 W VHF radio 50 2
3 20 W UHF radio 6 3
4 20 W HF 30 2
5 5 W VHF 15 1
6 50 MW Personal Role 0.03 0.03
Radio (PRR)
Notes:
i. Whilst transmitting.
ii. Storage and transportation of detonators not in approved packaging; or whilst handling or connecting into
a circuit.
iii. For an electric detonator, this has been defined as being ‘connected and assembled in a single detonator
circuit.’
1257. Electronic Counter Measures (ECM). ECM affects firing circuits with a
similar potential outcome to that caused by RF hazards. Care should be
taken to follow the specific guidance issued with the ECM equipment to
ensure there is no accidental detonation of the firing circuit.
1258. Fixed Radio and Radar Installations. When electric detonators are to be
used within 100 m of a high power fixed radio installation or 800 m of a
high power fixed radar installation, these systems, where possible, must be
switched off. If this is not practicable, safety distances are to be established
in accordance with the rules published in Joint Service Publication (JSP)
412 Radio Frequency Radiation Hazards Associated with Electro-Explosive
Devices.
1259. Civilian Equipment. Broadcasting on Citizens Band Radio is permitted

in the UK in the 27 MHz band. The safe distances are 30 m from a mobile
transmitter and 100 m from a static transmitter.
1260. Mobile Telephones and Other Hand-Held Radios. Mobile telephones

and other hand-held radios are commonly used and present a small but
real risk. A safe distance of 30 m is to be used between these sets and an
electric detonator. The 30 m distance means that operators are not to carry
a hand set while handling detonators.

RESTRICTED
1261. Helicopters. Helicopters must observe the RF hazards safety distances.
1262. Static Electricity. Man-made fibres in clothing may cause a build-up of

static electricity in individuals. To avoid the possibility of a static charge
initiating a detonator, the precautions in Paragraph 1264 must be followed.
1263. Lightning and Storms. A lightning strike may initiate electric detonators or
ISFE. Personnel are not to fit electric detonators or ISFE to circuits during
electrical storms. In addition, if there is a chance of a storm during the
demolition or exercise, the Demolitions Conducting Officer (DCO) must
ensure the appropriate safety distances are observed in case an accidental
detonation occurs.
1264. Carriage and Employment of Detonators and ISFE. The following rules
govern the carriage and employment of electric detonators and ISFE:
a. Service Packs. ELECTRIC DETONATORS MUST BE KEPT IN SERVICE

PACKS OR FULLY ENCLOSED METAL CONTAINERS AT ALL TIMES
UNTIL THEY ARE CONNECTED INTO CIRCUITS. Packs and containers
must not be opened within a vehicle or within 30 m of a radio set.
b. Multi-detonator Circuits. Under peacetime conditions, multi-detonator

circuits should be avoided as single detonator circuits minimise the
possibility of unbalanced electrical discontinuities converting common
mode currents into circulating mode currents. Similarly, only single
detonator circuits are recommended for operational demolitions. Single
detonator circuits are more reliable.
c. Alternate Strands. If multi-detonator, or ISFE, circuits must be used, the

detonators are to be connected into alternate strands of the firing cable.
d. Detonator Leads. The leads of the electric detonator are twisted together
at two twists per 25 mm. The twisted leads have a greater effect on
reducing the RF energy being passed to the bridgewire of the detonator
at radar frequencies than a corresponding length of firing cable. The
closeness of the twist also ensures the wires do not act as an efficient
circulating mode aerial below 17 GHz, which is the frequency of most
radar sets likely to be encountered. Therefore:
(1) The length (0.9 m) of the detonator leads must not be reduced.
(2) The wires of the lead should be neither untwisted nor separated
more than absolutely necessary to connect them to the firing cable.

RESTRICTED
(3) Before connecting any electric explosive device (electric detonator,

ISFE, etc) to a firing cable, the bare ends of the firing cable leads,
the electric explosive device leads and the person making the
connection should all be earthed by touching the ground. This is
to eliminate any possible build-up of electrostatic energy.
e. Smooth Transition. After connecting the wires of the detonator or ISFE

to the firing cable and covering the bare wires with insulating tape, the
connections should be arranged so the twist of the detonator or ISFE
wire continues smoothly into the twist of the firing cable.
f. Case Insulation. The metal case of the detonator must be well insulated
from any elevated metal structure. This reduces the possibility of firing
by VHF polarisation resulting from elevation of the detonator or structure
as there is a high impedance path to earth for these currents.
g. Protection. The electric detonator is to be carefully placed under a

sandbag or behind other suitable protection before the detonator leads
are connected to the firing cable.
h. Aircraft. Electric detonators may only be carried in aircraft and helicopters

when they are contained in their closed service packs.
i. ISFE. The two leads should be twisted together to form not less than
two twists per 25 mm. The wires should not be separated more than
absolutely necessary when being twisted together. The leads should
then be treated with similar precautions to those for detonator leads.
1265. Firing Cable. The following rules and procedures apply to electrical firing
cables:
a. Twists. Twisted firing cable with a minimum of forty-two (42) twists per
metre must be used. Ideally, Cable Special Purpose Electrical should
be used as this consists of a closely twisted pair of insulated wires that
pick up very little RF at communication frequencies compared with, for
example, D10 cable, the wires of which are very loosely twisted together.
b. Grounding. The firing cable and leads of the detonator or ISFE are to be
kept as close to the ground as possible.
c. Continuous Firing Cable. One continuous length of firing cable should be

used without joins, knots or loops, as this avoids unbalanced electrical
discontinuities converting common mode current into circulating mode
current. If a join is unavoidable, it should be made as described in
Chapter 4.

RESTRICTED
d. Separation. The twisted leads of the firing cable should be separated as

little as possible. They should be bound together about 50 mm from the
ends to prevent unnecessary untwisting when being connected to the
detonator or firing device.
e. Firing Cable during Detonator Connection. The exploder end of the firing
cable is to be short circuited by twisting the wires together and placed
on the ground while the detonator leads are being connected to the other
end of the cable. This ensures the leads do not become opened out to
form a dipole aerial.
f. High Power Electrical Sources. The firing cable must be kept a minimum
of 40 m from power and telephone cables. Electric power tool cables
should be cleared from the site before electric detonators are connected.
g. Minimum Length of Cable. Provided it is a minimum of 50 m long, the

firing cable must be as short as possible to avoid a significant amount of
RF picked up at the exploder end of the cable reaching the detonator.
h. Cut to Length. The cable must be cut to length and not connected
through the unused portion on the drum.
1266. Firing Procedures.
a. The DCO must ensure the exploder is not connected to armed firing
circuits until they are to be fired. This is done by:
(1) Peacetime. In peacetime, retaining the exploder on his or her

person while the detonators are fitted and until the charges are to
be fired.
(2) Operations. On operations, keeping the exploder at the firing point

under guard, with specific orders that the firing cable is not to be
connected to it until ordered by the officer in charge of the firing
party.
b. Before Firing. The procedure detailed in Section 12.2 is to be followed.

In training, the firing cable must not be connected to the exploder until
the sentries have acknowledged the signal that firing is about to start and
the DCO has confirmed the range danger areas are clear.
1267. Spare.
to
1270.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
SECTION 12.4 STORAGE AND TRANSPORT OF

EXPLOSIVES
1271. Regulations. The rules governing the peacetime storage of ammunition
and explosives are in Joint Service Publication (JSP) 482 Volume 2 and, for
transport, in JSP 800 Volume 4b, Dangerous Goods by Road, Rail and Sea.
These rules are to be observed in training; on operations, they are to be
followed as far as practicable without detriment to operational requirements.
A summary of the main points is given below, but this should not be used as
a substitute for the full regulations which are authoritative.
1272. Storage. Where proper magazines are not available, the following
precautions, which constitute a practical minimum for active service
conditions, should be observed:
a. Explosives are always to be stored in a dry, cool place with good cover
and ventilation.
b. Explosives are to be kept above floor level on duckboards or shelves.
c. The store is to be at least 200 m away from any other building.
d. Detonators are to be kept well away from other explosives, if possible in

a separate store. If this is not possible, they are to be separated from the
main explosive by a blast proof partition, eg a sandbag wall.
e. Explosives are not to be removed from their service packaging until they
are to be used. The number of opened packages is to be kept to a
minimum.
f. No inflammable material such as oil, paint or rags may be kept in the

explosives store.
g. Smoking is prohibited in the explosive store and within 20 m of it or the

enclosed explosives area.
h. Inflammable grass or undergrowth close to the store is to be cleared or

kept short.
i. If tarpaulins are used as overhead cover, they must be kept approximately

150 to 250 mm clear of the stack and be fixed in such a way as to allow
free circulation of air around the stack.

RESTRICTED
1273. Transport. The rules governing the carriage of explosives on vehicles are
summarised as follows:
a. Explosives should be carried in canopied vehicles. If this is not possible,

or the canopy is not fully serviceable, the explosives must, subject to
training requirements, be protected by opaque waterproof sheeting.
Where practicable, the sheeting should be lockable.
b. Vehicles are to be swept clean before loading. The load is to be distributed

evenly over the floor of the vehicle in as few layers as possible, in any
case not higher than the sides of the vehicle, and then firmly secured by
dry dunnage and chocks to prevent it shifting.
c. A vehicle should carry only explosives belonging to one Compatibility

Group (see Chapter 1) but, where a full load for a vehicle can be obtained
only by loading explosives of more than one group, explosives belonging
to Groups C, D, E, G and S may be transported on the same vehicle. The
Compatibility Group is clearly marked on all ammunition containers.
d. Detonators of Compatibility Group B should not be carried in the same

vehicle as explosives in Compatibility Group D if this can be avoided. If
it is unavoidable, they are to be kept segregated by 1 m distance in the
load-carrying compartment of the vehicle in their full standard service
packaging and the whole load must be secured. The load is then treated
as Compatibility Group B.
e. Vehicles are to display the appropriate Hazard Diamonds and reflective

rectangular boards as stipulated in JSP 800 Volume 4b.
f. Vehicles are to carry high visibility vests, white tape and flashing beacons
to assist in controlling movement at traffic accident sites.
g. Passengers are not permitted to be carried in vehicles transporting

explosives under any circumstances.
h. Explosives are not to be loaded into any vehicle carrying as freight, stores
or materials liable to cause or communicate fire or explosion.
1274. Responsibilities of Authorised Representative (AR). The AR must

ensure:
a. Explosives are packed in the correct service containers and the total
does not exceed the allowable net explosive quantity as specified in JSP
482, Part 1.

RESTRICTED
b. Vehicles are checked for serviceability before the journey. In particular:
(1) There should be no visible signs of damage to the floor and the
side walls of the vehicle are free from protruding nails, etc.
(2) There must be no leakage of fuel and no source from which undue
heat might be generated, eg by movement of the load or by faulty
brake adjustment.
(3) The appropriate fire extinguishers must be in position and fully

charged.
c. Drivers are given a route that avoids towns and congested areas as far as
possible and drivers adhere strictly to the route given.
d. Drivers and escorts are suitably trained, qualified and licensed for the
loads they are carrying.
e. A closed receptacle is provided for smoking materials and held in the

cab, or other safe place, clear of the explosives. All personnel travelling
in the vehicle must place their smoking materials in this receptacle before
the explosives are loaded and not remove them until the explosives have
been unloaded at their destination.
1275. Orders to Drivers. Orders to drivers must cover the following:
a. Engines to be switched off when loading or unloading ammunition or

explosives.
b. The route to be followed, including staging places if applicable.
c. Speed limits; no violent acceleration or braking.
d. Periodic halts to check the load has not shifted and there is no overheating
in any part of the vehicle.
e. Minimum safety distances between vehicles in convoy should be

100 m on normal roads and 200 m on dual carriageways or motorways.
In urban areas, this can be reduced to 50 m. When halted, the minimum
distance from other vehicles is 50 m.
f. Vehicles containing explosives must not hold other stores or materials

liable to cause or communicate fire or explosion; spare petrol in
containers must not be carried.

RESTRICTED
g. No smoking within 20 m of any vehicles containing explosives.
h. During thunderstorms, vehicles must not be parked under trees.
i. Loaded vehicles must not be left unattended.
j. Action in the event of a breakdown, accident or fire.
1276. Road Accidents. In the event of an accident, the driver should:
a. Not touch any items of the load that may have fallen or been ejected from
the vehicle.
b. Telephone the police, JSEODOC and the consignor to seek advice.
c. If necessary, inform fire brigade and ambulance services.
d. Where possible, drive the vehicle away from the stream of traffic.
e. Switch off the engine, check the vehicle and load, and switch on hazard
warning lights.
f. Close off the site of the accident; stop or direct traffic around the accident.
g. Warn the public to keep away.
h. Prevent smoking, naked flames or unauthorized persons within 20 m.
i. Administer first aid if applicable.
If the accident caused damage to the explosives, the fact must be recorded
on the accident report and the explosives must not be issued for use until
clearance has been given by the Ammunition Technical Officer.
1277. Fire.
a. The greatest danger when explosives are moved by road is that of the
vehicle catching fire. If the fire is not put out and the explosives cannot
be removed, they are likely to burn fiercely or detonate. The driver
and escort must be alert to the possibility of a fire in the vehicle. Fire
extinguishers as per JSP 800 Volume 4b must be readily accessible and
serviceable.

RESTRICTED
b. If the load is not at risk from the fire, the fire should be fought with the
appropriate equipment. If it is impossible to remove the explosives or
to control the fire, the driver and escort must move clear of the vehicle,
in opposite directions, to a safe distance of at least 400 m and warn
approaching pedestrians and vehicles to move out of line of sight to the
explosives carrying vehicle.
1278. Spare.
to
1280.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
SECTION 12.5 ARMY AND SPECIAL FORCES

EXPLOSIVES QUALIFICATIONS
GENERAL
1281. Command and Control. A qualified officer or senior NCO (or corporal with
dispensation from Capability Directorate Combat Support (CD Cbt Sp))
must be nominated to plan, conduct and supervise all practices and training
involving live explosives, simulators or accessories. He or she is referred to
as the ‘Demolitions Conducting Officer’ (DCO). The DCO must be present
throughout the practice or training involving live explosives, simulators or
accessories to ensure strict observance of all safety precautions. The DCO
must be qualified in accordance with Table 12-6. On no account may a
commanding officer authorise an unqualified person to plan, conduct or
supervise any practice or training involving live explosives, simulators or
accessories.
1282. Appointments and Qualifications. The appointments, qualifications

required and authority of personnel concerned with the use of live explosives,
simulators and accessories are summarised in Table 12-6 and detailed in
Paragraphs 1283 to 1296.
DEMOLITIONS SAFETY OFFICER (ALL VARIANTS)
1283. Demolitions Safety Officer (DSO). A DSO is an officer, warrant officer,

substantive SNCO, or Special Forces (SAS/SBS/SRR) JNCO or Special
Forces (Reserve) (SAS(R)/SBS(R)/SRR(R)) SNCO and above, who has
qualified by successfully completing one of the following:
a. Royal Engineers Troop Commanders Course (RETCC). Both the DSO

and Operational Demolitions phases. Eligibility: Regular officers, warrant
officers and SNCOs.
b. RE Field Sergeants Course. Both the DSO and Operational Demolitions

phases. Eligibility: Royal Engineers Combat stream SNCOs only (due to
compressed teaching).
c. SAS Patrol Demolitions Course. (Conducted by the Demolitions Cell of

22 SAS Regiment). Eligibility: Regular Special Forces lance corporal and
above. (Note: The SAS Patrol Demolition Course includes all necessary
content to qualify as a DSO).

RESTRICTED
d. SAS (Reserve) Patrol Demolitions Course. (Conducted by the Demolitions

Cell of 22 SAS Regiment). Eligibility: Reserve Special Forces SNCOs and
above. (Note: The SAS (Reserve) Patrol Demolition Course includes all
necessary content to qualify as a DSO).
1284. Demolitions Safety Officer (Restricted) (DSO (R)). A DSO (R) is an officer,
warrant officer, substantive SNCO, or corporal with dispensation from CD
Cbt Sp (SO2 Training Policy), who has qualified on one of the following
courses:
a. RE Troop Commanders DSO Course (excluding the Operational

Demolitions phase of the course).
b. Infantry Assault Pioneer Platoon Sergeants Course. Eligibility: Substantive

infantry assault pioneer platoon sergeants only.
1285. Variations in DSO Qualification. The DSO qualification enables personnel

holding this qualification to instruct trained soldiers on explosives in a
sanctioned or Army Recruiting and Training Directorate (ARTD) environment
to the limit of their instruction. The restricted version of the DSO qualification
prohibits the instruction of soldiers who have not previously been trained
in the use of explosives, but allows personnel holding this qualification to
‘remind and revise’ trained personnel. However, qualified and in date assault
pioneer platoon commanders and assault pioneer platoon sergeants are
permitted to instruct on demolitions as part of the Infantry Assault Soldiers
syllabus on courses sanctioned by CD Combat.
1286. Limits Imposed by Extent of Training. All variations of the DSO

qualification only permit the holder to conduct demolitions within the scope
of their training. For example, the Operational Demolitions package enables
Royal Engineers DSOs to conduct the full range of battlefield demolitions,
whereas Assault Pioneers are only qualified to conduct demolitions in line
with the lessons received on their qualifying course.
1287. Limits of Qualification. The following limitations apply to all variants of the
DSO qualification:
a. Size of Charge. The size of charge that may be prepared and initiated
from any firing point under the supervision of a DSO is restricted to the
limits specified in the local range standing orders.
b. Endorsed Activities. The DSO is qualified to plan and conduct any

training, battle simulation or operational demolition in accordance with
the limits of their training and this document using explosives. Table 12-6
summarises the endorsed capabilities of all recognised qualifications.

RESTRICTED
1288. Qualification Validity. Qualification validity varies depending on:
a. Rank - SNCOs and Above. For all SNCOs and above, the DSO
qualification (all variants) is valid for 3 years from the date of passing
the course examinations, or on re-qualification. To remain current as a
DSO, a re-qualification test supplied by the RE Warfare Wing (REWW) of
the Royal School of Military Engineering (RSME) must be passed. (This
test is due to be an online test in the Defence Learning Portal (DLP)).
The re-qualification must be taken before the expiry of the 3-year period,
otherwise the DSO course must be attended again to re-qualify.
b. Selected JNCOs (Substantive Corporals). For Special Forces personnel

who are not substantive SNCO or above, and selected substantive
Pathfinder Platoon corporals, the qualification life lasts as long as the
individual is posted to that unit, or reverts to 3 years from the time of
qualification if promoted.
1289. Qualification and Re-qualification. When first qualifying, individuals must

attend the course intended for them, or one that suits their experience. For
example, a RE field sergeant has the experience to attend the shorter DSO
and Operational Demolitions phases of the RE Field Sergeants Course,
whereas a RE troop commander, or someone with similar prior limited
exposure to explosives, such as some Reserve personnel, should attend
the DSO and Operational Demolitions phases of the RETCC (approximately
20 days in total). When re-qualifying after a DSO qualification has elapsed,
it is acceptable for all personnel to attend the shorter course.
1290. All Arms DSO Course. Personnel who qualified as a DSO on the, now
discontinued, All Arms DSO course retain the qualification and continue to
re-qualify as described in Paragraph 1289.
ALL ARMS EXPLOSIVES SAFETY OFFICER
1291. Eligibility. An All Arms Explosives Safety Officer (ESO) is a person who
meets the criteria below and who qualified on the, now discontinued, All
Arms Explosives Safety Officers Course at the RE Warfare Wing (REWW) of
the Royal School of Military Engineering (RSME).
a. Minimum Rank. Personnel must be a substantive SNCO or above.

RESTRICTED
b. Exceptions. Selected substantive battle simulation corporals from the

Pathfinder Platoon 16 Air Assault Brigade, Infantry Battle Schools and
British Army Training Units at Suffield (BATUS) and Kenya (BATUK) were
given special dispensation by SO2 Training Policy, Military Engineering
Branch, Capability Directorate Combat Support (SO2 Trg Pol, Mil Eng,
CD Cbt Sp) to attend the All Arms ESO course. Any future special
dispensations are to be in accordance with Joint Service Publication
375 (JSP 375), MOD Heath and Safety Handbook, Volume 2, Leaflet 11.
These dispensations are only valid for the period of employment at the
establishment or until the 3-year qualification period has elapsed, which
ever is the shorter.
1292. Limits of Qualification. The following limitations apply to the All Arms
ESO:
from any firing point under the supervision of an ESO is restricted to the
limits specified in the local range orders.
b. Endorsed Activities. An ESO is qualified to plan and conduct assault

breaching ranges for qualified personnel only, and battle noise simulation.
Table 12-6 summarises the endorsed capabilities of an ESO.
c. Instruction. An ESO is not qualified to instruct on explosive training or

assault breaching or conduct live demolition training.
1293. Qualification Validity. The All Arms ESO qualification is valid for 3 years from
the date of passing the course examinations. Thereafter, a re-qualification
test supplied by the REWW of the RSME must be passed to obtain the
qualification of All Arms Battle Noise Safety Supervisor (BSS). (This test
is due to be an online test in the Defence Learning Portal (DLP)). The re-
qualification must be taken before the expiry date of the 3-year period.
ALL ARMS BATTLE NOISE SAFETY SUPERVISOR
1294. Eligibility. An All Arms Battle Noise Safety Supervisor (BSS) is a person that
meets the criteria below and who has qualified on the All Arms BSS course
at the RE Warfare Wing (REWW) of the Royal School of Military Engineering
(RSME).
a. Minimum Rank. Personnel must be a substantive SNCO or above.

RESTRICTED
b. Exceptions. Selected substantive battle simulation corporals from the

Pathfinder Platoon 16 Air Assault Brigade, Infantry Battle Schools and
British Army Training Units at Suffield (BATUS) and Kenya (BATUK) may
be given special dispensation to attend the All Arms BSS course by SO2
Trg Pol, Mil Eng, CD Cbt Sp provided they have received dispensation
to conduct battle noise simulation in accordance with JSP 375
Volume 2, Leaflet 11. These dispensations are only valid for the period of
employment at the establishment or until the 3-year qualification period
has elapsed, which ever is the shorter.
1295. Limits of Qualification. The following limitations apply to the All Arms BSS:
from any firing point under the supervision of a BSS is restricted to the
limits specified in the local range orders.
b. Endorsed Activities. A BSS may carry out the supervision of all battle
noise simulation practices. A BSS is not to place explosive charges
against targets or conduct assault breaching. Table 12-6 summarises
the endorsed capabilities of a BSS.
c. Instruction. A BSS is not trained or qualified to instruct or supervise

unqualified personnel.
1296. Qualification Validity. The All Arms BSS qualification is valid for 3 years
from the date of passing the course examinations, or course re-qualification.
To remain current, a re-qualification test supplied by the REWW of the
RSME must be passed. (This test is due to be an online test in the Defence
Learning Portal (DLP)). The re-qualification must be taken before the expiry
date of the 3-year period, otherwise the All Arms BSS course must be
attended again to re-qualify.

12-38 TABLE 12-6 DETAILS OF REGULAR ARMY AND SPECIAL FORCES DEMOLITIONS
QUALIFICATIONS AND COMPETENCES
Serial Activity Qualification/competency
Military Engineer (Combat)

Demolitions Safety Officer

SAS/SBS (Reserve) Patrol
Assault Pioneer Section

Safety Supervisor (ii, iii)
Infantry Assault Soldier

Assault Pioneer Basic
Battlefield Explosives
All Arms Battle Noise
SA (A), (C) or (D) (90),
RM Assault Engineer
RM Assault Engineer
RM Assault Engineer
Demolitions Course
Demolitions Course
All Arms Explosives

Safety Officer (ii, iii)
MOR (A) or (B) (07)

SAS/SBS Patrol
(Restricted) (i)
Commander
Operator (iv)
Class 2/3
Class 1
Class 1
Class 2
Class 3
(ME (Cbt) 1)
(ME (Cbt) 3)
(As above)
(DSO (SF))
(DSO (SF))
(AP Basic)
(RM AE 1)
(RM AE 2)
(RM AE 3)
(DSO (R))
(AP Sect
Comd)
(DSO)
(BEO)
(ESO)
(BSS)
(IAS)
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
Use of Explosives
1 Handle, prepare, use and fire explosives • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2 Use explosives for explosive disposal of ammunition/ • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
blinds and explosive hazards (v)
3 Use explosives for set up of battle noise simulations • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4 Use explosives for assault breaching • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5 Use explosives for any demolition or explosive task • • • • • • • • • • • •
Planning and Conduct of Ranges and Activities using Explosives
6 Plan and conduct a range or activity involving battle noise • • • • • • •
simulation (vi)
7 Plan and conduct a range or activity involving assault • • • • • •
breaching (vi)
8 Plan and conduct a range or activity involving all explosive • • • • •
charges (vi)
Explosive Assault Breaching
9 Conduct assault breaching during peacetime training • • • • • • • • • • • • •
under supervision
10 Conduct assault breaching on operations • • • • • • • • • • • • •
(vii) (vii) (vii) (vii)
TABLE 12-6 DETAILS OF REGULAR ARMY AND SPECIAL FORCES DEMOLITIONS
QUALIFICATIONS AND COMPETENCES (continued)

Serial Activity Qualification/competency


SAS/SBS (Reserve) Patrol
Assault Pioneer Section
Infantry Assault Soldier

Safety Supervisor (ii, iii
Assault Pioneer Basic

Battlefield Explosives
All Arms Battle Noise
SA (A), (C) or (D) (90),
RM Assault Engineer
RM Assault Engineer
RM Assault Engineer
Demolitions Course
Demolitions Course
All Arms Explosives

Safety Officer (ii, iii)
MOR (A) or (B) (07)

SAS/SBS Patrol
(Restricted) (i)
Commander
Operator (iv)
Class 2/3
Class 1
Class 1
Class 2
Class 3
(ME (Cbt) 1)
(ME (Cbt) 3)
(As above)
(DSO (SF))
(DSO (SF))
(AP Basic)
(RM AE 1)
(RM AE 2)
(RM AE 3)
(DSO (R))
(AP Sect
Comd)
(DSO)
(BEO)
(ESO)
(BSS)
(IAS)
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
Explosive Assault Breaching (continued)
11 Supervise assault breaching training during peacetime • • • • • •
for qualified personnel.
12 Supervise assault breaching on operations • • • • • • • •
Conduct of Operational Demolition Tasks
13 Reconnoitre, plan and command demolition of targets • • • • •
in peacetime and on operations, less targets listed in
Chapters 9 and 10 of this publication (viii)
14 Reconnoitre, plan and command complex demolition • • •
tasks in peacetime and on operations, including all tasks
listed in Chapters 9 and 10 of this publication.
Notes:
i. Normally assault pioneer platoon commanders and platoon sergeants, who are qualified and in date and are permitted to instruct on demolitions as part of the Infantry Assault Soldier syllabus on courses sanctioned
by CD Combat. Also substantive corporals serving with Pathfinder Platoon for duration of their posting to that unit, or for 3 years, whichever is sooner, with dispensation to attend granted in accordance with
JSP 375, Volume 2, Leaflet 11.
ii. Personnel of any Arm or Service eligible in this table.
iii. Must be substantive SNCO. Substantive corporals serving with 16 Air Assault Brigade, the Land Warfare Training Centre (LWTC) Warminster, Infantry Training Centres (ITCs), Infantry Battle Schools (IBSs), the British
Army Training Unit Suffield (BATUS) and the British Army Training Unit Kenya (BATUK) may be qualified as ESOs or BSSs for the duration of their posting to that unit, or for 3 years, whichever is sooner.
iv. Normally reserved for Special Reconnaissance Regiment (SRR) personnel.
v. Only to the limit of each qualification.
vi. ‘Soldiers trained in the use of explosives’ are soldiers who have attended and successfully completed a course that gives them a basic demolition competency; eg ME (Cbt) 3, BEO, AP (Basic), IAS, RM AE 3.
Soldiers may only be reminded of skills consistent with their supervisor’s qualification.
12-39
vii. Personnel with the ME (Cbt) 3, AP Basic, IAS or RM AE 3 qualification should be supervised by a suitably qualified person. Commanders may give operational dispensation to conduct assault breaching
unsupervised in accordance with JSP 454, Part 2, Regulation 7. Advice can be obtained from CD Cbt Sp.
viii. Demolitions carried out on operations to the limit of individual training.
RESTRICTED
OTHER QUALIFICATIONS
1297. EOD Personnel. EOD personnel who are required to plan and conduct a
demolition range must be DSO qualified.
1298. Royal Marines Assault Engineers. Navy Command Headquarters (NCHQ)

is the authority for qualifications for Royal Marines Assault Engineers.
Details are:
a. Demolitions Safety Officer. An officer, warrant officer, colour sergeant

or sergeant who has qualified in demolitions on one of the following
courses:
(1) Assault Engineer Class 1 Course.
(2) Swimmer Canoeist Class 1 Course.
(3) RE Troop Commanders Course.
(4) RE Field Sergeants Course.
The size of charges that may be prepared and initiated under the
supervision of the DSO is restricted only by the limits specified in local
range orders, but he must supervise the initiation of all charges.
b. Explosives Safety Officer. A substantive SNCO or substantive corporal

who has qualified in demolitions on the Assault Engineer Class 2 Course.
The ESO qualification is valid for 3 years. A re-qualification test is
supplied by the Assault Engineer School at the Commando Training
Centre Royal Marines (CTCRM).
c. Range Conducting Officer. A warrant officer, SNCO or corporal who has

qualified as follows:
(1) Non-electrically Initiated Charges. To supervise the preparation and

initiation of non-electrically initiated charges, a range conducting
officer must have qualified, as a minimum, on one of the following
courses:
(a) Assault Engineer Class 2 Course (which includes electrical

initiation).
(b) Swimmer Canoeist Class 2 Course.
(c) Platoon Weapons Instructor Class 1 Course (for explosive

digging and blinds only).

RESTRICTED
(d) Heavy Weapons Class 1 Course (for explosive digging and

blinds only).
(2) Electrically Initiated Charges. To supervise the preparation and

initiation of electrically initiated charges, a range conducting officer
must be qualified to supervise the preparation and initiation of non-
electrically initiated charges and, in addition, must have passed
the Battle Inoculation/Noise Simulation (Electrical Initiation)
Safety Supervisors Course conducted by Assault Engineer Troop,
Infantry Support Wing, CTCRM, or the All Arms ESO or All Arms
BSS Courses conducted at the RSME.
The range conducting officer may carry out the duties of DCO, subject to
his qualification and rank, for battle inoculation and battle noise simulation
and explosive digging as appropriate. The total weight of explosives to
be fired in any one initiation under his supervision is not to exceed 1.0 kg
and it must be laid on the surface unless explosive digging techniques are
being used. On no account may anyone authorise unqualified personnel
to conduct practices or demonstrations with live explosives, explosive
accessories or purpose-made simulators.
1299. Infantry Assault Soldier (IAS). The IAS course includes training on the use
of explosives for assault breaching. The course is delivered by distributed
training in infantry battalions as approved by Capability Directorate Combat.
Explosives training must be taught by a qualified and in date RE officer
DSO, RE SNCO DSO, or an Assault Pioneer SNCO who has completed the
Assault Pioneer Platoon Sergeants Course and is an in-date DSO (R).
12100. Instruction on Explosives. Unless distributed training has been authorised

by the appropriate Capability Directorate, initial training on explosives and
training for those whose qualification has lapsed may only be conducted
at training establishments approved for the purpose by the Capability
Directorate Combat Support (CD CS). Authorised training establishments
are:
a. Royal School of Military Engineering (RSME).
b. Infantry Battle School (IBS).
c. Counter Terrorism Wing of 22 SAS Regiment (certification for Demolitions

Safety Officer (Special Forces) (DSO (SF)) conducted by RSME).
d. School of Electrical and Mechanical Engineering (SEME).

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
SECTION 12.6 ORGANISATION OF A

DEMOLITIONS RANGE DAY
12101. Introduction. The purpose of this section is to set the minimum organisation
required for a demolition range day, battle noise simulation or other event
involving the use of explosives. If there is any doubt, other sections of this
pamphlet must be consulted. This section summarises the activities before,
during and after firing, with particular emphasis on safety. The general
responsibilities of members of the safety organisation are in Annex F, with
guidance on the assessment of medical cover in Appendix 1.
12102. Action before Range Day.
a. The Demolitions Conducting Officer (DCO) must read and be familiar

with the relevant range or training area standing orders and must visit the
range or training area and the Range Liaison Officer (RLO) to determine:
(1) Range layout and charge areas for general demolitions and battle
noise simulation charges.
(2) Limits of explosives and types of charges that may be fired.
(3) Limitations of time (start, separation of charges and finish).
(4) Location and layout of firing points and circuits.
(5) Sentry duties and posts.
(6) Location of flags and signs.
(7) Safe area during preparation and firing.
(8) Medical facilities and requirements during the practice.
(9) Equipment required (radios, flags, stretcher, etc).
(10) Manpower required (sentries, explosives NCO, safety NCO, etc).
(11) Communications available.
(12) Accident and reporting procedures.

RESTRICTED
b. Range Instruction. The DCO then prepares a Demolition Range Action

and Safety Plan (DRASP). To assist in writing this, a task plan should be
completed while on the range reconnaissance. Annex G gives guidance
on preparation of a DRASP and includes an example at Appendix 1. A
blank explosives and accessories total form is at Appendix 2. Guidance
on the conduct of confidence charge training is at Annex H. The DRASP
is to include as a minimum:
(1) An instruction for the training, specific to the training being

undertaken.
(2) Explosive calculations for each target available (often included as

an annex).
(3) Charge layouts for each ring main, detailing the components of
each charge.
(4) Task plans for each target and ring main.
(5) A range layout showing all charges and targetry, ring mains and
spectator viewing area.
(6) Explosives and accessories totals.
(7) Stores lists.
(8) A sequence of events for the complete practice, including times,

briefings and ‘actions on’ for relevant safety points.
(9) Orders for: sentries, Explosives NCO, Safety NCO and support
staff.
(10) Safety brief for personnel participating in the training. Points to be

covered in the brief are summarised in Table 12-7.
(11) Bids for transport, additional manpower, meals and accommodation.
12103. Action by DCO on Arrival at Range.
a. Range Log. Report to the range officer/warden for briefing and sign on
range log (Land Ranges Log (MOD AB 906)). (Range orders may specify
the briefing must be prior to the practice).
b. Equipment. Collect necessary equipment from the range warden.

RESTRICTED
c. Range. Walk the range or training area and inspect the detonation
area to ensure it is clear of live explosives and accessories. (May be
accompanied by the range warden).
d. Inert Stores. Ensure no drill explosives or accessories are present.
e. Safety Brief. Safety brief for all personnel including sentries (see
Table 12-7).
f. Safety Personnel. Brief and deploy the Safety NCO and sentries.
g. Danger Area. Ensure all danger areas are clear of personnel.
h. Explosives Area. Site the explosives area and brief the Explosives NCO.
i. Smoking Area. Designate an area that may be used for smoking.
j. Medical. Brief the medical cover as laid down in range orders.
k. Unloading. Offload the explosives and other stores.
l. Targets. Check all targets to ensure they are correctly positioned in

accordance with range orders.
m. Troops to Task. Detail troops to tasks (minimum manpower to be

employed on each charge).

RESTRICTED
TABLE 12-7 DEMOLITION RANGE DAY - OUTLINE SAFETY BRIEFING
Serial Subject Points

(a) (b) (c)
1 Layout of range/training a. Charge areas for cratering, cutting and battle noise
areas simulation.
b. Assembly/smoking area.
c. Range boundaries.
2 Firing point(s) a. Location and distances from charges.
b. Marking/routes to and from.
3 Explosives area a. Location.
b. NCO in charge.
4 Stores area a. Location.
b. NCO in charge.
5 Assembly/smoking area a. Location.
b. No smoking except in smoking area.
c. Rules for use.
6 Sentries a. Locations.
b. How post is marked.
c. Communications/action if communications fail.
d. Action on range intrusion.
7 Action in the event of an a. Stop preparation/firing.
accident b. Administer first aid.
c. Location of:
(1) Safety vehicle and personnel.
(2) First aid kit and stretcher.
(3) Nearest hospital.
d. Trained first aid personnel.
8 Control of explosives Stress:
a. Only Explosives NCO to issue explosives.
b. Personnel to keep away from explosives area unless
drawing explosives.
c. All unused explosives and accessories to be returned
to Explosives NCO.
9 Range limitations a. Maximum charge sizes.
b. Maximum explosive weight or charges on ring main.
c. Maximum number of detonations in any given time
period.
d. Time delays (if any) required between detonation of
charges or ring mains.

RESTRICTED
TABLE 12-7 DEMOLITION RANGE DAY - OUTLINE SAFETY BRIEFING

(continued)
Serial Subject Points

(a) (b) (c)
10 Preparation of charges a. Minimum number of persons to be employed on
preparing each charge.
b. Instruct personnel on effect they are trying to achieve
and method of emplacing charge.
c. Do not unwrap explosives until they are required for
use.
d. No tamping with metal.
e. Test safety fuze a minimum of 20 m from other
explosives and accessories.
f. Handling of electric and non-electric detonators.
11 General points a. RF hazard:
(1) Radios not to be used within 30 m of firing circuit.
(2) Mobile telephones and pagers to be switched off
and batteries removed during range practice.
b. Live and drill items to be kept separate.
c. Persons not employed on a specific task to go to
assembly area.
d. Look up when charges fired.
12 Action on misfires To be dealt with personally by DCO.
13 Programme Outline of programme for day.
12104. Action by DCO during Preparation of Charges.
a. Troops. Ensure the minimum numbers of troops needed are used to

prepare each charge.
b. Safety Fuze Testing. Arrange for safety fuze to be tested. This must be
at least 20 m from any explosives or accessories.
c. Detonators. Ensure detonators remain with the Explosives NCO until

finally required to arm the circuit.
d. RF Hazards. Ensure all RF hazard precautions are taken.
e. Surplus Explosive. Ensure any surplus explosive from the preparation of

charges is returned to the Explosives NCO.
f. Safety Area. As and when charges are prepared, send personnel no

longer required to the assembly area.

RESTRICTED
g. Smoking. Ensure smoking only takes place in the designated area.
h. Safety Fuze Preparation. Order the required lengths of safety fuze to be

prepared.
i. Firing Cable and Exploders Testing. If relevant, ensure the electric cable
for ring mains and the Shrike exploder are tested. Ensure a sand-filled
sandbag is available at the location at which the electric detonator is to
be connected into the circuit.
j. Explanatory Tour. In a non-operational scenario, when all charges

are completed but before the detonators are connected, assemble all
personnel under training and give an explanatory tour (show and tell) of
all charges.
12105. Action by DCO Immediately before Fitting Detonators into Electric

Circuit.
a. Safe Area. Move all personnel not involved with fitting detonators to the
safe area.
b. Electrical Connections. Ensure the electrical connections at the firing

point are secure or guarded.
c. Sentries. Warn sentries detonators are being fitted.
d. Charges. Check all charges are correctly placed and securely fixed to
the targets.
e. Detonator Testing. Test the electric detonators for continuity, with the
detonators placed under a sandbag, before they are connected into the
circuit.
f. Detonator Connection. Connect the detonators into the circuit, taking

precautions against RF hazards.
g. Firing Point. Move all personnel to the firing point and carry out a head
count.
h. Firing Circuit. Test the completed firing circuit for continuity from the
firing point, checking all personnel are accounted for and the range is
secure.
i. Exploder. Keep the Shrike exploder secure until required for use.

RESTRICTED
12106. Action by DCO Immediately before Fitting Detonators into Non-electric

Circuit.
a. Safe Area. Move all personnel not involved with fitting detonators back
to the safe area.
b. Sentries. Warn sentries of the expected time of firing.
c. Charges. Check all charges are correctly placed and securely fixed to
the targets.
d. Detonators. Connect the detonators into the circuit.
e. Firing Sequence. Appoint personnel to count and, when required, time

explosions (two persons for each task). Explain the firing sequence to all
relevant personnel, including those monitoring the charges for misfires.
12107. Action by DCO when Firing Charges.
a. Range Safety Check. Check with the Safety NCO that all sentries are
alert and the danger area is clear. CHARGES MUST NOT BE FIRED
UNTIL ALL SENTRIES HAVE REPORTED THEIR AREA CLEAR.
b. Head Count. Count all personnel, including support staff and visitors,
and ensure the location of everyone is known.
c. Charge Monitors. Ensure personnel are appointed to monitor the charges

for misfires and blinds.
d. Visual Check. The DSO must visually check the danger area.
e. Look Up. If in the open, warn personnel to look up during firing.
f. Supervision of Firing. Personally supervise the following actions:
(1) Electrical Initiation. Connection of the exploder to the circuit and

firing the charge.
(2) Non-Electrical Initiation. Ignition of the explosive trains: with one

person at each point of initiation, operate the igniters simultaneously
and then walk to the place of safety.

RESTRICTED
g. Explosions. Count the number of explosions. (If it is not possible to

count the number of explosions, the DCO is to wait 30 minutes for safety
fuze initiation and 10 minutes for electrical initiation, before inspecting
the site (see Paragraph 1243).
h. Explosion Record. If required by range standing orders, record the time

of each explosion.
12108. Action by DCO after Firing.
a. Charges initiated without Blinds or Misfires. When all charges have been
detonated:
(1) Check. Examine the site alone and ensure all explosive charges
have detonated and no partial detonations have occurred.

(2) ‘All Clear’. Give the ‘all clear’, after which personnel may leave the
safe area and examine the effects. A group tour is normally the
most effective way to discuss the explosive effects of the charges.
b. In Event of Misfire or Blind. In the event of a misfire or blind:
(1) Record. Record the time of misfire.
(2) Inform. Inform the sentries and all personnel of the misfire and
ensure all personnel remain in a place of safety.
(3) Wait. Wait the requisite time (see Paragraph 1243).
(4) Check. Examine the site alone and identify the charge that has
not fired. Check all charges that have fired to ensure there are no
partial detonations. Deal with the misfire as specified in Section
12.2 and initiate the misfire non-electrically and return to the place
of safety.
(5) Further Check. After the explosion of the misfire, examine the site
alone to ensure all the explosives have detonated.
(6) ‘All Clear’. Give the ‘all clear’, after which personnel may leave the
safe area and examine the effects. A group tour is normally the
most effective way to discuss the explosive effects of the charges.

RESTRICTED
12109. Action by DCO during Range Clearance.
a. Explosive Stock. Check the recorded amount of explosive used tallies

with the remaining stock. Sign ‘Free from Explosives’ certificates and the
Internal Unit Ammunition Demand/Issue/Receipt Voucher (Army Form
G8227 (AF G8227)).
b. Debris. Ensure all debris, eg targets and cables, is removed from the
range.
c. Security. Withdraw sentries, flags, etc.
d. Equipment and Range Log. Return the range equipment to the range
warden and complete and sign the range log (Land Ranges Log
(MOD AB 906)).
e. Demolition Operators Log. Complete the Demolition Operators log, if

applicable.
f. Declaration. Take a declaration from all personnel that they have no

items of explosives or accessories in their possession. (On returning the
remaining explosives to store, the officer-in-charge is to ensure he takes
a declaration from the explosives party).
g. Range Clearance Certificate. If required, debrief the range officer on the

training and complete the Range Clearance certificate.
12110. Action by Safety NCO.
a. Carry out the orders of the DCO of the range.
b. Support Staff. Control the sentries and medical staff, positioning them if
necessary.
c. Radio Net. Act as control on the radio, ensuring contact is maintained

with sentries and the medical staff throughout the practice.
d. Visitors. Clear the entry of visitors to the range with the DCO.
e. RF Hazards. Ensure precautions against RF hazards are enforced near

firing circuits.

RESTRICTED
12111. Action by Explosives NCO.
a. Detonators. Ensure detonators are kept separate from all other explosives
and accessories and are only issued on the express orders of the DCO.
b. Unloading/Loading. Supervise the unloading of explosives and set up

and run the explosives store.
c. Preparation. Unpack explosives as required and prepare documentation

for issue.
d. Exploder. Control the Shrike exploder and only issue it on orders from
the DCO.
e. Issue. Issue the explosives and accessories as directed by the task

plans or by the DCO, obtaining a signature for all the items issued.
f. Accounting. At the end of the practice, account for all expended

explosives and accessories and reconcile the issues with the stocks
remaining.
g. Authorised Representative. Supervise the authorised representative in

reloading the unused explosive stock.

RESTRICTED
ANNEX A
BATTLEFIELD INOCULATION REMOTE INITIATION

SYSTEM (BIRIS)
1. Army Equipment Support Publication (AESP) 1375-G-111-201 is the
authorative publication on operating BIRIS and AESP 1375-11-211 provides
an aide memoire. The main features are covered in this annex.
2. General. BIRIS is designed to command detonate pyrotechnics and

explosives to provide battle noise simulation during battle inoculation
training.
a. BIRIS operates by using a UHF radio link from the firing point to the
initiation point, thereby overcoming the disadvantages associated with
cable-based systems.
b. The system comprises one transmitter and up to ten receivers. These

major items of equipment, together with accessories, are contained
within a rugged transit case. Figure A/1 shows a system comprising one
transmitter and two receivers and one ancillary pack, in a transit case.
c. Each receiver can initiate up to ten circuits. Each circuit, or ‘line’, can be
individually selected by the transmitter and fired at any time and in any
order. Up to ten receivers can be controlled by one transmitter.
d. Its typical operating range in an urban environment is approximately 2

kms. In open terrain, 2 to 5 kms can be expected and, under line of sight
conditions, ranges of 10 to 25 kms are possible.
Training on BIRIS is conducted by the Royal Engineers Warfare Wing

(REWW) of the Royal School of Military Engineering (RSME).
Issue No : 2.1 Jan 14 RESTRICTED A-1

RESTRICTED
Figure A/1. BIRIS comprising one transmitter, two receivers and one ancillary pack,
in transit case.
3. Specifications.
a. Operating Ranges.
(1) Urban terrain 2 km.
(2) Open terrain 2 to 5 km.
(3) Line of sight 10 to 25 km.
b. Weight.
(1) Transmitter 1.395 kg (excluding batteries).
(2) Receiver 3.830 kg (excluding batteries).
c. Dimensions.
(1) Transmitter 95 mm (W) x 300 mm (L) x 50 mm (D).
(2) Receiver 160 mm (W) x 300 mm (L) x 95 mm (D).
(3) Antenna Extension 5 m.
(4) Quarter-wave Antenna 192 mm.
(5) Half-wave Antenna 420 mm.
A-2 RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

RESTRICTED
d. Power Source.
(1) Transmitter AA alkaline or lithium cells

(150 hours).
(2) Receiver C alkaline or lithium cells

(150 hours).
e. Frequency Range. 385-390 or 405-410 MHz.
f. Transmitter Power Output. 2.5 W.
g. Firing Output Power. 300 mJoules at 50 volts.
h. Firing Delay. 1.15 seconds.
i. Temperature Range. -30°C to 50°C.
4. Transmitter Description.
a. The transmitter is a hand-held waterproof aluminium housing containing

the UHF radio and other associated electronics components. The base
of the housing is designed to receive a lithium battery or battery cassette
containing ten AA size alkaline batteries.
b. The top of the transmitter provides the mounting surface for the antenna
connector and key switch as shown in Figure A/2.
c. The display, keyboard and abbreviated operating instructions are

mounted on the front of the transmitter. The backlit LCD display provides
a visual presentation of actions being conducted by the operator using
the keyboard (see Figure A/2). Through the sixteen-button keyboard the
operator can:
(1) Programme a firing sequence.
(2) Review and edit a programmed sequence.
(3) Fire a programmed sequence.
(4) Select a box and a line number.
(5) Fire a selected box and line number.
(6) Verify a selected box and line-firing command has been transmitted.
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED A-3

RESTRICTED
(7) Indicate low battery state.
(8) Display error codes for diagnostic purposes.
Figure A/2. Transmitter, showing keyboard.
d. The LCD backlighting is extinguished 10 seconds after the last button is

pressed to conserve battery power.
e. The transmitter is contained within a pouch of nylon-weave construction

covered with a water-resistant polyurethane layer. Pockets for the
operating instructions card, antenna and key are provided on the inside
of the front flap.
5. Receiver Description.
a. The receiver is a waterproof cast aluminium housing containing the

electronics components necessary to accept and interrogate firing
commands, together with circuitry to disseminate the information to the
correct line.
b. The housing also contains the receptacle tubes for the eight C-size
batteries and a transit storage tube for the antenna.
c. On the upper surface is mounted the information plate and a backlit LCD
display. The display permits the operator to:
(1) Check circuit resistance.
(2) Monitor battery charge.
(3) Programme box number.

RESTRICTED
(4) Identify that the receiver is armed.
(5) Display error codes for diagnostic purposes.
d. Mounted on either side of the receiver housing in recessed bays are pairs
of terminal posts. Each pair represents the termination of a line and is
labelled from 0 to 9, thereby providing attachment for up to ten lines on
each receiver as shown in Figure A/3.
e. The terminal posts are the push-to-connect type and accept a maximum
wire size of 16 gauge. Each line has the capacity to fire a circuit with a
total resistance of no greater than 25 ohms.
Figure A/3. Receiver, showing terminals.
6. Pre-firing Drills to Set-up Receiver. The following drill should be

conducted to prepare the receiver for operation.
Warning: Do not commence receiver drills until the system transmitter

is switched off and the key is safeguarded.
a. Select a receiver from the system transit case and ensure the key switch
is in the fully anti-clockwise (OFF) position.
b. Insert the eight C-size alkaline batteries into the battery tubes, observing
the correct polarity. Replace the caps and tighten securely to ensure
good electrical contact.
c. Select the receiver site avoiding, where possible, hollows in the ground
that may fill with water. The site should be level so the receiver antenna
is in the level position.

RESTRICTED
d. Decide whether line of sight conditions prevail between the selected

receiver site and the proposed transmitter location. If in doubt, use the
antenna extension cable.
e. Remove the antenna from its storage tube and replace the tube cap. The
antenna should then be either:
(1) Fitted directly to the antenna connector on the end of the receiver,
or
(2) Fitted to the extension cable spike connector. The extension cable
should then be connected to the receiver.
f. Before carrying out the following drill, ensure the receiver is switched off
and the key is safeguarded.
(1) Once all charges and cables have been prepared and positioned,
non-essential personnel withdraw to the designated assembly area
or firing point.
(2) Ensure the cables are not connected to the receiver then fit the
detonators to the circuit.
(3) Once all detonators are fitted, attach the pair of wires at the free
end of each circuit to the selected terminals on the receiver.
(4) Insert and turn the key switch to the clockwise (ON) position. The
receiver completes a self-test sequence and then turns on all
display segments for a period of 3 seconds.
(5) Check each line for continuity and ohms reading before selecting
the box number.
Arming of the receiver occurs 1 minute after the last button is pressed.
g. If multiple receivers are being used, repeat this procedure at each

BATSIMs area before retreating to the firing point.
7. Pre-firing Drills to Set-up Transmitter. The following drill should be

conducted to prepare the transmitter for operation.
Warning: Do not commence pre-firing drills until the system transmitter

is switched off and the key is safeguarded.

RESTRICTED
a. Attach the battery pack to the transmitter housing. If fitting new alkaline
AA size batteries, ensure the correct polarity is observed before installing
the cassette.
b. Remove the front cover of the pouch and unscrew the antenna protective
cap on top of the transmitter. Remove the antenna from its transit pocket
in the pouch and fit it to the connector on the top surface of the transmitter
by pushing it on and rotating it clockwise until it locks in place.
c. Insert and turn the key switch to the clockwise position. Ensure all
personnel are outside of the danger area.
d. The transmitter completes a self-test sequence and then turns on all

display segments for 3 seconds. The display should be identical to that
in Figure A/4. If any segment is not working, the transmitter display is
faulty and the unit should be referred to technical support personnel.
After 3 seconds the display shows ‘--’.
Figure A/4. Self-test display.
e. If at any time ‘LO BAT’ appears on the display, indicating the battery
capacity is low, complete the following drill:
(1) Turn the transmitter key switch to the fully anticlockwise (OFF)
position.
(2) Remove the battery pack and insert new batteries.
(3) Replace the battery pack.
(4) Insert the key to the clockwise (ON) position.
8. Programming Firing Sequence.
a. The following drills should be conducted to program a sequence of firing

into the transmitter:
(1) Open the front cover of the pouch.

RESTRICTED
(2) Insert and turn the key switch to the clockwise (ON) position.
(3) Press ‘BOX’ and, whilst holding it down, press ‘SEQ’. Display
shows ‘--P’.
(4) Press numeral keys to enter box and line number. Note that as
each digit is entered, the display digit moves from right to left
allowing corrections to be made. A null step can be made using
the ‘CLR’ key.
(5) Press the ‘NXT’ key. This records the previous step and displays
the next step in the sequence memory.
(6) Repeat (4) and (5) until the complete sequence has been
programmed.
b. A program step containing a single digit is unacceptable. Two digits or a

null step must be displayed before the ‘NXT’ key allows the sequencing
to proceed.
c. On power-down (switch off) of the transmitter, all sequence memory

locations revert to null. It is therefore imperative that, having programmed
a sequence, the transmitter is left switched off.
d. ‘End’ is displayed when all available memory space has been used. To
escape from ‘End’, press ‘Box’.
9. Firing Drills.
a. The following drills should be conducted to fire a single circuit:
(1) Ensure all of the pre-firing drills have been followed.
(2) Ensure the transmitter is held upright and away from other objects
to obtain maximum performance.
(3) Press the ‘BOX’ key and, whilst holding it down, press the number
key corresponding to the receiver required. This number appears
in the left of the display.
(4) Press the ‘F’ (Fire) key and, whilst holding it down, press the
numbered key corresponding to the line required. The number
appears on the right of the display and detonation is initiated. A
letter ‘F’ flashes for a short period then remains on when the FIRE
command is completed.

RESTRICTED
b. Further lines on the same receiver may be fired by repeating (4) above.
c. Further receivers and lines may be fired by repeating (3) and (4) above.
10. Fire Programmed Sequence.
a. The following drills should be conducted to fire a programmed sequence:
(1) Ensure all of the pre-firing drills have been followed.
(2) Ensure the transmitter is held upright and away from other objects
to obtain maximum performance.
(3) Press the ‘BOX’ key and, whilst holding it down, press ‘SEQ’. The
display shows the first programmed box and line numbers.
(4) Press the ‘F’ (Fire) and, whilst holding it down, press ‘SEQ’.
Detonation is initiated and the letter ‘F’ flashes in place of the letter
‘P’. After a short delay, the next step is displayed.
b. A sequence step may be by-passed without firing by pressing ‘NXT’.

The next programmed step is then displayed.
c. It is possible for the operator to leave the sequence to perform other

tasks. On return to the programmed sequence, the first step is displayed.
To resume firing of the programmed sequence, the operator must step
through the sequence by pressing ‘NXT’ until the required re-start step
is displayed. (Note that any steps that have previously received a firing
command now display both ‘F’ and ‘P’ flashing alternatively.) Firing is
continued using the drill in Paragraph 9a(4).
11. Design Safety Features.
a. The equipment uses UHF radio signals to send firing commands from
the transmitter to the receiver. Each system operates on a specific
frequency. The transmitter can only activate receivers belonging to the
same system because, within the software, each system is allocated a
unique three-digit code. This code is referred to as the ‘Group Code’.
On the transmitter, the Group Code is marked on the top face of the unit
between the key switch and the antenna socket, and also at the top on
each side. On the receiver, the code appears on the top face above the
display and also on the sides adjacent to the carry strap attachment.

RESTRICTED
b. A situation could arise whereby two systems are deployed operating on

the same frequency. Interference occurs if two transmitters are operated
at exactly the same time within the signal reception area. This does
not result in unintentional firing of a circuit because of the unique code
associated with each system. Instead, firing commands may be ignored
by one or more receivers. This effect is known as ‘blocking’.
c. A key switch is provided with both transmitter and receiver to prevent

inadvertent initiation of any circuits during the setting up of the explosive
charges or pyrotechnics. This key effectively creates a safe environment
in which to prepare the explosives or pyrotechnics. Only when the
exercise preparation has been completed is the equipment armed.
d. A comprehensive error checking system is employed on the radio

transmission, involving a multi-stage data comparison and validation
process. This ensures the integrity of detonation of all detonation
commands, and hence a high safety standard.
e. The capacitor discharge system used in the firing circuit prevents damage
to cables or receivers if there is an accidental short circuit.
f. Arming of the receiver occurs 1 minute after the last button is pressed.
After 1 minute, the letter ‘A’ appears at the right of the display indicating
the receiver is ‘Armed’. Operation of any button while the receiver
is armed disarms the receiver; the ‘A’ is no longer displayed and the
1-minute time delay re-commences.

RESTRICTED
ANNEX B
ASSAULT BREACHING TRAINING

1. The use of explosives for assault breaching is described in Chapter 7.
Operational safety distances are reduced to the safest possible minimum to
permit immediate exploitation of the breach. In the open, the main risk from
small breaching charges is fragmentation or splintering, rather than blast.
2. The policy and procedures for conducting training in assault breaching

using explosives are discussed in Section 7.5. Additional information is as
follows:
a. Range Template. The range layout template at Appendix 1 is to be used

when a purpose-made assault breaching range is not available (see
Paragraph 0769).
b. Barrier Construction. Appendix 2 gives an approved design of a precast

concrete barrier (see Paragraph 0769).
Issue No : 2.0 Jan 13 RESTRICTED B-1

RESTRICTED
B-2 RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.0 Jan 13

RANGE LAYOUT FOR ASSAULT BREACHING TRAINING APPENDIX 1 TO
ANNEX B
!
! Minimum 6 m
!
TROOPS 1 m!
S
Minimum 100 m
A
! F
E
! Minimum 5 m Optional firing position
T
! Mousehole charge Y
!
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
! Minimum 25 m A
1m R
! E
T
R A
! Minimum 5 m O 6m
O
! ! P
S
! 6m 1m
TROOPS ! Minimum 15 m
!
Minimum 6 m !
! Legend:
"#$%&'
! Minimum 12.5 m Concrete barriers (see Note 3)
! Targetry (see Note 5)
Notes:
1. Distance troops to be stacked in either direction on wing walls depending on charge NEQ (see Table 7-1) (eg minimum 5 m for NEQ 125 g). If wall insufficient for safe distance, troops to be behind cover
at least 25 m from breach (NEQ up to 8 kg).
B-1-1
2. Red shaded area to be clear of all obstructions, including buildings and trees, etc to minimise fragment ricochet if troops stacked on wing walls.
3. See Appendix 2 for concrete barrier and wall design; alternatively use HESCO Mil Type 3 or double brick wall.
4. All troops not involved in firing party must be at least 100 m behind or to side of charge.
5. See Chapter 7 Paragraph 0771 for targetry construction.
RESTRICTED
B-1-2 RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.0 Jan 13

APPENDIX 2 TO
PRECAST CONCRETE BARRIER DESIGN ANNEX B
100 125
2400
2400
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
100 100
1000 1200 1200 675

1200
Height: 2.40 m Height: 2.40 m
675
Width: 1.00 m Width: 1.20 m
Nominal weight: 1150 kg Nominal weight: 1170 kg
All dimensions in mm unless otherwise stated All dimensions in mm unless otherwise stated
Type A Type B
Note:
B-2-1
Any holes in vertical sections behind which troops are protected must be sealed using a suitable filling (eg cement grout/concrete mix) or by covering with
mild steel plate (20 mm thickness) fixed across the holes.
RESTRICTED
B-2-2 RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.0 Jan 13

RESTRICTED
ANNEX C
EXAMPLES OF AF W4012 USED AS A RECONNAISSANCE REPORT
SECURITY CLASSIFICATION ( RES
STRICTED )
Army Form W 4012
Demolition Recce Proforma/Schedule (Note 1)
Formation Map Details NOTES

3 (UK) Div NAME: 1. Delete Proforma/Schedule as required. 22 JAN 13
Aldershot & Guildford l
Target Area 2. f
005 Series : M776 3. T Lt Smith
4.
Sheet : 289
5.
From : SU 0123 Edition : 17-GSGS 6. f 20 Fd Sqn RE
equipment).
To : SU 9876 : 1:50,000
Bridge Information Method of Demolition/ Labour Estimates

Explosives / Stores
Target Place/ (Note 3) Other Work Required (Note 5)
Waterway (m)
Description of Target
Work Priority
(Note 4)
Span (s) (m)
of Water (m)
Serial Grid reference/
Load Class
Max Depth
(Note 2)
Maximum
Width (m)
Length of
No. Photo No. S
SUITABLE FOR RESERVED DML Bulk H.E.
Width of
(Note 4)
Type and kg. Equipment Required
Hours
MLC
YES NO (Note 6)
T
a d e f g h j k l m n o
005/002 SU 017545 SIMPLY SUPPORTED 80 N 7.8 23 1.5 1 TABLE 10-3, SER 7
T 3 5 PE7 - 50Kg DETONATOR L1A1 X 5
ALDERSHOT STEEL BEAM DECK BOTTOM ATTACK AS E IS (Table (Table (5 OTP) DETONATOR L2A1 X 5
BRIDGE BOTTOM 25.2 G
GREATER THAN Er 9-1) 9-1) SAFETY FUZE L1A2 X 2
SUPPORT O
ONE COMPLETE CUT L4A1 DET FDDG L41A4 X 2
S 1.CUT AT MIDSPAN CORD – MATCH FUZEE X 1 TUB
BLEAK BRIDGE A 2
2.CUT FULL DEPTH OF 420m COUPLER KIT DEM x 1
SINGLE SPAN 2 WAY W
WEB & BOTH FLANGES (6 REELS) 14 GAUGE WIRE X 5KG
ROAD BRIDGE (A38) 3
3.DECK NEED NOT BE CUT TIMBER 20mx50mmx20mm
OVER THE WYE MK7 ASS BOATS x3
RIVER WITH BAILEY CHESS x 8
MASONRY CORDAGE x 200m
ABUTMENTS. SANDBAG x 100
CSPE X 2
BOLT GUN + FIXINGS
UDB x 100
2 CRATER AND NUISANCE

C 1 1.5 L25A2 MINE AT HE BLAST L9
MINE HOME ABUTMENT. RCK X 4 (BARMINE)
ADDI X 10
CRATER AND NUISANCE

C 1 3 PE7 - 90Kg MINE AT HE BLAST L9
MINE HOME ROADWAY. (Table (Table (9 OTP) (BARMINE)
9-1) 9-1) ADDI X 10

STRICTED )
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED C-1

RESTRICTED
(RESTRICTED)
ENEMY Side View NORTH Section A-A
E1 = 0.14m 25.2m E2 = 0.13m
A 7.8m
0.4m
1m 1m
1.36m
0.96m
A
LoC
1.2m
Ls1 = 1.12m Ls2 = 1.2m 8m
NTS DETAIL A
Method of Attack – Calculations e – Calculations

Cratering Charge LEGEND N EN DIR
Site Plan FP2
Table 8-3, Ser 7 – Simply Supported Steel Beam Deck Bridge, 1. Abutment Charge using Cam mouflet and Table 5-17 Buildings
Bottom Support. Length of Abutment = 10m
Bottom Attack E is Greater than Er . 1. Cut at mid-span. 2. Cut No of Charges = 3 at 3m spaccing's Tree
full depth of web and both flanges. 3. Deck need NOT be cut. 89.7Kg of PE7, 89.7/10 = 8.977 = 9 OTP PE7 (90Kg)
L=25.2 H=1.36 E 1 =0.14 E 2 =0.13 2. Roadway Charge using RCKK and Table 5-17 Blackbushe 250m
E = 0.14 + 0.13 = 0.27 Er = H/L = 1.36/25.2 = 0.054 Length of Crater line 8 x 1.41 = 11.28 Bush 5Km
From Table 8-1 Er/L = 0.006 No of RCK = 4 at 3m spacing'ss
Er = 0.006 x 25.2 = 0.152 S Stores area
E is greater than Er so Bottom attack is OK. Cratering Charges
C
M&E Explosive
EN N
I Beam – Charge Calculations – Detail A Store
280mm Rye River
FP Firing point
BLEAK – 0.2m/s
40mm Note: Due to the
BRIDGE
concrete deck the top
flange charge to be
SU 017545 M&E
880mm attached to the 7.8m
m
underside of the top
30mm S
flange.
40mm All charges fixed using
UDB and Bolt gun. ABUTMENT 10
0m x 1.2m
Using Table 5-3
350mm 3m A38
3m
Abutment 150m
= PE7 Charge Charges
placement
Rye
1. Top Flange = Ser 4, Col g-i = 3Blk 3Seg (1.8Kg)
Roadway 7Km
2. Bottom Flange = Ser 4, Col j-l = 5Blk 2Seg (2.7Kg) Charges
3. Web = Ser 2, Col p-r = 5Blk (2.5Kg)
4. I Beam Total = 3Blk 3Seg + 5Blk 2Seg + 5Blk = 14Blk
5. Cut Total = 14Blk x 6 = 84Blk FP1
6. Total PE = 84 / 20 = 4.2 = 5 OTP PE7 (50Kg)
(RESTRICTED)
C-2 RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

RESTRICTED

STRICTED )
Army Form W 4012

Target Area 2. f
005 Series : M776 3. T SGT WILLIAMS
4.
Sheet : 289
5.
equipment).
To : SU 9876 : 1:50,000

Explosives / Stores
Waterway (m)
Work Priority
(Note 4)
Span (s) (m)
of Water (m)
Load Class
Max Depth
(Note 2)
Maximum
Width (m)
Length of
No. Photo No. S
Width of
(Note 4)
Hours
MLC
YES NO (Note 6)
T
005/001 SU 015345 CONTINUOUS 40 N 6.2 37 2 1 TABLE 8-5, SER 3

T 2 4 PE7 DETONATOR L1A1 X 5
ALDERSHOT CONCRETE BEAM 14 T
TOP ATTACK (Table (Table -1760Kg DETONATOR L2A1 X 5
AND SLAB BRIDGE ONE COMPLETE CUT 9-1) 9-1) (176 OTP) SAFETY FUZE L1A2 X 1
WITH SHORT SIDE 37 2 STAGE ATTACK FDDG L41A4 X 1
SPAN. STAGE 1 – CUT INTERIOR L4A1 DET MATCH FUZEE X 1 TUB
14 SPAN SO THAT Y IS CORD - 14 GAUGE WIRE X 5KG
FOREST BRIDGE; A S GREATER THAN 1.25X 420m LWT
SINGLE LANE ROAD USING CONCRETE (6 REELS) CSPE
BRIDGE OVER THE STRIPPING CHARGES
BLACKWATER STAGE 2 – CUT L1A1 CDK -
RIVER. REINFORCED REINFORCING BARS x6
CONCRETE USING CD14.
ABUTMENTS
2 CRATER AND NUISANCE 1 2 L25A2 MINE AT HE BLAST L9

MINE HOME ABUTMENT. (Table (Table RCK X 6 (BARMINE)
CRATER AND NUISANCE 9-1) 9-1) ADDI X 20
MINE HOME ROADWAY.

STRICTED )

RESTRICTED
(RESTRICTED)
ENEMY Side View NORTH Section A-A 4.5 Boxes

PE7
E1 = 0.02m 14m 37m 14m E2 = 0.18m 6.2m
Y = 17.5m A
Charge 45 Boxes
Placement PE7
1.8m
1m
4.6m
Ls1 = 0.8m A Ls2 = 0.7m
Total Length 1m 0.8m
= 65.5m NTS
Method of attack – Calculations Cratering Charge – Calculations

C LEGEND Site Plan EN DIR
Table 8-5, Ser 3 – Continuous Concrete Beam and 1. Abutment Charge using RC CK and Table 5-17 Buildings
Slab Bridge with Short Side Span. Length of Abutment = 8m
One complete cut, Cut interior span so that Y is No of RCK = 3 at 3m spacingss
greater than 1.25X. 2. Roadway Charge using RCK K and Table 5-17 Tree N
X = 14 y = 17.5m 1 = 8.742
Length of Crater line 6.2 x 1.41 Fleet
Two stage attack using concrete stripping charges No of RCK = 3 at 3m spacin ngs
Bush 1.5Km
for first stage and CD14 to attack the RI bars.
Concrete Stripping – Charge Calculations Cratering Charges S Stores area

Using Table 5-10 EN N
1. Beam (Ser 31, Col f) M&E Explosive
Depth = 1.8m, Width = 1m Store
Charge = 400.6Kg/m Firing point FOREST
FP River
PE7 = 400.6 / 10 = 40.06 BRIDGE
= 41 OTP PE7 per Beam SU 015345
Blackwater – 0.5m/s
Total PE = 4 x 41 = 164 OTP PE7 (1640Kg) 6.2m
2. Slab (Ser 11, Col f) M&E
Depth = 0.8m, Width = 0.8m
Charge = 46.5Kg/m
Total Charge = 46.5 x 0.8 = 37.2Kg
Abutment S
PE7 = 37.2 / 10 = 3.72 A289
= 4 OTP PE7 per Slab Charges
3m 3m 200m
Total PE = 3 x 4 = 12 OTP PE7 (120Kg)
3. Total charge for concrete stripping Rye
164 + 12 = 176 OTP PE7 (1760Kg) 3Km
Roadway
Charges
Reinforcing Bars – Charge Calculations
Using CD14 = Length of Cut = 6.4 = 26.55 = 27 CD14
Length of CD14 0.241 FP
27 / 5 = 5.4 = 6 CDK
(RESTRICTED)

RESTRICTED
ADDITIONAL NOTES FOR COMPLETING DEMOLITION RECCE PROFORMA/SCHEDULE (AF W4012)

FRONT SIDE:
1. Delete either ‘Proforma’ or ‘Schedule’ in heading.
2. Formation is either Corps or Division - not your unit.
3. Target area: Given at orders.
4. Sector from ....... to ...... : Quote place, name and a 4 or 6 digit grid reference.
5. Map reference: Quote series, scale, sheet number and name.
6. Column (a): Serial number given at orders.
7. Column (b): Closest town and a 6 digit grid reference.
8. Column (c): Military categorisation plus a civilian description.
9. Column (d): If not posted, use best estimate.
10. Column (e): Measured centre to centre of piers.
11. Column (f): Include pavement if trafficable.
12. Column (g): As applicable or state ‘Nil’.
13. Column (h): As applicable or state ‘Nil’.
14. Column (j): Priority 1 is to achieve a 25 m gap (minimum).
Priority 2 is to crater and mine home abutment/roadway.
15. Column (k): State method of attack and charges for each priority of attack.
16. Column (l&m): See Pam 4, Table 9-1.
17. Column (n): Example: Ten OTP PE7, Detonating Cord 300 m.
18. Column (o): Demolition Accessories and anything not Included in the G 1098: PAUB, Bolt Gun
Accessories.
19. Ensure to fill out Date of Recce, Name of Recce Officer/NCO and Unit located in top right corner.
20. Note security classification at top and bottom.
REVERSE SIDE (RECCE PROFORMA ONLY)

1. Show side view indicating overall measurements and line of cuts.
2. Show front view if using pier footing charges or borehole charges with charge calculations and
placement.
3. Show detailed sketch of critical members to be cut eg; ‘I’ beam, also show charge calculations and
placement.
4. Show site plan indicating location, distance and description of firing points, north arrow, enemy
direction, stores area, mines and explosives area, Iocation and distance to local towns, any pertinent
information to site.
5. Show plan view of cratering charges to include calculations.
6. Show method of attack calculations and any additional charge calculations.
ENSURE THE FORM IS FILLED OUT NEATLY AND IN PENCIL.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
ANNEX D
EXAMPLE OF AF W4012 USED AS A DEMOLITION SCHEDULE
STRICTED )
Army Form W 4012

Target Area 2. f
005 Series : M776 3. T Lt Smith
4.
Sheet : 289
5.
equipment).
To : SU 9876 : 1:50,000

Explosives / Stores
Waterway (m)
Work Priority
(Note 4)
Span (s) (m)
of Water (m)
Load Class
Max Depth
(Note 2)
Maximum
Width (m)
Length of
No. Photo No. S
Width of
(Note 4)
Hours
MLC
YES NO (Note 6)
T
005/002 SU 017545 SIMPLY SUPPORTED 80 N 7.8 23 1.5 1 TABLE 10-3, SER 7
T 3 5 PE7 - 50Kg DETONATOR L1A1 X 5
ALDERSHOT STEEL BEAM DECK BOTTOM ATTACK AS E IS (Table (Table (5 OTP) DETONATOR L2A1 X 5
BRIDGE BOTTOM 25.2 G
GREATER THAN 9-1) 9-1) SAFETY FUZE L1A2 X 2
SUPPORT O
ONE COMPLETE CUT L4A1 DET FDDG L41A4 X 2
S 1.CUT AT MIDSPAN CORD – MATCH FUZEE X 1 TUB
BLEAK BRIDGE A 2
2.CUT FULL DEPTH OF 420m COUPLER KIT DEM x 1
SINGLE SPAN 2 WAY W
WEB & BOTH FLANGES (6 REELS) 14 GAUGE WIRE X 5KG
ROAD BRIDGE (A38) 3
3.DECK NEED NOT BE CUT TIMBER 20mx50mmx20mm
OVER THE WYE MK7 ASS BOATS x3
RIVER WITH BAILEY CHESS x 8
MASONRY CORDAGE x 200m
ABUTMENTS. SANDBAG x 100
CSPE X 2
BOLT GUN + FIXINGS
UDB x 100

C 1 1.5 L25A2 MINE AT HE BLAST L9
MINE HOME ABUTMENT. RCK X 4 (BARMINE)
ADDI X 10
CRATER AND NUISANCE

C 1 3 PE7 - 90Kg MINE AT HE BLAST L9
MINE HOME ROADWAY. (Table (Table (9 OTP) (BARMINE)
9-1) 9-1) ADDI X 10

STRICTED )
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED D-1

RESTRICTED
D-2 RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

RESTRICTED
SECURITY CLASSIFICATION ( REST

TRICTED )
Army Form W 4012

Target Area 2. f
005 Series : M776 3. T SGT WILLIAMS
4.
Sheet : 289
5.
equipment).
To : SU 9876 : 1:50,000

Explosives / Stores
Waterway (m)
Work Priority
(Note 4)
Span (s) (m)
of Water (m)
Load Class
Max Depth
(Note 2)
Maximum
Width (m)
Length of
No. Photo No. S
Width of
(Note 4)
Hours
MLC
YES NO (Note 6)
T
005/001 SU 015345 CONTINUOUS 40 N 6.2 37 2 1 TABLE 8-5, SER 3
T 2 4 PE7 DETONATOR L1A1 X 5
ALDERSHOT CONCRETE BEAM 14 T
TOP ATTACK (Table (Table - 1760Kg DETONATOR L2A1 X 5
AND SLAB BRIDGE O
ONE COMPLETE CUT 9-1) 9-1) (176 OTP) SAFETY FUZE L1A2 X 1
WITH SHORT SIDE 37 2 STAGE ATTACK FDDG L41A4 X 1
SPAN. S
STAGE 1 – CUT INTERIOR L4A1 DET MATCH FUZEE X 1 TUB
14 S
SPAN SO THAT Y IS CORD – 14 GAUGE WIRE X 5KG
FOREST BRIDGE; A S G
GREATER THAN 1.25X 420m LWT
SINGLE LANE ROAD U
USING CONCRETE (6 REELS) CSPE
BRIDGE OVER THE S
STRIPPING CHARGES
BLACKWATER S
STAGE 2 – CUT L1A1 CDK –
RIVER. REINFORCED R
REINFORCING BARS x6
CONCRETE U
USING CD14.
ABUTMENTS

C 1 2 L25A2 MINE AT HE BLAST L9
M
MINE HOME ABUTMENT. (Table (Table RCK X 6 (BARMINE)
C
CRATER AND NUISANCE 9-1) 9-1) ADDI X 20
M
MINE HOME ROADWAY.
SECURITY CLASSIFICATION ( REST

TRICTED )

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
ADDITIONAL NOTES FOR COMPLETING DEMOLITION RECCE PROFORMA/SCHEDULE (AF W4012)

FRONT SIDE:
1. Delete either ‘Proforma’ or ‘Schedule’ in heading.
2. Formation is either Corps or Division - not your unit.
3. Target area: Given at orders.
4. Sector from ....... to ...... : Quote place, name and a 4 or 6 digit grid reference.
5. Map reference: Quote series, scale, sheet number and name.
6. Column (a): Serial number given at orders.
7. Column (b): Closest town and a 6 digit grid reference.
8. Column (c): Military categorisation plus a civilian description.
9. Column (d): If not posted, use best estimate.
10. Column (e): Measured centre to centre of piers.
11. Column (f): Include pavement if trafficable.
12. Column (g): As applicable or state ‘Nil’.
13. Column (h): As applicable or state ‘Nil’.
14. Column (j): Priority 1 is to achieve a 25 m gap (minimum).
Priority 2 is to crater and mine home abutment/roadway.
15. Column (k): State method of attack and charges for each priority of attack.
16. Column (l&m): See Pam 4, Table 9-1.
17. Column (n): Example: Ten OTP PE7, Detonating Cord 300 m.
18. Column (o): Demolition Accessories and anything not Included in the G 1098: PAUB, Bolt Gun
Accessories.
19. Ensure to fill out Date of Recce, Name of Recce Officer/NCO and Unit located in top right corner.
20. Note security classification at top and bottom.
REVERSE SIDE (RECCE PROFORMA ONLY)

1. Show side view indicating overall measurements and line of cuts.
2. Show front view if using pier footing charges or borehole charges with charge calculations and
placement.
3. Show detailed sketch of critical members to be cut eg; ‘I’ beam, also show charge calculations and
placement.
4. Show site plan indicating location, distance and description of firing points, north arrow, enemy
direction, stores area, mines and explosives area, Iocation and distance to local towns, any pertinent
information to site.
5. Show plan view of cratering charges to include calculations.
6. Show method of attack calculations and any additional charge calculations.
ENSURE THE FORM IS FILLED OUT NEATLY AND IN PENCIL.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
ANNEX E
DEMOLITION ORDER (AF W9811)
DEMOLITION ORDER To: 1. Demolition Guard Commander NATO ..................................... AFW9811

2. Demolition Firing Party Commander (Security Classification) (STANAG 2017)
3. Retained by the Authorized Commander.
Serial No 4. Copy No 1 of 4
PART 1
From (Authorized Commander)
1. DEMOLITION TARGET DETAILS 8. CODEWORDS

a. Description Action to be taken Codeword
a. Change from Sta
ate 1 (SAFE) to State 2 (ARMED)
b. Location (grid co-ordinates) b. Change from Sta
ate 2 (ARMED) to State 1 (SAFE)
c. Fire the demolition now
c. Target nickname, number or codeword (All orders are to be prefixed by target identifying nickname, number or
codeword)) d. Para 3.b. cancelled, para 3.c. applies
d. Technical Instructions e. Para 3.c. cancelled, para 3.b. applies
f. Para 5.c. cancellled, para 5.b. applies
2. EXECUTING UNITS g. The Authorized Commander
C is changed to ............................
a. Demolition Guard h. Para 6.a. cancelled, para 6.b. applies
i. Para 6.b. cancelled, para 6.a. applies
b. Demolition Firing Party
9. AUTHORIZED COMMANDER
C
Signature Rank/Name
3. ORDERS TO THE DEMOLITION FIRING PARTY COMMANDER
The demolition target is to be prepared to State of Readiness (Strike out State of Readiness not applicable)
a. 1 (SAFE) / 2 (ARMED) by ..................................................................................................... DTG

b. All other orders will be issued to you by the Demolition Guard Commander Appointment DTG
Record their receipt in PART II Only one
box is to be
c. There is no Demolition Guard. You are to act as instructed in paras 5, 6 and 7, crossed
recording the orders received in PART II
4. ORDERS TO THE DEMOLITION GUARD COMMANDER
Your responsibilities are detailed in para iv. You are to act as instructed in paras 5, 6 and 7, PART II
recording the orders received in PART II
10. CHANGING STATE OF READINESS
5. DEMOLITION IS TO BE FIRED
a. Time estimated by Firing Party Commander to change from State of Readiness 1 (SAFE) to State of Readiness 2 (ARMED) is
a. Immediately upon being prepared ............................................... minutes
b. Upon receipt of codeword in para 8.c. by radio
b. State of DTG of
c. Upon receipt of the order from the Authorized Commander or his Liaison Officer personally Originator
Readinesss Receipt of Change
d. (Other orders) Ordered (Rank, Name)
6. EMERGENCY FIRING ORDERS Order Completed
a. You will NOT fire the demolition except as ordered in para 5 Only one
b. You WILL fire the demolition on your own initiative if the enemy is in the act of capturing box is to be
it crossed
7. ORDERS OTHER THAN FOR FIRING WILL BE GIVEN 11. HANDOVER

R AND TAKEOVER OF DEMOLITION TARGET
a. By the Authorized Commander personally
Rank, Name, Unit Signature DTG
b. By the Authorized Commander’s Liaison Officer personally
Training Command
der
c. By Radio
d. Accepting Comman nder
-1-
NATO ................................
(Security Classification)
Issue No : 2.0 Jan 13 RESTRICTED E-1
Vol 2 Pam 4 rev-12.indd Spread 9 of 12 - Pages(e-1, E-1) 21/02/2013 10:42

RESTRICTED
NATO ..................................... STANAG FORM 2017

12. RECORD OF OTHER CHANGES TO PART I (IF ANY) ORDERS FOR THE DEMOLITION
Instructions for preparing this form
i. Paragraphs 1 – 9 are to be completed, placing a cross in each box where applicable.
ii. Copy No 1 is to be issued to the Demolition Guard Commander and Copy No 2 to the Demolition Firing Party Commander.
Copy No 3 is retained by the Authorized Commander. If there is no Demolition Guard, Copy No 1 is issued to the unit
providing the firing party.
iii. If the Demolition Guard changes a new form should be issued.
Orders to the Demolition Guard Commander
13. FIRE THE DEMOLITION NOW iv. You are responsible for:
a. Command of the Demolition Guard and Demolition Firing Party.
Signature b. The security of the demolition site from enemy attack or sabotage and the control of traffic and refugees at the
Rank, Name Unit demolition site.
c. Giving the order to the Demolition Firing Party Commander in writing (para 10 of Copy No 2) to change the State of
DTG or enter DTG of receipt of codeword in para 8.c.) Readiness.
d. Giving the order to the Demolition Firing Party Commander in writing (para 13 of Copy No 2) to fire the demolition.
e. Keeping the Authorized Commander informed of the operational situation at the demolition site.
v. The Demolition Firing Party Commander is in technical control of the demolition but you must ensure that he keeps you
PART III informed of all action he takes. Your command post should be co-located with the firing point if possible.
14. DEMOLITION REPORT vi. You are to find out from the Demolition Firing Party Commander the time required to change the demolition from State of
Readiness 1 (SAFE) to State of Readiness 2 (ARMED), pass this information to the Authorized Commander and record it in
a. Bridge b. Road (Runway/Railway) para 10.a.
vii. You are to nominate a deputy forthwith and compile a seniority roster. You are to ensure that each man knows his place in
Estimated width of gap:........................................... No of craters: ...................................................... the roster, understands his duties and knows where to find this form if you become a casualty or are unavoidably absent.
The seniority roster must be made known to the Demolition Firing Party Commander.
No of spans down: ................................................. Diameter/Depth: ................................................. viii. Once State of Readiness 2 (ARMED) has been ordered either you or your deputy must always be at your command post so
that orders can be passed immediately to the Demolition Firing Party Commander.
ix. In the event of a misfire or only partially successful demolition you are to give the Demolition Firing Party protection unit
c. Other target such time as it has completed the demolition.
x. If you are ordered to hand over the demolition to another unit without the issue of a new form, para 11 is to be completed
d. Mines laid: AT mines ..................................................... AP mines ....................................................... and the form handed over to the new Demolition Guard Commander. A receipt is to be issued and retained by you. If a
new form has been issued, para 11 is to be completed on the old form which you will retain.
SKETCH xi. When the demolition has been completed you are to report its effectiveness to the Authorized Commander by the fastest
means available and return Copy No 1 to him with para 14 completed.
xii. If you receive orders to fire the demolition other than those given in para 5, you should refer to the Authorized Commander.
Orders to the Demolition Firing Party Commander
xiii. You are in technical charge of the preparation, charging and firing of the demolition.
xiv. The Demolition Guard Commander (if one is provided) is responsible for:
a. Tactical command of all troops at the demolition site; you are therefore under his command.
b. Giving you in writing (para 10) the order to change the State of Readiness.
c. Giving you in writing (para 13) the order to fire the demolition.
xv. You are to consult with the Demolition Guard Commander over the siting of your firing point, which is to be co-located with
his command post whenever practicable. It should be within the sight of the target.
xvi. You are to nominate a deputy forthwith, and compile a seniority roster. You are to ensure that each man knows his place in
the roster, understands his duties and knows where to find this form if you become a casualty or are unavoidably absent.
The seniority roster is to be made known to the Demolition Guard Commander.
xvii. You are to complete para 10.a. of the form and to report this information to the Demolition Guard Commander, if provided,
otherwise to the Authorized Commander.
xviii. Once State of Readiness 2 (ARMED) has been ordered, either you or your deputy must remain at the firing point.
xix. When there is no Demolition Guard and you receive orders to fire the demolition other than those given in para 5, you
should refer to the Authorized Commander or to your immediate superior.
xx. If you are ordered to hand over the demolition to another unit without the issue of a new form, para 11 is to be completed
Signature Rank, Name, Unit and the form handed to the new Demolition Firing Party Commander. A receipt is to be issued and retained by you. If a
new form has been issued para 11 is to be completed on the old form, which you will retain.
xxi. When the demolition has been completed you are to report its effectiveness to your Unit Commander by the fastest means
available, and return Copy No 2 to him with para 14 completed. If there is no Demolition Guard the Unit Commander must
pass the results and the completed Copy No 1 to the Authorized Commander. If mines are laid they are to be reported and
recorded on a minefield record (STANAG 2036).
-2-
NATO ................................
E-2 RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.0 Jan 13
Vol 2 Pam 4 rev-12.indd Spread 10 of 12 - Pages(E-2, E-3) 21/02/2013 10:42

RESTRICTED
ANNEX F
RESPONSIBILITIES OF RANGE SAFETY PERSONNEL

GENERAL
1. The annex details the responsibilities of each member of the range safety
organisation. More responsibilities may need to be allocated depending on
the location or activity to be conducted. All responsibilities must be detailed
in full in the Demolition Range Action and Safety Plan (DRASP), an example
of which is included in Annex G. The level of medical cover is discussed in
Appendix 1 to Annex F.
RESPONSIBILITES
1. Exercise Director. The Exercise Director is to be a minimum of a field rank

officer who has overall responsibility for the training and activities taking
place. Within a unit, this is normally the commanding officer. As with all
tasks, the Exercise Director is responsible for:
a. Ensuring those listed in the safety organisation are current and competent
to perform their duties as stipulated in the DRASP.
b. The conduct of the demolition day or explosive activity.
2. Senior Planning Officer. The Senior Planning Officer is the person

responsible for organising the training. He/she is to oversee all aspect of
the activities and give guidance and support to the safety organisation as
required. The Senior Planning Officer is to:
a. Direct the nominated Demolitions Conducting Officer (DCO) to conduct

explosive activities within the confines of his currency, competency and
qualification.
b. Provide guidance and support to the DCO to ensure the safe running of
the explosive activities.
c. Read the DRASP and approve the risk assessment and safety plan.
d. Ensure competency and currency of the safety organisation.
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED F-1

RESTRICTED
3. Demolitions Conducting Officer (DCO). The DCO is the person

responsible for the running of the range activities. He/she must be qualified
in accordance with Table 12-6. The DCO is to:
a. Ensure he/she is in date with his/her qualification, competent and in

possession of up to date local range standing orders. He/she must have
a copy of the DRASP to hand at all times.
b. Ensure the exercise is conducted in accordance with the rules and

limitations in range standing orders and this publication.
c. Physically check the explosives issued do not contain any natures not
accounted for in the AF G8227.
d. Ensure the safety organisation (Safety NCO, Explosives NCO, medical

team and sentries) discharge their duties correctly and thoroughly.
e. Deal with any misfires.
4. Safety NCO. The Safety NCO is under command of the DCO and is to carry
out the following tasks to assist the safety organisation:
a. Position the sentries and ensure they understand their duties.
b. Control the medical staff, positioning them if necessary.
c. Position the safety vehicle and ensure the medical team understands its
duties.
d. Command the radio safety net between sentries, the medical team and
himself/herself.
e. Relay information to and from the sentries and the DCO.
f. Meet and control any visitors, insuring the DCO is informed of their
arrival.
g. Inform the DCO of any range encroachments.
h. Enforce the radio frequency (RF) hazard precautions (no radios or mobile
phones within 30 m of detonators).
i. Inform the sentries of 15, 10 and 5 minute pre-firing checks.
F-2 RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

RESTRICTED
5. Explosives NCO. The Explosives NCO is responsible for the issue and
collection of all the explosives and explosive accessories. The Explosives
NCO is to:
a. Supervise the unloading of explosives and set up and maintain the

explosives store.
b. Unpack explosives as required and prepare documentation for issue.
c. Secure all explosives in the Explosives Area.
d. Ensure detonators are kept separate from all other explosives and
accessories and are only issued on the orders of the DCO. Detonators
are to remain in their service packs and stored a minimum of 1 m from
the explosives and accessories until issue.
e. Ensure safety fuze is tested at least 20 m from the Explosives Area.
f. Issue the explosives and accessories only when ordered and as directed
by the DCO, obtaining a signature for all the items issued. Detonating
cord and safety fuze are to be cut square.
g. Control the Shrike exploder or firing device and only issue it on orders
from the DCO.
h. At the end of the practice, account for all expended explosives and
accessories and reconcile issues with the stocks remaining and inform
the DCO.
i. Supervise the authorised representative in the reloading of the unused

explosive stocks.
6. Medical Team. Medical personnel are members of the safety organisation

and called forward if required. They stay outside the safety template unless
instructed by the DCO. Medical personnel are to:
a. Remain on site at all times during the range practice. Should they have
to leave the site at any time, all activities are to stop until full medical
cover is restored.
b. Stay clear of all activities involving explosives, explosive accessories or

ammunition. Remain located in an area that is in no danger from the
activities taking place but from where they can be called forward to deal
with casualties.
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED F-3

RESTRICTED
c. Follow all instructions, as directed by the DCO.
d. Provide first aid as appropriate to any casualties.
e. Give medical advice on appropriate follow-up action should an incident

occur.
A guide to the assessment of the level of medical cover is at Appendix 1
7. Sentries. The duties of a sentry are crucial to the successful and safe
management of the range. Sentries are to:
a. Remain located at the sentry points as posted at all times unless relieved
by the DCO.
b. Stay alert and continuously watch their area of responsibility.
c. Maintain the radio link with the DCO.
d. Inform the DCO immediately of any occurrences or incidents; or

personnel, vehicles or wild life entering the danger area.
e. Report whether the area is clear when requested by the DCO or Safety
NCO.
f. In the event of any visitors, hold them at their location and inform the
DCO or Safety NCO.
F-4 RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

RESTRICTED
APPENDIX 1 TO ANNEX F
RANGE MEDICAL COVER

GENERAL
1. The level of medical cover is to be determined following a medical risk

assessment. Advice should be sought from the medical officer. The
requirement for each of the following is to be assessed:
a. Need for medical personnel (eg would a MATT 3 Level 1 trained soldier
suffice?).
b. Number of medical personnel required.
c. Level of medical qualification (CMT 1, MO, etc).
d. Equipment available to medical personnel.
e. Vehicles to be made available or required to be tasked for casualty

transfer; eg land rover, military ambulance, civilian ambulance or
helicopter.
f. Communications to emergency services, eg locations of landline

telephones, use of radios, mobile phones, etc.
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL PERSONNEL
2. Medical personnel or nominated first aiders for a training activity are not to
be employed in any other role that might result in them becoming a casualty
or prevent them from discharging their duties in the event of an accident.
SAFETY VEHICLE
3. A safety vehicle must be present during any form of activity involving live
explosives. The vehicle must be capable of transporting casualties to the
nearest medical facilities. Should the vehicle have to leave the range at
any time, training must stop until it has returned or an alternative provided.
Route cards to the nearest medical facilities must be provided and held
in the vehicle. Drivers must be briefed prior to the start of training on the
routes and action to be taken in the event of an accident.
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED F-1-1

RESTRICTED
F-1-2 RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

RESTRICTED
ANNEX G
DEMOLITION RANGE ACTION AND SAFETY PLAN

(DRASP)
GENERAL
1. The DRASP is an essential document produced prior to any activity involving

the use of live explosives or explosive accessories. It should reflect the ‘Safe
System of Training (SST)’ described in Joint Service Publication (JSP) 375,
Volume 2, Leaflet 11, Annex A, and the four SST elements: ‘safe persons’,
‘safe equipment’, ‘safe practice’ and ‘safe place’. It should consist of a main
instruction and sufficient annexes to enable a third party to understand how
the training is to be undertaken and, if necessary, to conduct the training.
MAIN INSTRUCTION
2. References. Documents referred to in the DRASP in the order they appear.

Likely references include:
a. Military Engineering Volume II Pamphlet 4 Demolitions.
b. Local range or training area standing orders.
c. Relevant maps.
3. Introduction. An overview of the training taking place and the part the
demolition practice and battle noise simulations take in it.
4. Aim. The aim of the training.
5. Safe Persons. The nomination of personnel for specific tasks, together

with their duties and responsibilities (see Annex F). Each person should
have a copy of the DRASP prior to the training. The Safety Organisation
should include:
a. Exercise Director.
b. Senior Planning Officer.
c. Demolitions Conducting Officer (DCO).
d. Safety NCO.
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED G-1

RESTRICTED
e. Explosives NCO.
f. Medical cover.
g. Sentries.
6. Safe Place.
a. Designated Demolitions Ranges. The MOD Form 905 Land Range Safety
Certificate for the range must be checked by the DCO and all relevant
information detailed in the DRASP. If a training area not covered by a
MOD Form 905 is being used, this should be stated.
b. Training Areas Allowing Use of Explosives. The DRASP should state the
use of live explosives has been granted by the Training Area Administering
Unit in accordance with the Training Area Standing Orders. Any weapons
or equipment not in accordance with the Training Area Orders but
cleared for use by the Range Administering Unit (RAU) should be listed;
documentary evidence is required showing the name and appointment
of the person granting this authority.
c. Medical Risk Assessments. A risk assessment should be conducted and

included as an annex. As a result of the risk assessment, the medical
plan should be detailed in the DRASP and include as a minimum:
(1) Immediate Action (IA). Immediate action to take in the event of any
incident.
(2) Minor Casualty. Action to take should there be a minor casualty.
(3) Major Casualty (Non Life Threatening). Action to take should there
be a major casualty that is non-life threatening
(4) Major Casualty (Life Threatening). Action to take should there be a

major casualty that is life threatening.
(5) Safety Vehicle. Details for the safety vehicle.
(6) Follow-up Action. Action to be taken after the casualty or casualties

have received treatment or been moved to medical facilities.
(7) Reporting of Training Incident.
(8) Changes or Amendments to Range Plans. Action if the format of

the activity needs to be altered.
G-2 RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

RESTRICTED
7. Safe Weapons and Equipment. Control of the munitions and explosives

to be fired should be in accordance with MOD Form 904 Land Authorisation
Certificate or appropriate Training Area Standing Orders.
8. Safe Practice.
a. Risk Assessments. A risk assessment is to be conducted and included

as an annex. Details of other risk assessments and safe system of
training are to be articulated.
b. Action on Arrival. Action on arrival.
c. Training Objectives. A brief description of the training objectives should

be stated.
d. Range Layout. A description of the range should include, as a minimum,

the locations of and information on:
(1) Battle noise simulation (BATSIM), demolitions and explosives

areas:
(2) Firing points.
(3) Explosives stores area.
(4) Place of safety.
(5) Smoking area.
(6) Sentry positions.
(7) First aid locations.
e. Safety Brief. A detailed safety brief should be scripted as it will be briefed

to the exercising troops. It must include information on:
(1) Control of explosives.
(2) Range limitations.
(3) Preparation of charges.
(4) General safety points.
(5) Action on misfires.

RESTRICTED
(6) Demolition targets.
(7) Connecting detonators.
(8) Pre firing the demolition.
(9) Post firing.
(10) Medical.
f. Action on End of Practice. Action after the activity has concluded.
g. Declaration. State the declarations all participating troops must make

prior to leaving the range or training area.
h. Action on Return to Barracks. Action on return to camp.
i. Signature Block. The DRASP should be signed by the DCO and counter
signed by the Senior Planning Officer.
ESSENTIAL ANNEXES
9. As a minimum, the following annexes, listed in the order in which they are
referred to in the main instruction, must be produced:
a. AF G8227. The AF G8227 is the standard form for ordering explosives

or ammunition. A copy of the explosives and ammunition ordered for the
range day must be included.
b. Risk Assessment. A risk assessment forms the basis of the level of

medical cover and control measures to be put in place.
c. Range Layout. A picture showing the overall layout of the explosives and
demolition charges should include key information such as the location
of sentries, explosive stores area, etc.
d. Charge Layout. Diagrams showing the construction of each charge or

ring main.
e. Task Plans. A task plan summarises the explosives required for each task
or ring main. A copy of the task plan must be given to the Explosives
NCO so he/she can distribute the explosives as planned.

RESTRICTED
ADDITIONAL ANNEXES
10. Other annexes may be required to cover additional aspects for the running
and conduct of the activities planned. These may include:
a. Administration.
b. Transport requirements.
c. Manpower requirements, including hazardous material (HAZMAT) and

authorised representatives.
d. G1098 stores or other equipment.
e. Messing and accommodation arrangements.
EXAMPLE
11. An example of a DRASP is at Appendix 1.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
APPENDIX 1 TO ANNEX G
RESTRICTED
1 Troop, 20 Field Squadron, 46 Engineer Regiment

Gibraltar Barracks, Blackwater, Camberley,
Surrey, GU17 9LP
Telephone: 01252 865678 Military Network 91234 5678

Fax (Civ): 01252 866789 Fax (Mil): 91234 6789
Our Reference: 0123456-789

See Distribution
Date: 01 Apr 13
DEMOLITION RANGE ACTION AND SAFETY PLAN (DRASP) – 20 FD SQN RE DEMOLITION

TRAINING DAY – 10 APR 13
References:
A. Map, Sheet, Salisbury Plain, Series GSGS 5295, Edition 7-GSGS, 1:50,000.
B. Army Training Estate Salisbury Plain, Standing Orders for Training, Part 1 General and Dry
Training, dated Apr 12.
C. Army Training Estate Salisbury Plain, Standing Orders for Training, Part 2 Live Firing, Apr 12
D. Military Engineering Volume II, Field Engineering Pamphlet No4, Demolitions 2013.
Outline
1. 20 Fd Sqn RE will be conducting a Demolition Range Day at Casterley Range, SPTA on 10

Apr 13.
Aim
2. The aim of the DRASP is as follows:
a. Safe Persons. Detail the duties and responsibilities of the safety organisation.
b. Safe Place. Detail the area to be used and the medical plan that will be in place.
c. Safe Munitions and Equipment. Detail the munitions and explosives that will be used
during the exercise.
d. Safe Practice. Detail the actions that are to take place and the points/subjects that are
to be covered in the safety brief.
3. The aim of the day is for 20 Fd Sqn RE to practice the set up of live explosives against a
variety of targets.
Safe Persons
4. The following personnel are nominated to fill the appointments listed:
Ser Appointment Rank Name Quals Held Remarks

1 Exercise Director Lt Col Red - CO 46 Engr Regt
2 Senior Planning Officer Maj White - OC 20 Fd Sqn RE
3 DCO Capt Blue DSO 1 Tp Comd
4 Safety Officer SSgt Vigilant DSO 1 Tp SSgt
5 Explosives NCO Cpl Blast ME (Cbt) 1
6 Medical Sgt Healer CMT 1
1
RESTRICTED
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED G-1-1

RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
7 Sentry Spr Loner -
Note: DCO – Demolitions Conducting Officer
DSO – Demolitions Safety Officer.
Staff Duties
5. Exercise Director. The Exercise Director is responsible for:
a. Ensuring those listed in the safety organisation are current and competent to perform
their duties as stipulated in the DRASP.
b. The conduct of the demolition day or explosive activity.
6. Senior Planning Officer. The Senior Planning Officer is responsible for:
a. Directing the nominated Demolitions Conducting Officer (DCO) to conduct explosive

activities within the confines of his currency, competency and qualification.
b. Providing guidance and support to the DCO to ensure the safe running of the explosive
activities.
c. Reading the DRASP and approving the risk assessment and safety plan.
d. Ensuring the competency and currency of the safety organisation.
7. Demolitions Conducting Officer (DCO). The DCO is to:
a. Ensure he is in date with his DSO qualification, competent and in possession of up to

date local Range Standing Orders. He must have a copy of the DRASP to hand at all times.
b. Ensure the exercise is set up and conducted in accordance with the rules and
limitations in Range Standing Orders and Ref C and comply with direction given by the
Exercise Director and Senior Planning Officer.
c. Physically check the explosives issued do not contain any natures not accounted for in
the AF G8227.
d. Deal with any misfires.
8. Staff Duties and Safety Briefs. The following briefs will be issued to the range staff prior to
the practice beginning.
a. Safety Officer. The Safety Officer is to:
(1) Position the sentries and ensure they understand their duties.
(2) Control the medical staff, positioning them if necessary.
(3) Position the safety vehicle and ensure the medic understands his/her duties.
(4) Command the radio safety net between sentries, the medical team and
himself/herself.
(5) Relay information to and from the sentries and the DCO.
(6) Meet and control any visitors, insuring the DCO is informed of their arrival.
(7) Inform the DCO of any range encroachments.

2
RESTRICTED
G-1-2 RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
(8) Enforce the radio frequency (RF) hazard precautions (no radios or mobile phones
within 30 m of detonators).
(9) Inform the sentries of 15, 10 and 5 minute pre-firing checks.
b. Explosives NCO. The Explosives NCO is to:
(1) Supervise the unloading of explosives and set up and maintain the explosives
store.
(2) Unpack explosives as required and prepare documentation for issue.
(3) Secure all explosives in the explosives area.
(4) Ensure detonators are kept separate from all other explosives and accessories
and are only issued on the orders of the DCO. Detonators are to remain in their
service packs and stored a minimum of 1 m from the explosives and accessories until
issue.
(5) Ensure all safety fuze is tested a minimum distance of 20 m from the explosives
area.
(6) Issue the explosives and accessories only when ordered and as directed by the
the DCO, obtaining a signature for all the items issued. Detonating cord and safety
fuze is to be issued cut square.
(7) Control the Shrike exploder or firing device and only issue it on orders from the
DCO.
(8) At the end of the practice, account for all expended explosives and accessories
and reconcile issues with the stocks remaining and inform the DCO.
(9) Supervise the authorised representative in the reloading of the unused explosive
stocks.
c. Medical Cover. The Medical Team is to:
(1) Remain on site at all times during the range practice. Should it have to leave the
site at any time, all activities are to stop until full medical cover is restored.
(2) Stay clear of all activities involving explosives, explosive accessories or

ammunition. The team should be located in an area that is in no danger from the
activities taking place but from where it can be called forward to deal with casualties.
(3) Follow all instructions, as directed by the DCO.
(4) Provide first aid as appropriate to any casualties.
(5) Give medical advice of appropriate follow-up action should an incident occur.
d. Sentries. The sentries are to:
(1) Remain located at the sentry points at all times until relieved by the DCO.
(2) Stay alert and continuously watch their area of responsibility.
3
RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
(3) Maintain the radio link with the DCO.
(4) Inform the DCO immediately of any occurrences or incidents, or personnel,

vehicles or wild life entering the danger area.
(5) Report whether the area is clear when requested by the DCO or Safety NCO.
(6) In the event of any visitors, hold them at their location and inform the DCO or
Safety NCO.
Safe Place
9. MOD Form 905 – Land Range Safety Certificate. The MOD Form 905 for this range has
been checked by the DCO. This certifies that the range is safe and suitable for use with
equipment, munitions and explosive stores as prescribed within the MOD Form 904. To ensure
this is complete, the following details are to be recorded:
a. Name of the range: Casterley Range, SPTA.
b. I read the range orders on (date): 01 Mar 13.
c. Date of the range recce: 01 Mar 13.
d. Name of the person conducting the range recce: Capt M B Blue.
Risk Assessments
10. Medical Risk Assessments. The medical plan
a. Immediate Action (IA):
(1) Halt the practice and the DCO is to make safe to ensure there is no further
danger to personnel.
(2) The Safety Officer and medical team will move to the scene with the medical
pack.
(3) Immediate first aid will be administered if required.
(4) Inform Range Control (94325 4951, 01980674951)
b. Minor Casualty. After the IA, the following plan will be carried out:
(1) The safety vehicle will move from the admin area to the scene.
(2) The casualty will then be moved by stretcher or on foot to the vehicle.
(3) The medic will carry out an assessment and treat if necessary.
(4) If the casualty cannot be treated they will be taken to Larkhill MRS – Grid: SU125
442 (map in the vehicle).
c. Major Casualty (non-life threatening). Injured parties should be taken to following

facilities, as directed by the DCO:
(1) Salisbury District Hospital, Odstock Road, Salisbury, Wiltshire, SP2 8BJ -
(01722 336262).
4
RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
(2) Larkhill MRS – Grid SU 125442 (Mil: 94322 5266).
d. Major Casualty (life threatening). Follow COA 1; if this is too slow, follow COA 2:
(1) COA 1. Call 999 immediately, stating:
(a) Location (GRID).

(b) Incident.
(c) Other services (air ambulance?).
(d) Number of casualties.
(e) Extent of injuries.
(f) Repeat Location (GRID).
(2) COA 2. Take casualty to Salisbury District Hospital (address listed above) in
safety vehicle.
e. Safety Vehicle. If the safety vehicle is required to leave the range at any time, all
training must cease until it has returned, or an alternative is sourced. N.B. Directions from
Casterley Range to both locations are to be held in the safety vehicle.
f. Follow-up Action:
(1) Establish the exact cause and nature of the incident if possible.
(2) Follow up procedure must be carried out in accordance with the ATE SP
Emergency Services Flow Diagram contained within SPTA Standing Orders.
11. Reporting of a Training Incident. Should an incident occur during training, the details in
Para 1245 of Ref C should be followed. It is the responsibility of the DCO to ensure that all
members of the safety team and exercising troops understand the procedures; the most pertinent
points are:
a. Give first aid to the injured and call for medical assistance in accordance with Annex B
of Section 3 of Ref B.
b. Inform Range Control and follow the guidelines set out in Para 1.3025 of Section 3 of
Ref B.
c. Contact the Joint Service EOD Operations Centre (JSEODOC) via the Ammunition
Incidents Hotline DFTS 94234 x 3360/3361/3362; Civilian 01235 52 + Ext. They will advise
on what further action to take.
12. Changes/Amendments to Range Plans. In the event that the format of the activity needs
to be altered, the DCO is authorised to amend the plan. The changes, together with the reasons
will be recorded in this DRASP and Range Control informed.
Safe Munitions and Equipment
13. Safe Munitions and Explosive Stores. All munitions and explosives that are to be fired are
in accordance with MOD Form 904 – Land Authorisation Certificate; this lists all munitions and
explosive stores that are authorised for use on this range. All explosives and accessories for this
range can be found on the AF G8227 at Annex A.
Safe Practice
5
RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
14. Risk Assessments. A safe system of training is in place in accordance with Ref D. The
DCO will control all aspects of the range supported by his nominated safety staff. All other risk
assessments can be found at Annex C.
15. Action on Arrival. On arrival the DCO is to:
a. Ensure all members of the safety team and participating troops have issued and
serviceable combat helmet, ECBA, hearing and eye protection.
b. Brief safety personnel on their responsibilities as at Para 8 and issue them with copies
of their particular brief and the general safety brief as at Para 20, and deploy the safety
organisation.
c. Inform the exercising troops of the training objectives as at Para 16.
d. Give the exercising troops a description of the range as at Para 19 and the sequence
of events for the day.
16. Training Objectives. The following training objectives will be achieved whilst on this range:
a. Use of in service explosives.
b. The construction of improvised explosive charges.
17. Setting-up. The setting up of the firing point, targets, ring mains, medical point, explosives
area and stores areas will be coordinated by the DCO in accordance with Ref D and Annexes C, D
and E of this document.
18. Range Control. The DCO is to ensure he has printed off the Training Standard Authority
(TSA) for the training day from the SPTA website and holds a copy of Refs B and C.
a. On arrival at the range the DCO will carry out the following:
(1) Sign the MOD 906A and collect 2 x field phones.
(2) Inspect the firing bunker, connect and test comms.
(3) Verbally book onto the range and confirm range limitations
(4) Gain clearance prior to firing from Range Control.
LESSON PLAN (EXERCISE TROOPS)
19. Range Layout. The exercising troops are to be briefed on the following:
a. Layout of Range. The range is laid out in the following manner:
(1) Demolition Areas:
(a) Steel (4 x red concrete pillars).
(b) Concrete and timber.
(c) Explosive digging.
(d) White phosphorous (circle of white posts).
6
RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
(2) Firing Points: Bunker only (500 m).
(3) Explosives Area. The explosives area is in the dead ground between the
demolition area and the tap in point.
(4) Stores Area. The stores area is situated next to the explosives area in the dead
ground between the demolition area and the tap in point.
(5) Place of Safety. The bunker at the 500 m firing point; this is hardened and safe
for all permitted charges.
(6) Smoking Area. The smoking area is located to the rear of the bunker. Before
smoking, check there are no explosives in transit within 20 m.
(7) Sentries:
(a) Vadette (Telephone/radio). This is manned by SPTA/Landmarc Staff.
(b) Bunker (Telephone/radio). This is manned by our 1 x sentry.
(8) First Aid Locations. Location of:
(a) Safety vehicle and personnel – bunker.
(b) First aid kit and stretcher – during preparation, this will be at the stores
area. During firing, this will be at the bunker.
(c) Nearest hospital – Salisbury.
(d) Nearest medical centre – Larkhill.
(ROUTE CARDS ARE IN THE SAFETY VEHICLE)
(e) The nominated first aider is: Sgt Healer. During preparation, he will be at
the store.
20. Safety Brief. The safety brief to all personnel will be as follows:
a. Control of Explosives. The following points will be adhered to with regard to

explosives:
(1) Only the Explosives NCO is to issue explosives.
(2) Personnel are to keep away from the explosives area unless drawing explosives.
(3) All explosives are to be checked when issued and signed for as per the task plan
at Annex F.
(4) Ensure when collecting your safety fuze it is sleeved or taped at both ends to
prevent moisture affecting it. Return all unused explosives and accessories to the
Explosives NCO.
b. Range Limitations. The range has several limitations; these are:
(1) Maximum charge weight is:
(a) 10 kg for surface charge.
7
RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
(b) 30 kg for sub-surface charge.
(2) Charges must be initiated electronically when specified.
(3) Two means of communication before firing can commence. This will be achieved
by the Bunker phone and TP 4225. Radio link between the Bunker and Vadette 13
may be used instead of TP 4225 if there are no RF hazards.
c. Preparation of Charges. Charges are to be prepared with the following safety points
adhered to:
(1) Minimum number of persons on each task at any time.
(2) All safety fuze will be tested a minimum of 20 m from the explosives and
accessories.
(3) PE should only be handled with gloves (latex) due to the toxic nature of the
taggant in the explosive.
(4) Charges are not to be unwrapped or opened until required.
(5) All charges are to be attached securely and correctly to ensure the desired effect
is obtained.
(6) All charges are to be calculated and a brief on the charge, its effect and the
calculations involved is to be given during the show and tell.
(7) No tamping with metal.
(8) Ensure ISFEs are inserted into the ring main cable on alternative strands.
(9) DRFDs are to be tested with ISFEs from the 500 m firing point.
(10) Ensure safe handling of both electric and non-electric detonators.
d. General Safety Points. The following general safety points will be taken into account
when on the range:
(1) Radios are not to be used within 30 m of firing circuits.
(2) Mobile phones and pagers are to be turned off during range practice and their
batteries removed.
(3) When personnel are not working, they must move to the waiting area.
(4) No smoking except in the designated smoking area.
(5) Use sandbags to test continuity of electric detonators and ensure they remain
under the sandbag until connected to the ring main.
(6) Shrikes and code plugs are not to be removed from the stores area without
permission of the DCO and are to be returned immediately after use.
(7) Look up when firing and count the charges.
8
RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
e. Action on Misfires. The DCO is the only person to deal with any misfires. He will wait
the following period of time before inspecting the reason for the misfire and deal with it as per
Ref D:
(1) 10 mins if electrically initiated.
(2) 30 mins if non-electrically initiated.
f. Demolition Targets. All targets will be located as per the task plan and will be
secured in place; no target is to be moved unless cleared by the DCO.
g. Show and Tell. The show and tell completes 2 roles. These are:
(1) A chance for students to explain their task and pass on relevant information in
constructing the charge to the other students, which in turn clarifies the students’
understanding.
(2) It gives the DCO time to ensure all charges have been constructed correctly and
all safety procedures have been followed before the introduction of detonators.
h. Connecting Detonators. The following points must be adhered to when connecting

detonators to a ring main:
(1) Control of detonators by DCO and Explosives NCO.
(2) Control of Shrikes and DRFD – by DCO only.
(3) Minimum persons on each task.
i. Pre Firing the Demolition. Pre-fire checks need to be carried out. All personnel
are to be aware of the following points:
(1) A headcount of all personnel needs to be completed prior to any firing.
(2) A minimum of 2 counters will be appointed; this will ensure that if there are any
misfires, the actions laid down in Para 20e can be completed.
(3) All personnel will be told to look up and complete a visual check of the firing area
(livestock).
(4) A final continuity check will be completed and the demolition fired with the
announcement: “FIRING NOW”.
j. Post Firing. No one is to move from the safety area until the DCO has completed a
check of the range and confirmed that it is clear.
(1) The handling of all damaged targets should be done with working gloves.
ANY QUESTIONS ON THE SAFETY BRIEF?
k. Medical. The medical plan is to be briefed as laid out in Para 10 for both major and
minor causalities.
21. Action at End of Practice. Once the demolition has been fired, the following action will
commence:
a. If there is a misfire, refer to range standing orders.
9
RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
b. After all misfires have been dealt with; all personnel are to remain in the safe area until
the DCO has cleared the range.
c. All personnel are to move to the demolitions area for a back brief by the DCO on the
effects achieved from the exercise.
d. On completion the DCO must:
(1) Ensure the range is cleaned and inspected by a member of Range Control.
(2) Check any remaining explosives are accounted for and expended
explosives are written on the issued AF G8227.
(3) The remaining explosives will be loaded onto the explosives vehicle, supervised
by the Explosives NCO. The vehicle must be correctly marked if required and all the
paperwork should be amended to reflect the remaining quantities.
(4) Load and complete a stores check.
(5) Larkhill requires an end of activity report.
(6) Declaration and Free from Explosives (FFE) and sign Range Log.
21. Declaration. All members of the exercise staff and students are to give a declaration and
the DCO is to sign an AF B159A. This is to be explained as follows:
a. “In accordance with Queen’s Regulations, firers and members of the range staff are
reminded that it is an offence to leave this range (or exercise area) with live explosives,
explosive accessories or parts of explosive accessories in their possession. Furthermore,
students and members of the range staff are reminded that it is incumbent upon them to
ensure that other participants are also conforming to this declaration and breaches are to be
reported directly. A declaration to that effect is to be given to the DCO by all participants and
range staff.”
22. Action on Return to Barracks. On arrival at barracks, the following is to be carried out:
a. Return explosives and detonators to the Ammunition Compound.
b. Conduct a thorough check of vehicles and containers used to transport the explosives.
c. Sign and return the AF G8227 and hand in with the AF B159As.
(Original Signed) (Original Counter Signed)
M B Blue J White
Capt Maj
DCO Senior Planning Officer
Annexes:
A. AF G8227.
B. Risk Assessments.
C. Range Layout.
D Charge Layout.
E. Task Plans.
10
RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
Distribution:
CO 46 Engr Regt
Copy to:
SPTA Range Control
11
RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
Annex A to
0123456-789
Dated 01 Apr 13
AF G8227
Internal Unit Ammunition Demand/ Issue/ Reciept Voucher AFG 8227

(Revised 6/91)
DATE AMD TIME OF

SUB-‐UNIT SUB-‐UNIT REFERENCE QMs VOUCHER No.
PROPOSED C OLLECTION
VERSION: 20 Feb 13 Cse Code: DR 6 7 DMD

Unit: REWW COURSE RETCC IV
Sub-‐Unit: Mil Eng O ps ACTIVITY RETCC -‐ Larkhill 1
Dept: Explosives Cse No. TCC 1 65 2 3 4
Person allowed to draw the ammunition:
Phone: Ext____________ No. Name
1 Rank 5
Issued Issued Returned
ITEM Required Expended Brass/Salvage
Units Batch No. Units Batch No.
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h)
50404-02 FUZE SAFETY L1A3 METRIC 16
50603-05 CORD DETONATING L5A1 210

R E Q U I R E M E N T
51002-11 DETONATOR DEMOLITION ELECTRIC L2A2 8
51004-01 CORD DETONATING BOOSTER L10A1 5
51010-11 DETONATOR DEMOLITION L1A2 15
51204-01 IGNITER SAFETY FUZE ELECTRIC 15
51402-02 MATCH FUZEE L1A1 1
52415-01 CHARGE DEMOLITION 0.5 KG BLOCK PE7 L20A1 50
54236-01 MINE ANTI-TANK HE BLAST L18A1 WITHOUT FUZE 1
53505-01 Charge Demolition Bangalore Torpedo Live L26A1 1
52000-01 Charges, Shaped, Flexible Linear, SABREX, L1A1, 1m, 40g/m 1
52803-01 Charge Demolition Sheet No 4 Tagged 1
52416-01 Charge Demolition Slab PE7 L21A1 - 2 Kg Inner Tatical Packaging 1

ISSUED
AUTHORITY
Date Signature 8
EXPENDED
9
REMARKS
RETURNED
10 11
12
RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
Annex B to
0123456-789
Dated 01 Apr 13
Risk Assessments
Project / Task: Location: Assessor: Date:

Demolitions Casterley Demolitions Pit Capt M B Blue 01 Apr 13
Revised Risk
Activity/ Potential Population Risk Rating Control
Ser Rating
Element Hazards at Risk Measures Specified
L S R L S R
1 Demolition Accidental Student / 1 5 5 • Detonators under the strict control of the DSO/Explosives NCO. 1 2 2
Day Detonation User / • Exploders under the strict control of the DSO/Explosives NCO.
Bystander • Explosives only issued on orders of the DCO.
• DRILLS TO BE INSTRUCTED AND SUPERVISED BY A DSO.
• CHARGES INITIATED ONLY ON THE COMMAND OF THE
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
DCO.
• Prior ‘dry’ training carried out.
• Safety brief.
• RF safety hazard rigorously enforced.
• Safety fuse tested – use correct minimum lengths.
• Misfires dealt with by DCO.
• No tamping with metal.
• Other safety measures put in force as recommended in Ref D.
2 Injury on Injury from Students 2 2 4 • Students to be briefed about setting up targets safely in during 1 2 2
Range tools and the safety brief.
large • Students to be briefed about the correct use.
targets
LIKELIHOOD SEVERITY OF INJURY RATING BANDS AND ACTION REQUIRED

1. Most unlikely 1. Trivial injuries 1–3 Minimal Risk Maintain control measures
2. Unlikely 2. Minor injuries 4–6 Low Risk Fine tune control measures
3. Possible 3. Major injuries to the person 8 – 10 Medium Risk Improve control measures
4. Likely 4. Major injuries to several people 12 – 36 High Risk Improve controls immediately
5. Very Likely 5. Death to one person
6. Certain 6. Multiple deaths
G-1-13
13
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
Annex C to
0123456-789
Dated 01 Apr 13
Range Layout
14
RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
Annex D to
0123456-789
Dated 01 Apr 13
Charge Layout
Ringmain 1 – Cratering
15
RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
Ringmain 2 – Timber & Concrete
16
RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
Ringmain 3 – Steel
17
RESTRICTED

G-1-18 RESTRICTED
Annex E to
0123456-789
Dated 01 APR 13
Task Plans
TASK PLAN: RINGMAIN 1 – Cratering

COURSE/ Ex: 20 Fd Sqn RE Demolitions Day DATE: 01 Apr 13 IC: Capt M B Blue
Safety Safety
Ser Student Task Explosive ISFE Signature Det Type Target Remarks
Fuze Dist
Shaped Fired first.
1 Cpl Aplha RCK Pilot Hole Charge Nil Nil L2A2 Ground 1000m Charge on
(8.5kg) stand off
Granular
RCK Main
2 Cpl Aplha Explosive Nil Nil L2A2 Ground 300m
Charge
(19.6kg)
1 Segment of Camouflet
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
Camouflet Pilot
3 Cpl Aplha PE7 (0.1kg) 1 75mm L1A2 Ground 25m chamber
Hole
5m Det Cord charge
Reduced 20 Blocks PE7
Cpl Aplha Camouflet Main (10kg) 1 75mm L1A2 Ground 300m
4
Charge 10m Det Cord
Granular
Hole pre dug
explosive
using earth
25kg PAN
5 Cpl Aplha ANFO 1 150mm L1A2 Ground 300m auger. ANFO
1x Block PE7
mixed in
(0.5kg)
dustbin
10m Det cord
RANK………… NAME……………………………………….. SIGNATURE…………………………… (EXPLOSIVE NCO)

18
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
TASK PLAN: RINGMAIN 2 – Timber & Concrete
Safety Safety
Fuze Dist
1000m Cruciform
Breaching 12 Blocks PE7 Concrete Pad due to Charge
1 Cpl Bravo Charge (6kg) Nil Nil L2A2 x 1 (not metal Target
Cruciform 10m Det Cord reinforced) pickets(50 propped by
0m) pickets
1/2 Barmine 1000m Target
4.2kg) Concrete Pad due to propped by
Breaching
2 Cpl Bravo 1x Block PE7 1 75mm L1A2 x 1 (not metal pickets
Charge Barmine
(0.5kg) reinforced) pickets(50 Use UDB if
10m Det Cord 0m) available
Concrete 2x Block PE7 Concrete 1000m
Target on
3 Cpl Bravo Stripping (1kg) 1 150mm L1A2 x 1 Sleeper due to
Sandbags
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
Untamped 10m Det Cord (reinforced) reinforcing
Target on
2x Block PE7 Concrete 1000m
Concrete Sandbags
Cpl Bravo (1kg) 1 225mm L1A2 x 1 Sleeper due to
4 Stripping Tamped Sandbag
10m Det Cord (reinforced) reinforcing
tamping
Timber Cutting 1x Block PE7 Tree Trunk
Target dug in
5 Cpl Bravo 1 x Borehole (0.5kg) 1 300mm L1A2 x 1 less than 300m
and stood up
Charge 10m Det Cord 500mm dia
Timber Cutting 2x Block PE7 Tree Trunk
Target dug in
Cpl Bravo 2 x Borehole (1kg) 1 375mm L1A2 x 1 more than 300m
6 and stood up
Charge 10m Det Cord 500mm dia
Timber Cutting 3x Block PE7
Target dug in
7 Cpl Bravo charge with (1.5kg) 1 450mm L1A2 x 1 Tree Trunk 300m
and stood up
kicking charge 10m Det Cord
Target dug
Timber Cutting 20m+10m =
in and stood
8 Cpl Bravo charge using Det 30m Det Cord 1 525mm L1A1 x 1 Tree Trunk 300m
up
Cord (300g)

G-1-19
19
RESTRICTED
G-1-20 RESTRICTED
TASK PLAN: RINGMAIN 3 – Steel
Safety Safety
Fuze Dist
Improvised Bee Use suitable
2x Blocks PE7
Hives wine bottle/ 6”
1 Cpl Charlie (1kg) Nil Nil 1 x L2A2 AFV Track 1000m
Steel Plate nails reqd for
10m Det Cord
cutting stand off
Nuts/Bolts &
nails reqd.
2x Blocks PE7 Fig 11 Cardboard or
Improvised
2 Cpl Charlie (1kg) 1 75mm 1 x L1A2 Targets/Witnes 1000m foam packing
Claymore
10m Det Cord s Screens reqd between
explosives and
frag
CD14
Steel Cutting
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
3 Cpl Charlie 5.3kg 1 150mm 1 x L1A2 Steel I Beam 1000m
I Beam
10m Det Cord
4x PE7 Blocks Sticks and
Cpl Charlie Bridge Panel (2.0kg) 1 225mm 1 x L1A2 Bridge Panel 1000m strings, Mine
4
20m Det Cord tape
2m Blade 1 x L1A2
Assault
5 Cpl Charlie 1150g/m 1 300mm 4 x Det cord Door 1000m Door stood up
Breaching
10m Det Cord boosters

20
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
ANNEX H
CONDUCT OF CONFIDENCE CHARGE TRAINING

INTRODUCTION
1. Confidence charge training is a vital element of preparing personnel for the

use of demolition charges, representing the progression from training with
inert explosives and accessories to the use of live in-service explosives and
accessories. Confidence charges install the self belief required in students
to handle live explosives, either as a first-time user or by way of revision.
Once confidence charge training has taken place, training can be focused
on to more complex demolitions tasks. This annex outlines a clear and safe
system of training with confidence charges.
CONDUCT
2. Dry Training. Rehearsals of drills and training on inert equipment, including

confidence charges, should always be conducted before any training with
live equipment takes place.
3. Sequence of Events. An example sequence of events to be followed as far

as reasonably practicable is at Appendix 1.
4. Principles. When setting out the range for confidence charge training, the
following principles should be observed:
a. Layout of Range. All charges are to be set out in such a manner that the
route back to the safe area from the charge, once initiated, should not
bring personnel closer to other charges. An example range layout is at
Appendix 2.
b. Layout of Charges. Individual charges should be set out in a linear

fashion (see Figures 1 and 2) with the charge on the outside of the half
moon formation (see Appendix 2).
c. Position of Firer. When initiating the charge, the firer should be kneeling,
so he/she is close enough to the ground to place the initiation train
(detonation cord, detonator and safety fuse) gently on the ground.
d. Maximum NEQ. The effect and training value required from a confidence
charge can be gained using relatively little explosive. The maximum net
explosive quantity (NEQ) for each confidence charge is 0.2 kg (ie two
100 g segments of a PE block).
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED H-1

RESTRICTED
e. Instructor to Student Ratio. Confidence charge training should be

carried out with no more that a 1:6 DCO to student ratio. If possible, the
supervision of the practice should be improved with the addition of up to
three Military Engineer (Combat) Class 1 (ME (Cbt) 1) Sappers or JNCOs
or above. Only one DCO gives the orders; the rest of the instructors are
present in a supporting role only.
5. Confidence Charge. The confidence charge itself is a simple initiation set

consisting of the following components only:
a. PE charge (maximum NEQ of 0.2 kg, ie two 100 g segments).
b. Detonating Cord (minimum length 2 m).
c. Safety Fuze (minimum length 600 mm and increased in 75 mm increments

per charge).
d. One Firing Device Kit Demolition Grip (grip switch) complete with one
Flash Initiator.
e. One Detonator Demolition (flash detonator).
0.2 kg PE moulded around

Minimum of 600 mm
Flash detonator taped to 300 mm double thumb knot in end
safety fuze
detonating cord cradle of detonating cord
Double thumb knot

in detonating cord
Detonating cord
minimum length of 2 m
Figure H/1. Initiation train for confidence charge training.
H-2 RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

RESTRICTED
Figure H/2. Inert equipment showing confidence charge laid flat in a straight line.
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED H-3

RESTRICTED
H-4 RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

APPENDIX 1 TO ANNEX H
CONFIDENCE CHARGE TRAINING - SEQUENCE OF EVENTS

Serial Words of command Process Equipment Remarks
(if applicable)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
1 N/A Students put into single file.
2 N/A Students briefed on procedure in Safety Brief – remind students of
conjunction with range standing words of command heard in inert
orders. practice.
3 “Collect Explosives”. In order, students collect their Maximum 200 g (two segments) PE. Due to increasing lengths of safety
explosives and accessories from Minimum 2 m detonating cord. fuze, DCO ensures students stay in
Explosives NCO. Safety fuze beginning with 600 mm, line and in order.
increasing in 75 mm increments.
Flash initiator. Students place all equipment in an
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
Demolition grip switch. empty sandbag (used later as mat to
Insulation tape. work on).
Ensure Explosives NCO has tested

firing devices.
4 “Follow me to your positions”. DCO leads students around ‘half One full sandbag filled with soft single-
moon’ of sandbags. sized sand.
5 “Place your equipment and Once students in place, DCO moves At this stage, DCO may use
full sandbag in the Charge to open end of the ‘half moon’ competent Military Engineers
Preparation Area. Stand up and and students face instructor once (Combat) Class 1, positioned
face me”. they have placed their full sandbag between students, as additional
and equipment in their charge supervisors.
preparation area.
6 “Take out all of your equipment DCO instructs students to place Sandbag Hollow in sandbag prepared by
and place it on the empty all their stores on empty sandbag students using their heel.
sandbag in the Charge in Charge Preparation Area. Full
Preparation Area. Prepare the sandbag prepared by creating
full sandbag by making a hollow hollow in it to hold charge.
using your heel ”.
7 “Place your grip switch in your DCO instructs students to place Grip switch
right hand trouser pocket.” their demolition grip switch in their
H-1-1
right hand map pocket in their

trousers.
H-1-2 Serial Words of command Process Equipment Remarks
(if applicable)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
8 “Prepare your charge and DCO instructs students to connect Detonation cord Create 300 mm cradle in detonating
detonation cord – ensure you: detonating cord to charge and place 200 g PE cord with insulation tape.
it back on sandbag. Insulation tape
- make a double thumb knot Put double thumb knot in opposite
- mould the PE completely end of detonating cord.
around the knot
- tape a 300 mm cradle in the Mould PE around double thumb knot
detonating cord. in detonating cord.
When you have completed

that task, place your charge
in the hollow of the sand-filled
sandbag”.
9 “Connect your flash initiators to DCO instructs students to connect Flash initiator As detailed in Sect 4.1.
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
your safety fuze and place it on flash initiator to safety fuze and Safety fuze
the empty sandbag.” place it back on sandbag.
10 “Take one step back from your Students take step back from their Gives DCO and other supervisors
sandbags.” sandbags chance to check all previous work.
11 “I will issue you one detonator Once satisfied flash initiators One Detonator Demolition (flash detonator) DCO and supervisors ensure
and a pair of crimpers. connected properly, DCO issues per student – issued by the DCO.Crimpers students hold detonators like
In your own time, fit the each student a detonator and (held and controlled by the DCO). cigarette (between two fingers at
detonator to the safety fuze oversees crimping of detonator to OPEN end).
and crimp it once, 5 to10 safety fuze. Initiation set must not
mm from the open end of the be connected to charge.
aluminium tube. When you have
completed this, carefully place
your detonator on the sand-filled
sandbag, ensuring it is not

touching the charge.”
12 “Holding the end of the Once all detonators crimped to Insulation tape (prepared) DCO and supervisors ensure
detonator connected to the safety fuze, students ordered to tape Charge (prepared) students prepare insulation tape and
safety fuze, tape your detonator detonator to charge. Initiation train (prepared) pre-cut it before taping detonator to
to the cradle on your detonating cradle.
cord.”
Serial Words of command Process Equipment Remarks
(if applicable)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
13 “Place your charge in the hollow DCO then orders students to lay Grip switch DCO ensures students facing him/her
of the sandbag, ensuring the their charges in one straight line, to receive further orders.
initiation train is in one straight remove their grip switches from their
line towards you. trouser pockets and drop down to
one knee.
Remove your grip switch from
your pocket and kneel at the end
of your initiation train.”
14 “Test your grip switches and DCO instructs students to test their Grip switch Move switch to ‘Ready to fire’
notify me if yours is faulty.” demolition grip switch. position.
Push plunger down to fire action,

ensuring it is held in fired position.
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
Check firing pin in place.
Release action.
Return switch to ‘Safe’ position.
Replace any fault grip switch with

spare carried by DCO or safety staff.
15 “Connect your grip switch to DCO orders students to connect Grip switch Confirmation of Steps 16 to 19
your flash initiator and place it demolition grip switch to flash Charge (prepared) should take place before further
on the ground when finished.” initiator and confirms next steps for action taken.
firing the device.
16 “Pick up your grip switch.’’ DCO gives order to move demolition Grip switch DCO and safety staff ensure all grip
grip switch to ‘Ready to Fire’ Charge (prepared) switches prepared properly.
position.
Move your Grip Switches to the
Ready position and place on the
ground”
H-1-3
H-1-4 Serial Words of command Process Equipment Remarks
(if applicable)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
17 “Pick up your grip switch. DCO explains that if any safety Grip switch Students to look away from charge
Ensure the initiation train and fuze does not light, grip switch is to (towards DCO) when they fire.
safety fuse is laid flat. be removed and charge dealt with
separately later.
On my count of 3, fire your grip
switches [confirm students DCO begins count down from ‘3’.
understand]. On count of ‘1’, students fire the
action.
3.....2.......1......Fire”
18 “Remove your grip switch and DCO instructs students to remove Grip switch Approximately 72 to 88 seconds
place in your pocket. demolition grip switch from flash from first charge initiation to first
initiator. Once done, DCO ensures detonation.
Make your way towards me and initiation set remains laid out in
back to the Safe Area as soon straight line. Enough time must be allowed to get
RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED
as possible. back to Safe Area.
DCO ensures students stand up and
Notify me of any concerns walk towards him/her and back to
immediately.” Safe Area.
19 N/A DCO ensures students have left half Safe distance of 50 m in correct
moon and making their way back to personal protective clothing (PPE).
Safe Area.He/she checks all safety
fuse lengths are burning and notes First charge explodes after between
any potential misfires. DCO then 72 and 88 seconds.
leaves half moon and moves back
to Safe Area to carry out head count Following charges explode in
of students and count charges approximately 10 sec intervals.
going off.
RESTRICTED
APPENDIX 2 TO ANNEX H
RANGE LAYOUT FOR CONFIDENCE CHARGES
Route to Safe Area
DCO
Charge Charge
preparation Student Student preparation
area area
SF = 975 mm SF = 600 mm
Minimum Minimum
4m 4m
ME (Cbt) 1 ME (Cbt) 1
JNCO JNCO
supervisor supervisor
Charge Student Student Charge
(optional) (optional)
preparation preparation
area area
SF = 900 mm SF = 675 mm
Student Student
Minimum Minimum
4m 4m
Charge Charge
Legend preparation preparation
SF = Safety fuze area area
SF = 825 mm Minimum SF = 750 mm
4m
Not to scale Minimum 15 m
Notes:
1. Red lines indicate charge initiation train (see Figures H/1 and H/2).
2. Students located inside half moon of charges so, when charges are initiated, every step students take
back to Safe Area is away from charge. When exiting range, students and staff walk towards DCO and
away from charges.
3. Charges not to exceed NEQ specified in range standing orders and maximum charge weight of 0.2 kg PE.
4. All charges spaced minimum of 4 m apart.
5. All charges placed on soft single-sized sand-filled sandbag.
6. DSO acts as DCO in sole command and control of practice.
Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED H-2-1

RESTRICTED
H-2-2 RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

20140224-ME Vol 2 Pam 4 Incl Amdt 1 - Auth - 2-1 - MVRSPT-R

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

20140224-ME Vol 2 Pam 4 Incl Amdt 1 - Auth - 2-1 - MVRSPT-R

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RESTRICTED

Army Code No: 71670

(This publication replaces Military Engineering Volume II, Pamphlet No 4

Amendments Amdt No Date Amdt No Date Amdt No Date

Distribution As directed by SO1 Publications, RE General Staff Publications, Chatham,

SO2 PUBLICATIONS, RE GENERAL STAFF PUBLICATIONS

I have the following comments and/or suggestions to make for amendment/

(i) Comments generally should relate to content and matters of fact.

Army Code No 71670

Military Engineering Volume II

Prepared under the direction

of the Chief of the General Staff

ii RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.0 Jan 13

CHAPTER 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF EXPLOSIVES

1.1 Background 1-1

CHAPTER 2 SERVICE EXPLOSIVES

2.1 Summary 2-1

CHAPTER 3 EXPLOSIVE AND DEMOLITION ACCESSORIES

3.1 Summary 3-1

CHAPTER 4 FIRING ARRANGEMENTS

4.1 Initiating Single Charges Non-electrically 4-1

CHAPTER 5 CHARGES FORMED FROM BULK

5.1 General 5-1

Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED iii

5.8 Concussion Charges 5-99

CHAPTER 6 SPECIAL CHARGES

6.1 Introduction 6-1

CHAPTER 7 USE OF EXPLOSIVES FOR ASSAULT BREACHING

7.1 General 7-1

CHAPTER 8 SIMULATION OF BATTLE NOISE

8.1 General 8-1

CHAPTER 9 DEMOLITION TASKS

9.1 General 9-1

CHAPTER 10 BRIDGE DEMOLITION

10.1 Principles 10-1

iv RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

CHAPTER 11 TACTICAL AND LOGISTIC ASPECTS

11.1 Types of Demolition 11-1

12.1 General 12-1

A. Battlefield Inoculation Remote Initiation System (BIRIS) A-1

1/1 Transmission of shock wave to target 1-15

Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED v

2/1 Charge Demolition Plastic Explosive 2-3

3/1 Detonators Demolition 3-3

vi RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

3/16 Fuze Instantaneous 3-20

4/1 Initiating PE using detonating cord 4-2

5/1 Cutting steel cable 5-8

Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED vii

5/8 Section through span 5-44

6/1 Positioning charges for breaking steel joints 6-5

7/1 Use of manual breaching tools 7-1

viii RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

7/4 Slip-on detonating cord booster 7-9

8/1 Rapid small arms fire 8-4

9/1 Position of charges on rail track 9-9

Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14 RESTRICTED ix

10/1 See-saw collapse mechanism 10-3

x RESTRICTED Issue No : 2.1 Feb 14

10/44 Masonry arch bridge 10-54

12/1 Electric detonator 12-19

H/1 Initiation train for confidence charge training H-2

1-1 Explosive hazard divisions 1-12